ROSCOE - B001613e - Command Reference Guide

Advantage CA-Roscoe
 
Interactive Environment
Command Reference Guide

r6
This documentation and any related computer software help programs (hereinafter referred to as the
“Documentation”) is for the end user’s informational purposes only and is subject to change or withdrawal by CA at
any time.
This Documentation may not be copied, transferred, reproduced, disclosed, modified or duplicated, in whole or in
part, without the prior written consent of CA. This Documentation is confidential and proprietary information of CA
and protected by the copyright laws of the United States and international treaties.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, licensed users may print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation for
their own internal use, and may make one copy of the related software as reasonably required for back-up and
disaster recovery purposes, provided that all CA copyright notices and legends are affixed to each reproduced copy.
Only authorized employees, consultants, or agents of the user who are bound by the provisions of the license for
the product are permitted to have access to such copies.
The right to print copies of the documentation and to make a copy of the related software is limited to the period
during which the applicable license for the Product remains in full force and effect. Should the license terminate for
any reason, it shall be the user’s responsibility to certify in writing to CA that all copies and partial copies of the
Documentation have been returned to CA or destroyed.
EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE STATED IN THE APPLICABLE LICENSE AGREEMENT, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, CA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENTATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
OR NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL CA BE LIABLE TO THE END USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
LOSS OR DAMAGE, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, GOODWILL, OR LOST DATA, EVEN IF CA IS EXPRESSLY
ADVISED OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGE.
The use of any product referenced in the Documentation is governed by the end user’s applicable license
agreement.
The manufacturer of this Documentation is CA.
Provided with “Restricted Rights.” Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to the
restrictions set forth in FAR Sections 12.212, 52.227-14, and 52.227-19(c)(1) - (2) and DFARS Section 252.227-
7014(b)(3), as applicable, or their successors.
All trademarks, trade names, service marks, and logos referenced herein belong to their respective companies.
Copyright  2005 CA. All rights reserved.

Contents
About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix
Chapter 1. Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 + (Redisplay Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.3 Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2 * (Defer Execution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.3 - (Reexecute Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.4 =n (Add to AWS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.4.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.4.3 Internal Pointer Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.5 : Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5.3 Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
| 1.6 AJOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
| 1.6.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
| 1.6.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
| 1.6.2.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.7 ALLOCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.8 ALLOCATE (Data Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.8.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.8.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.9 ALLOCATE (Data Set Under ETSO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.9.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.9.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Contents iii
1.9.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
1.10 ALLOCATE (Advantage CA-Roscoe-Managed Files) . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1.10.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1.10.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1.10.3 Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1.10.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1.11 ALTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1.12 ALTER AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
1.12.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
1.12.2 Internal Pointer Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
1.12.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
1.13 ALTER JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1.13.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1.13.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1.13.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
1.14 ALTER (LIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1.14.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1.14.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
1.14.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
1.15 AMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
1.15.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
1.15.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
1.16 ATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
1.17 ATTACH AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
1.17.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
1.17.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
1.17.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
1.18 ATTACH DSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
1.18.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
1.18.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
1.18.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
1.19 ATTACH JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
1.19.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
1.19.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
1.19.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
1.20 ATTACH LIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
1.20.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
1.20.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
1.20.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
1.21 ATTACH VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
1.21.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
iv Command Reference Guide

1.21.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
1.21.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
1.22 BOTTOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
1.22.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
1.22.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
1.23 BOUNDS Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
1.23.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
1.23.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
1.23.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
1.24 BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
1.24.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
1.24.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
1.25 CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
1.25.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
1.25.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
1.25.3.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
1.26 CANCEL ETSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81
1.26.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81
1.26.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81
1.27 CATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
1.27.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
1.27.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
| 1.28 CDSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
| 1.28.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
| 1.28.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
| 1.28.3 Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
1.29 CHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
1.29.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
1.29.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
1.29.4.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
1.30 COMPRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
1.30.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
1.30.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
1.31 COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
1.31.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
1.31.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-90
1.31.4.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
Contents v
1.32 Copy Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
1.32.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
1.32.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
1.32.3.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
1.33 COPYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97
1.33.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97
1.33.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99
1.33.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103
1.34 COPYX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
1.34.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
1.34.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
1.34.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
1.35 CREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113
1.35.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113
1.35.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115
1.35.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115
1.36 DDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116
1.36.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116
1.36.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116
1.37 DEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
1.38 DEFINE ALIAS (ICF or VSAM Catalog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-118
1.38.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-118
1.38.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-118
1.39 DEFINE ALIAS for PDS Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119
1.39.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119
1.39.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119
1.40 DEFINE GDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121
1.40.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121
1.40.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122
1.41 DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-124
1.42 DELETE AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125
1.42.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125
1.42.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125
1.42.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126
1.43 DELETE DSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
1.43.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
1.43.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-128
1.43.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129
vi Command Reference Guide

1.44 DELETE (LIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130
1.44.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130
1.44.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130
1.45 Delete Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
1.45.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
1.45.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132
1.45.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
1.46 DELETES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135
1.46.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135
1.46.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-136
1.46.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138
1.47 DELETEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
1.47.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
1.47.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140
1.47.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142
1.48 Destination Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-143
1.48.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-143
1.48.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145
1.48.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-146
1.49 DETACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-147
1.49.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-147
1.49.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-148
1.49.2.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-149
1.50 DISCARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150
1.50.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150
1.50.3.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150
1.51 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-151
1.51.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-151
1.51.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-152
1.52 DISPLAY (ACTIVE Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-153
1.52.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-153
1.53 DISPLAY (AWS Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-154
1.53.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-154
1.53.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-154
1.54 DISPLAY (DEVICES Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-155
1.54.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-155
1.54.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-155
1.55 DISPLAY (END Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-156
1.55.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-156
1.55.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-156
1.56 DISPLAY (HELP Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-157
Contents vii
1.56.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-157
1.56.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-157
1.57 DISPLAY (INIT Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158
1.57.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158
1.57.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158
1.58 DISPLAY (JOB Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159
1.58.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159
1.58.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159
1.58.2.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159
1.59 DISPLAY (MASK Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
1.59.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
1.59.1.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
1.60 DISPLAY (NAME Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161
1.60.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161
1.60.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161
1.61 DISPLAY (NOAWS Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162
1.61.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162
1.62 DISPLAY (QUEUE Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163
1.62.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163
1.62.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163
1.63 DIVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164
1.63.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164
1.63.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165
1.64 DROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167
1.64.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167
1.64.2.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167
1.65 DSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-168
1.65.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-168
1.65.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-169
1.65.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170
1.66 EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171
1.66.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171
1.66.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-172
1.66.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175
1.67 Edit Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-176
1.67.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-176
1.67.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-177
1.67.3.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-178
| 1.68 EDSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179
| 1.68.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179
| 1.68.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-180
| 1.68.3 Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182
| 1.68.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182
1.69 ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-183
1.69.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-183
viii Command Reference Guide

1.69.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-183
1.70 EXCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-184
1.70.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-184
1.70.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185
1.70.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189
1.71 EXCL Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-190
1.71.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-190
1.71.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-190
1.71.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-192
1.72 EXEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193
1.72.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193
1.72.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193
1.72.2.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-194
1.73 EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-195
1.74 EXPORT (MVS Data Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-196
1.74.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-196
1.74.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-197
1.74.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-199
1.75 EXPORT (AllFusion CA-Librarian Master File) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-200
1.75.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-200
1.75.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-201
1.75.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-203
1.76 EXPORT (AllFusion CA-Panvalet File) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-204
1.76.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-204
1.76.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-206
1.76.3.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-207
1.77 FETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-209
1.77.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-209
1.77.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-209
1.77.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-211
1.78 FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-212
1.78.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-212
1.78.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-212
1.78.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-214
1.79 FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-215
1.80 FIND (Member) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-216
1.80.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-216
1.80.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-216
1.81 FIND (String) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-217
Contents ix
1.81.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-217
1.81.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-218
1.81.4.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-220
1.82 FIRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-221
1.82.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-221
1.82.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-223
1.82.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-226
1.83 FIRST JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-227
1.83.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-227
1.83.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-227
1.83.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-228
1.84 FIRST Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-229
1.84.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-229
1.84.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-229
1.84.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-230
1.85 FREE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-232
1.85.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-232
1.85.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-232
1.86 HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-234
1.86.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-234
1.86.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-234
1.86.2.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-235
1.87 IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-236
1.88 IMPORT (MVS Data Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-237
1.88.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-237
1.88.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-240
1.88.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-242
1.89 IMPORT (AllFusion CA-Librarian Master File) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-244
1.89.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-244
1.89.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-248
1.89.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-249
1.90 IMPORT (AllFusion CA-Panvalet Member) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-251
1.90.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-251
1.90.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-256
1.90.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-258
1.91 INCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-260
1.91.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-260
1.91.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-262
x Command Reference Guide

1.91.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-265
1.92 INCL Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-267
1.92.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-267
1.92.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-267
1.92.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-269
1.93 INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-270
1.94 INFO DSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-271
1.94.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-271
1.94.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-272
1.95 INFO LIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-276
1.95.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-276
1.95.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-276
1.96 INFO VOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-278
1.96.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-278
1.96.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-278
1.97 INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-282
1.97.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-282
1.97.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-282
1.97.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-284
1.98 Input Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-285
1.98.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-285
1.98.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-285
1.98.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-287
1.99 JCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-288
1.99.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-288
1.99.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-288
1.100 LAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-292
1.101 LAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-293
1.101.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-293
1.101.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-295
1.101.3 Internal Pointer Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-297
1.101.4 Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-298
1.101.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-298
1.102 LAST JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-300
1.102.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-300
1.102.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-300
1.102.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-301
1.103 LAST Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-302
1.103.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-302
1.103.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-302
Contents xi
1.103.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-303
1.104 LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-305
1.104.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-305
1.104.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-305
1.104.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-306
1.105 LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-307
1.105.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-307
1.105.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-308
1.105.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-310
1.106 LOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-311
1.106.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-311
1.106.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-311
1.107 LOWCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-313
1.107.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-313
1.107.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-313
1.108 Lowercase Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-315
1.108.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-315
1.108.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-315
1.108.3.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-316
1.109 LSHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-317
1.109.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-317
1.109.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-317
1.109.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-318
1.110 MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-319
1.110.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-319
1.110.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-319
1.111 MASK Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-320
1.111.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-320
1.111.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-320
1.111.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-321
1.112 MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-322
1.112.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-322
1.112.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-322
1.112.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-323
1.113 MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-324
1.113.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-324
1.113.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-324
1.114 MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-325
1.114.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-325
xii Command Reference Guide

1.114.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-325
1.114.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-326
1.115 Move Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-327
1.115.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-327
1.115.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-327
1.115.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-328
1.116 NEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-329
1.117 NEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-330
1.117.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-330
1.117.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-332
1.117.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-335
1.118 NEXT JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-337
1.118.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-337
1.118.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-337
1.118.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-338
1.119 NEXT Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-339
1.119.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-339
1.119.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-339
1.119.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-340
1.120 NOSEQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-342
1.120.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-342
1.120.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-342
1.121 NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-343
1.121.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-343
1.121.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-343
1.121.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-344
1.122 Note Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-345
1.122.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-345
1.122.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-346
1.122.2.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-346
1.123 NOTRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-348
1.123.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-348
1.123.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-348
1.124 OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-349
1.124.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-349
1.124.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-349
1.124.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-350
1.125 OFFON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-351
Contents xiii
1.125.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-351
1.125.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-351
1.126 OMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-352
1.126.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-352
1.126.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-353
1.126.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-356
1.127 Overlay Mask Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-357
1.127.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-357
1.127.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-357
1.127.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-358
1.128 ORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-359
1.129 ORDER AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-360
1.129.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-360
1.129.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-360
1.129.2.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-361
| 1.130 ORDER DSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-363
| 1.130.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-363
| 1.130.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-369
| 1.130.3 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-369
| 1.130.4 Field-name Attribute Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-369
| 1.130.5 The Ampersand as Command Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-369
| 1.130.6 Fields Containing Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-370
| 1.130.7 Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-370
1.131 ORDER LIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-371
1.131.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-371
1.131.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-372
1.131.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-374
1.132 ORDER Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-376
1.132.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-376
1.132.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-376
1.132.3.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-377
1.133 PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-379
1.133.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-379
1.133.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-379
1.134 POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-380
1.135 POINT AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-381
1.135.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-381
1.135.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-381
1.135.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-382
1.136 POINT DSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-383
1.136.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-383
1.136.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-383
xiv Command Reference Guide

1.136.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-384
1.137 POINT JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-385
1.137.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-385
1.137.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-386
1.137.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-387
1.138 POINT LIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-388
1.138.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-388
1.138.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-388
1.138.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-389
1.139 PREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-390
1.139.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-390
1.139.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-390
1.139.4.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-391
1.140 PREV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-392
1.141 PREV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-393
1.141.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-393
1.141.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-395
1.141.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-398
1.142 PREV JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-400
1.142.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-400
1.142.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-400
1.142.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-401
1.143 PREV Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-402
1.143.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-402
1.143.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-402
1.143.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-403
1.144 PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-405
1.144.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-405
1.144.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-409
1.144.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-415
1.145 PRINT CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-416
1.145.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-416
1.145.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-416
1.145.2.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-417
1.146 PRINT DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-418
1.146.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-418
1.146.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-418
1.147 PRINT HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-422
1.147.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-422
1.147.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-422
Contents xv
1.147.2.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-423
1.148 PRINT LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-424
1.148.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-424
1.148.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-425
1.149 PRINT RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-428
1.149.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-428
1.149.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-429
1.149.2.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-429
1.150 PRINT ROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-430
1.150.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-430
1.150.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-430
1.150.2.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-431
1.151 PRINT STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-432
1.151.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-432
1.151.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-433
1.151.2.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-435
1.152 PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-436
1.152.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-436
1.152.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-436
| 1.153 QDSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-437
| 1.153.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-437
| 1.153.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-437
1.154 QUERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-438
1.154.1 QUERY ALLOCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-438
1.154.1.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-438
1.154.1.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-438
1.154.1.3 Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-439
1.154.2 QUERY CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-439
1.154.2.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-439
1.154.2.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-440
1.154.3 QUERY DIVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-440
1.154.3.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-440
1.154.3.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-441
1.155 REFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-442
1.155.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-442
1.155.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-443
1.155.2.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-443
1.156 RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-444
1.156.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-444
1.156.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-444
1.157 RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-446
1.157.1 RENAME AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-446
1.157.1.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-446
1.157.1.3 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-446
1.157.2 RENAME DSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-447
1.157.2.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-447
xvi Command Reference Guide

1.157.2.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-448
1.157.2.4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-448
1.157.3 RENAME (LIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-448
1.157.3.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-448
1.157.3.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-450
1.157.3.4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-450
1.158 RENUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-451
1.158.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-451
1.158.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-452
1.158.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-453
1.159 REPEAT Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-454
1.159.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-454
1.159.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-454
1.159.3.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-455
1.160 RESET Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-456
1.160.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-456
1.160.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-456
1.161 RESUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-457
1.161.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-457
1.161.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-457
1.162 RSHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-458
1.162.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-458
1.162.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-458
1.162.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-459
1.163 RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-460
1.163.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-460
1.163.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-460
1.163.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-461
1.164 SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-462
1.164.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-462
1.164.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-463
1.164.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-464
1.165 SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-465
1.165.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-465
1.165.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-465
1.166 SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-466
1.166.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-466
1.166.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-467
1.167 Scroll Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-469
Contents xvii
1.167.1 Scroll Line Commands (By Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-469
1.167.1.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-469
1.167.1.2 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-469
1.167.2 Scroll Line Commands (By Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-470
1.167.2.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-470
1.167.2.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-470
1.167.2.3 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-471
1.167.3 Scroll Line Commands (To Top/Bottom) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-471
1.167.3.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-471
1.167.3.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-471
1.167.3.3 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-472
| 1.168 SDSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-473
| 1.168.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-473
1.169 SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-474
1.169.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-474
1.169.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-475
1.169.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-478
1.170 SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-479
1.170.1 SELECT AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-479
1.170.1.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-479
1.170.1.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-480
1.170.1.3 Internal Pointer Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-481
1.170.1.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-481
1.170.2 SELECT DSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-482
1.170.2.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-482
1.170.3 SELECT LIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-484
1.170.3.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-484
1.171 SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-485
1.171.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-485
1.171.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-485
1.171.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-487
1.172 SEQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-488
1.172.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-488
1.172.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-488
1.172.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-489
1.173 SET Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-490
1.173.1 SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-493
1.173.1.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-493
1.173.1.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-494
| 1.173.2 SET ALLRECALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-494
| 1.173.2.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-494
| 1.173.2.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-495
1.173.3 SET ATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-495
1.173.3.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-495
xviii Command Reference Guide

1.173.3.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-495
1.173.4 SET AUTOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-496
1.173.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-496
1.173.4.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-497
1.173.5 SET AUTOINDENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-498
1.173.5.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-498
1.173.5.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-498
1.173.6 SET AUTOINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-499
1.173.6.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-499
1.173.6.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-499
1.173.7 SET AWSDSPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-500
1.173.7.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-500
1.173.7.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-500
1.173.8 SET BOUNDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-501
1.173.8.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-501
1.173.8.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-502
1.173.8.4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-502
1.173.9 SET CHARSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-503
1.173.9.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-503
1.173.9.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-503
1.173.10 SET CMDLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-504
1.173.10.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-504
1.173.10.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-504
1.173.10.3 Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-505
1.173.11 SET COPYDEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-505
1.173.11.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-505
1.173.11.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-506
1.173.12 SET CURSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-506
1.173.12.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-506
1.173.12.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-507
1.173.13 SET DATEFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-507
1.173.13.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-507
1.173.13.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-508
1.173.14 SET DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-508
1.173.14.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-508
1.173.14.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-510
1.173.14.4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-512
| 1.173.15 SET DSN ORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-512
| 1.173.15.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-512
Contents xix
| 1.173.15.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-518
| 1.173.15.3 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-518
| 1.173.16 Field-name Attribute Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-519
| 1.173.17 The Ampersand as Command Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-519
| 1.173.18 Fields Containing Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-519
1.173.20 SET DSNCMLST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-519
1.173.20.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-519
1.173.20.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-520
1.173.21 SET DSNCNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-520
1.173.21.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-520
1.173.21.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-521
1.173.22 SET DSNEMPTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-521
1.173.22.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-521
1.173.22.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-522
1.173.23 SET DSNRECALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-522
1.173.23.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-522
1.173.23.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-522
1.173.24 SET EDITCHNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-523
1.173.24.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-523
1.173.24.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-523
1.173.25 SET EOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-525
1.173.25.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-525
1.173.25.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-526
1.173.26 SET ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-526
1.173.26.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-526
1.173.26.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-526
1.173.26.4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-527
1.173.27 SET FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-527
1.173.27.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-527
1.173.27.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-527
1.173.28 SET HELPPFX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-528
1.173.28.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-528
1.173.28.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-529
| 1.173.29 SET INFRECALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-529
| 1.173.29.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-529
| 1.173.29.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-530
1.173.30 SET JOBCNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-530
1.173.30.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-530
1.173.30.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-531
1.173.31 SET LIB ORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-531
1.173.31.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-531
xx Command Reference Guide

1.173.31.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-532
1.173.31.4 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-533
1.173.32 SET MASTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-533
1.173.32.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-533
1.173.32.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-533
1.173.32.4 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-534
1.173.33 SET MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-534
1.173.33.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-534
1.173.33.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-535
1.173.34 SET MONLEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-536
1.173.34.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-536
1.173.34.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-536
1.173.35 SET MSGLEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-537
1.173.35.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-537
1.173.35.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-537
1.173.36 SET PFKDELIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-538
1.173.36.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-538
1.173.36.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-538
| 1.173.37 SET RPSDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-539
| 1.173.38 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-539
| 1.173.38.1 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-539
| 1.173.38.2 Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-541
1.173.39 SET RPSDEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-541
1.173.39.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-541
1.173.39.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-541
1.173.40 SET RPSNOTIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-542
1.173.40.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-542
1.173.40.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-542
1.173.41 SET SAVEATTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-543
1.173.41.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-543
1.173.41.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-543
1.173.42 SET SCROLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-544
1.173.42.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-544
1.173.42.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-544
1.173.43 SET SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-545
1.173.43.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-545
1.173.43.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-546
1.173.44 SET SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-546
1.173.44.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-546
1.173.44.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-547
Contents xxi
| 1.173.45 SET SPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-547
| 1.173.45.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-547
| 1.173.45.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-548
| 1.173.45.3 Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-548
1.173.46 SET STATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-548
1.173.46.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-548
1.173.46.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-549
1.173.47 SET SUBMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-549
1.173.47.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-549
1.173.47.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-550
1.173.47.4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-551
1.173.48 SET SYSID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-551
1.173.48.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-551
1.173.48.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-551
1.173.49 SET TLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-552
1.173.49.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-552
1.173.49.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-552
1.173.50 SET USERID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-553
1.173.50.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-553
1.173.50.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-554
1.174 Shift Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-555
1.174.1 Shift (Left) Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-555
1.174.1.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-555
1.174.1.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-556
1.174.1.4 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-556
1.174.2 Shift (Right) Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-557
1.174.2.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-557
1.174.2.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-558
1.174.2.4 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-559
1.175 SIGNON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-560
1.175.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-560
1.175.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-560
1.176 SORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-561
1.176.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-561
1.176.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-561
1.176.2.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-562
1.177 SPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-563
1.177.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-563
1.177.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-563
1.178 STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-564
1.178.1 STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-565
1.178.1.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-565
1.178.1.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-565
xxii Command Reference Guide

1.178.2 STATUS COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-569
1.178.2.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-569
1.178.2.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-569
1.178.3 STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-570
1.178.3.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-570
1.178.3.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-570
1.178.4 STATUS JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-571
1.178.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-571
1.178.4.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-572
1.178.5 STATUS NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-573
1.178.5.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-573
1.178.5.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-574
1.178.6 STATUS SESSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-574
1.178.6.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-574
1.178.6.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-575
1.178.7 STATUS SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-580
1.178.7.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-580
1.178.7.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-580
1.179 SUBMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-582
1.179.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-582
1.179.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-582
1.179.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-584
1.180 SUFFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-585
1.180.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-585
1.180.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-585
1.180.4.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-586
1.181 TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-587
1.181.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-587
1.181.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-587
1.181.2.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-588
1.182 Text-Related Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-589
1.182.1 Text-Related (TXTCENT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-589
1.182.1.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-589
1.182.1.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-589
1.182.1.3 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-590
1.182.1.6 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-590
1.182.2 Text-Related (TXTFLOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-591
1.182.2.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-591
1.182.2.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-592
1.182.2.5 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-594
1.182.3 Text-Related (TXTJOIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-594
1.182.3.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-594
Contents xxiii
1.182.3.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-595
1.182.3.5 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-597
1.182.4 Text-Related (TXTLCASE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-598
1.182.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-598
1.182.4.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-599
1.182.5 Text-Related (TXTSPLIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-600
1.182.5.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-600
1.182.5.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-601
1.182.5.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-602
1.183 Text-Related Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-604
1.183.1 Text Center Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-605
1.183.1.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-605
1.183.1.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-605
1.183.1.4 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-606
1.183.2 Text Enter Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-606
1.183.2.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-606
1.183.2.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-606
1.183.2.4 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-607
1.183.3 Text Flow Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-608
1.183.3.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-608
1.183.3.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-608
1.183.3.4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-609
1.183.4 Text Join Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-610
1.183.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-610
1.183.4.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-611
1.183.4.4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-612
1.183.5 Text LowerCase Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-612
1.183.5.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-612
1.183.5.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-612
1.183.7 Text Split Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-613
1.183.7.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-613
1.183.7.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-614
1.183.7.4 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-615
1.184 TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-616
1.184.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-616
1.184.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-616
1.185 TOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-617
1.185.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-617
1.185.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-617
xxiv Command Reference Guide

1.186 TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-618
1.186.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-618
1.186.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-618
1.187 TSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-619
1.187.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-619
1.187.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-619
1.187.2.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-619
1.188 TTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-620
1.188.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-620
1.189 UNCATLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-621
1.189.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-621
1.189.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-621
1.190 UPCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-622
1.190.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-622
1.190.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-622
1.191 UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-624
1.191.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-624
1.191.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-625
1.191.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-625
1.192 Uppercase Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-626
1.192.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-626
1.192.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-626
1.192.3.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-627
1.193 WAIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-628
1.193.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-628
1.194 WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-629
1.194.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-629
1.195 XCOPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-630
1.195.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-630
1.195.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-631
1.195.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-633
1.196 XCOPYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-634
1.196.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-634
1.196.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-636
1.196.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-639
1.197 XCOPYX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-641
1.197.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-641
1.197.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-643
Contents xxv
1.197.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-647
1.198 XLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-648
1.198.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-648
1.198.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-648
1.198.4.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-650
1.199 Xlate Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-651
1.199.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-651
1.199.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-651
1.199.3.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-653
1.200 ZAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-654
1.200.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-654
1.200.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-654
1.200.3 ZAP (* Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-656
1.200.3.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-656
1.200.3.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-656
1.200.4 ZAP (ABSDUMP Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-656
1.200.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-656
1.200.4.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-658
1.200.5 ZAP (BASE Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-658
1.200.5.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-658
1.200.5.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-658
1.200.6 ZAP (CCHHR Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-658
1.200.6.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-658
1.200.6.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-659
1.200.7 ZAP (DUMP Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-659
1.200.7.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-659
1.200.7.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-660
1.200.8 ZAP (IDRDATA Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-660
1.200.8.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-660
1.200.8.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-660
1.200.9 ZAP (NAME Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-661
1.200.9.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-661
1.200.9.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-661
1.200.10 ZAP (RELDUMP Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-661
1.200.10.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-661
1.200.10.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-662
1.200.11 ZAP (REP Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-662
1.200.11.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-663
1.200.11.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-663
1.200.12 ZAP (SETSSI Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-663
1.200.12.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-663
1.200.12.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-663
1.200.13 ZAP (SYSLIB Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-664
1.200.13.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-664
1.200.13.2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-665
1.200.14 ZAP (TTR Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-667
xxvi Command Reference Guide

1.200.14.1 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-667
1.200.15 ZAP (VERIFY Subcommand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-667
1.200.15.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-667
1.200.15.2 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-668
Appendix A. Extended Monitor Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.1 AMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.1.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 COB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.2.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.4 IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.4.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.5 JCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.6 LOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.6.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.7 PLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A.8 ZAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
Contents xxvii
xxviii Command Reference Guide
About This Guide
The Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Command Reference Guide

contains detailed descriptions of the Advantage CA-Roscoe primary and line
commands.
Organization: Primary command descriptions are arranged alphabetically.
Line command descriptions are arranged alphabetically by the function they

perform.
Each command description includes:

■ A one-sentence description of the function the command performs
■ The syntax of the command and an explanation of that syntax
■ Notes about using the command
■ The position of the internal pointer after the command executed
■ A list of related primary and line commands
■ Examples and explanations of displays, when appropriate
The Appendix to this manual contains:

■ Extended syntax of certain Monitor commands
■ Descriptions of all commands designated as 'functionally stabilized'
About This Guide xxix

Revisions and Enhancements
The following information has been provided as a quick reference regarding
revisions and enhancements that have been made in the the core release and
the Service Packs that followed.
|Summary of Revisions for Service Pack 7

| ■ Use the DIVERT command to divert WTPs to the master console.
| ■ Files allocated to an Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment AWS
| or Library member for use in ETSO are not llowed to be extended to by
| using DISP=MOD.
Summary of Revisions for Service Pack 6

To allow multiple archiving products, two new Advantage CA-Roscoe start-up
parameters (RECALVL2 and RECALVL3) have been added.
When installing and using the JCK monitor to check JCL in Advantage
CA-Roscoe's AWS, a blank screen is often encountered without any error
messages or indication of any kind that there is a problem. Messages and
options have been added to specify and list out the options passed to
JCLCHECK. New options for JCL include: -D, -X, and -A. JCK-D display
parms passed to JCLCHECK. JCK-X turns off Advantage CA-Roscoe's SVC
screening of issues and JCK-A places output to an Advantage CA-Roscoe
AWS.
New messages have been added to describe problems that can occur during
execution of JCK that would have normally returned with no indication of a
problem.
Summary of Revisions for Service Pack 5

Editorial and minor technical changes have been made throughout this
manual.
Summary of Revisions in this Edition

The STATUS SYSTEM display contains the following additions:
ARCHIVE COIN BIT
ARCHIVE REQUEST NUMBER
DISK ARCHIVE VOLUME
GENLEVEL
SPLEVEL
See 1.178.6, “STATUS SESSION” on page 1-574.
xxx Command Reference Guide

Summary of Revisions
■ New Commands
– AJOB: Invokes an RPF that displays a job menu or selection list from
which jobs can be monitored and processed.
– CDSN: Invokes an RPF that discontinues a data set editing session
without saving or updating the data set.
– EDSN: Invokes an RPF that establishes or continues a data set editing
session.
– QDSN: Invokes an RPF that displays information about the current
data set editing session.
– SDSN: Invokes an RPF that saves or updates data set edit information
and discontinues the data set editing session.
– SET SPLIT: (3270-type terminals only) Designates how the screen is to
be SPLIT when depressing the PF key assigned to the SPLIT function.
About This Guide xxxi

■ Enhanced Commands
– EXPORT: This command has been updated to support AllFusion
CA-Librarian release 3.9 and AllFusion CA-Panvalet release 14.2.
– IMPORT: This command has been updated to support AllFusion
CA-Librarian release 3.9 and AllFusion CA-Panvalet release 14.2.
– SET MODE: Four new operands have been added to enhance the
control of character translation. The PRESERVE/NOPRESERVE
operands control the translation of non-displayable characters to blanks
when data on the same line is entered/changed. The MIX/NOMIX
operands control the case sensitivity for search commands.
– STATUS SESSION Display: A new field has been added to indicate the
current or default setting controlling screen splits.
– Support has been added for AllFusion CA-Librarian Multi-Volume
master files defined as VSAM. The operands VOLUME and UNIT of
several commands cannot be used with AllFusion CA-Librarian data
sets defined as VSAM.
– Case insensitive searching is now provided. A new operand, MIX, has
been added to the following commands:
ATTACH AWS
ATTACH LIB
COPYS
COPYX
DELETES
DELETEX
EXCL
FIND
FIRST
INCL
LAST
LIST
NEXT
OMIT
PREV
SEARCH
XCOPYS
XCOPYX
MIX indicates that the search is a case insensitive search. The search is
for any combination of string characters, in upper and lower case, that
match the search string.
xxxii Command Reference Guide

■ Obsolete Commands: The following commands are OBSOLETE with this
release:
ALL
CAT
DIR
JCL
PDS
PRINT MOD
UTILITY
VCAT
VTOC
■ Editorial and minor technical changes have been made throughout this
manual.
About This Guide xxxiii

Advantage CA-Roscoe Publications
The following publications are supplied with Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive
Environment. They are divided into a User Series and a System Series.
User Series Contents

Name
Command Reference Describes all Advantage CA-Roscoe primary and
Guide line commands and Monitor commands.
Extended Development Describes how: 1) the Application Programming
Tools Guide Interface (API) can be used by applications
executing under ETSO to take advantage of
Advantage CA-Roscoe facilities, and 2) the
interactive facilities provided by SKETCH can be
used to generate and maintain panels used in
programs running under CICS or IMS.
Getting Started Introduces Advantage CA-Roscoe to
non-programmers.
Release Guide Provides a summary of the enhancements included
in this release.
RPF Language Guide Describes all components of the RPF language and
how to write RPF programs. It also describes the
Dialog Management Facility (DMF) which can be
used to develop, maintain and execute panel-driven
RPF applications.
User Guide Provides task-oriented descriptions of how to use
Advantage CA-Roscoe.
xxxiv Command Reference Guide

System Series Contents
Name
Extended Facilities for Describes how sites can make extensions to their
System Programmers Advantage CA-Roscoe system. This includes
Guide creating site-written Monitor routines and
customizing security and other online exits.
Installation Guide Describes the steps to follow when installing or
upgrading Advantage CA-Roscoe.
Messages and Codes Explains all messages that might be received by
Guide individuals using Advantage CA-Roscoe or by the
individual responsible for maintaining Advantage
CA-Roscoe.
Programs and Utilities Describes Advantage CA-Roscoe execution
Guide requirements. Also describes maintenance and
reporting programs for the accounting facility,
Active Work Space (AWS), library system, and user
profile system.
Security Administration Describes implementation of internal and external
Guide security to protect your Advantage CA-Roscoe
system.
System Commands Guide Describes commands used to control and monitor
Advantage CA-Roscoe and to obtain performance
information about that execution.
System Reference Guide Intended for the individual responsible for
maintaining Advantage CA-Roscoe. It describes
Advantage CA-Roscoe and its components.
About This Guide xxxv

Related Publications
The CA Common Services r11 for z/OS SP6 (formerly known as Unicenter
TNG Framework for OS/390 and CA Common Services for z/OS and OS/390
Services) documentation can be found on http://supportconnect.ca.com.
The following manuals relate to Advantage CA-Roscoe and are on

http://supportconnect.ca.com.
Title Contents
Advantage CA-Earl Reference Guide Contains detailed information about
Advantage CA-Earl statements,
parameters, and coding rules. Also
explains the Advantage CA-Earl
Reporting Service.
Advantage CA-Earl User Guide Designed for users interested in
learning about Advantage CA-Earl. It
presents an introduction to
Advantage CA-Earl features and
capabilities.
Advantage CA-Earl Systems Lists the installation options for
Programmer Guide Advantage CA-Earl and instructions
for modifying them. Also describes
size requirements and program
execution.
Advantage CA-Earl Examples Guide Contains sample programs that show
a variety of common applications.
xxxvi Command Reference Guide

CA Common Services for z/OS
CA Common Services for z/OS are a common set of services that may be used
by any MVS Computer Associates product. These services are maintained
separately from the product and are documented and installed separately as
well. Advantage CA-Roscoe uses CAIRIM for installation services and security.
Licensing Management Program (LMP)
Advantage CA-Roscoe now interfaces with CAIRIM services to determine

product licensing authorization.
About This Guide xxxvii

Command Information and Notation
Command Character Set

The characters that may be used in Advantage CA-Roscoe commands consist
of:
1. Uppercase and lowercase alphabetic characters plus the national currency
symbols. (When U.S. English is in effect, the alphabetic characters are A
through Z, a through z plus @, # and $.
2. The numeric characters 0 through 9.
3. All 'special' characters that appear on a standard terminal keyboard except
the alphabetic characters, the numeric characters, the comma, the asterisk
and the space.
4. All EBCDIC bit combinations that cannot be entered from a standard
keyboard.
5. The space when used to separate a command from its first operand and to
separate operands within a command.
6. The reserved characters double comma (,,), asterisk (*), minus sign (-) and
plus sign (+).
The double comma (,,) can only be used once in a command -- as an
operand representing the last line of: an AWS, a named library member or
an attached job output file. For example:
ATTACH 5,,
This command displays the contents of the active AWS beginning at line 5
and continuing to the end.
The asterisk (*), minus sign (-) and plus sign (+) are pseudo-commands
and are described in the body of this manual.
xxxviii Command Reference Guide

Command Execution Hierarchy
Advantage CA-Roscoe processes commands and data in the following order:
1. The Execution Area of the Advantage CA-Roscoe screen is examined first.
■ If no line commands have been entered, all changes made to the data
displayed in this area are recorded.
■ If line commands have been entered, they are validated.
If they are all valid, changes made to the displayed data are recorded
and the commands are executed.
If an error is encountered, execution halts until the error is corrected.
No changes made to the displayed data are recorded and no line or
primary commands are executed.
2. The Command Area is then examined. Each 'word' encountered in this
area is evaluated as follows:
Note: The same hierarchical evaluation is used when the commands are
executed from within an RPF program.
■ If the 'word' matches the name of a primary command or begins with
a valid primary command abbreviation, it is executed as a primary
command.
■ If the first three characters of the 'word' match the first three characters
of a Monitor command defined to Advantage CA-Roscoe, it is executed
as a Monitor command.
■ If the 'word' matches the name of a library member that belongs to the
user, it is assumed the member contains an RPF program and is
executed. (If the member does not contain an RPF program, a message
is displayed.)
If the 'word' does not match a member in the user's library, the site
RPF Execution Library is examined. (An RPF Execution Library is
optional. If a site chooses to use an Execution Library, the library
contains only RPF programs.) If the 'word' matches a library member
name, the member is executed.
■ If the 'word' does not match any of the preceding criteria or if there is
no site Execution Library, a message is issued.
To bypass this hierarchy, you can use the primary commands:

EXEC To invoke an RPF program. EXEC is required only when the name
of the RPF program matches the name of a primary or Monitor
command (for example, EXEC FETCH).
RUN To invoke a Monitor command. RUN is required only when the
name of a site-written Monitor command matches the name of a
primary command (for example, RUN ATTACH).
About This Guide xxxix

Command Types
Advantage CA-Roscoe supports both primary commands and line commands.
Primary commands are those commands that are entered in the Command
Area of the Advantage CA-Roscoe screen.
Line commands are those commands that are entered in the sequence number
field of the Execution Area when an AWS is attached. (To use line commands,
SET DISPLAY NUMX must be in effect for that AWS. This command
establishes a display format that includes an unprotected sequence number
field.)
See the Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment User Guide for additional
information.
xl Command Reference Guide

Reading Syntax Diagrams
The formats of all statements and some basic language elements are illustrated
using syntax diagrams. Read syntax diagrams from left to right and top to
bottom.
The following terminology, symbols, and concepts are used in syntax

diagrams.
Keywords: Appear in uppercase letters, for example, COMMAND or PARM.

These words must be entered exactly as shown.
Variables: Appear in italicized lowercase letters, for example, variable.
Required Keywords and Variables: Appear on a main line.
Optional Keywords and Variables: Appear below a main line.
Default Keywords and Variables: Appear above a main line.
Double Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: Indicate the beginning of a

statement.
Double Arrowheads Pointing to Each Other: Indicate the end of a

statement.
Single Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: Indicate a portion of a statement,

or that the statement continues in another diagram.
Punctuation Marks or Arithmetic Symbols: If punctuation marks or

arithmetic symbols are shown with a keyword or variable, they must be
entered as part of the statement or command. Punctuation marks and
arithmetic symbols can include:
, comma > greater than symbol

. period < less than symbol
( open parenthesis = equal sign
) close parenthesis ¬ not sign
+ addition − subtraction
* multiplication / division
About This Guide xli

The following is an example of a statement without parameters.
Statement Without Parameters

──COMMAND─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
You must write:
COMMAND
Required parameters appear on the same horizontal line (the main path of the
diagram) as the command or statement. The parameters must be separated by
one or more blanks.
Statement with Required Parameters

──COMMAND──PARM1──PARM2───────────────────────────────────────
You must write:
COMMAND PARM1 PARM2
Delimiters such as parentheses around parameters or clauses must be included.
Delimiters Around Parameters

──COMMAND──(PARM1)──PARM2='variable'──────────────────────────
If the word variable is a valid entry, you must write:
COMMAND (PARM1) PARM2='variable'
Where you see a vertical list of parameters as shown in the following example,
you must choose one of the parameters. This indicates that one entry is
required and only one of the displayed parameters is allowed in the statement.
Choice of Required Parameters

──COMMAND──┬─PARM1─┬──────────────────────────────────────────
├─PARM2─┤
└─PARM3─┘
You can choose one of the parameters from the vertical list, such as in the
following examples:
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM2
COMMAND PARM3
xlii Command Reference Guide

When a required parameter in a syntax diagram has a default value, it
indicates the value for the parameter if the command is not specified. If you
specify the command, you must code the parameter and specify one of the
displayed values.
Default Value for a Required Parameter

┌─YES─┐
──COMMAND──PARM1=─┴─NO──┴───PARM2─────────────────────────────
If you specify the command, you must write one of the following:
COMMAND PARM1=NO PARM2

COMMAND PARM1=YES PARM2
A single optional parameter appears below the horizontal line that marks the
main path.
Optional Parameter
──COMMAND──┬───────────┬──────────────────────────────────────
└─PARAMETER─┘
You can choose (or not) to use the optional parameter, as shown in the
following examples:
COMMAND
COMMAND PARAMETER
If you have a choice of more than one optional parameter, the parameters
appear in a vertical list below the main path.
Choice of Optional Parameters

──COMMAND──┬───────┬──────────────────────────────────────────
├─PARM1─┤
└─PARM2─┘
You can choose any of the parameters from the vertical list, or you can write
the statement without an optional parameter, such as in the following
examples:
COMMAND
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM2
About This Guide xliii

For some statements, you can specify a single parameter more than once. A
repeat symbol indicates that you can specify multiple parameters. The
following examples include the repeat symbol.
Repeatable Variable Parameter

┌──
──────────┐
─variable─┴───────────────────────────────────────
──COMMAND───
In the preceding example, the word variable is in lowercase italics, indicating

that it is a value you supply, but it is also on the main path, which means that
you are required to specify at least one entry. The repeat symbol indicates that
you can specify a parameter more than once. Assume that you have three
values named VALUEX, VALUEY, and VALUEZ for the variable. Some of
your choices are:
COMMAND VALUEX
COMMAND VALUEX VALUEY
COMMAND VALUEX VALUEX VALUEZ
If the repeat symbol contains punctuation such as a comma, you must separate
multiple parameters with the punctuation. The following example includes the
repeat symbol, a comma, and parentheses.
Separator with Repeatable Variable and Delimiter

┌─,────────┐
─variable─┴──)─────────────────────────────────
──COMMAND──(───
In the preceding example, the word variable is in lowercase italics, indicating

that it is a value you supply. It is also on the main path, which means that
you must specify at least one entry. The repeat symbol indicates that you can
specify more than one variable and that you must separate the entries with
commas. The parentheses indicate that the group of entries must be enclosed
within parentheses. Assume that you have three values named VALUEA,
VALUEB, and VALUEC for the variable. Some of your choices are:
COMMAND (VALUEC)
COMMAND (VALUEB,VALUEC)
COMMAND (VALUEB,VALUEA)
COMMAND (VALUEA,VALUEB,VALUEC)
The following example shows a list of parameters with the repeat symbol.
Optional Repeatable Parameters

┌──
─────────┐ ┌──
─────────┐ ┌──
─────────┐
┬───────┬┴───
──COMMAND─── ┬───────┬┴───
┬───────┬┴──────────────
└─PARM1─┘ └─PARM2─┘ └─PARM3─┘
xliv Command Reference Guide

Some choices you can make include:
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM1 PARM2 PARM3
COMMAND PARM1 PARM1 PARM3
For example, YES in the following diagram, its special treatment indicates it is
the default value for the parameter. If you do not include the parameter when
you write the statement, the result is the same as if you had actually specified
the parameter with the default value.
Default Value for a Parameter

──COMMAND──┬─────────────────┬──PARM2─────────────────────────
│ ┌─YES─┐ │
└─PARM1=─┴─NO──┴──┘
Because YES is the default in the example preceding, if you write:
COMMAND PARM2
you have written the equivalent of:
COMMAND PARM1=YES PARM2
In some syntax diagrams, a set of several parameters is represented by a single

reference, as in this example:
Variables Representing Several Parameters

──COMMAND──┬─────────────────────┬────────────────────────────
├─PARM1───────────────┤
└─┤ parameter-block ├─┘
parameter-block:
├──┬──────────────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────┤
├─PARM2────────────┤
└─PARM3─┬───────┬──┘
├─PARM4─┤
└─PARM5─┘
The parameter-block can be displayed in a separate syntax diagram.
Choices you can make from this syntax diagram therefore include (but are not
limited to) the following:
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM3
COMMAND PARM3 PARM4
Note: Before you can specify PARM4 or PARM5 in this command, you must
specify PARM3.
About This Guide xlv

A note in a syntax diagram is similar to a footnote except that the note appears
at the bottom of the diagram box.
──COMMAND──┬─────────┬────────────────────────────────────────
(1)
└─PARM1─── ┘
Note:
1 This is a note about the item.
xlvi Command Reference Guide

Chapter 1. Command Descriptions
This topic lists available commands, their functions, syntax, related commands,
and examples.
Chapter 1. Command Descriptions 1-1

1.1 + (Redisplay Command)

Causes one or more previously executed primary commands, Monitor
commands or RPF program names to be redisplayed.
1.1.1 Syntax
+ (Redisplay Command)
── + ──┬────────┬──┬───────┬──┬───────────┬───────────────────
│ ┌─1──┐ │ │ ┌─B─┐ │ │ ┌─1──┐ │
└─┼────┼─┘ └─┼───┼─┘ └─,──┼────┼─┘
└─v1─┘ └─F─┘ └─v2─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, redisplays the last executed command or program
name.
v1 Relative number of the previously executed command (within the
command save area buffer) that is to be redisplayed. If the number
exceeds the number of commands in the area, the oldest command
is assumed. If omitted, the default is 1.
F Causes the scan to go forward (towards the most recently executed
command). If omitted, the default is B.
B Causes the scan to go backward (towards the oldest executed
commands). If omitted, the default is B.
v2 Number of previously executed commands/program names that are
to be redisplayed in the Command Area. If specified, the number
must be 1, 2, or 3. If omitted, the default is 1.
1-2 Command Reference Guide

1.1.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ The plus sign cannot be used to redisplay previously executed line
commands.
Multiple Execution of + :
■ Repeated executions of the plus sign are comparable to executing +1B,1.
Each execution displays a successively older executed command or
program name.
1.1.3 Related Commands
Primary Command(s) Line Command(s)

* (Defer Execution) N/A
- (Reexecute Command)
STATUS COMMAND (Display
list of executed cmds.)
1.1.3.1 Examples
Assume that the following primary commands have just been entered.
FETCH WIDGET
ATTACH
RENUMBER
UPDATE
■ To redisplay the last executed command or program name (UPDATE *),
enter:
+
■ To display the next to the last executed command (instead of redisplaying
the last executed command), enter:
+2
The RENUMBER command is now redisplayed. To see the command that
preceded the RENUMBER, enter:
+ +1 +B or +1B
The ATTACH command is redisplayed. To redisplay the RENUMBER
command, enter:
+F or +1F
■ To redisplay the last three executed commands, enter:
+3,3

1.2 * (Defer Execution)

(3270-type terminals only.) Defers execution of primary commands, Monitor
commands and RPF programs.
1.2.1 Syntax
* (Defer Execution)
────string───────────────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
string One or more commands and program names whose execution is
to be deferred.
1.2.2 Notes
Deferring Execution:
■ Primary Commands:
The asterisk can be placed anywhere within the Command Area. No
subsequent primary command, Monitor command or RPF program will be
executed until the asterisk is deleted.
The user can scroll the data while the asterisk is used. To execute the
command(s), delete the asterisk.
■ Line Commands:
The asterisk has no effect on the execution of line commands.
The asterisk can also be used to represent the:

■ Name of the last fetched, saved or updated library member (for example,
UPDATE *).
■ Line to which the pointer is currently positioned in an AWS, attached data
set object, job output or library member (for example, DELETE *).

+ (Redisplay Command) N/A
- (Reexecute Command)

1.2.3.1 Examples
■ To defer execution of a command:

COPY 1 3 T
■ To: a) defer the execution of multiple commands; b) delete the line to

which pointer for the active AWS is currently positioned; and c) update
the member that was last fetched, saved, or updated:
COPY 1 3 T & DELETE & UPDATE

1.3 - (Reexecute Command)
1.3 - (Reexecute Command)

Causes the last executed primary command, Monitor command or RPF
program to be reexecuted.
1.3.1 Syntax
- (Rexecute Command)
── - ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
There are no operands.
1.3.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ The minus sign cannot be used to reexecute previously executed line
commands.
Multiple Executions Of - :
■ Any number of minus signs can be entered, as long as each minus sign is
on a line by itself or is separated from other commands by a command
delimiter (for example, - & - & - is valid, assuming that the command
delimiter is the &).

* (Defer Execution) N/A
+ (Redisplay Command)

1.4 =n (Add to AWS)
1.4 =n (Add to AWS)

Adds, replaces or deletes data in the active AWS by line number.
1.4.1 Syntax
=n (Add to AWS Command)
── =n──┬────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────────
└─string─┘
Operand Description
n One- to six-digit sequence numbers. Leading zeros can be omitted.
string Data to be added to or replaced within the active AWS. The string
may not exceed the width of the screen if entered from the terminal
or 255 characters if added using an RPF program.
1.4.2 Notes
If the specified line number:
■ Exists. The string replaces the current contents of the line. If no string is
specified, the contents of the line are deleted (the line is overlaid with
spaces).
■ Does not exist. The string is added to the active AWS.
1.4.3 Internal Pointer Position
Data Location After Command Execution

AWS At the last line specified.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

Add to AWS: Add to AWS:
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT I, IB, IM (MASK), TE
XCOPY, XCOPYS,
XCOPYX

1.4 =n (Add to AWS)

Rearrange AWS Contents: Rearrange AWS Contents:
COPY C, CC, CR, CCR, CB, CT, R, RR
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
Replace AWS Contents: Replace AWS Contents:
CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE

1.5 : Command
1.5 : Command
Performs a specific screen escape action.
1.5.1 Syntax
: Command
── :C── :E── :L── :P── :S── :U── :W───────────────────────────
Command Description
:C Causes the current screen display to be copied into an AWS.
:E Causes split-screen processing to end.
:L Causes the Terminal Lock screen to be displayed.
:P Causes the current screen display to be printed at the default (or
current) printing location assigned to the terminal.
:S Causes a full-screen split to occur.
:U Causes an ETSO application that is prompting for input to be
suspended.
:W Causes a full-screen swap to occur.
1.5.2 Notes
Usage:
■ While these commands are intended to be used when an RPF program or
other application (ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal,
they can be issued at any time.
■ To use one of these commands, type the appropriate command in any
unprotected field and press PF12. The cursor must immediately follow the
command. (Note that the colon and PF key assignment are the Advantage
CA-Roscoe defaults. Use the STATUS SYSTEM display to determine if the
site has changed the defaults.)
Using : commands:
■ Using :C :
The SET COPYDEST command must be issued before the :C command
may be issued. SET COPYDEST identifies the AWS that is to receive the
copied data.
■ Using :L :

1.5 : Command
To resume a 'locked' session, the user's Advantage CA-Roscoe password

must be entered in the Terminal Lock screen. Thus, :L is not recognized if
the user has no password.
■ Using :S, :W And :E :
Issuing :S causes a full-screen split to occur, where the inactive
presentation area becomes active and fills the screen.
Issuing :W causes the presentation areas to be swapped (the inactive
presentation area becomes the active presentation area). The now active
presentation area fills the screen.
To terminate the split, issue :E.
■ Using :U :
When :U is issued, the application executing under ETSO is suspended.
The user may enter any Advantage CA-Roscoe command. To resume
application execution, the user must issue the command:
RESUME ETSO
If the application was invoked by an RPF program, :U cannot be issued
unless explicitly allowed by that program.

COPY SCREEN N/A
PRINT SCREEN
SET TLOCK NOW

1.6 AJOB
1.6 AJOB
|
| Invokes an RPF that displays a job menu or selection list from which jobs can
| be monitored and processed.
|1.6.1 Syntax
|
| AJOB Command
| ──AJOB──┬────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────
| ├─jobname─┬───┬──┤
| │ └─v─┘ │
| └─jobnum─────────┘
| Operand Description
| With no operands, displays the Job Facility menu.
| jobname Name of the job to qualify the Job Selection list. One or more
| wildcard characters may be included with the name. If the name
| does not include wildcard characters, it may be qualified with:
| v Number of the job to be attached
| jobnum Number of the job to be attached
|1.6.2 Notes
| Determine Execution Status:
| ■ AJOB can be used to display a Job Selection list containing job status and
| information. You can use the selection list and menu panels to provide
| information about jobs in execution, initiators, job queues, and devices.
| ■ You can also use the DISPLAY command to determine the status of a job.
| DISPLAY can be used to obtain specific job information.
| Using the Job Facility:

| ■ This command invokes an RPF, so a prefix may be required for execution.
| By default, it will be executed from the RO prefix.
| ■ The Job Facility remains active until explicitly deactivated.

1.6 AJOB
| ■ Selecting a job from the job display panel causes output to the Execution
| Area and places the Job Facility in a pending state. It can be resumed at any
| time, using any PA key or any of the following Advantage CA-Roscoe
| commands:
| AJOB
| SELECT MENU
| SELECT NEXT
| SELECT PREV
| NEXT JOB
| PREV JOB
| LAST JOB
| FIRST JOB
| DETACH JOB (job is detached first)
| While the Job Facility is pending, Advantage CA-Roscoe commands (except
| the SCREEN command) can be issued. RPFs, however, are not supported.
| The PA keys will return control to the previous level, or to Advantage
| CA-Roscoe when issued from the primary menu.
| ■ The CLEAR key will discontinue AJOB processing from any AJOB panel or
| display from which it is pressed (with the exception of a CONSOLE
| display caused by a command from the OPERATOR COMMAND panel).
| It will leave the most recent job attached that had been selected for
| viewing.
| When CLEAR is pressed during a CONSOLE display, it causes the
| CONSOLE display to be cleared and redisplays the OPERATOR
| COMMAND panel.
| ■ If a job is currently attached and you issue the AJOB command, the first
| job is implicitly detached (AJOB issues a DETACH JOB NOACT).
| ■ If a specified job can be found, it is attached and AJOB terminates. If the
| specified job cannot be found, or if the job name uses a wildcard
| specification, then a Job Selection list is presented based on the JOB|GRP
| NAME value.
| Multiple Users Attaching Jobs:

| ■ Multiple users can attach the same job concurrently. The first person to
| attach a specific job, using either the ATTACH JOB command or the Job
| Facility, has control of the file attributes (using the STATUS screen or the
| ALTER command) and the job disposition (using the DETACH command).
| JES2 Sites:
| ■ A job's files may be examined at any time. (If the attributes of the output
| files are to be modified, the job must be submitted with a special SYSOUT
| class established by site management.) If the job is:

1.6 AJOB
| AWAITING EXECUTION
| The JCL and all SYSIN data can be viewed.
| (This is the only time that this information is
| displayed.)
| EXECUTING The JCL and much of the job log and SMB that
| is currently written can be viewed, plus all
| available files. (If a file is open and empty, only
| the end of file message is presented when that
| file is displayed.)
| AWAITING PRINT All SYSOUT files that have not yet been printed
| or purged can be viewed.
| ■ Using Job Numbers: A job may be queried by its job name or number. If
| there are multiple jobs with the same name and no job number is
| specified, a Job Selection List is produced.
| JES3 Sites:
| ■ If an output file exists, it may be examined at any time. Modifications may
| only be made to the attributes of files routed to a SYSOUT class held for:
| – An external writer (when ETSO is not active),
| or
| – TSO (when ETSO is active).
| ■ Site management will tell you what special SYSOUT class(es) they have
| established.
| ■ Using Job Numbers: A job may be queried by its job number. If there are
| multiple jobs with the same name and no job number is specified, a Job
| Selection List is produced.
| Using 'Wildcard' Characters:

| ■ Wildcard characters may be used to create the criteria for a job's inclusion
| in a Selection List.
| ■ The jobname specified with the AJOB command may use the question
| mark (?), asterisk (*), and plus sign (+) 'wildcard' characters.
| CODE Meaning and Examples

| ? Any single character.
| Example: Matches:
| ROS? ROSE
| ROST

1.6 AJOB
| CODE Meaning and Examples

| None, one or more characters.
| ROSJCL ROSAJCL
| ROSJCL
| ROSJCLEND
| ROSXJCLX
| + None, one or more trailing characters.
| DROS+ DROS
| DROSCOE
| DROSTSO
| Note: The question mark, asterisk, and plus sign may be used in the same
| search string.
| Example: S?A*JC+
| Matches: STARTJCL
| Consecutive asterisks (**) or an asterisk and plus sign (*+) are invalid.
|1.6.2.1 Examples
| ■ To invoke the Job Facility, displaying the Job Facility menu, enter:
| AJOB
| ■ To display a job selection list for all jobs beginning with RO, enter:
| AJOB RO+
| ■ To display a Job Facility menu containing a specific job, enter:
| AJOB COMPILE 52
| where COMPILE is the jobname and 52 is the jobnumber.

1.7 ALLOCATE
1.7 ALLOCATE
To allocate a file. In Advantage CA-Roscoe, several types of allocations can be
made, specifically to:
Data Sets: Create and, optionally, catalog a data set.
ETSO: Allocate a data set that can be referenced during the execution of
an application known to ETSO.
Advantage CA-Roscoe-Managed files:
Allocate a Advantage CA-Roscoe file (the terminal, AWS or a
library member) that can be referenced during the execution of an
application known to ETSO:
Each use of the ALLOCATE command is discussed individually on the

following pages.

1.8 ALLOCATE (Data Set)

To create and, optionally, catalog a data set.
1.8.1 Syntax
ALLOCATE (Data Set) Command
──ALLOCate──DSN──dsname──┬──────┬──┬────────────────────┬────────
└─(+v)─┘ └─LIKE dsn─┬──────┬──┘
└─(+v)─┘
──┬───────────────┬──┬───────────┬──┬────────────────┬────────────
└─AVGREC─┬─U─┬──┘ └─BLKSIZE v─┘ │ ┌─YES─┐ │
├─K─┤ └─CATLG─┴─NO──┴──┘
└─M─┘
──┬──────────────────┬──┬───────┬──┬───────────────┬──────────────
└─DATACLAS charstr─┘ └─DIR v─┘ └─DSORG charstr─┘
──┬──────────────────────┬──┬───────────────┬─────────────────────
└─DSNTYPE─┬─LIBRARY─┬──┘ └─EXPDT charstr─┘
└─PDS─────┘
──┬──────────────┬──┬──────────┬──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬───────
└─INCr charstr─┘ └─KEYLEN v─┘ └─KEYOFF v─┘ └─LRECL v─┘
──┬──────────────────┬──┬────────────────┬──┬───────────────┬─────
└─MGMICLAS charstr─┘ │ ┌──┐ │ └─RECFM charstr─┘
└─PRImary─┴─v─┴──┘
──┬────────────────┬──┬────────────────────────────────┬──────────
└─RECORG─┬─ES─┬──┘ └─SECMODEL(charstr─┬─────────┬─)─┘
├─KS─┤ └─GENERIC─┘
├─LS─┤
└─RR─┘
──┬─────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬─────────
└─SECondary v─┘ └─STORCLAS charstr─┘ └─UNIT charstr─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────┬──────────────────────────────
│ ┌──
───────────┐ │
┬─────────┬┴──┘
└─VOLume charstr──
└─charstr─┘
──┬──────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─ENDALLOC─┘

Operand Description
DSN One- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set to be
allocated. The name may be further qualified with:
+v Relative generation number of GDG (Generation Data
Group) data set to be allocated, specified as a value
between 1 and 255.
LIKE Fully qualified name of an existing data set. It may be
qualified with:
v Relative generation number of the GDG (Generation
Data Group) data set to be used as a model. It can be 0
(most current) or a minus number (for example, -1).
The following information is copied from the existing data set:
INCR (allocation unit), PRIMARY, SECONDARY, and DIR
(space allocation parameters), BLKSIZE, DSORG, EXPDT,
KEYLEN, LRECL, RECFM, UNIT, and VOLUME.
If the existing data set is an SMS-managed data set, the
following information is also copied: DATACLAS, KEYOFF,
MGMTCLAS, RECORG, and STORCLAS.
MODEL is an alias for LIKE.
Note: Any of this information may be overridden by
specifying one or more of the following operands.
AVGREC= (SMS only.) Scale modification factor to be used for average
block requests (INCR BLK), specified as:
U Use primary and secondary quantities as specified.
K Use kilobytes; multiple primary and secondary quantities
by 1024.
M Use megabytes; multiple primary and secondary
quantities by 1024576.
BLKSIZE Block size of the data set to be allocated, specified as a value
between 0 and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0.
Note: BLKSIZE is required if INCR BLK is specified and the
specified value may not exceed 65535.
CATLG Designate whether the data set is to be cataloged by
specifying:
YES Catalog the data set.
NO Do not catalog the data set.
If omitted, the default is YES.
For SMS-managed data sets, this operand is ignored; the data
set is always cataloged.

DATACLAS (SMS only.) One- to eight-character name of a data class to be

used when allocating a new SMS-managed data set.
DIR Number of PDS directory blocks for which space is to be
reserved. Valid only when allocating a PDS. If omitted, the
default is 0.
DSORG Data set organization, specified as DA, DAU, PO, POU, PS, or
PSU. If omitted, the data set organization is undefined.
DSNTYPE= (SMS only) Data set type definition, specified as LIBRARY or
PDS. If omitted, the site system default is used.
Note: The DSNTYPE value of LIBRARY defines a PDSE and
the DSNTYPE value of PDS defines a partitioned data
set. These are IBM standards for SMS processing.
EXPDT Expiration date of the data set to be allocated, specified in the
form yyddd or yyyyddd. If omitted, the default is no
expiration date.
INCr Type of allocation units, specified as BLK, TRK, or CYL. (See
Notes for a list of aliases.)
Note: INCR is required if LIKE is not specified.
KEYLEN Key length of the data set to be allocated, specified as a value
between 0 and 255. If omitted, the default is 0. With SMS, this
value overrides the key length defined in the data class for the
data set.
KEYOFF (SMS only.) VSAM key-sequenced data set key offset,
specified as a value between 0 and 32760. (The first byte of a
logical record is position 0). If omitted, the default is 0.
LRECL Logical record length of the data set to be allocated, specified
as a value between 0 and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0.
MGMTCLAS (SMS only.) One- to eight-character name of the management
class to be used when allocating a new SMS-managed data set.
PRImary Number of units to be used for the primary space allocation.
If omitted, the default is 0. If 0 is specified and there is no
secondary allocation, no space is allocated on the designated
volume or unit; however, a format-1 DSCB is created in the
VTOC.
RECFM Any valid record format. If omitted, the record format is
undefined.
RECORG (SMS only.) VSAM data set record organization, specified as:
ES VSAM entry-sequenced data set.
KS VSAM key-sequenced data set.
LS VSAM linear space data set.
RR VSAM relative record data set.

These values may also be specified as ESDS, KSDS, LSDS, and

RRDS, respectively.
SECMODEL (SMS only.) Name of a RACF discrete or generic data set
profile that is to be used in creating a discrete RACF profile
for the data set. Qualify with:
GENERIC Required if a generic data set profile is named.
Use SECMODEL if there is no default RACF data set profile
or if a different profile is desired.
SECondary Number of units that are to be used for the secondary space
allocation. If omitted, the default is 0.
STORCLAS (SMS only.) One- to eight-character name of a storage class
that is to be used for a new SMS-managed data set.
UNIT One- to eight-character unit name associated with the device
type(s) on which the data set is to be allocated. It may be
either an IBM-defined generic name (for example, 3380) or a
site-defined esoteric name (for example, SYSDA).
VOLume One- to six-character serial number of volume on which the
data set is to be allocated. One to six serial numbers may be
specified.
Note: If both VOLUME and UNIT are specified and the
volume is mounted, UNIT is ignored. If the volume is
not mounted and the unit name refers to a mass
storage device, a MSS mount is attempted.
If only UNIT is specified, only those volumes within
the designated generic or esoteric group that have a
Use attribute of STORAGE are eligible for the
allocation.
If neither VOLUME nor UNIT is specified and ETSO is
active, an allocation to the unit name specified in the
ETSO PSCB control block is attempted. If ETSO is not
active, an allocation is attempted using the unit name
SYSALLDA.
ENDALLOC Indicates the end of ALLOCATE input. ENDALLOC is valid
only when used within an RPF program.
1.8.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ ALLOCATE supports the creation of new VSAM data sets on systems
where IBM's DFSMS is installed. For systems without DFSMS, VSAM data
sets may be created using IBM's Access Method Services DEFINE
command.

■ Site management has the option of using a site-written exit routine to

evaluate the operands specified with this command. If the routine
determines that one or more of the operands should be overridden, the
user is not notified.
Syntax Requirements:
■ When entered at the terminal, the command must be complete within a
line (continuations are not allowed).
■ When executed from within an RPF program, both ALLOCATE and
ENDALLOC must appear on lines by themselves, with command operands
on intervening lines.
Allocation Requirement:
■ Data sets may be created only on DASD volumes that are mounted and
online or on mass storage volumes that can be staged.
Using CATLG:
■ If CATLG YES is specified and the data set cannot be cataloged (for
example, it is already cataloged or the user has insufficient access authority
for the catalog), the command is rejected. The user may reexecute the
command, specifying CATLG NO.
Using EXPDT:
■ When the expiration date is specified as 'yyydd', it is assumed to indicate a
year in the twentieth century. Years beyond 1999 may be specified only at
sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At these sites, the year may be
specified in the range 2000 through 2155.
Using INCR:
■ Allocation units may be specified in the form of blocks, cylinders or tracks.
The following chart shows the aliases that may be specified with the INCR
operand:
BLOCKS CYLINDERS TRACKS

AVBLK CYL TRK
AVBLKS CYLS TRKS
AVBLOCK CYLINDER TRACK
AVBLOCKS CYLINDERS TRACKS
BLK
BLKS
BLOCK
BLOCKS

Using UNIT Without VOLUME:

■ When UNIT is specified and VOLUME is omitted, only those volumes
associated with the specified generic or esoteric group that have a use
attribute of STORAGE are eligible for the allocation. To determine which
volumes have such a Use attribute, use the DISPLAY DEVICES command.
The Status field of the resulting display will contain STR if the volume's
use attribute is STORAGE.

DSN AL (data set object) N/A
DSN AM (data set object)

1.9 ALLOCATE (Data Set Under ETSO)

To allocate an OS data set and assign a DD name that can be referenced
during the execution of an application known to ETSO.
1.9.1 Syntax
ALLOCATE (Data Set Under ETSO) Command
──ALLOCate──┬────────┬──┬─────────────────────────┬──────────────
└─ddname─┘ │ ┌─,─────┐ │
┬─────┬┴─)─┤
├─DSName=(dsn──
│ └─dsn─┘ │
├─DUMMY───────────────────┤
├─JCLDD=charstr───────────┤
└─SYSOUT=(charstr)────────┘
──┬──────────┬──┬────────────────┬──┬───────────┬─────────────────
└─LIKE=dsn─┘ └─AVGREC=─┬─U─┬──┘ └─BLKSIZE=v─┘
├─K─┤
└─M─┘
──┬────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬──────
└─BURST─┬─YES─┬──┘ └─CHAR=charstr─┘ └─CONTIG=─┬─YES─┬──┘
└─NO──┘ └─NO──┘
──┬──────────┬──┬──────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬────────────
└─COPIES=v─┘ └─DATACLAS charstr─┘ └─DEST=charstr─┘
──┬───────┬──┬──────────────┬──┬───────────────┬──────────────────
└─DIR v─┘ └─DISP=charstr─┘ └─DSORG=charstr─┘
──┬───────────────────────┬──┬───────────────┬────────────────────
└─DSNTYPE=─┬─LIBRARY─┬──┘ └─EXPDT=charstr─┘
└─PDS─────┘
──┬─────────────┬──┬───────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬────────
└─FCB=charstr─┘ └─FLASH=(charstr,v)─┘ └─INCr=charstr─┘
──┬──────────┬──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬─────────────────────────
└─KEYLEN=v─┘ └─KEYOFF=v─┘ └─LRECL=v─┘
──┬──────────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬──────────────────────
└─MGMICLAS=charstr─┘ └─MODIFY=charstr,v─┘
──┬───────────────┬──┬─────────────────┬──────────────────────────
└─OPTCD=charstr─┘ │ ┌──┐ │
└─PRImary=─┴─v─┴──┘
──┬───────────────────┬──┬───────────────┬──┬───────────────┬─────
└─PROTECT=─┬─YES─┬──┘ └─QNAME=charstr─┘ └─RECFM=charstr─┘
└─NO──┘
──┬─────────────────┬──┬───────────────────┬──────────────────────
└─RECORG=─┬─ES─┬──┘ └─RELease=─┬─YES─┬──┘
├─KS─┤ └─NO──┘
├─LS─┤
└─RR─┘

ALLOCATE (Data Set Under ETSO) Command (Continued)
──┬───────────────┬──┬─────────────────┬──┬─────────────┬─────────
└─RETPD=charstr─┘ └─ROUND=─┬─YES─┬──┘ └─SECondary=v─┘
└─NO──┘
──┬────────────────────────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬────────
└─SECMODEL(charstr─┬─────────┬─)─┘ └─SPACE=( charstr)─┘
└─GENERIC─┘
──┬──────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────
└─STORCLAS=charstr─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬─────
└─UCS=(charstr─┬────────────────────┬─)─┘ └─UNIT=charstr─┘
└─,─┬──────┬─,VERIFY─┘
└─FOLD─┘
──┬────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────────
└─VOLume=charstr─┘
──┬──────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─ENDALLOC─┘
Operand Description
ddname One- to eight-character DD name to be associated with the
data set being allocated. If omitted, the DSNAME=
operand is required and space is allocated for the data set.
DSNAME= Fully qualified name of the data set(s) to be allocated.
A maximum of 10 data set names may be specified,
enclosed by parentheses. The parentheses are optional if
only one data set name is specified.
LIKE= Fully qualified name of an existing data set.
If DSNAME= is specified and there is no space allocation,
one track is assigned. If no disposition is specified, NEW is
assumed. (DISP=NEW is the only valid disposition.)
If DSNAME= is omitted, a space allocation is required. If
no disposition is specified, NEW is assumed. (DISP=NEW
is required.)
Without SMS, the DCB parameters of the existing data set
are used to allocate the new data set(s).
With SMS, the attributes copied from the existing data set
are AVGREC, KEYLEN, KEYOFF, LRECL, RECORG (or
RECFM), and SPACE.
Note: LIKE= is invalid with DUMMY, SYSOUT= or
JCLDD=.

DUMMY Causes read/write operations to the file to be ignored.

Specify this operand only when a DD name is also
specified.
JCLDD= Name of a DD statement appearing in the Advantage
CA-Roscoe JCL. (DISP=SHR is the only valid disposition.)
Note: DSNAME=, DUMMY, JCLDD=, and SYSOUT= are
mutually exclusive.
SYSOUT= SYSOUT information, specified in the form:
──(class─┬───────┬──┬───────┬─)─────────────
└─,prog─┘ └─,form─┘
where:
class The site-defined class representing 328x-type
printers or any valid system printer SYSOUT class.
If specified as *, the site's system printer default
class is used. (Parentheses are optional if only class
is specified.)
prog One- to eight-character name of a site-written
program on the system library that is to be used to
write the output data set (in place of JES2 or JES3).
(Valid only when directing output to a system
printer.)
form One- to four-character string specifying the type of
form on which the output is to be printed. (Valid
only when directing output to a system printer.)
AVGREC= (SMS only.) Scale modification factor to be used for
average block requests (INCR BLK), specified as:
U Use primary and secondary quantities as specified.
K Use kilobytes; multiple primary and secondary
quantities by 1024.
M Use megabytes; multiple primary and secondary
quantities by 1024576.
BLKSIZE= Maximum block length, in bytes, specified as a value
between 0 and 32760.
BURST= Requirement for the use of the 3800 print subsystem
burster-trimmer-stacker option, specified as:
YES Output is to be burst into separate sheets.
(Abbreviate as Y.)
NO Output is to be left in continuous fanfold.
(Abbreviate as N.)

CHARS= One- to four-character name of a 3800 print subsystem

character-arrangement table. A maximum of four names
may be specified.
CONTIG= Requirement for contiguous space, specified as:
Note: Do not specify this operand if the SPACE= operand
is used.
YES Space must be contiguous.
NO Space need not be contiguous.
COPIES= Number of copies to be produced.
DATACLAS= (SMS only.) One- to eight-character name of a data class to
be used when allocating a new SMS-managed data set.
DEST= If the SYSOUT class is for a system printer, one- to
eight-character printer id. If omitted, the output is directed
to the printer destination assigned to Advantage
CA-Roscoe.
If the SYSOUT class is for a site-defined 328x-type printer,
its destination name. If omitted, the output is directed to
the default printing location associated with the terminal.
DIR Numeric amount of directory space allocation.
is used.
DISP= Disposition of the data set, specified as:
NEW Create.
OLD Already exists.
SHR Already exists and can be used simultaneously by
other jobs.
MOD Already exists and to be extended.
The disposition can be further qualified with:
KEEP Keep.
CATLG Keep and place entry pointing to data set in
system catalog.
When multiple values are used, they must be separated by
commas and bound by parentheses, as in
DISP=(NEW,KEEP).

DSORG= Data set organization, specified as PO, POU, PS, PSU, or

DA. If omitted, space must be coded as for PS.
DSNTYPE= (SMS only) Data set type definition, specified as LIBRARY
or PDS. If omitted, the site system default is used.
Note: The DSNTYPE value of LIBRARY defines a PDSE
and the DSNTYPE value of PDS defines a
partitioned data set. These are IBM standards for
SMS processing.
EXPDT= Expiration date. If omitted, the current data is used as the
default.
Note: EXPDT= and RETPD= are mutually exclusive.
FCB= One- to four-character name of the FCB (Forms Control
Buffer) image to be used.
FLASH= One- to four-character name of the forms overlay frame to
be used when printing on a 3800 print subsystem.
Optionally, may be qualified with:
v Numeric value between 0 and 255 which indicates
the number of copies that JES is to flash with the
overlay. (0 causes all copies to be flashed.)
INCr= Unit of allocation, specified as TRK, CYL, or a numeric
value representing the average block size. If INCR= is
omitted, the allocation is assumed to be by blocks.
is used.
KEYLEN= Maximum key length, in bytes. With SMS, this value
overrides the key length defined in the data class for the
data set.
KEYOFF= (SMS only.) Position of the first byte of the record key in
each logical record of a new data set. Specify a value
between 0 and 32760. (The first byte of a logical record is
position 0.)
LRECL= Maximum logical record length, in bytes.
MGMTCLAS= (SMS only.) One- to eight-character name of the
management code to be used when allocating a new
SMS-managed data set.
MODIFY= One- to four-character name of the copy-modification
module that is to tell JES how to print the SYSOUT data
set on a 3800 print subsystem. Optionally, may be qualified
with:
v Numeric value indicating which table name specified
with the CHARS= operand is to be used. (0 equals
the first table name.)

OPTCD= Alphabetic character(s) indicating the optional services to

be performed by the control program. If multiple
characters are specified, they must be contiguous (not
separated by commas). Refer to the appropriate IBM JCL
manual for a description of the characters that may be
specified.
PRImary= Numeric amount of primary space allocation.
PROTECT= Requirement for RACF protection of data set when it is
initially defined, specified as:
YES RACF protection is required.
NO RACF protection is not required.
QNAME= (TCAM only.) Name of TPROCESS macro instruction
defining destination queue for messages that are to be
processed by the program.
RECFM= Record format. All record format types are valid.
RECORG= (SMS only.) VSAM data set record organization, specified
as:
ES VSAM entry-sequenced data set.
KS VSAM key-sequenced data set.
LS VSAM linear space data set.
RR VSAM relative record data set.
RELease= Status of unused space after the operation completes,
specified as:
YES Unused space is not to be kept.
NO Unused space is to be kept.
is used.
RETPD= Retention period. If omitted, the default is 0.
Note: EXPDT= and RETPD= are mutually exclusive.
ROUND= Requirement that the space must begin on the first track of
a cylinder, specified as:
YES Space must be equal to one or more cylinders.
NO Space need not be equal to one or more cylinders.
is used.
SECondary= Numeric amount of secondary space allocation.
is used.

SECMODEL= (SMS only.) Name of a RACF model profile, discrete data

set profile or generic data set profile. (The named profile is
copied to the discrete data set profile built by RACF for the
new data set.) May be qualified with:
GENERIC Required if a generic data set profile is
named.
Use SECMODEL= if there is no default RACF data set
profile or if a different profile is desired.
SPACE= Space to be allocated for the data set, specified as:
(incr,(pri,sec,dir),RLSE,CONTIG,ROUND)
The allocation unit can be TRK, CYL, or a numeric value
representing the block size. Primary, secondary and
directory space can be defined as customary. CONTIG and
ROUND must be coded in the order RLSE, CONTIG, and
ROUND following the allocation amounts.
Note: If SPACE= is specified, do NOT use the operands:
INCR=, PRIMARY=, SECONDARY=, DIR=,
RELEASE=, CONTIG=, and ROUND=.
STORCLAS= (SMS only.) One- to eight-character name of a storage
class to be used for a new SMS-managed data set.
UCS= One- to four-character name of the universal character set
to be used. May be qualified with:
,FOLD (JES2 only.) The chain or train for the
universal character set is to be loaded in fold
mode.
,VERIFY The character set image is to be displayed
before the data set is printed to allow the
operator to verify that the image is for the
correct chain or train.
UNIT= Standard unit designation (for example, UNIT=DISK).
VOLUME= Serial number of the volume on which the data set is to be
allocated. (Multivolume data sets are not supported.)
ENDALLOC Indicates the end of ALLOCATE input. ENDALLOC is
valid only when used within an RPF program.

1.9.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ ALLOCATE is valid only when the Extended Time-Sharing Option (ETSO)
is active.
■ The individual operands establishing space requirements can be specified
with no values (for example, PRIMARY=5,SECONDARY=,DIR=1 is valid).
While this can be done from the terminal, it is meant to aid in building an
ALLOCATE command from within an RPF program.
■ Finally, all files must be allocated before invoking application execution by
the CALL command.
Allocation Limits:
■ By default, 19 files can be allocated per session. (Site management has the
option of changing this maximum value.) This value includes any
combination of terminal, active AWS, library member and OS data sets.
■ If split screens are being used, the applications executing in each screen
may allocate the maximum number of files.
Allocating a Data Set Defined in the Advantage CA-Roscoe JCL:

■ If the JCLDD= operand is not used, the designated data set is dynamically
allocated. To eliminate the overhead this causes, site management may
include DD statements for frequently accessed data sets in the Advantage
CA-Roscoe JCL. If your site chooses to do this, your site management will
tell you the DD names that should be used.
Allocating a SYSOUT Data Set:

■ When allocating a SYSOUT data set that is to be directed to a:
System Printer: Use any of the operands noted as being
SYSOUT-related. From the other operands, JCL
requirements allow only the use of UNIT=, DSORG=,
RECFM=, BLKSIZE=, and LRECL=.
328x-Type Printer: Only the DEST=, COPIES=, and RECFM= operands
may be used.
■ With RECFM=, the only valid formats are:

– FA or FBA (comparable to PRINT TYPE ANS)

– FM OR FBM (comparable to PRINT TYPE MCC)
– Any other record format specified is treated as PRINT TYPE DEF.
Allocating a Temporary Data Set:

■ A temporary data set is allocated if: 1) neither DSNAME, DUMMY,
JCLDD, nor SYSOUT are specified, and 2) there is a space parameter.

CALL N/A
CANCEL
DIVERT
FREE
QUERY ALLOCATE
QUERY CALL
QUERY DIVERT
RESUME
SET ESCAPE
1.9.3.1 Examples
1. To allocate an OS data set from within an RPF program:

ALLOCATE
DSN=ABC.XYZ
DISP=(NEW,CATLG)
VOLUME=STOR2 UNIT=SYSDA
SPACE=(TRK,(1,1)) BLKSIZE=24 LRECL=8
ENDALLOC
To perform the same allocation from the terminal, the command must be
specified on a single line in the Command Area, as in:
ALLOCATE DSN=ABC.XYZ DISP=(NEW,CATLG)...
2. Assume you want to execute an application that uses a file with the DD
name SYSUT1. To designate that this file is not to be allocated for this
execution:
ALLOCATE SYSUT1 DUMMY
3. Assume that the Advantage CA-Roscoe JCL includes a DD statement
named SAMPLE and that the statement identifies a data set that is used by
an ETSO application. To designate that this data set is to be used:
ALLOCATE SPECIAL JCLDD=SAMPLE
4. To allocate a SYSOUT data set from the terminal, where the output is
directed to a 328x-type printer:
ALLOCATE SYSPRINT SYSOUT=R DEST=PR17

This example assumes that R is a valid 328x-type printer class and that
PR17 is a printing location associated with the user's terminal.
5. To allocate a SYSOUT data set from within an RPF program, where the
output is directed to a system printer:
ALLOCATE
SYSPRINT SYSOUT=(W,,LTRH)
RECFM=FBM
DEST=ABCD
BURST=N
CHARS=(ROS4)
COPIES=2
ENDALLOC
6. To allocate a temporary data set:
ALLOCATE TEMPDD SPACE=(TRK,1(1,1))

1.10 ALLOCATE (Advantage CA-Roscoe-Managed Files)

To allocate a Advantage CA-Roscoe-managed file (the terminal, an AWS or a
library member) and assign a DD name that can be referenced during the
execution of an application known to ETSO.
1.10.1 Syntax
ALLOCATE (Advantage CA-Roscoe Managed Files) Command
──ALLOCate── ddname──┬────────────────┬─────────────────────────
├─AWS─┬────────┬──┤
│ └─=aname─┘ │
└─MEM=mem─────────┘
──┬────────────────────┬──┬───────────┬──┬─────────┬──────────────
└─CTRL=──┬─FORMAT──┬─┘ └─BLKSIZE=v─┘ └─LRECL=v─┘
├─DISCARD─┤
└─KEEP────┘
──┬───────────────┬──┬──────────┬────────────────────────────────
└─RECFM=charstr─┘ └─ENDALLOC─┘
Operand Description
ddname One- to eight-character DD name to be associated with the
input/output file.
* Causes the terminal to be used as an input/output file.
AWS Causes the active AWS to be used as an input/output file.
OR
AWS= Name of the existing AWS that is to be used as an
input/output file.
MEM= Name of the library member to be used as an input/output file.
CTRL= Designate recognition of carriage control characters by
specifying:
FORMAT Interpret carriage control characters as:
blank no blank lines
0 1 blank line
- 2 blank lines
1 3 blank lines
Ignore any other characters found in column 1.
DISCARD Ignore carriage control characters. The output
record starts with column 2.
KEEP Ignore carriage control characters. The output
record starts with column 1.

CTRL=DISCARD is forced if the application specifies machine

carriage control characters.
BLKSIZE= Maximum block length, in bytes.
LRECL= Maximum logical record length, in bytes.
RECFM= Record format. All record format types are valid.
ENDALLOC Indicates the end of ALLOCATE input. ENDALLOC is valid
only when used within an RPF program.
1.10.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ ALLOCATE is valid only when the Extended Time-Sharing Option (ETSO)
is active.
Allocation Requirement:
■ All files must be allocated before invoking application execution through
the CALL command.
■ By default, 19 files can be allocated per session. (Site management has the
option of changing this maximum value.) This value includes any
combination of terminal, AWS, library member and OS data sets.
■ If split screens are being used, the applications executing in each screen
may allocate the maximum number of files.
Advantage CA-Roscoe-Managed File Requirements:
| Files allocated to an Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment AWS or

| Library member for use in ETSO are not allowed to be extended by using
| DISP=MOD.
Terminal The terminal can be designated as both an input and an output file.
AWS An AWS can be designated as both an input and an output file.
When the application ends (either successfully or unsuccessfully),
the input data in that AWS is overlaid by the output data written to
it.
The BLKSIZE, LRECL and RECFM operands can be used to override the
default DCB values for the intercepted Advantage CA-Roscoe-managed file.


CALL N/A
CANCEL
DIVERT
FREE
QUERY ALLOCATE
QUERY CALL
QUERY DIVERT
RESUME
SET ESCAPE
1.10.3.1 Examples
■ To allocate the active AWS as an input file:

ALLOCATE SYSIN AWS
■ To allocate the library member named OUTMEM as an output file:
ALLOCATE SYSPRINT MEM=OUTMEM
■ If this command were to be included within an RPF program, ALLOCATE
and ENDALLOC must appear on a line by themselves, as in:
ALLOCATE
SYSPRINT
MEM=OUTMEM
ENDALLOC

1.11 ALTER
1.11 ALTER
Changes the attributes of an AWS, job output or a library member. The ALTER
command is used several ways:
AWS To change the attributes of an AWS.
JOB To change the attributes of an attached job output file.
mem To change the description and/or attributes of a library member.
Each use of the ALTER command is discussed individually on the following

pages.

1.12 ALTER AWS
1.12 ALTER AWS

To change the attributes of a named AWS.
1.12.1 Syntax
ALTER AWS Command
──ALTer Aws──┬─aname─┬──┬────────────────┬──┬─────────┬────────
└──────┘ ├─RECoverable────┤ ├─SESsion─┤
└─NONRECOVERABLE─┘ ├─SPLit───┤
├─RPF─────┤
└─LEVel───┘
──┬──────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────
├─IMPLicit─┤
└─WXPLicit─┘
Operand Description
aname The name of the specific AWS whose attributes are to be
altered.
* Indicates the active AWS.
RECoverable Designates that the contents of this AWS are to be backed up
on disk and recovered in the event of a session or system
termination.
NONRECOVERABLE
Designates that the contents of this AWS are to be retained in
storage for as long as possible. While this provides faster
execution, the data is lost if there is a session or system
termination. (Abbreviate as NREC.)
Note: RECOVERABLE and NONRECOVERABLE are mutually
exclusive.
SESsion Causes this AWS to be discarded when the session ends.
SPLit Causes this AWS to be discarded when the split screen in
which the CREATE command was executed is terminated.
RPF Causes this AWS to be discarded when the RPF 'application'
containing the CREATE command returns control to the
terminal. (In this case, 'application' refers to the RPF program
invoked by the user and all subordinate RPF programs that it
may invoke.)
LEVel Causes this AWS to be discarded when the RPF program
containing the CREATE command terminates. (Abbreviate as
LVL.)
Note: SESSION, SPLIT, RPF and LEVEL are mutually
exclusive.

1.12 ALTER AWS
IMPLicit Designates that this AWS is to be made active when a SELECT

command is issued with the NEXT, PREV, or FLIP keyword.
EXPLicit Designates that this AWS is to be made active when it is
specifically named in a SELECT command.
Note: IMPLICIT and EXPLICIT are mutually exclusive.

AWS At the first line when a list is displayed.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

RENAME N/A
1.12.3.1 Examples
■ To alter the attributes of the AWS named TEST so that it is discarded

when the session ends and not recoverable in the event of a session or
system termination:
ALTER AWS TEST SESSION NONRECOVERABLE
■ To alter the attributes of the currently active AWS so that it is
automatically discarded upon the termination of the RPF program in
which it is created:
ALTER AWS LEVEL

1.13 ALTER JOB
1.13 ALTER JOB

To change the attributes of an attached job output file:
1.13.1 Syntax
ALTER JOB Command
──ALTer Job──┬────────┬──┬─NOPrint─┬──Class charstr────────────
├─ALL────┤ └─Print───┘
└─File v─┘
──Destcharstr──Form v──COPIES v────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
ALL Causes all files to be affected. (Site management has the option
of restricting use of this operand.)
File Number of the file to be affected. An asterisk (*) may be used
to indicate the file that is currently attached.
Note: ALL and FILE v are mutually exclusive. If neither is
specified, the attributes of the currently attached job
output file are changed.
NOPrint Causes the designated file(s) to be marked for deletion when
the job is detached.
Print Causes the designated file(s) to be marked for printing when
the job is detached.
Class SYSOUT class to be assigned to the file(s).
Dest Name of the printing location where the file(s) are to be
printed. (REMOTE is a synonym for DEST.)
Form (JES2.) One- to eight-digit form number to be assigned to the
file(s).
COPIES (JES2.) Number of copies of the designated file(s) that are to be
printed. The number must be between 1 and 255.
1.13.2 Notes
JES2 Sites:
■ The ALTER command is valid only when a job has held SYSOUT data sets.
JES3 Sites:
■ The ALTER command is valid only when a job has held SYSOUT data sets
and the data sets are held for either:
– An external writer (when ETSO is not active), OR

1.13 ALTER JOB
– TSO (when ETSO is active).

STATUS JOB display N/A
1.13.3.1 Examples
■ To change the attributes of the second file of a job so that two copies of the
file will be printed when the job is detached:
ALTER JOB FILE 2 PRINT COPIES 2
■ To change the attributes of the file that is currently attached so that the file
is not printed:
ALTER JOB NOPRINT
or
ALTER JOB FILE NOPRINT

1.14 ALTER (LIB)
1.14 ALTER (LIB)

To change the description and/or attributes of an existing library member.
1.14.1 Syntax
ALTER (LIB) Command
──ALTer──mem──┬───────────┬──┬───────────────────┬─────────────
└─/charstr/─┘ └─SEQ─┬──────────┬──┘
│ ┌─8─┐ │
├─s──┼───┼─┤
│ └─l─┘ │
└─COBOL────┘
──┬───────┬──┬────────────┬────────────────────────────────────
└─NOSEQ─┘ ├─Shared─────┤
├─Execonly───┤
└─Restricted─┘
Operand Description
mem Name of the library member to be altered.
/charstr/ One- to thirty-character delimited description to be assigned to
the member.
SEQ Sets attribute to allow the insertion of sequence numbers when
the library member is submitted for background execution.
With no qualification, causes sequence numbers to be placed in
columns 73 through 80. The qualifications are:
s l Starting column and length of the sequence number
field.
The maximum length of the field is 8 characters. If
omitted, the default is 8.
COBOL Causes sequence numbers to be placed in columns 1
through 6.
NOSEQ Sets attribute to prevent the insertion of sequence numbers
when the library member is submitted for execution.
Shared Sets attribute to allow anyone to access or execute the member;
only the owner can change or delete it. (Abbreviate as S or
SHR.)

1.14 ALTER (LIB)
Execonly Sets attribute to allow anyone to execute the member; only the
owner can access, change or delete it. (This attribute is intended
for RPF programs.) (Abbreviate as E or EXE.)
Restricted Sets attribute to allow only the owner to execute, access, change
or delete the member. (Abbreviate as R or RES.)
1.14.2 Notes
■ ALTER has no effect on the contents of the library member or on attributes
not specified in the command.
■ Unless changed by site management, only the owner of a library member
can change the member's description or attributes.

Change Attributes: N/A
INFO LIB display
LIB I (display menu)
RENAME
UPDATE
1.14.3.1 Examples
To change only the access attribute of the library member ABC to SHARED:
ALTER ABC SHARED
Since no description of sequence attribute is specified, they remain unchanged.

1.15 AMS
1.15 AMS
Permits interactive execution of IDCAMS (the IBM Access Method Services
system utility).
1.15.1 Syntax
AMS Command
──AMS─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.15.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ AMS is a Monitor command. Site management has the option of restricting
its use.
If its use is not restricted, see Appendix B for the extended syntax that
permits the input to be read from the active AWS or a library member.
AMS Overview:
■ By default, AMS attached IDCAMS in such a way that SYSIN and
SYSPRINT become terminal input and output. (Site management can
change AMS so that the active AWS is used for input and output. The
extended syntax allows the user to also obtain input from a library
member.)
■ IDCAMS is invoked with a PARM field entry directing it to reset its
margins for SYSIN to columns 1 through 72. IDCAMS echoes the
MARGINS command and displays a message that the command is
complete. After this message is displayed, the user may enter any AMS
directive(s) or IDCAMS command(s).
■ AMS terminates when IDCAMS finishes all processing (when IDCAMS
detects an end-of-file condition on SYSIN). End-of-file on SYSIN is
returned to IDCAMS when:
– The ..END or ..EOD is entered.
– Any Attention key is used.
– End-of-file is reached in the active AWS or library member.
■ Note that it is assumed that the user is familiar with IDCAMS as described
in the IBM manual OS/VS Access Method Services. That manual should
be used as the definitive guide on JCL requirements, command syntax and
execution.

1.15 AMS
AMS Directives:
■ AMS directives begin with the characters .. and are never seen by
IDCAMS. The AMS directives are:
.. AWSIN Subsequent input taken from the active AWS.
.. AWS Subsequent output goes into the active AWS.
.. END or .. EOD Logical end-of-file on SYSIN.
.. HELP AMS directives (not IDCAMS) are listed.
.. STATUS Current source for input and the destination for the
output are shown.
.. TERMIN Subsequent input taken from the terminal.
.. TERMOUT Subsequent output goes to the terminal.
IDCAMS Commands:
■ While all IDCAMS commands are valid, please note the following:
1. Avoid the use of modal commands (IF..., THEN..., and so forth) since
their execution cannot be interrupted.
2. Commands such as DEFINE are long and it is easy to make mistakes.
Prepare input to IDCAMS in the AWS. Put a ..TERMIN directive after
each IDCAMS command. If the command is executed successfully, a
..AWSIN directive will switch the input source back to the AWS.
Otherwise, a ..EOD will terminate IDCAMS and allow the AWS to be
re-edited.
3. PRINT is useful for examining VSAM or non-VSAM data sets. Avoid
using the AWS or terminal in a REPRO command. It is suggested that,
where applicable, the COUNT parameter be included with the PRINT
and REPRO commands to limit the amount of data processed.
4. Avoid accessing any data set defined by DSNAME in the Advantage
CA-Roscoe JCL. IDCAMS forces a non-shareable disposition on such
data sets, making them inaccessible to other programs until Advantage
CA-Roscoe is shut down.

1.16 ATTACH
1.16 ATTACH
Attaches and displays data at the terminal. This data may be one of the
following:
■ The contents of an AWS.
■ The Data Set Facility, a sequential data set, PDS Selection List or member,
AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List or module, or Catalog Selection List.
■ Job output.
■ The Library Facility or a library member.
■ A VTOC or Volume Selection List.
Each use of the ATTACH Command is discussed individually on the following

pages.

1.17 ATTACH AWS
1.17 ATTACH AWS

To attach the contents of an AWS.
1.17.1 Syntax
ATTACH AWS Command
──ATTACH──┬────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────
└─AWS─┬───────┬──┘
├──────┤
└─aname─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬────
└─/string/─┬───┬──┬───┬──┬─────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬──┘
└─p─┘ └─q─┘ └─LIT─┘ └─context─┘ └─Mix─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, attaches and displays the contents of the
currently active AWS.
AWS Causes the currently active AWS to be reattached and the display to
begin with the first line. AWS can be qualified with:
* Causes the display to begin with the previously
displayed location.
aname Name of the AWS to be attached.
/string/ Search string, which may not exceed 80 characters and must be
bound by delimiters. The attachment and display begins with the
first line containing the string and continues from that point to the
end of the range.
p q Number of the first and last lines to be searched for the string or to
be displayed. If only one number is specified, only that line is
searched/displayed.
LITeral Prevents the search string from being interpreted (for example,
X'C1' is to be treated as a character string; not as the hexadecimal
representation of the letter A). If omitted, the string is subject to
interpretation.
context Qualifies the search string within the data. If omitted, the search is
for the string exactly as entered. If specified, it must be one of the
following:
WORD Treat the string as a complete entity (it is preceded and
followed by a non-alphanumeric character.) (Abbreviate
as WOR.)

1.17 ATTACH AWS
BEGIN Treat the string as either beginning or being a complete

entity (it is preceded by a non-alphanumeric character
and followed by either an alphanumeric or
non-alphanumeric character.) (Abbreviate as BEG.)
PREFIX Treat the string as beginning an entity (it is preceded by
a non-alphanumeric character and followed by an
alphanumeric character.) (Abbreviate as PRE.)
EMBED Treat the string as contained within an entity (it is
preceded and followed by an alphanumeric character.)
(May also be specified as IMBED; abbreviate as EMB or
IMB.)
SUFFIX Treat the string as ending an entity (it is preceded by an
alphanumeric character and followed by a
non-alphanumeric character.) (Abbreviate as SUF.)
END Treat the string as either ending or being a complete
entity (it is preceded by either an alphanumeric or
non-alphanumeric character and is followed by a non-
alphanumeric character.)
| Mix Indicates that the search is a case insensitive search. The search is
| for any combination of string characters, in upper and lower case,
| that match the search string. (Abbreviate as M.)
1.17.2 Notes
At 3270-type terminals:
■ When you sign on, an automatically created AWS can be attached by
entering ATTACH with no AWS name. You can attach any other existing
AWS by including its name with the command. Once attached, the
contents of that AWS is displayed and can be scrolled and modified. It
remains attached until:
1. Another AWS is created with an ACTIVE attribute.
2. A existing AWS is ATTACHed or SELECTed.
3. The active AWS is DISCARDed.
4. A command is issued that causes output to the Execution Area (for
example, ATTACH DSN).
5. The DETACH command is entered.
6. The CLEAR key is pressed.

1.17 ATTACH AWS
At typewriter devices:
■ ATTACH causes an immediate display of data; there is no attachment. Use
the ATTN function to stop a listing at a typewriter device.
Binary Data:
■ If the data in the active AWS contains binary characters, those characters
are displayed as spaces when that AWS is attached.
Changing Search Column Boundaries:

■ By default, the search is restricted to the default or current column
boundaries. To change the column boundaries, use the modifiable STATUS
DISPLAY screen, the SET BOUNDS primary command or the BOUNDS
line command. The range remains in effect until explicitly changed.
Specifying the Search String:

■ Regardless of the form in which the data is displayed, the string can be
specified in either character format or its hexadecimal representation.
Thus, the string THE can be specified as either:
THE or X'E3C8C5'
A string is considered to be in hexadecimal representation when it is
specified in the form:
X'string'
where the string is bound by apostrophes and contains an even number of
characters.
■ Unless requested otherwise, a hex string is interpreted as a request to find
the character format of the string (for example, if the string is specified as
X'C1', it is treated as a request to find the string A).
■ To prevent interpretation, use the qualifier LITERAL (for example, X'C1'
LITERAL causes a search for the string X'C1').
Qualifying the Search String:

■ By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the search
string. For example, the string THE is found in the words THE, THERE,
and BROTHER. To limit the search, use the WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN,
EMBED, END, and SUFFIX context qualifiers, where:
– WORD qualifies the string as a word (for example, only the word THE
matches the string THE).
– PREFIX qualifies the string as beginning a word (for example, the
string THE begins the word THERE).
– BEGIN qualifies the string as beginning or being a word (for example,
the string THE matches THE and THERE).

1.17 ATTACH AWS
– EMBED qualifies the string as being contained within a word (for

example, the string THE is within the word OTHER and BROTHER).
– END qualifies the string as ending or being a word (for example, the
string TEST matches both TEST and CONTEST).
– SUFFIX qualifies the string as ending a word (for example, the string
TEST ends the word CONTEST).
■ When a context qualifier is specified and the data being searched contains
strings that:
Begin at the left margin: The string is assumed to be preceded
by a non-alphanumeric (for example, a
space).
End the record: The string is assumed to be followed by
a non-alphanumeric (for example, a
space, period, or comma).
Begin at the left search boundary:
The string must be preceded by a
non-alphanumeric.
End at the right search boundary:
The string must be followed by a
non-alphanumeric.
| Changing the Character Translation Mode:

| ■ By default, the search is restricted to the current setting of the character
| translation mode (see the SET MODE command on 1-534.) To change the
| character translation mode, specify the MIX operand on the command line.
| After the command executes, the previously established (or default)
| character translation mode is restored.

AWS At 3270-type terminals: At the first line. At typewriter
devices: At the last line.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

1.17 ATTACH AWS

CREATE AWS N/A
POINT AWS
SELECT AWS
1.17.4.1 Examples
■ To attach the currently active AWS to the terminal and begin the display
with the first line:
ATTACH
■ To attach the contents of the currently active AWS and begin the display
with the first line containing the string START:
ATTACH /START/
■ To attach the AWS named TEST:
ATTACH AWS TEST
■ To reattach the currently active AWS and begin the display with the first
line:
ATTACH AWS
■ To reattach the currently active AWS and begin the display with the first
line of the previously displayed data:
ATTACH AWS

1.18 ATTACH DSN
1.18 ATTACH DSN

To attach to the terminal and display a sequential data set, PDS Selection List
or member, AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List or module, or Catalog
Selection List.
1.18.1 Syntax
ATTACH DSN Command
──Attach Dsn──┬─────────────────────────────────────────┬─────
├────────────────────────────────────────┤
├─dsn─┬──────────┬────────────────────────┤
│ ├─(dsnmem)─┤ │
│ └─(v)──────┘ │
├─┬───────────────────────────────┬───────┤
│ │ ┌──
───────────┐ │ │
│ ├─Volume charstr── ┬─────────┬┴──┤ │
│ │ └─charstr─┘ │ │
│ │ ┌──
───────────┐ │ │
│ └─UNITcharstr── ┬─────────┬┴─────┘ │
│ └─charstr─┘ │
├─┬─────────────────────────────────┬─────┤
│ ├─┬─────────────────────────────┬─┤ │
│ │ │ ┌──
───────────┐ │ │ │
│ │ └─PSWd charstr── ┬─────────┬┴──┘ │ │
│ │ └─charstr─┘ │ │
│ ├─┬─────────────┬─────────────────┤ │
│ │ └─MCD charstr─┘ │ │
│ ├─┬─────────────┬─────────────────┤ │
│ │ └─ARC charstr─┘ │ │
│ ├─┬──────────────┬────────────────┤ │
│ │ └─PGMr charstr─┘ │ │
│ ├─┬─────────────────┬─────────────┤ │
│ │ └─MODtype charstr─┘ │ │
│ └─┬──────────────┬────────────────┘ │
│ └─LANG charstr─┘ │
├─HIST────────────────────────────────────┤
├─┬───────┬───────────────────────────────┤
│ ├─QUICK─┤ │
│ ├─SHORT─┤ │
│ └─LONG──┘ │
├─┬─────────────────┬─────────────────────┤
│ └─CONfirm charstr─┘ │
├─┬────────────────┬──────────────────────┤
│ └─CONMem charstr─┘ │
├─┬────────┬──────────────────────────────┤
│ └─LINE v─┘ │
└─┬─────────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─ORDERed─┬────┬─fldname─┬─────────┬──┘
└─BY─┘ └─charstr─┘

1.18 ATTACH DSN
Operand Description
With no operands, displays the Data Set Facility menu.
* Causes the previously attached data set object to be reattached.
dsn One- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set ob[e[t to
be attached. (With no further qualification, a data set, PDS
Selection List or AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List is
attached.) To produce a Catalog Selection List, one or more
'wildcard' characters may be included with the name.
If the name does not include wildcard characters, it may be
qualified with:
dsnmem
One- to eight-character name of the AllFusion
CA-Librarian module or PDS member to be attached.
To produce a qualified AllFusion CA-Librarian or PDS
Selection List, use one or more wildcard characters with
the name. With no wildcards, the appropriate
member/module is displayed.
v Relative generation number of the GDG (generation data
group) data set to be attached, specified as 0 (most
current) or a minus number (for example -1).
Volume One- to six-character serial number of the volume on which the
data set resides. One to six serial numbers may be specified.
| (VOLUME cannot be used with AllFusion CA-Librarian data sets
| defined as VSAM.)
If a generic data set name is used with DSN, only one volume
may be specified.
■ VOLUME is required if the data set is not cataloged.
■ VOLUME may be entered as VOLUME, VOL, or V.
Note: To attach a VTOC or Volume Selection List, use the
ATTACH VOLUME command.
type(s) on which the data set resides. It may be either an
IBM-defined generic name (for example, 3380) or a site-defined
esoteric name (for example, SYSDA). Required if the data set is
| not cataloged and resides on a mass storage device. (UNIT
| cannot be used with AllFusion CA-Librarian data sets defined as
| VSAM.)
PSWd Password(s), established by the site, for the designated data set or
AllFusion CA-Librarian master file. If omitted and a password is
required, access is denied.
If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or
AllFusion CA-Librarian master file module password.

1.18 ATTACH DSN
If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data set
password and the second is treated as the AllFusion CA-Librarian
password.
MCD Management code of the AllFusion CA-Librarian master file.
Required when attaching a PROD2 module. Site-dependent
when attaching a master file containing PROD2 modules.
ARC Archive level of the AllFusion CA-Librarian master file module to
be attached. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) If
omitted, the most current level of the module is attached.
The level may be specified in one of the following forms:
Lx Absolute level number (between 0 and 65535)
as reported on the AllFusion CA-Librarian
Update Report.
-y Relative level number between 0 and 255. The
current level is -0; -1 is one level older than
the current.
yymmddhhmmss Date and time when the desired archive level
was current. An even number of digits
(starting from the right) may be omitted.
Omitted digits are assumed to have the
highest values that are consistent with the
values of those digits that are specified.
PGMr One- to 15-character programmer name that is to be used when
selecting modules for inclusion in a AllFusion CA-Librarian
Selection List. Only those modules marked as owned by the
specified programmer are included in the selection list. If omitted,
all appropriate modules (as qualified by other operands of this
command) are included.
MODtype Designate the type of modules to be included in a AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List by specifying one of the following:
PROD0 Includes only those modules with PROD0 security
status.
status.
status.
TEST Includes only those modules with TEST security
status.
If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by other
operands of this command) are included.
LANG Language code designating the programming language type of
the modules that are to be included in a AllFusion CA-Librarian
Selection List. If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by
other operands of this command) are included.

1.18 ATTACH DSN
HIST Causes the display to contain only history records for the
specified AllFusion CA-Librarian master file module. The first
eight positions of the record contain the record date.
QUICK, SHORT, or LONG
Designates the extent of information that is to be included in the
initial Selection List display.
Note: HIST, QUICK, SHORT, and LONG are mutually exclusive.
CONfirm Designate whether data set delete operations are to be confirmed
prior to their execution by specifying one of the following:
YES Confirm delete operation.
NO Do not confirm operation.
Note that CONFIRM may be entered as CONFIRM, CONF, or CON.
CONMem Designate whether member/module delete operations are to be
confirmed prior to their execution by specifying one of the
following:
YES Confirm delete operation.
NO Do not confirm operation.
LINE Designate the location at which the display is to begin. If omitted,
the display begins with the first line. If specified, it must be in the
following form:
v Number of the line at which the display is to begin.
* Reattach at the current top line.
*+v Reattach at the current top line plus the specified number of
lines.
*-v Reattach at the current top line minus the specified number
of lines.
Note that LINE is ignored when reattaching the Data Set Facility
menu or a function panel.
| ORDERed Is the operand to invoke the Advantage CA-Roscoe internal sort.
| It can be specified as ORD or ORDER.
| BY Is an optional extra word, permitted for continuity.
| fldname Is the selection list field that is to be sorted. It can be
| one of the following:
| VOLume UNIT DEVTYPE

| CONTG-CYL CYL-CONTG AVAIL-CYL
| CYL-AVAIL CONTG-TRK TRK-CONTG
| AVAIL-TRK TRK-AVAIL AV-XT
| TOTAL-TRK TRK-TOTAL USED-TRK

1.18 ATTACH DSN
| TRK-USED %USED MAXBLK

| TRKSIZE TRK/CYL TRK-CYL
| #DSNS USED-XT VTOC-TRK
| TOTAL-DSCB DSCB-TOTAL DSCB-FREE
| FREE-DSCB D%USED INDEX
| SMS DEVSTAT VOLSTAT
| Data-Set-Name DATASET TYPE
| DEVice ORGanization RecFM
| BLKSiZe LRECL CREDT
| REFDT EXPDT TRKS
| INUSE EXTents MGMTCLAS
| MCLASS STORCLAS SCLASS
| DATACLAS DCLASS MEMber
| VV.MM CREATEd CRTDT
| Last-Mod-Date Last-Mod-Time SIZE
| INIT MODify TTR
| USER PaSsWorD Last-MoDified
| DESCription ProGraMmeR LANGuage
| SSTAT BLocKS RECordS
| ATTRibutes loadEP ALIAS-of
| SSI-data REFDT REFERENCE
| Note: The above field names may be abbreviated as

| shown (by uppercase) or they may be specified
| in their entirety. See the ORDER DSN
| command for more information on which fields
| are valid for each selection list type.
| charstr Characteristics that qualify the sort. Use the following
| keywords:
| ASCending Reorders the specified field in
| ascending order.
| DEScending Reorders the specified field in
| decending order.
| COLs - s - e Reorders specific part(s) of fields by
| starting and ending column
| boundaries. This enables sorting by
| prefixes, suffixes, or parts of dates
| (days, months, years). When
| specifying COLs, it must follow the
| field-name that contains the columns
| to be reordered. (Specify COLS, COL,
| or C.)

1.18 ATTACH DSN
| Column counts start at the beginning

| of a field and end at the end of that
| same field. They do not follow the
| number line count.
| AND, &, @ Optional extra-word used for
| continuity when when reordering
| multiple fields.
| For example, to ATTACH a Selection List of cataloged data sets
| with a high level qualifier of ROSCOE, sorted by the first three
| characters of the VOLume name in descending order, and by the
| DEVice, specify:
| A DSN ROSCOE.+ ORDERED BY VOL COL 1 3 DES AND DEV
1.18.2 Notes
Data Set Attachment Criteria:
To be attached, the data set must:

1. Reside on an online DASD volume or a mass storage volume capable of
being staged. Tape volumes and offline DASD volumes may be accessed
only if the requested data set has been migrated by IBM's Hierarchical
Storage Manager (HSM) and HSM is currently active.
2. Not be under exclusive control by another task executing in the computer
nor allocated with DISP=OLD in the Advantage CA-Roscoe JCL.
3. Not use the track overflow feature.
4. Not have a variable spanned record format.
5. Not have its access prevented by site specifications made by the system
programmer.
Detaching/Reattaching the Data Set Facility:

■ The Data Set Facility remains attached until explicitly detached.
■ Executing a command that causes output to the Execution Area (for
example, ATTACH LIB) or pressing the CLEAR key places the Data Set
Facility in a 'pending' state. It can be reattached at any time.
■ If a data set is currently attached and you attach another one, the first is
implicitly detached (you need not enter the DETACH DSN command).

1.18 ATTACH DSN
Using 'Wildcard' Characters:

■ Wildcard characters may be used to create the criteria for an entry's
inclusion in a Selection List.
■ The data set name used to create a Catalog Selection List may include the
plus sign (+) and/or asterisk (*) wildcard characters. (These same
characters may be used with the data set name specified with a ATTACH
VOLUME command to create a qualified VTOC Selection List.)
CODE MEANING AND EXAMPLES

+ Any number of trailing characters within a level
plus any number of subsequent level.
Example: Matches:
TEST1.AB+ TEST1.ABC
TEST1.ABR.NEXT.LOAD
Any One- to eight-character index level, or
TEST2..LOAD TEST2.BASE.LOAD
TEST2.PROD.LOAD
Within a level:
Any number of leading characters, or
TEST3.BC TEST3.ABC
TEST3.XYZBC
Any number of trailing characters, or
TEST4.AB TEST4.ABA
TEST4.ABXYZ
Any number of embedded characters.
TEST5.AC.SOURCE TEST5.AAC.SOURCE
TEST5.ABEC.SOURCE
Any number of index levels, including none.
TEST6. TEST6.AAA
TEST6.BBBB.NEXT.LOAD
Note: The asterisk and plus sign may be used in the

same search string.
Example: Matches:
TEST7.PROD.+ TEST7.APROD1.BASE
TEST7.ABPROD1.PREV.SOURCE

1.18 ATTACH DSN
Using 'Wildcard' Characters: (cont'd)

■ The member or module name used to create a PDS or AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List may use the question mark (?), asterisk (*), and
plus sign (+) 'wildcard' characters. (These characters may also be used with
the serial number specified with the ATTACH VOLUME command to
create a qualified Volume Selection List.)

? Any single character.
Example: Matches:
TEST.SAMPLE1(RO?) ROE
ROS
None, one or more characters.
TEST.SAMPLE2(JCL) AJCL
JCL
JCLEND
XJCLX
+ None, one or more trailing characters.
TEST.SAMPLE3(RO+) RO
ROE
ROSCOE
Note: The question mark, asterisk and plus sign may

be used in the same search string.
Example: TEST.SAMPLE4(S?AJC+)
Matches: STARTJCL
Consecutive asterisks () or an asterisk and plus

sign (+) are invalid.
Entries in a VTOC Selection List:

■ The entries in a Data Set Facility Selection List are usually presented in
alphabetical order. However, if the number of data sets to be included in a
VTOC Selection List exceeds approximately 1500 entries, this List may be
presented in a non-sorted format.

1.18 ATTACH DSN
Initial Use of the Data Set Facility:

■ The first time you use the Data Set Facility (via the DSN, ATTACH DSN
or ATTACH VOLUME command):
1. Data Set Delete Confirmation:
CONFIRM YES is assumed. Thereafter, the setting in effect when you
sign off is remembered and reinstated whenever you sign back on.
2. Member Delete Confirmation:
CONFIRM NO is assumed. Thereafter, the setting in effect when you
sign off is remembered and reinstated whenever you sign back on.
3. Selection List:
QUICK is assumed if neither HIST, QUICK, SHORT, nor LONG are
specified. Thereafter, the setting in effect when you sign off is
remembered and reinstated whenever you sign back on.
QUICK, SHORT and LONG control the extent of information included
in the initial Selection List display. If QUICK or SHORT specified,
information is acquired for entries based on the operations affecting
those entries.

AWS N/A
DSN At 3270-type terminals: At the first line. At typewriter
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

DSN A (display menu) N/A
IMPORT (to display data)

1.18 ATTACH DSN
1.18.4.1 Examples
■ To attach the data set or AllFusion CA-Librarian master file named

TEST.SAMPLE:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SAMPLE
■ To attach the member/module FIRST on TEST.SAMPLE:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SAMPLE(FIRST)
■ To attach the Catalog Selection List showing all of the data sets with a first
index level of TEST and a second index level that begins with A and end
with C:
ATTACH DSN TEST.AC.+
■ To attach all members/modules from the data set TEST.SAMPLE that
contains the characters JCL:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SAMPLE(JCL+)

1.19 ATTACH JOB
1.19 ATTACH JOB

To attach to the terminal and display job output.
1.19.1 Syntax
ATTACH JOB Command
──Attach Job──┬───────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──┬──────┬──
├─v──────────────┤ │ ┌─1──┐ │ ├─CC───┤
└─jobname─┬───┬──┘ ├─File─┴─ v─┴──┤ └─NOCC─┘
└─v─┘ │ ┌─1──┐ │
├─Line─┴─ v─┴──┤
│ ┌─1──┐ │
└─Page─┴─ v─┴──┘
Operand Description
* Causes the previously attached job to be reattached.
v Number of the job to be attached.
jobname Name of the job to be attached.
If multiple jobs have been submitted with the same job name, the
job number may be included to designate the specific job to be
attached. If omitted, the next available job is selected.
FILE Number of the file at which the display begins. If omitted, the
default is 1.
PAGE Number of the page within a file at which the display begins. If
LINE Number of the line within a file at which the display begins. If
CC Causes display of carriage control characters.
NOCC Prohibits display of carriage control characters. This is the default if
neither CC nor NOCC are specified.
1.19.2 Notes
Determine Execution Status:
■ Use DISPLAY to determine the status of a job. DISPLAY can be used to
provide information about jobs in execution, initiators, job queues and
devices.
At 3270-Type Terminals:
■ The user can scroll through the contents of an attached job but cannot
modify it.
■ The job remains attached until explicitly detached.

1.19 ATTACH JOB

example, ATTACH LIB) or pressing the CLEAR key places the job in a
'pending' state. The job can be reattached at any time.
At Typewriter Devices:
■ ATTACH causes an immediate display of data; there is no attachment.
■ The listing stops when: 1) the ATTN function is used, or 2) the number of
lines indicated by the BREAK command have been listed. (After the
specified number of lines have been listed, printing stops. To restart listing
at the same location, enter ATTACH JOB *.)
■ Use the SET DISPLAY command to specify the length of the output lines.
(The default is 80.) The maximum length is 150 characters. If a number is
specified that is longer than the line that can be printed at the device, the
line is wrapped.
Multiple Users Attaching Jobs:

■ Multiple users can attach the same job concurrently. The first person to
attach a specific job has control of the file attributes (using the STATUS
screen or the ALTER command) and the job disposition (using the
DETACH command).
JES2 Sites:
■ A job's files may be examined at any time. (If the attributes of the output
files are to be modified, the job must be submitted with a special SYSOUT
class established by site management.) If the job is:
AWAITING EXECUTION
The JCL and all SYSIN data can be viewed. (This is
the only time that this information will be
displayed.)
EXECUTING The JCL and much of the job log and SMB that is
currently written can be viewed, plus all available
files. (If a file is open and empty, only the end of
file message is presented when that file is
displayed.)
AWAITING PRINT All SYSOUT files that have not yet been printed or
purged can be viewed.
■ Using Job Numbers: A job may be attached by its job name and/or
number. If there are multiple jobs with the same name and no job number
is specified, a Job List is produced.
JES3 Sites:
■ If an output file exists, it may be examined at any time. Modifications may
only be made to the attributes of files routed to a SYSOUT class held for:
– An external writer (when ETSO is not active), or

1.19 ATTACH JOB
– TSO (when ETSO is active).

■ Site management will tell you what special SYSOUT class(es) they have
established.
■ Using Job Numbers: A job may be attached by its job number. If there are
multiple jobs with the same name and no job number is specified, a Job
List is produced.

■ Wildcard characters may be used to create the criteria for an entry's
inclusion in a Selection List.
■ The job name used to create a Job LIST may use the question mark (?),
asterisk (*), and plus sign (+) 'wildcard' characters.

Example: Matches:
ROS? ROSE
ROST
ROSJCL ROSAJCL
ROSJCL
ROSJCLEND
ROSXJCLX
DROS+ DROS
DROSCOE
DROSTSO
Note: The question mark, asterisk and plus sign may

be used in the same search string.
Example: S?AJC+
Matches: STARTJCL


1.19 ATTACH JOB

AWS N/A
DSN N/A
JOB At 3270-type terminals: At the first line. At typewriter
LIB N/A
1.19.3.1 Examples
■ To display the job named COMPILE, beginning with the first line of the
first file:
ATTACH JOB COMPILE
Note that if there were more than one job named COMPILE, the preceding
command would display a Job List of all of them.
■ To display the job COMPILE beginning with the fourth line of the second
file:
ATTACH JOB COMPILE 542 FILE 2 LINE 4
■ To reattach the job COMPILE and begin the display with the last file, page,
and line shown:
ATTACH JOB
The above command can also be used to reattach a Job List.

1.20 ATTACH LIB
1.20 ATTACH LIB

To attach to the terminal and display a Library Selection List or all or part of a
library member.
1.20.1 Syntax
ATTACH LIB Command
──Attach Lib──┬─ +────────────┬──┬─────┬───────────────────────
├─KEY string────┤ └─mem─┘
└─pfx.─┬─────┬──┘
└─mem─┘
──┬─────────────────────────────────────┬──┬────────────┬───────
└─ORDERed─┬────┬─fldname─┬─────────┬──┘ ├─Shared─────┤
└─BY─┘ └─charstr─┘ ├─Execonly───┤
├─Restricted─┤
└─Nodesc─────┘
──┬────────┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─LINE v─┘
──Attach──┬─────┬──┬──────┬──mem─────────────────────────────────────
└─Lib─┘ └─pfx.─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──────
├─/string/─┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬──┤
│ └─p─┬───┬──┘ └─LITeral─┘ └─context─┘ └─Mix─┘ │
│ └─q─┘ │
└─LINE v────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
──Attach Lib──┬───┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────
└──┘
Operand Description
+ Provides a Selection List containing all of the members owned
by the user signed on.
The member list to be attached can be displayed in a specific
order. Use the ORDER operands to qualify the display:
ORDERed BY fldname [ charstr ]
where:
ORDERed is the operand to invoke the Advantage
CA-Roscoe internal sort. It can be specified as
ORD or ORDER.
BY is an optional extra-word, permitted for
continuity.

1.20 ATTACH LIB
fldname is the Selection List field that is to be sorted. It

can be one of the following:
MEMber
DESCription
LINes
ATR
SEQno
CREated
UPDated
ACCess
CRT
Note: The above field names may be
abbreviated as shown (by uppercase) or
they may be specified in their entirety.
See the ORDER LIB command for
further information.
charstr characteristics that qualify the sort. Use the
following keywords:
■ ASCending or DEScending: Reorders the
specified field in ascending or descending
order, respectively.
■ Cols [ s ] e: Reorders specific part(s) of
fields by starting and ending column
boundaries. This enables sorting by prefixes,
suffixes, or parts of dates (days, months,
years).
When specifying COLs, it must follow the
field-name that contains the columns to be
reordered. (Specify COLS, COL, or C.)
Column counts start at the beginning of a
field and end at the end of that same field.
They do not follow the number line count.
■ AND, &, @: Optional extra-word used for
continuity when reordering multiple fields.
For example, to ATTACH a Library Selection
List of your members, sorted by MEMBER
name suffixes in descending order, and by their
ATtRibutes, specify:
A LIB + ORDERED BY MEM COL 7 9 DES AND ATR
KEY Sign-on key of the user whose library members are to comprise
a Selection List.
pfx. Prefix of the user whose library members are to comprise a
Selection List. May be qualified with:

1.20 ATTACH LIB
mem Member name contains wildcard characters to produce a

qualified Selection List.
SHARED Causes members with a shared access attribute to be included in
the Selection List. (Abbreviate as S or SHR.)
EXECONLY Causes members with an execute-only access attribute to be
included in the Selection List. (Abbreviate as E or EXE.)
RESTRICTED
Causes members with a restricted access attribute to be included
in the Selection List. (Abbreviate as R or RES.)
NODESC Causes members that have no description are to be included in
the Selection List.
LINE Number of the line at which the display or search is to begin.
mem Name of the library member to be attached. If the member
belongs to another user, that individual's prefix must be
included.
bound by delimiters. The attachment and display begins with
the first line containing the string and continues from that point
to the end of the range.
p q Number of first and last line to be used for string search or
display. If only one number is specified, only that line is
searched/displayed.
Note: If the command contains both line numbers (p/q) and
the LINE v operand, the line numbers are ignored.
LITERAL Prevents the search string from being interpreted (for example,
X'C1' is to be treated as a character string; not as the
hexadecimal representation of the letter A). If omitted, the string
is subject to interpretation.
context Qualifies the search string within the data. If omitted, the search
is for the string exactly as entered. If specified, it must be one of
the following:
WORD Treat the string as a complete entity (it is preceded
and followed by a non-alphanumeric character.
(Abbreviate as WOR.)
BEGIN Treat the string as either beginning or being a
complete entity (it is preceded by a non-alphanumeric
character and followed by either an alphanumeric or
non- alphanumeric character.) (Abbreviate as BEG.)
PREFIX Treat the string as beginning an entity (it is preceded
by a non-alphanumeric character and followed by an

1.20 ATTACH LIB

(May also be specified as IMBED; abbreviate as EMB
or IMB.)
SUFFIX Treat the string ending as an entity (it is preceded by
an alphanumeric character and followed by a
END Treat the string either ending or being as a complete
non- alphanumeric character and is followed by a
non-alphanumeric character.)
| Mix Indicates that the search is a case insensitive search. The search
| is for any combination of string characters, in upper and lower
| case, that match the search string. (Abbreviate as M.)
LIB Causes the Library Facility menu to be attached.
LIB * Causes the previously attached member or Selection List to be
reattached and the display to begin with the previously
displayed location.
1.20.2 Notes
At 3270-type terminals:
■ The contents of the attached member can be scrolled but it cannot be
modified. (To modify the contents of the member, a copy must be placed
in an AWS.)
■ The library member remains attached until explicitly detached.
example, ATTACH DSN) or pressing the CLEAR key places the member in
a 'pending' state. The member can be reattached at any time.
■ ATTACH causes an immediate display of data; there is no attachment. Use
the ATTN function to stop a listing at a typewriter device.

Using 'Wildcard' Characters to Create a Selection List:

■ A library member name may include the question mark (?), asterisk (*) and
plus sign (+) 'wildcard' selection characters. These characters are used to

1.20 ATTACH LIB
create a selection list that contains only those member that match the
selection criteria.

Example: RO? Matches: ROE

ROS
ROW
Example: JCL Matches: AJCL

JCL
JCLEND
XJCLX
Example: RO+ Matches: RO

ROE
ROSCOE
Note: The question mark, asterisk, and plus sign may be
used in the same search string.
Example: S?AJC+ Matches: STARTJCL


line command. The range remains in effect until explicitly changed.

THE or X'E3C8C5'
A string is considered to be in hexadecimal representation when it is
X'string'
characters.

1.20 ATTACH LIB


strings that:
space).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.

1.20 ATTACH LIB

AWS N/A
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB At 3270-type terminals: At the first line. At typewriter

LIB A (display menu) N/A
LIST (non-modifiable display)
1.20.4.1 Examples
■ To attach a Selection List showing all of your members:

ATTACH LIB +
■ To attach a Selection List showing all of the members owned by the
individual assigned the prefix ABC whose names begin with RO:
ATTACH LIB ABC.RO+
■ To attach a Selection List showing those members that have a SHARED
access attribute or have no description:
ATTACH LIB + SHARED NODESC
■ To attach the library member COBPROG and begin the display with the
first line containing PROCEDURE:
ATTACH COBPROG /PROCEDURE/
Alternatively, you could have qualified the string to begin the display with
the first occurrence of the string PROC, as in:
ATTACH COBPROC /PROC/ PREFIX
■ To reattach the previously attached library member/ Selection List and
begin the display with the previously displayed line:
ATTACH LIB

1.21 ATTACH VOLUME
1.21 ATTACH VOLUME

To attach to the terminal and display a VTOC or Volume Selection List.
1.21.1 Syntax
ATTACH VOLUME Command
──Attach──┬─────────┬──Volume──┬─────────┬──┬──────────────┬───
└─DSN dsn─┘ ├────────┤ └─UNIT charstr─┘
├─+───────┤
└─charstr─┘
──┬───────────────────┬──┬───────┬─────────────────────────────
└─TYPE─┬─PRIVATE─┬──┘ ├─QUICK─┤
├─PUBLIC──┤ ├─SHORT─┤
└─STORAGE─┘ └─LONG──┘
Operand Description
With no operands, displays the Data Set Facility menu.
Dsn One- to 44-character name with 'wildcard' characters to be used
to create a qualified VTOC Selection List. (See Notes for
additional information.)
* Causes the previously attached data set object to be reattached.
+ Causes a Volume Selection List to be displayed. The List contains
only those units that have a volume mounted.
charstr Volume serial number. 'Wildcard' characters may be used to
create a Volume Selection List.
Note: If neither *, + or a serial number is specified, UNIT
and/or TYPE are required.
UNIT One- to eight-character unit name. It may be either an
esoteric name (for example, SYSDA).
TYPE Designate the type of volumes to be included by specifying one
or more of the following:
PRIVATE Include private volumes. (Abbreviate as PRV.)
PUBLIC Include public volumes.
STORAGE Include storage volumes. (Abbreviate as STG).
If omitted, all volumes types are included in the Selection List.
QUICK, SHORT, or LONG
Designates the extent of information that is to be included in the
initial Selection List display.
Note: QUICK, SHORT and LONG are mutually exclusive.

1.21 ATTACH VOLUME
1.21.2 Notes
Detaching/Reattaching the Data Set Facility:
■ The Data Set Facility remains attached until explicitly detached.
example, ATTACH LIB) or pressing the CLEAR key places the Data Set
Facility in a 'pending' state. It can be reattached at any time.
■ If a data set or Selection List is currently attached and the user attaches
another one, the first is implicitly detached (the user need not enter the
DETACH DSN command).
QUICK/SHORT/LONG Setting:
■ The first time you use the Data Set Facility (through DSN, ATTACH DSN,
or ATTACH VOL), QUICK is assumed. Thereafter, the setting in effect
when you sign off is remembered and reinstated whenever you sign back
on.
■ QUICK, SHORT, and LONG control the extent of information included in
the initial Selection List display. If QUICK or SHORT are specified,
information is acquired for entries based on the operations affecting those
entries.

■ The asterisk (*), plus sign (+) and question mark (?) wildcard characters
may be specified with the volume serial number to create the selection
criteria for a Volume Selection List.
Note: The asterisk (*) and plus sign (+) may be used with the data set
name to create a qualified VTOC Selection List. (See the description
of ATTACH DSN for information about using these characters.)

1.21 ATTACH VOLUME

Example: ??ROS1 Matches: ADROS1

MUROS1
Example: MUS Matches: MUAS1

MURDS1
MUROS1
Example: MUR+ Matches: MUR1

MUROS1
Note: The question mark, asterisk and plus sign
may be used in the same search string.
Example: ?UOS+ Matches: MUROS1
Consecutive asterisk () or an asterisk and a plus

(+) are invalid.

AWS N/A
DSN At 3270-type terminals: At the first line. At typewriter
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

DSN A (display menu) N/A

1.21 ATTACH VOLUME
1.21.4.1 Examples
■ To attach A VTOC Selection List showing the contents of the volume

STOR02:
ATTACH VOL STOR2
■ To attach a VTOC Selection List showing the data sets beginning with
TEST.ABC. on the volume STOR02:
ATTACH DSN TEST.ABC.+ VOL STOR2
■ To attach a Volume Selection List showing all volumes with volser names
beginning with STOR:
ATTACH VOL STOR+
■ To attach a Volume Selection List showing all devices with a mounted
volume:
ATTACH VOL +
■ To attach a Volume Selection List showing all 3380 devices:
ATTACH VOL UNIT 338
■ To attach a Volume Selection List showing all PUBLIC volumes:
ATTACH VOL TYPE PUBLIC
■ To attach a Volume Selection List showing all DASD units:
ATTACH VOL SYSALLDA
■ To attach a Volume Selection List showing all 3380 devices with a
mounted PUBLIC or PRIVATE volume:
ATTACH VOL + UNIT 338 TYPE PUBLIC PRIVATE

1.22 BOTTOM
1.22 BOTTOM
Positions the pointer to the last line of the active AWS.
1.22.1 Syntax
BOTTOM Command
──BOTTOM──────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.22.2 Notes
■ BOTTOM does not cause the display to be changed it only positions the
pointer to the last line of the active AWS.
■ While BOTTOM can be entered from the terminal, it is intended for use in
RPF programs.

AWS At the end of the active AWS.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

FIND N/A
POINT AWS
TOP

1.23 BOUNDS Line Command

Sets column boundaries within the active AWS to limit the scope of edit, locate
and shift operations.
1.23.1 Syntax
BOUNDSB Command
──BOUNDS──┬───┬──┬───┬────────────────────────────────────────
└─<─┘ └─>─┘
Operand Description
With no operands, resets column boundaries to columns 1 and 80.
< Left boundary symbol.
> Right boundary symbol.
1.23.2 Notes
Default Settings:
■ At sign-on, the default column boundaries are:
AWS = 1 through 80
DSN = 1 through 32767
JOB = 1 through 255
LIB = 1 through 80
■ When SET DISPLAY NUMX is in effect, the current column boundary
settings are displayed on the Scale Line.
Using BOUNDS:
■ The < and > boundary symbols may be placed anywhere on the line.
When positioning to a location that contains data, use either the space bar
or the cursor positioning keys. When positioning to a location that does
not contain data, use the space bar.
■ To set the column boundaries to one column, enter BOUNDS twice to
specify that both the left (<) and right (>) column boundaries are to be set
to the chosen column. The Scale Line will contain a vertical bar (|),
indicating the column boundary.
■ If only one column boundary character (< or >) is specified, only that
boundary is changed.

Abbreviations:
■ BOUNDS may be abbreviated as BOUND, BNDS AND BND.

SET BOUNDS display
STATUS DISPLAY
1.23.3.1 Examples
■ To set the column boundaries to columns 8 and 20:

> AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS 1 72
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ================================ T O P ==============
BOUNDS <DENTIFICATI>N DIVISION.
2 PROGRAM-ID. SHIPRATE.
The Scale Line in the next example reflects the boundaries in affect after
this command is executed.
■ To reset the right column boundary to 35:

> ....+..<.1....+....>....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ================================ T O P ==============
BOUNDS IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. >
■ To set the boundaries to the same column:

> ....+.<..1....+....2....+....3....>....4....+....5..
...... ================================ T O P ==============
BOUNDS <DENTIFICATION DIVISION.
BOUNDS >ROGRAM-ID. SHIPRATE.

1.24 BREAK
1.24 BREAK
(Typewriter devices only.) Controls the number of lines written before
pausing.
1.24.1 Syntax
BREAK Command
──BREAK──┬───┬────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─v─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, deactivates the software BREAK function.
v Number of lines to be written before pausing.
1.24.2 Notes
Default:
■ At sign-on, the site-defined number of lines is in effect.
Using BREAK:
■ BREAK is meant to be used at terminals that do not have a hardware
BREAK key.
■ If BREAK is deactivated, the hardware BREAK key must be used.
Controls:
■ To resume listing after a pause, use the CONTROL-S or CONTROL-Q
keys.
■ To terminate the listing, press the RETURN key. An 'EOT' (CONTROL-D)
disables the terminal.

1.25 CALL
1.25 CALL
Initiates execution of an application known to ETSO.
1.25.1 Syntax
CALL Command
──CALL──charstr─┬────────┬────────────────────────────────────
└─string─┘
Operand Description
charstr One- to eight-character name used to invoke the application.
string Parameter list to be passed to the application. The list must be
bound by delimiters and can consist of any parameters valid within
the application.
With programs, the list cannot exceed 100 characters in length. With
command processors, it cannot exceed:# 1) the length of the
terminal line, or 2) 255 characters, if issued from within an RPF
program.
1.25.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ The CALL command is valid only when the Extended Time-Sharing
Option (ETSO) is active.
Executing Applications:
■ Your site management will tell you what applications are available and
how they should be invoked. For example, to invoke IEBCOPY, you might
enter:
CALL IEBCOPY
While to invoke GDDM ICU, you might enter:
CALL ADMCHART
Terminate Prompting/Output:
■ If the application prompts for a variable amount of input, you can indicate
end-of-input by entering '..', the default escape indicator.
■ The same indicator can also be used to terminate an application that is
writing output to the terminal.
■ You can change the escape indicator using the SET ESCAPE command.

1.25 CALL

ALLOCATE N/A
CANCEL
DIVERT
FREE
QUERY ALLOCATE
QUERY CALL
QUERY DIVERT
RESUME
SET ESCAPE
1.25.3.1 Example
■ To allocate the terminal as an input and an output file and to invoke the
application DOIT and pass it parameters:
ALLOCATE SYSIN
ALLOCATE SYSPRINT
CALL DOIT '1 2'

1.26 CANCEL ETSO
1.26 CANCEL ETSO

Terminates execution of an ETSO application that is currently suspended.
1.26.1 Syntax
CANCEL ETSO Command
──CANCEL ETSO─────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.26.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ The CANCEL command is valid only when the Extended Time-Sharing
■ Only applications using the ETSO Application Programming Interface have
the option of suspending execution.
Obtaining Information:
■ Use the QUERY CALL command to display information about ETSO
applications that you are currently executing.

ALLOCATE N/A
CANCEL
DIVERT
FREE
QUERY ALLOCATE
QUERY CALL
QUERY DIVERT
RESUME
SET ESCAPE

1.27 CATALOG
1.27 CATALOG
Catalogs an OS data set.
1.27.1 Syntax
CATALOG Command
──CATALOG──┬─Dsn dsname─┬──────┬───────┬───────────────────────
│ └─(+v)─┘ │
│ ┌──
───────┐ │
charstr┴──┘
└─Volume charstr──
──┬─────────────────────────────┬──────────────────────────────
│ ┌──
───────────┐ │
┬─────────┬┴──┘
└─UNIT charstr──
└─charstr─┘
Operand Description
Dsn One- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set to be
cataloged. The name may be further qualified with:
+v Relative generation number of GDG (generation data group)
date set to be cataloged, specified as a value between 1 and
255.
Volume One- to six-character serial number of volume on which the data set
resides. One to six volumes may be specified.
UNIT One- to eight-character name of the unit associated with the
volume(s) specified by VOLUME. The name may be either an
esoteric name (for example, SYSDA).
One to six unit names may be specified (one for each corresponding
volume). If multiple volumes are specified with VOLUME but only
one unit name is specified, that unit name is assumed to apply to
all volumes specified.
1.27.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ CATALOG does not support VSAM data sets. Use IBM's Access Method
Services DEFINE command to catalog a VSAM data set.
■ CATALOG may not be used to create a catalog entry for an SMS-managed
data set.

1.27 CATALOG
UNIT Requirements:
■ UNIT is not required if the volumes specified with VOLUME are mounted
and online. (If specified, it is ignored. The unit information is obtained
dynamically from the unit control blocks (UCBs) associated with each
volume.)
■ UNIT is required if the data set resides on a tape or non-mounted volume
(for example, mass storage).
Abbreviation:
■ CATALOG can also be abbreviated as CATLG.
Esoteric Unit Names:

■ Esoteric unit names may be used if they refer to a single device type. For
example, SYSDA may be used if it only refers to 3380 DASD devices; it
may not be used if it refers to 3350 and 3380 devices.
CATALOG Processing:
■ If the first (or only) volume specified with CATALOG is available for
inspection, Advantage CA-Roscoe verifies that the designated data set
exists. If the data set does not exist, the request is rejected. No check is
made for any other volumes specified.
■ If the first (or only) volume specified is not available for inspection, no
check is made for the data set's existence; the request is honored. (This
permits catalog entries to be created for tape and DASD data sets residing
on volumes that are only accessible from another system.)

DSN CT (data set object) N/A
UNCATLG

1.28 CDSN
1.28 CDSN
|
| Invokes an RPF that discontinues a data set editing session without saving or
| updating the data set.
|1.28.1 Syntax
|
| CDSN Command
| ──CDSN────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
| There are no operands.
|1.28.2 Notes
|1.28.3 Related Commands
| Primary Command(s) Line Command(s)

| ATTACH DSN N/A
| DSN A (display menu)
| EDSN
| QDSN
| SDSN

1.29 CHAIN
1.29 CHAIN
Concatenates specified library members in the active AWS.
1.29.1 Syntax
CHAIN Command
┌──
───────┐
┬─────┬┴───────────────────────────────────────
──CHAIN──mem───
└─mem─┘
Operand Description
mem Name of the library member to be concatenated. A maximum of 21
member names can be specified, provided that the command fits on
a single line.
1.29.2 Notes
■ The contents of the active AWS are deleted before the concatenation
occurs.
■ The new contents of the active AWS is numbered beginning with 1 and
incremented by 1.
■ The library members are brought into the active AWS in the order
specified and assume the attributes of the last library member named.
If one of the members is not found, execution terminates. Any members
already fetched into the AWS remain there.
■ If only one member name is specified, the result is the same as a FETCH
command.

AWS At the first line of the active AWS.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

1.29 CHAIN

=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX,
XCOPY, XCOPYS, XCOPYX
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
COPY N/A
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE
1.29.4.1 Example
■ To copy three library members into the active AWS in the order specified,
where one of the members belongs to the individual assigned the prefix
ABC:
CHAIN SAMPLE1 ABC.OTHER SAMPLE2

1.30 COMPRESS
1.30 COMPRESS
Compresses a partitioned data set to regain unused space.
1.30.1 Syntax
COMPRESS Command
──COMPRESS Dsn──dsname──┬───────────────┬──┬─────────────┬─────
└─Volume chrstr─┘ └─UNIT chrstr─┘
──┬─────────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────
└─PSWd chrstr─┘
Operand Description
dsname One- to 44-character fully qualified name of the partitioned data set
to be compressed.
Volume One- to six-character serial number of the volume containing the
data set to be compressed. VOLUME is required if the data set is
not cataloged.
UNIT One- to eight-character unit designation associated with the device
on which the data set resides. UNIT is required only if the data set
resides on a mass storage device.
PSWd Password (established by the site) for the designated data set. If
omitted and a password is required, the operation is rejected.
1.30.2 Notes
COMPRESS Requirements:
■ When a COMPRESS operation is requested, the utility program defined by
the site is invoked to process the request. (As distributed, the utility
program is IEBCOPY.)
■ To be compressed, the data set must:
1. Reside on a single DASD volume that is currently mounted and online,
or a mass-storage volume that is capable of being staged.
2. Be a partitioned data set.
3. Not have the unmoveable attribute ( DSORG=POU) or keyed records.
4. Meet any requirements imposed by the site-defined utility program
that have not been mentioned here.

1.30 COMPRESS
COMPRESS Messages:
■ Diagnostic messages produced by the utility are written to the user's
library member ZZZZZCMP. (If the member does not exist, it is created; if
it is does exist, its contents are overlaid.)
■ Type of information directed to this member can be controlled by the SET
DSNCMLST command.
Site-Imposed Limits:
■ The number of COMPRESS requests that may be active concurrently is
limited by site management. If the limit has been reached, the user is
placed in a wait for two seconds, then the request is retried. This process
continues until the data set is compressed or the user terminates the
request with an attention interrupt.
■ Site management has the option of designating whether the user must
have exclusive control of the data set.
■ If the site requires exclusive control and that cannot be obtained, the
compress request is rejected.
■ If the site does not require exclusive control, shared control is accepted if
exclusive control cannot be obtained.

DSN CM (data set object) N/A

1.31 COPY
1.31 COPY
Copies all or part of the designated data into an AWS.
1.31.1 Syntax
COPY Command
┌─N1─┐
──Copy──┬───────────┬──┬──────────┬──o──┼────┼──┬───────┬──────
├─AWS aname─┤ └─p─┬───┬──┘ └─Nv─┘ ├─NOHDR─┤
├─Dsn───────┤ └─q─┘ └─FULL──┘
├─Job───────┤
├─Lib───────┤
├─mem───────┤
└─SCReen────┘
──┬──────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─TO aname─┘
Operand Description
aname Name of an existing AWS that is to be copied.
Dsn Designates that the currently attached data set object is to be
copied.
Job Designates that the currently attached job output file is to be
copied.
Lib Designates that the currently attached library member or Selection
List is to be copied.
mem Name of the library member to be copied.
SCReen Designates that the currently displayed screen is to be copied.
Note: If neither an explicit AWS name, DSN, JOB, LIB, a library
member name nor SCREEN is specified, one or more lines
within the active AWS are to be copied.
p q Number of the first and last lines to be copied. If only one number
is specified, only that line is copied.
o Destination of the operation, specified as:
v A line number.
* After the line at which the AWS pointer is positioned.
T Before the first AWS line.
B or ,, After the last AWS line.
R Replace AWS contents with copied data. (Treated as T
when copying within the AWS.)

1.31 COPY
Nv Number of times (v) the specified lines are duplicated. The default
is N1.
NOHDR (Applicable only when copying from a Selection List.) Prevents the
Selection List header lines from being copied.
FULL (Applicable only when copying from a Selection List.) Causes the
Selection List being copied to include all available information. If
omitted, only the information provided by the current format is
copied. (Use the SELECT ALT command to change the format.)
TO Name of the AWS that is to receive the data. If omitted, the data is
copied to the currently active AWS.
1.31.2 Notes
■ The copy operation is nondestructive (lines are not deleted from their
original location).
AWS Line Numbers:

■ If the destination is specified as a line number and the line number exists,
the data is placed after that line. If the line number does not exist, the data
is inserted at that line.
■ When the copied lines are placed between existing lines in the AWS or
before the first AWS line, the associated line numbers are incremented by
1. When the copied lines are placed to the end of the AWS, the current
increment is used.
AWS Overflow:
■ If the number of lines to be copied exceeds the size of the AWS, the
operation terminates when the AWS is full; the data copied up to the point
of the overflow is retained.
Terminating Operation:
■ The Attention key may be used to interrupt a copy operation.
Copying Within an AWS:

■ When copying within an AWS, you need not identify that AWS with the
command. For example, there is no difference between:
COPY 1 5 B
and
COPY AWS ROS1 1 5 B TO ROS1
■ A range of AWS lines cannot be copied to a position within that range.

1.31 COPY
Copying to an AWS:
■ When copying between AWSs, both AWSs must exist. Either or neither of
them need be the active AWS.
■ If you are working with split screens, you may not copy to the AWS that
is active in the other split screen. (You may copy from the AWS that is
active in the other screen to the AWS that is active in the screen containing
the command.)
Copying From a Data Set Object:

■ The attached data set object can be a sequential data set, PDS member,
AllFusion CA-Librarian module or a Selection List.
■ To be copied, a data set must:
1. Reside on an online DASD volume or a mass storage volume capable
of being staged. Tape volumes and offline DASD volumes may be
accessed only if the requested data set has been migrated by IBM's
Hierarchical Storage Manager (HSM) and HSM is currently active.
2. Not be under exclusive control by another task executing in the
computer nor allocated with DISP=OLD in the Advantage CA-Roscoe
JCL.
3. Have a data set organization of PS, PSU, PO, POU, DA, or DAU.
5. Not have its access prevented by site specifications made by the
system programmer.
■ If the logical record length of the data being copied exceeds 255, only the
first 255 characters are copied.
■ When copying from a Selection List, the AWS will contain:
1. The header lines from the Selection List, unless the NOHDR operand is
specified, and
2. Only the information associated with the current format, unless FULL
is specified. If FULL is specified, the copied data may exceed the width
of the terminal screen.
Copying From Job Output:

■ When copying from an output file, the data is copied ASIS. Terminal
errors will occur when LISTing binary data.
Copying From The Library:

■ When a library member name is included with the command (for example,
COPY WIDGET), all or part of the designated member is copied into the
AWS. The member need not be attached.

1.31 COPY
■ When LIB is specified with the command (for example, COPY LIB), all or
part of the currently attached member or Selection List is copied into the
AWS.
Copying From Screen Display:

■ The rows and columns comprising the displayed screen are assumed to be
numbered from one by one (for example, the first screen position is row
one, column one).
Alternate Copy Screen:

■ If an RPF program or other application (ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control
of the terminal, the current screen can be copied into an AWS by entering
:C in any unprotected field and pressing PF12. The cursor must
immediately follow the command. (Note that the colon and PF key
assignment are the Advantage CA-Roscoe defaults. Use the STATUS
SYSTEM display to determine if the site has changed these defaults.)
■ Note that when using this form of copy, a SET COPYDEST command must
have been issued prior to the :C, where SET COPYDEST identifies the
AWS that is to receive the copied data.

AWS At the last line copied.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

=n
COPYS, COPYX
DSN C (display menu)
LIB C (display menu)
XCOPY, XCOPYS,
XCOPYX

1.31 COPY

C, CC, CR, CCR, CB, CT, R, RR
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN C, CB, CC, CR, CCR, CCT
COPYS, COPYX
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE
1.31.4.1 Example
■ To copy lines 100 through 500 after the last line of the active AWS:
COPY 1 5 B
■ To copy every line in the active AWS beginning with the line at which the
pointer is currently positioned through the end of that AWS to before the
first line of that AWS:
COPY ,, T
■ To copy ten lines, beginning at the line at which the pointer is currently
positioned, after line 300 in the active AWS:
COPY 1 3
■ To copy lines 100 through 500 from the AWS named SAMPLE to the top
of the active AWS:
COPY AWS SAMPLE 1 5 T
■ To copy all of the attached data set object after line 900 of the AWS named
SAMPLE :
COPY DSN 9 TO SAMPLE
■ To copy the currently attached Library Selection List to the active AWS,
omitting the Selection List header lines and replacing the contents of the
AWS:
COPY LIB NOHDR R
■ To copy lines 700 through 1200 of the library member named TEST1 to the
line at which the pointer is currently positioned within the active AWS:
COPY TEST1 7 12
■ To copy lines 5 through 20 of the current screen display four times and
place them after line 1200 of the AWS named SAMPLE:
COPY SCREEN 5 2 12 N4 TO SAMPLE

1.32 Copy Line Commands

Copies one or more lines, one or more times, at a given destination.
1.32.1 Syntax
Copy Line Commands
──┬─C─┬───┬──┬────────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
├─CC───────┤
├─CR───────┤
├─CCR──────┤
├─CB───────┤
└─CT───────┘
Command Description
C Copy one line. To copy multiple lines, specify:
v Number of lines to be copied.
CC Copy block of lines. CC must be entered on the first and last line of
block to be copied. The range of lines to be copied does not have to
be displayed in its entirety on one screen. Scrolling and other line
commands can be performed while a line command is pending.
CR Copy one line. The command remains displayed.
CCR Copy block of lines; the commands remain displayed. CCR must
be entered on the first and last line of block to be copied. The range
of lines to be copied does not have to be displayed in its entirety on
one screen. Scrolling and other line commands can be performed
while a line command is pending.
CB Copy all lines from the line containing the command through the
last line of the active AWS.
CT Copy all lines from the first line of the active AWS through the line
containing the command.
1.32.2 Notes
original location).

Using CR and CCR:

■ The CR and CCR line commands may be used to copy the same line(s) to
multiple destinations.
■ Depending on the destination line command used, the CR or CCR
command(s) remain displayed, allowing the same line(s) to be copied
again.
■ To remove a pending CR or CCR command, use the RESET line command
or a destination line command ending in D (for example, AD).
Destination Line Commands:

■ A destination line command must be specified with a copy line command.
It does not have to be specified on the same screen as the copy line
commands. Scrolling and other line commands can be performed while a
line command is pending.
■ Also use the destination line commands to specify the number of times the
lines are to be copied.
AWS Sequence Numbers:

■ When lines are copied between existing lines in the active AWS or before
the first AWS line, associated line numbers are incremented by 1. When
lines are copied to the end of the active AWS, the current increment is
used.

=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
XCOPY, XCOPYS, XCOPYX
COPY R, RR
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN
COPY
COPYS, COPYX
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE

1.32.3.1 Example
■ To copy two lines (lines 100 and 200) after line 400 of the active AWS:

> AWS(AAA.TAXREPT) SCRL FULL COLS 7 78
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...
...... ================================ T O P =========
C21 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
2 PROGRAM-ID. TAX-REPT.
3
A4 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.
■ To copy all lines from line 300 through the end of the AWS to before line
100:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...
...... ================================ T O P =========
B1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
CB3
4 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

1.33 COPYS
1.33 COPYS
Copies one or more lines containing a specific string from the designated data
into the AWS.
1.33.1 Syntax
COPYS Command
──COPYS──┬─AWS aname─┬──┬───────────┬──/string/────────────────
├─Dsn───────┤ └──┬───┬─ e─┘
├─Job───────┤ └─s─┘
├─Lib───────┤
├─mem───────┤
──┬───────────┬──o──┬────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬────────────────
└─ p─┬───┬──┘ └─Nv─┘ └─LITeral─┘ └─Mix─┘
└─q─┘
──┬─────────┬──┬───────┬──┬──────┬──┬──────────┬───────────────
└─context─┘ └─NOHDR─┘ └─FULL─┘ └─TO aname─┘
Operand Description
Dsn Designates that the currently displayed data set object is to be
copied.
Job Designates that the currently displayed job output file is to be
copied.
SCReen Designates that the current screen display is to be copied.
s e Number of the starting and ending columns to be searched for the
string. If only one number is specified, it is assumed to be the
ending column. The ending column cannot exceed: 1) 255, or 2) the
record length of the data set object.
/string/ Search string which may not exceed 80 characters in length and
must be bound by delimiters.
p q Number of the first and last lines to be searched for the string. If
only one number is specified, only that line is searched.

1.33 COPYS

v A line number.
B or,, After the last AWS line.
R Replace AWS contents with copied data.
is N1.
interpretation.
| Note: If the Mix operand is present, it must appear before the
| context operand.
following:
and followed by a non-alphanumeric character.)
by a non- alphanumeric character and followed by an
or IMB.)
SUFFIX Treat the string as ending an entity (it is preceded by

1.33 COPYS
1.33.2 Notes
original location).
Abbreviation:
■ COPYS can be abbreviated as CS.
AWS Line Numbers:

increment is used.
AWS Overflow:
Copying from an AWS:

■ You may not copy lines containing the specified string within the same
AWS.

1.33 COPYS
active in the other split screen to the AWS that is active in the screen
containing the command.)
Copying from a Data Set Object:

LIBRARIAN module or a Selection List.
1. Reside on an online DASD volume, a mass storage volume capable of
being staged. Tape volumes and offline DASD volumes may be
2. Not be under exclusive control by another task executing in in the
JCL.
system programmer.
specified, and

■ When copying from an output file, the data is copied asis. Terminal errors
will occur when LISTing binary data.
Copying From the Library:

COPYS WIDGET), the appropriate lines are copied into the AWS. The
member need not be attached.

1.33 COPYS
AWS.
Copying From Screen Display:

one, column one).

boundaries. To change the column boundaries for:
A single operation: Specify the s and e operands with the command
(for example, COPYS 20 30 ABC). After the
command executes, the previously established or
default range is restored. To limit the operation to
a single column, specify s equal to e.
The terminal session: Use the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen, the
SET BOUNDS primary command or, if the AWS is
attached, the BOUNDS line command. This range
remains in effect until explicitly changed.

THE or X'E3C8C5'
■ A string is considered to be in hexadecimal representation when it is
X'string'
characters.

1.33 COPYS

strings that:
Begin at the left margin: The string is assumed to be preceded by a
non-alphanumeric (for example, a space).
End the record: The string is assumed to be followed by a
non-alphanumeric (for example, a space,
period, or comma).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.


1.33 COPYS

DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

=n
COPY, COPYX
XCOPY, XCOPYS,
XCOPYX
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN
COPY C, CB, CC, CR, CCT, CT
COPYX
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE
1.33.4.1 Examples
■ To copy every line containing the string WIDGET in the lines 100 through
900 of the attached data set object, replacing the active AWS contents:
COPYS DSN WIDGET 1 9 R
■ To copy every line from the attached data set object containing the
hexadecimal string C1 to the top of the active AWS:
COPYS DSN X'C1' LITERAL
■ To copy every line containing the string XYZ from the existing AWS
named OUTDATA to the top of the existing AWS named INDATA:
COPYS AWS OUTDATA XYZ T TO INDATA

1.33 COPYS
■ To copy every line of the attached job output file containing the string
PRINT-FILE to, or immediately after, line 1200 of the active AWS:
COPYS JOB PRINT-FILE 12
■ To copy every line from the attached job output file containing a string
beginning with ABC to the bottom of the active AWS:
COPYS JOB ABC PREFIX B
■ To copy every line from the library member MEMBER1 containing the
string XYZ to the top of the active AWS, repeating those lines three times:
COPYS MEMBER XYZ T N3
■ To copy every line containing the date 12/12/88 from the Library Selection
List, omitting the header lines, after the line at which the AWS pointer is
currently positioned:
COPYS LIB '12/12/88' NOHDR
■ To copy every line containing the string DATE in columns 10 through 50
of the displayed screen to the bottom of the AWS named SAMPLE :
COPYS SCREEN 1 5 DATE B TO SAMPLE

1.34 COPYX
1.34 COPYX
Copies one or more lines not containing a specific string from the designated
data into the AWS.
1.34.1 Syntax
COPYX Command
──COPYX──┬─AWS aname─┬──┬───────────┬──/string/────────────────
├─Dsn───────┤ └──┬───┬─ e─┘
├─Job───────┤ └─s─┘
├─Lib───────┤
├─mem───────┤
──┬───────────┬──o──┬────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬────────────────
└─ p─┬───┬──┘ └─Nv─┘ └─LITeral─┘ └─Mix─┘
└─q─┘
──┬─────────┬──┬───────┬──┬──────┬──┬──────────┬───────────────
└─context─┘ └─NOHDR─┘ └─FULL─┘ └─TO aname─┘
Operand Description
Dsn Designates that the currently displayed data set object is to be
copied.
Job Designates that the currently displayed job output file is to be
copied.
SCReen Designates that the current screen display is to be copied.

1.34 COPYX

v A line number.
is N1.
interpretation.
| context operand.
following:
by a non- alphanumeric character and followed by an
or IMB.)

1.34 COPYX
1.34.2 Notes
original location).
Abbreviation:
■ COPYX can be abbreviated as CX.
AWS Line Numbers:

increment is used.
AWS Overflow:
Copying from an AWS:

■ You may not copy lines containing the specified string within the same
AWS.

1.34 COPYX
active in the other split screen to the AWS that is active in the screen
containing the command.)
Copying from a Data Set Object:

LIBRARIAN module, or a Selection List.
2. Not be under exclusive control by another task executing in in the
JCL.
system programmer.
specified, and
Copying from Job Output:

will occur when LISTing binary data.
Copying from the Library:

COPYS WIDGET), the appropriate lines are copied into the AWS. The
member need not be attached.

1.34 COPYX
AWS.
Copying from Screen Display:

one, column one).

(for example, COPYS 20 30 ABC). After the
SET BOUNDS primary command or, if the AWS is

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.

1.34 COPYX

strings that:
period, or comma).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.


1.34 COPYX

DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

=n
COPY, COPYS
XCOPY, XCOPYS,
XCOPYX
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN
COPY C, CB, CC, CR, CCT, CT
COPYX
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE
1.34.4.1 Examples
■ To copy every line not containing the string WIDGET in the lines 100
through 900 of the attached data set object, replacing the active AWS
contents:
COPYX DSN WIDGET 1 9 R
■ To copy every line from the attached data set object not containing the
hexadecimal string C1 to the top of the active AWS:
COPYX DSN X'C1' LITERAL
■ To copy every line not containing the string XYZ from the existing AWS
named OUTDATA to the top of the existing AWS named INDATA:
COPYX AWS OUTDATA XYZ T TO INDATA

1.34 COPYX
■ To copy every line of the attached job output file not containing the string
PRINT-FILE to, or immediately after, line 1200 of the active AWS:
COPYX JOB PRINT-FILE 12
■ To copy every line from the attached job output file not containing a string
beginning with ABC to the bottom of the active AWS:
COPYX JOB ABC PREFIX B
■ To copy every line from the library member MEMBER1 not containing the
string XYZ to the top of the active AWS, repeating those lines three times:
COPYX MEMBER XYZ T N3
■ To copy every line not containing the date 12/12/88 from the Library
Selection List, omitting the header lines, after the line at which the AWS
pointer is currently positioned:
COPYX LIB '12/12/88' NOHDR
■ To copy every line not containing the string DATE in columns 10 through
50 of the displayed screen to the bottom of the AWS named SAMPLE :
COPYX SCREEN 1 5 DATE B TO SAMPLE

1.35 CREATE
1.35 CREATE
Assign a name and attributes to an AWS.
1.35.1 Syntax
CREATE Command
──CREATE AWS──aname──┬────────────────┬──┬─────────┬───────────
├─RECoverable────┤ ├─SESsion─┤
└─NONRECoverable─┘ ├─SPLit───┤
├─RPF─────┤
└─LEVel───┘
──┬──────────┬──┬──────────┬──┬────────┬───────────────────────
├─ACTive───┤ ├─IMPlicit─┤ ├─NEW────┤
└─INACTive─┘ └─EXPlicit─┘ ├─REUSE──┤
└─RETAIN─┘
Operand Description
aname One- to eight-character name to be assigned to the AWS being
created. It must conform to Advantage CA-Roscoe's member
naming conventions. The name may not be FLIP, NEXT,
PREV, ROSn, SYSn or TMPn (where 'n' is a numeric value); nor
may it be B, F, N, P, T, or R.
If the name is specified as TEMP, a name is generated in the
form TMPn, where 'n' is a unique character.
RECoverable Designates that the contents of this AWS is to be backed up on
disk and recovered in the event of a session or system
termination.
NONRECOVERABLE
Designates that the contents of this AWS is to be retained in
storage for as long as possible. While this provides faster
execution, the data is lost if there is a session or system
termination. (Abbreviate as NREC.)
Note: RECoverable and NONRECOVERABLE are mutually
exclusive. If neither is specified, the default is
RECOVERABLE if the AWS is defined with an explicit
name or NONRECOVERABLE if the AWS is defined
with the name TEMP.

1.35 CREATE
SESsion Causes this AWS to be discarded when the session ends.

SPLit Causes this AWS to be discarded when the split screen in
which the CREATE command was executed is terminated.
RPF Causes this AWS to be discarded when the RPF 'application'
containing the CREATE command returns control to the
terminal. (In this case, 'application' refers to the RPF program
invoked by the user and all subordinate RPF programs that it
may invoke.)
LEVel Causes this AWS to be discarded when the RPF program
containing the CREATE command drops to the next higher RPF
level. (Abbreviate as LVL.)
Note: SESSION, SPLIT, RPF and LEVEL are mutually
exclusive. They define the retention attribute of the
AWS being created. If none of these are specified, the
default is SESSION.
ACTive Designates that this AWS is to be made the current AWS for
the screen containing the command.
INACTive Designated that this AWS is not to be made the current AWS.
Note: ACTIVE and INACTIVE are mutually exclusive. If
neither is specified, the default is ACTIVE.
IMPlicit Designates that the AWS is to be made current when a SELECT
command is issued with the NEXT, PREV, or FLIP keyword.
EXPlicit Designates that the AWS is to be made current only when it is
specifically named in a SELECT command.
Note: IMPLICIT and EXPLICIT are mutually exclusive. If
neither is specified, the default is IMPLICIT.
NEW Designates that the AWS named with this command is being
created.
REUSE Designates that the AWS named with this command is being
recreated (the contents of the AWS are to be deleted). Its
previously specified attributes may be altered by the operands
specified with this command.
RETAIN Designates that the attributes of the AWS named with this
command are to be altered as indicated. (Any data contained
within this AWS is to be retained.)
Note: NEW, REUSE and RETAIN are mutually exclusive. If
neither are specified, the default is NEW.

1.35 CREATE
1.35.2 Notes
Defaults and Restrictions:
■ By default, each user has two AWSs (named ROSn). The first is available
when you sign on. The other is automatically provided when you split the
screen. The number of additional AWSs that you may create is established
by site management.

AWS At the first line.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

ALTER AWS N/A
ATTACH AWS
DISCARD AWS
POINT AWS
RENAME
SELECT AWS
STATUS AWS
1.35.4.1 Examples
■ To create an AWS with the name TEST:

CREATE AWS TEST
TEST will have the default attributes: RECOVERABLE, SESSION, ACTIVE,
IMPLICIT, and NEW.
■ To reuse the existing AWS named TEST1:
CREATE AWS TEST1 REUSE
While the attributes of TEST1 can be changed when REUSE is specified,
they have not been with this example. The prior contents of TEST1,
however, has been deleted.

1.36 DDO
1.36 DDO
Permits Advantage CA-Datacom/DB Datadictionary to be used during a
Advantage CA-Roscoe terminal session.
1.36.1 Syntax
DDO Command
──DDO─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.36.2 Notes
To Start Advantage CA-Datacom/DB Datadictionary Session:
■ At sites using Advantage CA-Datacom/DB Datadictionary, executing the
DDO command causes the Advantage CA-Datacom/DB Datadictionary
frontispiece to be displayed. All facilities of Advantage CA-Datacom/DB
Datadictionary are available to the Advantage CA-Roscoe users.
To End Advantage CA-Datacom/DB Datadictionary Session:

■ To terminate the session, enter the OFF command.
Restriction:
■ The DDO command cannot be issued when the Advantage CA-Roscoe
screen has been split and both presentation areas are displayed.
See the descriptions of the :commands on page 1-9 for information about
specific screen escape actions that can be performed during a Advantage
CA-Datacom/DB Datadictionary session.

1.37 DEFINE
1.37 DEFINE
Defines an alias, or a generation data base or data set index.
Specifically, the DEFINE Command is used to define the following:

■ Alias for a non-VSAM data set cataloged in an ICF or VSAM catalog
■ Alias for an ICF or VSAM user catalog
■ Alias for a partitioned data set member
■ Generation data base(ICF or VSAM catalog)
■ Generation data set index (CVOL catalog)
Each use of the DEFINE Command is discussed individually on the following

pages.

1.38 DEFINE ALIAS (ICF or VSAM Catalog)
1.38 DEFINE ALIAS (ICF or VSAM Catalog)

To define an alias for:
■ A non-VSAM data set cataloged in an ICF or VSAM catalog, or
■ An ICF or VSAM user catalog
1.38.1 Syntax
DEFINE ALIAS Command
──DEFine ALIAS──charstr──RELate──dsn──────────────────────────
Operand Description
ALIAS Name of the alias to be created.
RELate One- to 44-character name of the non-VSAM data set, ICF user
catalog, or VSAM user catalog for which an alias is to be created.
1.38.2 Notes
Non-VSAM Data Sets:
■ When defining an alias for a non-VSAM data set, the data set must be
cataloged in an ICF or VSAM catalog accessible to Advantage CA-Roscoe.
Catalog Restriction:
■ The catalog entry created for the alias must be in the same catalog as the
entry for the related non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog, or VSAM user
catalog.
■ Attempts to define an alias with a name that causes an entry to be created
in a different catalog are not supported by catalog management and are,
therefore, rejected.

DSN DA (data set object) N/A

1.39 DEFINE ALIAS for PDS Member

To define an alias for a partitioned data set member.
1.39.1 Syntax
DEFINE ALIAS Command
──DEFine ALIAS──charstr──RELate──dsn(mem)──────────────────────
──┬────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──┬──────────────┬───────
└─Volume charstr─┘ └─UNIT charstr─┘ └─PSWd charstr─┘
Operand Description
ALIAS One- to eight-character alias to be created.
RELate Fully qualified name of the PDS in which the alias is to be created
plus the One- to eight-character name of the member for which an
alias is to be created.
PDS resides. VOLUME is required only if the data set is not
cataloged.
Note: Volume can be specified as VOLUME, VOL, or V.
UNIT One- to eight-character unit name associated with the device on
which the PDS resides. UNIT is required only if the data set resides
on a mass storage volume and is not cataloged.
PSWd One- to eight- character OS password for the PDS.
1.39.2 Notes
Non-Load Module Aliases:
■ If the related member is not a load module (or is an alias in a load
module), the PDS directory record for the alias is created by copying all
information from the related member's directory record and setting the
alias flag in the new directory record.
Load Module Aliases:

■ If the related member is a load module, the related member's CESD
(Composite External Symbol Directory) records are read to determine if the
requested alias name is defined as a symbolic name in the load module.
■ If it is not defined as a symbolic name, the PDS directory record for the
alias is created by copying all information from the related member's
directory record and setting the alias flag in the new directory record.
■ If the requested alias name is an eligible symbolic name in the load
module, the PDS directory record for the alias is created by first copying

all information from the related member's directory record, then overlaying
the following fields based on the information found in the ESD (External
Symbol Dictionary) data for the symbol:
– Entry Point Offset,
– Addressing Mode,
– Overlay Control Information, and
– Scatter Load Information.
■ If the requested alias is defined as a symbolic name in the load module,
the request is rejected if it is not one of the following types:
– Control Section Definition
– Entry Label Reference
– Common Control Section
– Resolved External Reference
– Resolved Weak External Reference
■ Additionally, if the load module is in overlay format, the symbol must
refer to a location in the root segment (segment 1) of the load module.

DSN DA (data set object) N/A

1.40 DEFINE GDG
1.40 DEFINE GDG

To define a: 1) generation data base (ICF and VSAM catalogs), or 2) a
generation data set index (CVOL catalogs) that, optionally, is modeled after the
characteristics of an existing base or index.
1.40.1 Syntax
DEFINE GDG Command
──DEFine GDG──charstr──┬──────────────┬──┬─────────┬───────────
└─LIKE charstr─┘ └─LIMit=v─┘
┌─NOEMPTY─┐ ┌─NOSCRATCH─┐
──┼─────────┼──┼───────────┼──┬───────────────┬─────────────────
└─EMPty───┘ └─SCRatch───┘ └─OWNER charstr─┘
──┬────────────┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
├─FOR v──────┤
└─TO charstr─┘
Operand Description
GDG One- to 35-character name of the generation data group to be
created. (GDG may also be specified as
GENERATIONDATAGROUP.)
LIKE One- to 35-character name of an existing generation data
group whose attributes are to be used as a model in assigning
the attributes of the GDG being created.
Note: MODEL is an alias for LIKE.
LIMit Maximum number of generation data sets that may be
associated with the GDG. The value must be between 1 and
255.
Note: LIMIT is required if the LIKE operand is not used.
NOEMPTY Causes only the oldest generation data set to be uncataloged
when the limit is reached. (NOEMPTY may be abbreviated as
NEMP.)
EMPty Causes all generation data sets to be uncataloged when the
maximum number of generation data sets have been reached
for the GDG and another generation data set is to be
cataloged.
Note: If neither EMPTY nor NOEMPTY are specified, the
default is NOEMPTY.
NOSCRATCH Prevents the data set's format-1 DSCB from being deleted;
causing the space to remain allocated to the data set.
(NOSCRATCH may be abbreviated as NSCR. It may also be
specified as NODELETE or NDEL.)

1.40 DEFINE GDG
SCRatch Causes the generation data set's format-1 DSCB to be deleted

from the VTOC when the data set is uncataloged. (This allows
the space assigned to the data set to be made available to
other users.) (SCRATCH may be also be specified as DELETE
or DEL.)
Note: If neither SCRATCH nor NOSCRATCH are specified,
the default is NOSCRATCH.
OWNER One- to eight-character owner identifier that is to be placed in
the GDG's catalog entry. OWNER is ignored if the GDG is to
be cataloged in a CVOL catalog.
FOR Number of days for which the GDG is to be kept. It must be a
value between 0 and 9999.
TO Date through which the GDG is to be kept. The date may be
[yy] yyddd
Note: FOR and TO are mutually exclusive.
1.40.2 Notes
Using the LIKE Operand:
■ When LIKE is specified, the existing GDG must be cataloged in a catalog
that is accessible to Advantage CA-Roscoe.
■ The attributes from the model GDG are assigned to the new GDG unless
they are overridden by specific operands of this command.
Using the EMPTY/NOEMPTY Operand:

■ Use EMPTY and NOEMPTY to specify the action to be taken when the
maximum number of generation data sets have been reached for the
generation data group and another generation data set is to be cataloged.
(Note that the disposition of the data set's format-1 DSCB in the VTOC is
controlled by the SCRATCH/NOSCRATCH operands.)
Using the SCRATCH/NOSCRATCH Operand:

■ Use SCRATCH and NOSCRATCH to specify whether a generation data
set's format-1 DSCB in the VTOC is to be deleted when the data set is
uncataloged (either implicitly by the EMPTY/NOEMPTY operands or
explicitly by a delete or uncatalog request).

1.40 DEFINE GDG
Using the FOR/TO Operand:

■ Restrictions:
FOR or TO is ignored if the GDG is to be cataloged in a CVOL catalog.
| Catalogs using the CVOL method are not accessible if they reside on a
| dynamic device.
If an SMS-managed data set is created under a GDG base in an ICF
catalog, the FOR or TO value may be overridden by specifications in the
SMS management class associated with the data set.
■ Dates:
The retention period specified by the FOR or TO operand may resolve to
any date up to the 365th day of the year 2155 at sites with MVS/XA
SP2.2.0 or higher. At other sites, the maximum retention period is the
365th day of the year 1999.
If TO is used and the date is specified as yyddd, it is assumed to indicate a
year in the twentieth century.

DSN DG (data set object) N/A

1.41 DELETE
1.41 DELETE
To delete one of the following:
■ The contents of an AWS
■ A data set object
■ The contents of a library member or the entire member
Each use of the DELETE command is discussed individually on the following

pages.

1.42 DELETE AWS
1.42 DELETE AWS

To delete the contents of an AWS.
1.42.1 Syntax
DELETE AWS Command
──DELete──┬───────────┬──┬──────────┬─────────────────────────
└─AWS aname─┘ └─p─┬───┬──┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, deletes the entire contents of the active AWS.
aname Name of the AWS whose contents is to be deleted. If omitted, the
default is the active AWS.
p q Number of the first and last lines within the AWS that are to be
deleted. If only one number is specified, only that line is deleted.
1.42.2 Notes
Deleting an AWS:
■ If the entire contents of an AWS is deleted, the starting value and
increment for its line numbers are reset to the defaults (from 100 by 100).

AWS At the line following the last deleted line. If the
operation included what had been the last line, the
pointer is positioned to the line that is now the last line.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

1.42 DELETE AWS

D, DD, DB, DT
DELETES DS, DSB, DST
DELETEX DX, DXB, DXT
DDU
DISCARD AWS
1.42.4.1 Examples
■ To delete the entire contents of the active AWS:

DELETE
■ To delete lines 100 through 900 of the active AWS:
DELETE 1 9
■ To delete lines 100 through 900 of the AWS named SAMPLE:
DELETE AWS SAMPLE 1 9

1.43 DELETE DSN
1.43 DELETE DSN

To delete a data set object.
1.43.1 Syntax
DELETE DSN Command
──DELete Dsn──dsn──┬──────────┬────────────────────────────────
├─(dsnmem)─┤
├─(v)──────┤
└─()──────┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬──┬─────────────────────────┬────
│ ┌──
───────┐ │ │ ┌──
───────┐ │
charstr┴──┘ └─UNIT charstr──
└─Volume charstr── charstr┴──┘
──┬─────────────────────────┬──┬─────────────┬──┬───────┬──────
│ ───────┐ │ └─MCD charstr─┘ └─PURGE─┘
┌──
charstr┴──┘
└─PSWd charstr──
Operand Description
deleted. The name may be qualified with:
dsnmem
One- to eight-character name of the PDS member or
AllFusion CA-Librarian module to be deleted.
v Relative generation number of the GDG (Generation Data
Group) data set to be deleted, specified as 0 (most recent)
or a minus number (for example, -1).
* Causes all of the members comprising the designated PDS
to be deleted; the data set itself is retained.
data set resides. One to six volumes may be specified. Required if
the data set is not cataloged.
Note: Volume can be specified as VOLUME, VOL, V.
UNIT One- to eight-character unit name associated with the device type(s)
on which the data set resides. It may be either an IBM-defined
generic name (for example, 3380) or a site-defined esoteric name
(for example, SYSDA). Required if the data set is not cataloged and

1.43 DELETE DSN
If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or the
password.
Required when deleting a PROD2 module.
PURGE Causes the data set to be purged, regardless of its expiration or
retention date. If omitted, the data set is purged only if the
expiration or retention date is passed. (Not applicable with
AllFusion CA-Librarian master files.)
1.43.2 Notes
■ Non-VSAM Data Sets:
– DELETE can be used to delete any non-VSAM data set and the
following VSAM object types: ALIAS, AIX, CLUSTER, GDGBASE,
PAGESPACE, and PATH.
■ GDG Bases:
– GDG bases may be deleted only if there are no GDG data sets
cataloged under them.
■ 'Uncatalog' Operation:
– For SMS-managed data sets, an uncatalog operation is always
performed.
– For data sets that are not SMS-managed, an uncatalog operation is
performed if the data set to be deleted is cataloged and the volumes on
which the delete operation is performed match those specified in the
catalog.
– Only an uncatalog operation is performed for requests to delete an
alias, GDG base, or path.

DSN D (display menu) N/A

1.43 DELETE DSN
1.43.3.1 Examples
■ To delete the member/module WIDGET from the data set TEST.SAMPLE:

DELETE DSN TEST.SAMPLE(WIDGET)
■ To delete the data set TEST.SAMPLE1 regardless of its expiration/retention
date:
DELETE DSN TEST.SAMPLE1 PURGE

1.44 DELETE (LIB)
1.44 DELETE (LIB)

To delete the contents of a library member.
1.44.1 Syntax
DELETE (LIB) Command
──DELete──mem─────────────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
mem Name of the library member to be deleted.
1.44.2 Notes
Deleting Part of Member:
■ To delete specific lines within a member, a copy of the member must be
placed in an AWS. Update the member with the contents of that after
removing the appropriate lines.
Delete Confirmation:
■ Site management may require that you confirm any attempt to delete a
library member. If confirmation is required, a message is displayed.
Reenter the DELETE command; entering any other command terminates
the operation.
Resulting Display:
■ If the member named by the DELETE command is currently displayed, the
resulting display will be:
– The Selection List if you displayed the member using that list.
– The menu if you displayed the member using the menu.
– A blank Execution Area if you attached the member directly.

LIB D (display menu) N/A

1.45 Delete Line Commands

Deletes one or more lines.
1.45.1 Syntax
Delete Line Command
──┬─D─┬───┬────────────┬──────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
├─DD─────────────────┤
├─DB─────────────────┤
├─DT─────────────────┤
├─DS─┬───┬─ /string/─┤
│ └─V─┘ │
├─DSB /string/───────┤
├─DST /string/───────┤
├─DU /string/────────┤
├─DX─┬───┬─ /string/─┤
│ └─V─┘ │
├─DXB /string/───────┤
└─DXT /string/───────┘
Command Description
D Delete one line. To delete multiple lines, specify:
v Number of lines to be deleted.
DD Delete block of lines. DD must be entered on the first and last line
of the block of lines to be deleted. The range of lines to be deleted
need not appear in its entirety on one screen. Scrolling and other
line commands can be performed while a line command is pending.
DB Delete all lines from the line containing the command through the
DT Delete all lines from the first line of the active AWS through the
line containing the command.
DS Delete line containing the designated string. To delete multiple lines
containing the string, specify:
v Number of lines to be included in the delete operation.
DSB Delete all lines containing the designated string from the line
containing the command through the last line of the active AWS.

DST Delete all lines containing the designated string from the first line of
the active AWS through the line containing the command.
DU Delete all lines from the line containing the command until the first
line containing the designated string.
DX Delete the line not containing the designated string. To delete
multiple lines not containing the string, specify:
v Number of lines to be included in the delete operation.
DXB Delete all lines not containing the designated string from the line
containing the command through the last line of the active AWS.
DXT Delete all lines not containing the designated string from the first
line of the active AWS through the line containing the command.
/string/ Search string, which must not exceed the length of the terminal line
and must be bound by delimiters.
1.45.2 Notes
DISPLAY screen, the SET BOUNDS primary command, or the BOUNDS
line command. This range remains in effect until explicitly changed.

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.
■ The search looks for the string exactly as it is specified; therefore, supply
sufficient context with the string to avoid ambiguity. For example, use
leading and trailing blanks to make the string unique (for example, the
word THE matches the string / THE /; the words THE, THERE, and
BROTHER match the string /THE/).
■ Exercise care when specifying a string that could be interpreted as being in
hex. For example, to find the string X'C1', specify /X'C1/ or /X'C1' /;
/X'C1'/ is treated as the hexadecimal representation of the character A.


DELETE
DELETES
DELETEX
1.45.3.1 Examples
■ To delete two lines where one form of the command is used to delete lines
100 and 200 and another form is used to delete lines 300 and 400:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+...
...... ========================== T O P ====================
D21 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
DD3
DD4 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION
■ To delete every line from line 300 through the end of the active AWS:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+...
...... ========================== T O P ====================
1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
DB3
■ To delete every line containing the string XYZ beginning with line 200 and
continuing for the next five lines:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+...
...... ========================== T O P ====================
DS52 /XYZ/RAM-ID. TAX-REPT.
3
4 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION
■ To delete every line not containing the string ERROR-MSG from the first
line of the active AWS through the line containing the command:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+...
...... ========================== T O P ====================
891 MOVE MESSAGE TO ERROR-MSG.
DXT2 /ERROR-MSG/N-DATE TO OUT-DATE.
893 MOVE IN-ERROR TO OUT-ERROR.

■ To delete every line from the beginning of the active AWS until the first
occurrence of the string PROCEDURE DIVISION:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+...
...... ========================== T O P ====================
DU2 /PROCEDURE DIVISION/ OUT-DATE.
893 MOVE IN-ERROR TO OUT-ERROR.

1.46 DELETES
1.46 DELETES
Deletes one or more lines from an AWS that contains a designated string.
1.46.1 Syntax
DELETES Command
──DELETES──┬───────────┬──┬───────────┬── /string/─────────────
└─AWS aname─┘ └──┬───┬─ e─┘
└─s─┘
──┬───────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬─────────────
└─ p─┬───┬──┘ └─LITeral─┘ └─context─┘ └─Mix─┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
aname Name of the AWS that is to be affected by this operation. If
omitted, the active AWS is assumed.
ending column. The ending column cannot exceed 255.
interpretation.
following:
non-alphanumeric characters.) (Abbreviate as BEG.)
alphabetic character.) (Abbreviate as PRE.)

1.46 DELETES

or IMB.)
non-alphanumeric character and is followed by a
1.46.2 Notes
Abbreviation:
■ DELETES can be abbreviated as DS or DELS.

A single execution: Include the s and e operands with the command
(for example, DELETES 20 30 /ABC/). After the
command is executed, the previously established
or default range is restored.
To limit the operation to a single column, specify s
equal to e.
SET BOUNDS primary command, or, if the AWS
is attached, the BOUNDS line command. This
range remains in effect until explicitly changed.

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'

1.46 DELETES

characters.

strings that:
space).
End the record: The string is assumed to be followed
Begin at the left search boundary: The string must be preceded by a
non-alphanumeric.
End at the right search boundary: The string must be followed by a
non-alphanumeric.


1.46 DELETES


AWS At the end of the given range.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

DELETE D, DD, DB, DT, DS, DSB, DST
DELETEX DX, DXB, DXT, DU
1.46.4.1 Examples
■ To delete every line in the active AWS containing the character string
PRINT-FILE in columns 20 through 50:
DELETES 2 5 /PRINT-FILE/
■ To delete every line in the active AWS containing the character string
DATE in lines 100 through 900:
DELS /DATE/ 1 9
■ To delete every line within the AWS named SAMPLE that contains the
character string DATE within columns 20 through 50 of lines 100 through
900:
DELETES AWS SAMPLE 2 5 /DATE/ 1 9

1.47 DELETEX
1.47 DELETEX
Deletes one or more lines in an AWS that do not contain a specific string.
1.47.1 Syntax
DELETX Command
──DELETEX──┬───────────┬──┬───────────┬──/string/──────────────
└─AWS aname─┘ └──┬───┬─ e─┘
└─s─┘
──┬───────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬─────────────
└─ p─┬───┬──┘ └─LITeral─┘ └─context─┘ └─Mix─┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
aname Name of the AWS that is to be affected by this operation. If
omitted, the active AWS is assumed.
interpretation.
following:
non-alphanumeric characters.) (Abbreviate as BEG.)
alphabetic character.) (Abbreviate as PRE.)

1.47 DELETEX

or IMB.)
1.47.2 Notes
Abbreviation:
■ DELETEX can be abbreviated as DX or DELX.

A single execution: Include the s and e operands with the command
(for example, DELETEX 20 30 /ABC/). After the
command is executed, the previously established
or default range is restored.
equal to e.

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'

1.47 DELETEX

characters.

strings that:
space).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.

1.47 DELETEX


DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

DELETE D, DD, DB, DT
DELETES DS, DSB, DST, DX, DXB, DXT, DU
1.47.4.1 Examples
■ To delete every line in the active AWS that does not contain the string
REPORT-FILE:
DELETEX /REPORT-FILE/
■ To delete every line in the active AWS that does not contain the string
TEST in columns 20 through 50:
DELX 2 5 /TEST/
■ To delete every line in the AWS named SAMPLE that does not contain the
string DATA within columns 12 and 30 of lines 100 through 1200:
DELETEX AWS SAMPLE 12 3 /DATA/ 1 12

1.48 Destination Line Commands

Designates destination for the Copy and Move line commands.
1.48.1 Syntax
Destination Line Commands
──┬─A─┬───┬────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
├─B─┬───┬────┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─BB─┬───┬───┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─TT─┬───┬───┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─AD─┬───┬───┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─BD─┬───┬───┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─BBD─┬───┬──┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─TTD─┬───┬──┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─O─┬───┬────┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─OO─────────┤
├─OB─────────┤
├─OT─────────┤
└─OD─┬───┬───┘
└─v─┘
Command Description
A Inserts the line(s) being copied or moved after this line. With a copy
operation, qualify with:
v Number of copies of the designated line(s) to be inserted. If
omitted, inserts one copy.
B Inserts the line(s) being copied or moved before this line. With a
copy operation, qualify with:
BB Inserts the line(s) being copied or moved after the last line of the
active AWS. With a copy operation, qualify with:
TT Inserts the line(s) being copied or moved before the first line of the
active AWS. With a copy operation, qualify with:


AD Inserts the line(s) being copied or moved after this line. With a copy
operation, the CR or CCR line command is removed when the
operation completes. Also, the destination may be qualified with:
BD Inserts the line(s) being copied or moved before this line. With a
copy operation, the CR or CCR line command is removed when the
operation completes. Also, the destination may be qualified with:
BBD Inserts the line(s) being copied or moved after the last line of the
active AWS. With a copy operation, the CR or CCR line command
is removed when the operation completes. Also, the destination
may be qualified with:
TTD Inserts the line(s) being copied or moved before the first line of the
active AWS. With a copy operation, the CR or CCR line command
is removed when the operation completes. Also, the destination
O Overlays one line with the line(s) to be copied or moved. The
destination may be qualified with:
v Number of lines to be overlaid.
OO Overlay block of lines. OO must be entered on the first and last line
of the block of lines to be overlaid. The range of lines need not
appear in its entirety on one screen. Scrolling, as will as other line
commands, can be performed while a line command is pending.
OB Overlays all lines from the line containing the command through
the last line of the active AWS with the line(s) being copied or
moved.
OT Overlays all lines from the first line of the active AWS through the
line containing the command with the line(s) being copied or
moved.

OD Overlays one line with the line(s) being copied or moved. With a
copy operation, the CR or CCR line command is removed when the
operation completes. The destination may be qualified with:
1.48.2 Notes
Using Destination Line Commands:
■ A destination line command does not have to be on the same screen
display as the associated Copy or Move line command. Scrolling, as well
as other line commands, can be performed while the line command is
pending. (A destination command is pending when entered with no or an
incomplete Copy or Move line command.)
■ The destination cannot be within the range of lines designated by the Copy
or Move line commands.
■ Destination commands may be specified in the sequence number field of
the lines designating the top and bottom of the active AWS. (The sequence
number field of these lines contains '......'.)
Using Overlay Destination Line Commands:

■ Only blank characters in the target destination line(s) are overlaid with the
corresponding characters from the source line(s) ( the lines being
copied/moved).
■ The number of lines to be overlaid takes precedence over the number of
source lines.
If the number of lines to be overlaid is less than the number of source
lines, the operation stops when the specified number of lines have been
overlaid.
If the number of lines to be overlaid is greater than the number of source
lines, the source lines are repeated until the specified number of lines are
overlaid.

N/A Copy Lines:
C, CC, CR, CCR, CB, CT
Move Lines: M, MM, MB, MT
Define/Overlay Mask: MASK
OM, OMB, OMT

1.48.3.1 Examples
■ To overlay the blank characters in line 200 and 300 with data copied from
line 100:

> AWS() SCRL FULL COLS 7 78
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...>
...... ========================== T O P ===========
C1 AAAAA BBBBB CCCCC DDDDD EEEEE
O22 XXXXX XXXXX
3 XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX
■ Gives the following results:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...>
...... ========================== T O P ===========
1 AAAAA BBBBB CCCCC DDDDD EEEEE
2 AAAAA XXXXX CCCCC XXXXX EEEEE
3 XXXXX BBBBB XXXXX DDDDD XXXXX
■ To insert a copy of line 100 after line 200 and 300:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...>
...... ========================== T O P ===========
CR1 XXXXX YYYYY ZZZZZ
A2 AAAAA
AD3 BBBBB
■ Gives the following results:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...>
...... ================================ T O P =====
1 XXXXX YYYYY ZZZZZ
2 AAAAA
21 XXXXX YYYYY ZZZZZ
3 BBBBB
31 XXXXX YYYYY ZZZZZ

1.49 DETACH
1.49 DETACH
Detaches an attached AWS, data set object, job or library member.
1.49.1 Syntax
DETACH Command
──Detach──┬────────────────┬──────────────────────────────────
├─Dsn────────────┤
├─Job─┬───────┬──┤
│ ├─Noact─┤ │
│ └─Hold──┘ │
└─Lib────────────┘
Command Description
With no operand, releases whatever is currently attached. If an
AWS is attached, it is also detached.
Dsn Causes the currently attached data set object to be released. If
omitted, the data set object may be reattached.
Job Causes the currently attached job to be released. If omitted, the job
may be reattached.
If specified without qualification, all files are released from the hold
queue and user-assigned NOTE names are deleted. (The files are
disposed of according to their PRINT/NOPRINT status, where files
marked PRINT are routed to the appropriate SYSOUT print class
while files marked NOPRINT are deleted.) The qualifications are:
Noact Causes all files associated with the job to be retained when
the job is detached. User-assigned NOTE names are also
retained.
Note: Can be specified as NOACT, NOA, or N.
Hold Causes the files marked NOPRINT to be released when the
job is detached. Files marked PRINT are retained as are all
user-assigned NOTE names associated with those files.
Note: Can be specified as HOLD, HOL, H.
Lib Causes the attached Library Facility to be released. If omitted, the
Library Facility may be reattached.

1.49 DETACH
1.49.2 Notes
■ When the screen is redisplayed, the data in the Execution Area has been
blanked out.
Abbreviations:
■ DETACH can be specified as DETACH, DET, or D.
AWS:
■ DETACH does not affect the contents of the AWS.
Data Set Object:

■ Attaching another data set object causes an implicit detach of the currently
attached data set object.
■ When a data set or member/module is detached, all NOTE names are
deleted.
Jobs:
■ DETACH JOB acts as though NOACT was also specified when detaching a
job under the following conditions:
JES2 1) The job is awaiting execution or is executing, or 2) the held job
has no held SYSOUT files.
JES3 The job has no held SYSOUT files.
■ Multiple users can concurrently attach the same job. The first person to
attach the job has control over the job's disposition. If that person issued
the DETACH JOB command, the job is released. Other viewers discover
the job is released the next time they press the Enter key or use a PF key
to scroll.
| ■ After the job is released, if a Job List was displayed, a new Job List will be
| displayed using the original input parameters and current JES information.
| ■ If a Job List is displayed, DETACH JOB releases the Job List.
Library Facility:
■ Attaching another library member causes an implicit detach of the
currently attached member.
■ When a member is detached, all NOTE names are deleted.

1.49 DETACH
1.49.2.1 Examples
■ To detach the currently attached and displayed data:

DETACH
■ To release a job, delete all note names, delete files marked NOPRINT and
print files marked PRINT:
DETACH JOB
■ To release a job but retain it on the HOLD queue with all of its files and
their associated note names:
DETACH JOB NOACT
■ To release a job but retain it on the HOLD queue with only those files
marked PRINT and their associated note names:
DETACH JOB HOLD
■ To release the currently attached data set object:
DETACH DSN

1.50 DISCARD
1.50 DISCARD
Removes a named AWS and deletes its contents.
1.50.1 Syntax
DISCARD Command
──DISCard──AWS──┬─aname─┬─────────────────────────────────────
└──────┘
Operand Description
aname Name of the AWS to be removed.
* Causes the previously attached (current) AWS to be discarded.
Note: If only one AWS remains, it cannot be discarded.

AWS At the first line when a list is displayed.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

CREATE AWS N/A
DELETE AWS
DELETES AWS
DELETEX AWS
1.50.3.1 Example
■ To remove the AWS named TEST:

DISCARD AWS TEST

1.51 DISPLAY
1.51 DISPLAY
Displays information from the operating system on jobs in execution, initiators,
job queues and devices.
1.51.1 Syntax
DISPLAY Command
──DISplay──┬────┬──┬─────────┬────────────────────────────────
├─-A─┤ └─charstr─┘
└─-X─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, displays the status of all jobs whose names
contain the user's identification in the site-designated location.
-A Causes information to be written to the active AWS.
If charstr is specified, the designated information is written to the
active AWS and DISPLAY terminates.
If charstr is omitted, the status of all jobs whose names contain the
user's identification in the site-designated location is written to the
active AWS.
-X Invokes prompting.
If charstr is specified, the designated information is displayed and a
prompt is issued.
If charstr is omitted, a prompt is issued, the appropriate
information is displayed and another prompt is issued.
charstr Subcommand or job name. The subcommands include:
Active Job
AWS Mask
Devices Name
END NOAWS
Help QUEUE
Init
Note: Each subcommand is discussed individually on the
following pages.

1.51 DISPLAY
1.51.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ DISPLAY is a Monitor command. Site management has the option of
restricting the use of this command and its subcommands.
User Identification:
■ The type of user identification and its location within the job name is
defined by site management. The identification can be either the user's
prefix or an abbreviated form of his sign-on key. If the identification is not
in the designated location, a message is displayed.
Subcommands:
■ If an invalid (misspelled or non-existent) subcommand is entered, it is
treated as a job name.

1.52 DISPLAY (ACTIVE Subcommand)
1.52 DISPLAY (ACTIVE Subcommand)

Shows jobs currently active in the system.
1.52.1 Syntax
DISPLAY (ACTIVE Subcommand)
──Active──┬─────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────
├─All─────┤
├─charstr─┤
├─Stc─────┤
└─Tso─────┘
Operand Description
With no operand, displays activity information that is appropriate
for the site's environment, where:
JES2: Shows all jobs submitted through JES2. No started tasks or
active TSO users are shown.
JES3: Shows all jobs submitted through JES3. No started tasks or
active TSO users are shown.
All Displays all active jobs, started tasks, and TSO users.
charstr (JES2 Only.) One- to seven-character remote destination name. All
active jobs submitted from the remote destination are displayed.
Stc Displays only started tasks.
Tso Displays only active TSO users.

1.53 DISPLAY (AWS Subcommand)
1.53 DISPLAY (AWS Subcommand)

Directs all subsequent output to the active AWS instead of to the terminal.
1.53.1 Syntax
DISPLAY AWS Subcommand
──AWS─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.53.2 Notes
Messages:
■ Informational and error messages cannot be directed to the AWS. They are
always written to the terminal. (Note that the messages can be trapped
when DISPLAY is executed from within an RPF program.)
Resetting Destination:
■ Use the NOAWS subcommand to reset the output destination.

1.54 DISPLAY (DEVICES Subcommand)
1.54 DISPLAY (DEVICES Subcommand)

Shows all direct access and tape devices that are online and mounted.
1.54.1 Syntax
DISPLAY (DEVICES Subcommand)
──Devices─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.54.2 Notes
The information provided by the resulting display includes:
UCB Unit control block device number of each device.
VOLSER Serial number of the volume mounted on each device.
STATUS Three fields, separated by slashes, that provide information about
the device:
1st Field Volume Use Status, shown as:
PRV = Private
PUB = Public
STR = Storage
2nd Field Volume Mount Status (for DASD volumes only),
shown as:
RMV = Volume is removeable.
RSD = Volume is permanent resident.
RSV = Volume is reserved.
3rd Field Device Status, shown as:
A = Allocated
O = Online
S = System residence volume (SYSRES)
DEVTYPE Device type (for example, 3380).

1.55 DISPLAY (END Subcommand)
1.55 DISPLAY (END Subcommand)

Terminates execution of DISPLAY.
1.55.1 Syntax
DISPLAY (END Subcommand)
──END─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.55.2 Note
■ END is only needed when execution was initiated by the DISPLAY-X
command.

1.56 DISPLAY (HELP Subcommand)
1.56 DISPLAY (HELP Subcommand)

Displays a summary of the DISPLAY subcommands.
1.56.1 Syntax
DISPLAY (HELP Subcommand)
──HELP────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.56.2 Note
■ HELP always writes to the terminal.

1.57 DISPLAY (INIT Subcommand)
1.57 DISPLAY (INIT Subcommand)

Shows the status of all initiators.
1.57.1 Syntax
DISPLAY (INIT Subcommand)
──Init────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.57.2 Notes
JES2 Information:
■ Shows the status of all initiators, the classes associated with each initiator,
and the name and number of any job executing on each initiator.
■ The information is reported only for the CPU on which Advantage
CA-Roscoe is running.
JES3 Information:
■ Shows the status of each job class group, the number of initiators allocated
to each group, the status of each job class within a group, and the name
and number of each job executing within a class.

1.58 DISPLAY (JOB Subcommand)
1.58 DISPLAY (JOB Subcommand)

Displays information about the named job.
1.58.1 Syntax
DISPLAY (JOB Subcommand)
──┬──────┬──┬─charstr───┬─────────────────────────────────────
└─Job=─┘ └─charstr +─┘
Operand Description
charstr Name of job about which status information is desired.
charstr + Causes information about jobs whose names begin with the
characters preceding the plus sign to be displayed.
1.58.2 Notes
When to Use JOB=:
■ JOB is required only when the job name matches a DISPLAY
subcommand. As illustrated in the examples, entering DISPLAY
JOB=charstr is comparable to entering DISPLAY charstr.
JES2 Without NJE:

■ The information includes the stepname for all jobs executing on the same
CPU as Advantage CA-Roscoe.
1.58.2.1 Examples
■ To display the status of jobs whose names contain the user's ID in the
site-designated location:
DISPLAY
■ To display the status of the job(s) named ABC:
DISPLAY ABC or DISPLAY JOB=ABC
■ To display the status of jobs whose names begin with ROS:
DISPLAY ROS+ or DISPLAY JOB=ROS+
■ To display the status of the job(s) named ACTIVE:
DISPLAY JOB=ACTIVE

1.59 DISPLAY (MASK Subcommand)
1.59 DISPLAY (MASK Subcommand)

Displays information about the job(s) whose names match the mask.
1.59.1 Syntax
DISPLAY (MASK Subcommand)
──MASK=──charstr──────────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
charstr Name of the job for which status information is desired.
The name cannot exceed eight characters in length. It must include
at least one valid character and may include one or more asterisks
(*), where the asterisk represents any character valid in a job name.
If less than eight characters are specified, the string is treated as
though it is padded to the right with asterisks. This is comparable
to including a plus sign (+) with the string of the JOB subcommand
(JOB=ROS+).
1.59.1.1 Example
■ To display the status of all jobs whose names contain the letter A in the
first position and C in the third position:
DISPLAY MASK=AC

1.60 DISPLAY (NAME Subcommand)
1.60 DISPLAY (NAME Subcommand)

Shows the names of all jobs for a specified job class or remote destination.
1.60.1 Syntax
DISPLAY (NAME subcommand)
──NAME──┬─charstr1─┬──────────────────────────────────────────
└─charstr2─┘
Operand Description
charstr1 One-character job class. Only the names of jobs in this class are
shown.
charstr2 One- to seven-character remote destination name. Only the names
of jobs for this remote destination are shown.
1.60.2 Notes
JES2 Information:
■ With charstr1, the display includes information about jobs awaiting
execution.
■ With charstr2, the display includes information about jobs awaiting
execution or print.
JES3 Information:
■ The NAME subcommand displays information about all jobs.

1.61 DISPLAY (NOAWS Subcommand)
1.61 DISPLAY (NOAWS Subcommand)

Directs all subsequent output to the terminal.
1.61.1 Syntax
DISPLAY (NOAWS subcommand)
──NOAWS───────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1.62 DISPLAY (QUEUE Subcommand)
1.62 DISPLAY (QUEUE Subcommand)

Shows the number of jobs which are not executing, printing or punching, or
being read for a specified class or remote destination.
1.62.1 Syntax
DISPLAY (QUEUE subcommand)
──QUEUE──┬─charstr1─┬─────────────────────────────────────────
└─charstr2─┘
Operand Description
charstr1 One-character job class. Only the number of jobs in this class are
shown.
charstr2 One- to seven-character remote destination name. Only the number
of jobs for this remote destination are shown.
1.62.2 Note
JES3:
■ The QUEUE subcommand is ignored.

1.63 DIVERT
1.63 DIVERT
Redirects the input or output associated with TGET, TPUT, WTO, and WTP
macros encountered within the application executing under ETSO.
1.63.1 Syntax
DIVERT Command
──DIVERT──┬─TGET charstr─┬────────────────────────────────────
├─TPUT charstr─┤
├─WTO charstr──┤
└─WTP charstr──┘
Operand Description
TGET Identify the redirected source of terminal input (requested through
a TGET macro) by specifying one of the following:
■ AWS
■ MEM library member name
■ TERMINAL (or *)
TPUT Identify the redirected target of terminal output (requested by a
TPUT macro) by specifying one of the following:
■ AWS
■ DISCARD
■ TERMINAL (or *)
WTO Identify the redirected target of console output (requested through a
WTO macro) by specifying one of the following:
■ AWS
■ CONSOLE
■ DISCARD
■ TERMINAL (or *)
WTP Identify the redirected target of terminal output (requested through
a WTO macro with route code 11) by specifying one of the
following:
■ AWS
■ CONSOLE
■ DISCARD
■ TERMINAL (or *)

1.63 DIVERT
1.63.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ The DIVERT command is valid only when the Extended Time-Sharing
■ DIVERT has no affect on the data sets or Advantage CA-Roscoe-managed
files identified by previously executed ALLOCATE commands.
Current Diversion Settings:

■ Use the QUERY DIVERT command to obtain information about any input
or output diversions that are currently in effect.
| Viewing Messages on the Master Console:
| Messages normally seen on the master console may not be seen when an
| application runs under Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive ETSO Environment.
| An application may appear as if it is hung, when it is really waiting for a tape
| mount or an operator's response from a message that an operator can not see.
| To avoid this problem, divert WTP's to the master console using the
| Advantage CA-Roscoe DIVERT command. The following RPF can be used as a
| sample RPF to divert WTP and to initiate an application.
| <<SARROS>>
| : THIS RPF WILL DESTROY THE AWS - SAVE THE AWS IF REQUIRED
| PUSH
| SET ATTACH NOPAUSE
| SET BOUNDS AWS 1 3
| Q DIVERT AWS
| FIND /WTP/
| READ AWS L1 1 12
| DIVERT WTP CONSOLE
| TRAP ON
| +CALL SARROS /+A1+/
| TRAP OFF
| IF INDEX(L1 '.') EQ
| +DIVERT WTP +L1+
| ELSE
| +DIVERT WTP MEM +L1+
| ENDIF
| IF (TC EQ )
| RESPONSE 'SARROS ENDED, RC IS '|TC
| WRITE AWS B LASTERR
| A
| ENDIF
| POP
| RETURN

1.63 DIVERT

ALLOCATE N/A
CALL
CANCEL
FREE
QUERY ALLOCATE
QUERY CALL
QUERY DIVERT
RESUME

1.64 DROP
1.64 DROP
Deletes a NOTE name.
1.64.1 Syntax
DROP Command
──DROP──┬─────┬──charstr──────────────────────────────────────
├─Dsn─┤
├─Job─┤
└─Lib─┘
Operand Description
Dsn Designates that the operation is to apply to the sequential data set,
PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module that is attached but
not currently displayed.
Job Designates that the operation is to apply to the job that is attached
but not currently displayed.
Lib Designates that the operation is to apply to the library member that
is attached but not currently displayed.
Note: If neither DSN, JOB, or LIB are specified, the operation
applies to the currently attached and displayed data.
charstr Name, previously defined by the NOTE command, that is to be
dropped.

NOTE N/A
POINT
STATUS NOTES
1.64.2.1 Examples
■ To delete the NOTE name WIDGET which is associated with the currently
attached and displayed data:
DROP WIDGET
■ To delete the NOTE name XYZ which is associated with the attached but
not currently displayed job:
DROP JOB XYZ

1.65 DSN
1.65 DSN
Attaches the Data Set Facility menu to the terminal and, optionally, displays a
function-related panel.
1.65.1 Syntax
DSN Command
──DSN──┬───────────────────────────────┬──────────────────────
├─charstr─┬─────────────────┬───┤
│ └─dsn─┬────────┬──┘ │
│ ├─dsnmem─┤ │
│ └─v──────┘ │
│ ┌──
───────────┐ │
├─Volume charstr── ┬─────────┬┴──┤
│ └─charstr─┘ │
│ ┌──
───────────┐ │
┬─────────┬┴────┘
└─charstr─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, displays the Data Set Facility menu.
charstr One or more data set facility function codes. If omitted, the Data Set
Facility menu is displayed. If specified, it must be one of the
following:
A Causes the Data Set Facility menu to be displayed with the
attach code in the OPTION field.
AL Causes Allocate Function Panel to be displayed.
AM Causes the Allocate SMS Function Panel to be displayed.
C Causes the Copy Function Panel to be displayed.
CM Causes the Data Set Facility menu to be displayed with the
compress code in the OPTION field.
CT Causes the Data Set Facility menu to be displayed with the
catalog code in the OPTION field.
D Causes the Delete Function Panel to be displayed.
DA Causes the Define Alias Func- tion Panel to be displayed.
DG Causes the Define Generation Data Group Function Panel to
be displayed.
I Causes the Data Set Facility menu to be displayed with the
info code in the OPTION field.
P Causes the Print Function Panel to be displayed.

1.65 DSN
R Causes the Rename Function Panel to be displayed.

RL Causes the Data Set Facility menu to be displayed with the
release DASD space code in the OPTION field.
UC Causes the Data Set Facility menu to be displayed with the
uncatalog code in the OPTION field.
X Causes the Data Set Facility menu to be displayed with the
termination code in the OPTION field.
dsn One- to 4four-character fully qualified name of the data set to be
involved in this operation. The name may be qualified with:
dsnmem
One- to eight-character name of the PDS member or
AllFusion CA-Librarian module to be involved.
group) data set, specified as 0 (most current), a minus
number (for example, -1) or a positive number (for
example, +1).
| the data set is not cataloged. (VOLUME cannot be used with
| AllFusion CA-Librarian data sets defined as VSAM.)
Note: VOLUME can be specified as VOLUME, VOL, or V.
UNIT One- to eight-character unit name associated with the device type(s)
| resides on a mass storage device. (UNIT cannot be used with
| AllFusion CA-Librarian data sets defined as VSAM.)
1.65.2 Notes
■ If the specified function code supports subfunction codes, the subfunction
codes can be concatenated to the primary code (for example, R.M). A
maximum of four code may be specified, separated by periods.
■ If invalid or insufficient information is specified, the Data Set Facility menu
is displayed.

1.65 DSN

ATTACH DSN N/A
ACH VOL
OCATE DSN
Y DSN
ALOG DSN
PRESS DSN
INE
DELETE DSN
IMPORT
INFO DSN
PRINT DSN
RENAME DSN
RELEASE DSN
UNCATLG
1.65.3.1 Examples
■ To display the Allocate Function Panel to allocate the data set TEST.NEW:
DSN AL TEST.NEW
■ To display the Data Set Facility menu with the uncatalog code in the
OPTION field and the name TEST.OLD in the DATA SET field:
DSN UC TEST.OLD
■ To display the Rename Function Panel with the R (rename data set)
subfunction code in the OPTION field and the name TEST.NEW in the
DATA SET field:
DSN R.R TEST.NEW

1.66 EDIT
1.66 EDIT
Replaces a character string found within the contents of the active AWS with
another string.
1.66.1 Syntax
EDIT Command
──Edit──┬─F─────────────────────────────────────────────┬──────
└──┬───┬─e/─┬─────────┬─/─┬─────────┬─/p─┬───┬──┘
└─s─┘ └─string1─┘ └─string2─┘ └─q─┘
──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬─────────────────────────────────────
└─LITeral─┘ └─context─┘
Operand Description
F Terminates EDIT after replacing the first occurrence of string1
with string2.
s e Number of the starting and ending columns to be searched for
string1. If only one number is specified, it is assumed to be
the ending column. The ending column cannot exceed 255.
/string1/string2/
Delimited search and replacement strings. Neither string may
exceed 80 characters in length; their combined length may not
exceed 110 characters.
If string1 is:
Longer than string2 All data to the right of the original
string is shifted left; the remaining
columns of the line (or edit range) are
padded with blanks.
Omitted (for example, //STRING2/) string2
replaces the contents of the line(s).
(Column limits are ignored.)
If string2 is:
Longer than string1 All data to the right of the original
string is shifted right. Any characters
extending beyond column 255 (or the
edit range) are lost.
Omitted (for example, /STRING1//) string1 is
deleted from the line(s); the lines are not
deleted.

1.66 EDIT
p q Number of the first and last lines to be searched for string1. If

X'C1' is to be treated as a character string; not as the
hexadecimal representation of the letter A). If omitted, the
string is subject to interpretation.
context Qualifies the search string within the data. If omitted, the
search is for the string exactly as entered. If specified, it must
be one of the following:
and followed by a non-alphanumeric character).
complete entity (it is preceded by a
non-alphanumeric character and followed by either
an alphanumeric or non-alphanumeric characters).
(Abbreviate as BEG.)
PREFIX Treat the string as beginning an entity (it is
preceded by a non-alphanumeric character and
followed by an alphabetic character). (Abbreviate
as PRE.)
preceded and followed by an alphanumeric
character). (May also be specified as IMBED;
abbreviate as EMB or IMB.)
SUFFIX Treat the string as ending an entity (it is preceded
by an alphanumeric character and followed by a
non-alphanumeric character). (Abbreviate as SUF.)
END Treat the string as either ending or being a
complete entity (it is preceded by either an
alphanumeric or non-alphanumeric character and is
followed by a non-alphanumeric character).
1.66.2 Notes
■ At least one operand must be specified; F cannot be the only operand.

A single execution: Specify the s and e operands with the command (for
example, EDIT 20 30 /A/B/). After the command
executes, the previously established or default range
is restored.

1.66 EDIT

equal to e.
The terminal session:
Use the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen, the
SET BOUNDS primary command, or, if the AWS is
■ While it is not recommended, column boundaries may also be set for the
terminal session by specifying only the s and e operands (for example,
EDIT 12 72). From the terminal, the command affects only the AWS. When
executed from within an RPF program, the command is comparable to SET
BOUNDS ALL. The range remains in effect until changed by a SET
BOUNDS command or BOUNDS line command, or by a subsequent EDIT,
FILL, OMIT, or SEARCH primary command that also specifies only the s
and e operands.
Specifying the Search/Replacement Strings:

■ Regardless of the form in which the data is displayed, the search or
replacement string can be specified in either character format or its
hexadecimal representation. Thus, the string THE can be specified as
either:
THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.


1.66 EDIT

strings that:
period, or comma).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.
Tracking Changed Lines:

■ When an edit operation completes successfully, the user receives no
informational message. To track lines that have been affected by an edit
operation, the user can issue either of the following commands before
performing the edit:
SET EDITCHNG ON Causes the sequence number field of the
appropriate lines to contain '==CHG>'.
TRACE Produces a non-modifiable display containing only
those lines affected by the edit operation.

AWS With EDIT: At the end of the active AWS or given range.
(If TRACE EDIT is in effect and tracing is ended with an
attention, the position is uncertain.)
With EDIT F: If a match is found, at that line. If no
match is found, at the end of the active AWS or given
range.

1.66 EDIT

DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

Add String To Line: Add String To Line:
FILL N/A
PREFIX
SUFFIX
Change AWS Contents: Change AWS Contents:
E, EE, EB, ET
XLATE XL, XLB, XLT
Trace Edits: Trace Edits:
SET EDITCHNG N/A
TRACE EDIT / NOTRACE
1.66.4.1 Examples
■ To replace every occurrence of the word DATE with the word TIME:
EDIT /DATE/TIME/
■ To change every occurrence of the word REPT to REPORT in columns 12
through 40 of lines 100 through 500:
EDIT 12 4 /REPT/REPORT/ 1 5
■ To replace the word THE with the word AN:
EDIT /THE/AN/ WORD
If the qualifier WORD is omitted and the active AWS contains the line
'THEIR OTHER BROTHER ATE THE APPLE, the characters THE would
be changed to AN in the words THEIR, OTHER, and BROTHER.
■ To delete every occurrence of the string FILLER from the active AWS
contents without deleting the lines containing that string:
EDIT /FILLER//
■ To overlay lines 1800 through 2500 with the string FILLER:
EDIT //FILLER/ 18 25

1.67 Edit Line Commands

Replaces one or more occurrences of a character string with another string
within the active AWS.
1.67.1 Syntax
Edit Line Commands
──┬─E─┬───┬──┬───────────────────┬──┬─────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ └─/string1/string2/─┘ │
├─EE─┬───────────────────┬────────┤
│ └─/string1/string2/─┘ │
├─EB─┬───────────────────┬────────┤
└─ET─┬───────────────────┬────────┘
└─/string1/string2/─┘
Command Description
E Edit one line. To edit multiple lines, specify:
v Number of lines on which edit is to occur.
EE Edit block of lines. EE must be entered on the first and last
line of the block of lines to be edited. The range of lines
need not appear in its entirety on one screen. Scrolling, as
will as other line commands, can be performed while a line
command is pending.
EB Edit all lines from the line containing the command through
the last line of the active AWS.
ET Edit all lines from the first line of the active AWS through
the line containing the command.
/string1/string2/ Delimited search and replacement strings. The combined
length of both strings must not exceed the length of a
terminal line.
If omitted, the strings specified using a previous edit line
command are used. If string1 is:
longer than string2 all data to the right of the original
string is shifted left; the remaining
columns of the line (or edit range) are
padded with blanks.
Omitted string2 replaces the contents of the
line(s). (Column limits are ignored.)

If string2 is:
Longer than string1 all data to the right of the original
string is shifted right. Any characters
extending beyond column 255 (or the
edit range) are lost.
Omitted string1 is deleted from the line(s); the
lines are not deleted.
1.67.2 Notes
■ By default, the entire line is searched for the specified string. The search
can be limited to specific columns by using the SET BOUNDS primary
command or the BOUNDS line command. The range remains in effect until
changed by another SET BOUNDS command or BOUNDS line command.

replacement string can be specified in either character format or its
hexadecimal representation. The string THE can be specified as either:
THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.

BROTHER match the string /THE/).

Tracking Changed Lines:

■ When an edit operation completes successfully, the user receives a message
stating the number of lines changed. To track lines that have been affected
by an edit operation, the user can issue the SET EDITCHNG command
before performing the edit. (SET EDITCHNG ON causes the sequence
number field of the appropriate lines to contain '==CHG>'.)

FILL N/A
PREFIX
SUFFIX
EDIT
XLATE XL, XLB, XLT
SET EDITCHNG N/A
1.67.3.1 Example
■ To replace every occurrence of the string INC-TAX-FILE with the string

TAX-FILE from line 1200 through the end of the active AWS:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...
...... ========================== T O P ==========
EB12 /INC-TAX-FILE/TAX-FILE/
13 FILE SECTION.
14 FD INC-TAX-FILE
15 RECORDING MODE F

1.68 EDSN
1.68 EDSN
|
| Invokes an RPF that establishes or continues a data set editing session.
|1.68.1 Syntax
|
| EDSN Command
| ──EDSN──┬───────────────────┬──┬────────────────┬──────────────
| ├──────────────────┤ └─Volume charstr─┘
| └─dsn─┬──────────┬──┘
| └─(dsnmem)─┘
| ──┬──────────────┬──┬───────────────────────────┬───────────────
| └─UNIT charstr─┘ └─PSWd charstr─┬─────────┬──┘
| └─charstr─┘
| ──┬─────────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────
| └─ARC charstr─┘
| With no operands, displays the Edit Data Set Facility menu.
| * Causes the active edited data set object to be redisplayed for
| editing. If no data set has been previously edited, the currently
| attached data set will be selected. If no data sets are active, the Edit
| Data Set Facility menu is displayed.
| dsn One- to 4four-character fully qualified name of the data set object to
| be edited.
| The name cannot include wildcard characters. If the data set is not
| physical sequential, it must be qualified with:
| dsnmem
| One- to eight-character name of the AllFusion
| CA-Librarian module or PDS member to be edited.
| Volume One- to six-character serial number of the volume on which the
| data set resides. Only one serial number may be specified. (Volume
| cannot be specified with AllFusion CA-Librarian data sets defined
| as VSAM.)
| ■ Volume is required if the data set is not cataloged.
| ■ Volume may be abbreviated in the following ways: VOLUME,
| VOL, or V.
| UNIT One- to eight-character unit name associated with the device type
| on which the data set resides. It may be either an IBM-defined
| generic name (for example, 3380) or a site-defined esoteric name
| (for example, SYSDA). Required if the data set is not cataloged and
| resides on a mass storage device. Only one unit name may be

1.68 EDSN
| specified. (UNIT cannot be specified with AllFusion CA-Librarian

| data sets defined as VSAM.)
| PSWd Password(s), established by the site, for the designated data set or
| AllFusion CA-Librarian master file. If omitted and a password is
| required, access is denied.
| If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or
| AllFusion CA-Librarian master file module password.
| If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data set
| password and the second is treated as the AllFusion CA-Librarian
| password.
| ARC Archive level of the AllFusion CA-Librarian master file module to
| be edited. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) If omitted,
| the most current level of the module is edited.
| The level may be specified in one of the following forms:
| Lx Absolute level number (between 0 and 65535) as
| reported on the AllFusion CA-Librarian Update
| Report.
| -y Relative level number between 0 and 255. The
| current level is -0; -1 is one level older than the
| current.
| yymmddhhmmss Date and time when the desired archive level
| was current. An even number of digits (starting
| from the right) may be omitted. Omitted digits
| are assumed to have the highest values that are
| consistent with the values of those digits that are
| specified.
| Note: If archive resolution is being specified to
| the minute and second, enclose the value
| in apostrophes.
|1.68.2 Notes
| Data Set Editing Criteria:
| To be edited, the data set must:

| 1. Reside on an online DASD volume or a mass storage volume capable of
| being staged. Tape volumes and offline DASD volumes may be accessed
| only if the requested data set has been migrated by IBM's Hierarchical
| Storage Manager (HSM) and HSM is currently active.
| 2. Not be under exclusive control by another task executing in the computer
| nor allocated with DISP=OLD in the Advantage CA-Roscoe JCL.

1.68 EDSN
| 3. Not use the track overflow feature.

| 4. Not have a variable spanned record format.
| 5. Not have its access prevented by site specifications made by the system
| programmer.
| Editing/Reediting the Data Set Edit Facility:

| ■ The Data Set Edit Facility remains active until explicitly deactivated using
| the CDSN or SDSN commands, or until the Advantage CA-Roscoe session
| is ended.
| ■ Executing a command that causes output to the Execution Area (for
| example, ATTACH LIB) or pressing the CLEAR key places the Data Set
| Edit Facility in a 'pending' state. The data set can be edited again at any
| time by issuing EDSN *.
| ■ If a data set is currently being edited and you invoke edit for another one,
| you will not be prompted to discontinue editing or save the first data set.
| You need to enter the SDSN or CDSN command first, and then you can
| edit another data set.
| Using the Edit Data Set Facility Panel:

| ■ You can specify the data set to be edited as part of the EDSN syntax from
| the command line. If you do not specify a data set name, the panel below
| will be displayed.
| Edit Data Set Facility Display
| <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
|
| EDIT DATA SET FACILITY
| FUNCTION ===>
| DATA SET ===>

| VOLUME ===> PASSWORD ===>
| UNIT ===> ARCHIVE LEVEL ===>
| E - EDIT DATA SET X - TERMINATE EDIT DATA SET

|
| ■ From the Edit Data Set Facility panel, there are only two functions to
| perform: Edit or Terminate. Edit (or E) begins the data set editing session.
| The specified data set is attached in a modifiable AWS. Terminate (or T)
| ends the data set edit completely. That is, if you were previously editing a
| data set, the editing session is cancelled, and no data is saved.

1.68 EDSN

| ATTACH DSN N/A
| CDSN
| QDSN
| SDSN
|1.68.3.1 Examples
| ■ To edit module ABC of the data set or AllFusion CA-Librarian master file
| named TEST.SAMPLE:
| EDSN TEST.SAMPLE(ABC)
| ■ To reestablish editing of the data set TEST.SAMPLE that had been invoked
| by a previous EDSN command:
| EDSN

1.69 ETC
1.69 ETC
Permits CA-ETC to be used during a Advantage CA-Roscoe terminal session.
1.69.1 Syntax
ETC Command
──ETC─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.69.2 Notes
Start CA-ETC Session:
■ At sites using CA-ETC, executing the ETC command causes the CA-ETC
frontispiece to be displayed. (CA-ETC is an extended text composition
system that automates the preparation, composition, updating and
maintenance of any textual material. All Advantage CA-Roscoe manuals
are prepared using CA-ETC.) All CA-ETC facilities are available to
Advantage CA-Roscoe users.
End CA-ETC Session:

■ To terminate a CA-ETC session, enter the OFF command.
Restrictions:
■ CA-ETC cannot be executed during Advantage CA-Roscoe split screen
processing. Likewise, Advantage CA-Roscoe split screen processing cannot
be invoked during a CA-ETC session.
■ The ETC command cannot be issued when the Advantage CA-Roscoe
See the descriptions of the :commands for information about specific screen
escape actions that can be performed during a CA-ETC session.

1.70 EXCL
1.70 EXCL
Locates and displays all lines not containing a specific character string.
1.70.1 Syntax
EXCL Command
──EXCL──┬──────────────────────────────────┬──┬─────────┬──────
└─scope─┬───┬─e─┬───────────────┬──┘ └─LITeral─┘
└─s─┘ └─string─┬───┬──┘
└─n─┘
──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬─────────────────────────────────────────
└─context─┘ └─Mix─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, locates and displays all lines not containing the
previously specified string in the currently attached data.
scope Qualifies the data to be affected. If omitted, the currently attached
data is affected. If specified, it must be one of the following:
AWS Causes the active AWS to be reattached and searched for
the specified string. (Abbreviate as A.)
DSN Causes the pending data set object to be reattached and
searched for the specified string. (Abbreviate as D.)
JOB Causes the pending job output file to be reattached and
searched for the specified string. (Abbreviate as J.)
LIB Causes the pending library member or Selection List to be
reattached and searched for the specified string. (Abbreviate
as L.)
string Search string, which cannot exceed characters in length. If omitted,
the string specified with the previously executed EXCL, FIRST,
INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command or the
ATTACH primary command is used.
n Number of lines to be searched. If omitted, the default is: 1) the
end of the active AWS or library member, or 2) the site-defined
search limit for the data set object or job output.

1.70 EXCL
LITERAL Prevents the search string from being interpreted (for example,
interpretation.
following:
non-alphanumeric character). (Abbreviate as BEG.)
alphanumeric character). (Abbreviate as PRE.)
preceded and followed by an alphanumeric character).
or IMB.)
non-alphanumeric character).
Note: The LITERAL or context keywords may be specified in any order as
long as they are placed at the end of the command.
1.70.2 Notes
EXCL Requirements/Scope:
■ This command is valid only when SET DISPLAY NUMX is in effect.
■ The search for lines not containing the string begins with the first
displayed line or the line at which the pointer is currently positioned.

1.70 EXCL

A single execution: Specify the s and e operands with the command
(for example, EXCL 20 30 ABC). After the
default range is restored.
equal to e.

Delimiting Search Strings:

■ When entered at the terminal, delimit the string when it:
1. includes a space (for example, EXCL 'A B'),
2. is numeric (for example, EXCL /578/),
3. matches one of the command's keyword operands (for example, EXCL
/JOB/).
■ When used within an RPF program, the string must be delimited.

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.

1.70 EXCL


strings that:
space).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.
EXCL Command Display:

■ If matching strings are found, the resulting display begins with the last
line of the implicit or explicit search limit.
■ If non-matching strings are found, the resulting modifiable display:
– Contains a top-line indicator to note that it is a limited display.

1.70 EXCL
– Is terminated by entering any primary command or line command

other than EXCL with no operand or by pressing the Enter key
without having entered any command.
– Indicates the number of non-matching lines.
■ If the number of lines in the display exceeds the size of the screen, you can
resume operation by:
1. Pressing one of the PF keys to which a scroll function is assigned. The
direction of the scan depends on the value of the scroll key that is
pressed (for example, scroll forward causes EXCL to scan towards the
end of the data from the current location).
2. Entering the EXCL line command, with no operand, in the sequence
number field of a line and pressing Enter. The active AWS must be
attached. The scan begins with that line and continues towards the end
of the data.
■ The resulting display is:
– Modifiable if produced when searching the active AWS.
– Semi-modifiable if produced when searching a Selection List (function
codes may be entered).
– Non-modifiable if produced when searching a data set,
member/module, job output file or library member.
■ To see the data following a particular line in the EXCL display:
– With the AWS, type an asterisk (*) in the sequence number field of the
appropriate line and press the Enter key.
– With any other form of attached data, 1) use the POINT command (for
example, POINT LINE 500), or 2) place the cursor at the desired line
(using the cursor positioning keys) and press the Enter key.

AWS If match found, at the first line.
If no match, at the end of the active AWS or given
range.
DSN If match found, at the first line.
If no match, at the end of the file or given range.
JOB If match found, at the first line.
LIB If match found, at the first line.
If no match, at the end of the member or given range.

1.70 EXCL

Specific Occurrence: Specific Occurrence:
FIRST FIRST
LAST LAST
NEXT NEXT
PREV PREV
All/None Occurrences: All/None Occurrences:
EXCL
INCL INCL
OMIT OMIT
SEARCH
1.70.4.1 Examples
■ To locate and display every line not containing the word PROC in the
currently attached data:
EXCL PROC WORD
Because the string is qualified, a word such as PROCEDURE will not
match. To find those lines not containing a word beginning with PROC,
you might enter:
EXCL PROC PREFIX
■ To locate and display every line in the currently attached data not
containing the string XYZ in columns 10 through 50:
EXCL 1 5 XYZ
■ To search the next 60 lines and display every line not containing the string
DIVISION:
EXCL DIVISION 6
■ To reattach the currently attached job and then locate and display every
line not containing the string AWS in columns 10 through 50:
EXCL JOB 1 5 /AWS/
The search string is qualified since it matches a keyword operand of the
command.
■ To reattached the previously attached data set object and display every
line (without altering the screen positioning) not containing the previously
specified string:
EXCL DSN LOCKED

1.71 EXCL Line Command

Locates and displays every line not containing the specified search string.
1.71.1 Syntax
EXCL Line Command
──EXCL──┬──────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────
└─/string/─┘
Operand Description
/string/ Search string, which must not exceed the length of a terminal line
and must be bound by delimiters. If omitted, the string specified
with the previously executed EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT, or
PREV primary or line command or the ATTACH primary command
is used.
1.71.2 Notes
■ The line on which EXCL is entered is included in the search.


THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.


BROTHER march the string /THE/).
EXCL Line Command Display:

■ If matching strings are found, the resulting display begins with the last
■ If matching strings are found, the resulting modifiable display:
other an EXCL with no operand or by pressing the Enter key without
having entered any command.
– Indicates the number of non-matching lines.
1. Entering the EXCL line command, with no operand, in the sequence
number field of a line and pressing Enter. The scan begins with that
line and continues towards the end of the active AWS, or
pressed (for example, scroll forward causes EXCL to scan towards the
end of the active AWS from the current location).
■ To see the data that follows a particular line in the EXCL display, type an
asterisk (*) in the sequence number field of the appropriate line and press
the Enter key.

FIRST FIRST
LAST LAST
NEXT NEXT
PREV PREV


EXCL
INCL INCL
OMIT OMIT
RCH
1.71.3.1 Examples
■ To display every line in the active AWS that does not contain the string
FILLER:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+..
...... ========================== T O P =========
EXCL /FILLER/CATION DIVISION.
3
■ To display every line that does not contain the previously specified string:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+..
...... ========================== T O P =========
EXCL IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
3

1.72 EXEC
1.72 EXEC
Initiates execution of an RPF program.
1.72.1 Syntax
EXEC Command
┌──
────────┐
┬──────┬┴───────────────────────────────────
──┬──────┬──mem───
└─EXEC─┘ └─expr─┘
Operand Description
mem Name of the library member containing the RPF program to be
executed.
expr Value passed to the invoked program. A maximum of eight (8)
expressions can be passed. They are placed sequentially in the
argument variables available to the invoked program.
1.72.2 Notes
Explicit Program Invocation:
■ The EXEC command need only be specified when the name of the
program to be executed matches the name of a Advantage CA-Roscoe or
Monitor command (for example, EXEC IMPORT).
Implicit Program Invocation:

■ If EXEC is omitted and
– A prefix is specified with the program name, the library associated
with the designated prefix is checked for the member containing the
program.
– No prefix is specified, the user's library is checked for the program. If
the member is not found, the optional RPF Execution Library is then
checked for the program.
– The program is specified in the form:
.prog-name
The pseudo Execution Library is examined for the member containing
the program. (Your site management will tell you if this optional
facility is available at your site.)

1.72 EXEC
Program Control:
■ When a program is invoked, control transfers to the member containing
that program. Its commands are sequentially executed until the end of the
program, RETURN or STOP is reached. Control then returns to the
terminal user.
Argument Variables:
■ Each program has a maximum of 8 argument variables. The contents of
these variables are set by the expressions passed with the EXEC command.
(The values of the expressions are placed sequentially in the argument
variables. Unused argument variables contain null values.)
■ The expressions can be:
– Character strings, which only need to be delimited if they contain
spaces (for example, EXEC ABC HELLO 'GOOD BY').
– Numeric values (for example, EXEC ABC 123 933).
– Alphanumeric values (for example, EXEC ABC 123ABC ABC123).
– Null value (for example, EXEC ABC ONE ' ' TWO).
■ The expressions cannot be:
– A variable. Variables are not recognized when entered from the
terminal (for example, if EXEC ABC L2 is entered, L2 is assumed to be
a string; not a local variable).
– The result of an arithmetic expression as in: EXEC ABC 1+2.
For Additional Information:

■ The syntax of EXEC shown in this manual handles initial program
invocation only. See the RPF Language Guide for a complete description of
this command.
1.72.2.1 Examples
■ To execute the RPF program in the library member named SCHEDULE:

EXEC SCHEDULE
■ To pass expressions to the RPF program in the member named BUILDJCL
when invoking that program:
EXEC BUILDJCL 'DSN=SYS1.MACLIB' 'DISP=SHR'

1.73 EXPORT
1.73 EXPORT
To write data from the active AWS and one or more library members to one of
the following:
■ An MVS data set.
■ A AllFusion CA-Librarian Master File.
■ An AllFusion CA-Panvalet library file.
Each use of the EXPORT command is discussed individually on the following

pages.

1.74 EXPORT (MVS Data Set)

Writes to an existing MVS data set from the active AWS and one or more
library members.
1.74.1 Syntax
EXPORT (MVS Data Set) Command
──EXPort──DSName=dsn─┬──────────┬───┬───────────────┬──────────
└─(dsnmem)─┘ └─MEMber=dsnmem─┘
──┬────────────────────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──────────
│ ┌──
─────────────┐ │ └─UNIt=charstr─┘
┬───────────┬┴──┘
└─INPut=charstr──
└─/charstr/─┘
──┬────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──────────────────────────
└─VOLume=charstr─┘ └─DISp=charstr─┘
──┬───────────────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬──────────────
└─RANge=─┬───┬──┬────┬──┘ └─PASsword=charstr─┘
└─p─┘ └─/q─┘
Operand Description
DSName= Name of the data set where data is to be written.
(dsnmem) Name of a PDS member. It can be specified with
either the DSNAME or MEMBER operand but not
with both.
MEMber= Name of a PDS member where data is to be written.
INPut= Location of the data to be written. If omitted, the input is
assumed to be in the active AWS. The input can be specified as
either:
* Current contents of active AWS.
[pfx.] mem Contents of library member. The prefix is required if
the member is not in the library of the user signed
on.
Any combination of the AWS or library members can be specified
as long as the total number of input sources does not exceed 10.
The same source can be specified more than once. If multiple
input sources are specified, they must be separated by slashes.

UNIt= Required for mass storage devices. Specify 3380V or VIRTUAL.

VOLume= Serial number of the volume where the data set is to be written.
VOLUME is required if the data set is not cataloged.
DISp= Disposition of the data set. If omitted, the default is OLD. If
specified, it must be in the form MOD or OLD. (DISP=MOD is
valid only for sequential files.)
RANge= Starting (p) and ending (q) line number in the first (or default)
input source that is to be written. (The range can also be
designated by the keywords FIRST (for p) and LAST (for q).) If
RANGE is not specified, the entire contents of the input source is
written. If p is omitted, FIRST is assumed. If q is omitted, LAST
is assumed. If only one number is specified, its position is
determined by the absence or presence of the slash.
PASsword= Data set password established by the site. If omitted, a prompt is
issued if the data set is password protected.
1.74.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ EXPORT is a Monitor command. Site management has the option of
restricting its use.
■ If its use is not restricted, see Appendix B for the extended syntax that
permits the input to be read from a library member.
Including Operands With the Command:

■ If EXPORT is entered with operands, the combined length of all of the
operands cannot exceed 200 characters in length.
■ If EXPORT is entered with no operands,the user is prompted. In response
to the prompts:
ENTER DATA SET NAME
Enter only the name; do not enter the keyword DSNAME=.
ENTER EXPORT OPERANDS
Enter one or more operands. The combined length of the operands may
not exceed 200 characters per line. To indicate a continuation, terminate the
line with a comma followed by a space; begin the continuation anywhere
on the following line. (Operands cannot be broken over two lines.)

EXPORT Criteria:
■ To be exported, a data set must meet the following criteria:
1. It must be resident on a single direct access volume. Multivolume data
sets cannot be handled.
2. It may not be under the control of another task executing in the
computer.
3. The DCB attributes of the data set must be defined in the DSCB.
4. The DSORG must be PS, PO or DA; the RECFM may not be undefined
or spanned; and the KEYLEN must be zero.
5. You must have the appropriate data set security authorization.
6. It may not be in a format that requires a special handler.
■ The length of each EXPORTed line is padded or truncated to equal the
logical record length (LRECL) of the file. If the LRECL is greater than 255,
each EXPORTed line is padded to the right with spaces. If the LRECL is
less than 255, each line is truncated. Variable-length records are handled
by calculating the actual length (up through the last non-blank character of
the input line).
■ When a member of a PDS is stowed, it replaces any preexisting member of
the same name. The directory entry has no user fields and consists of 12
bytes (8-byte name and 4-byte TTRC field).
Validation and Error Handling:

■ Extensive validation of the output data set is performed before and during
OPEN processing. If any attributes of the output data set are unacceptable
to EXPORT, the operation is terminated.
■ No check is made for the end of extent conditions. If a D37 or E37 abend
occurs, EXPORT will recover and inform the user of the abend code.
■ An error in EXPORT can occur if there is an I/O error on the input or
output data sets. In these circumstances, if the output data set is PS, the
starting address will be pointed to and the data set closed. If the output
data set is PO, no STOW will be performed and the data set will be closed.

IMPORT N/A

1.74.3.1 Examples
The following examples assume that messages EXP60, EXP68 and EXP69 have
not been suppressed by site management or by the SET MONLEVEL
command.
■ To write the first 50 records in the active AWS to the PDS member named
XXX:
EXPORT DSNAME=ABC.DEF(XXX) INPUT= RANGE=FIRST/5
The resulting summary messages would be:
EXP6: 5 RECORDS WRITTEN TO DATA SET
ABC.DEF(XXX) - MEMBER REPLACED ON VOL STOR3
EXP69: SUCCESSFUL EXECUTION OF EXPORT...
■ To add a member to the data set ABC.DEF where the input consists of 216
records in the library member AAA.COBMOD and 108 records in the
AWS:
EXPORT DSN=ABC.DEF(TESTMOD) INPUT=AAA.COBMOD/
The summary messages would be:
ABC.DEF(TESTMOD) - MEMBER ADDED ON VOLUME STOR3
■ The following examples illustrate the ways in which the positional
RANGE= operands can be specified:
RANGE=200/500 Include all records from line 200 through line 500.
RANGE=/500 Include all records from the first line through line
500.
RANGE=FIRST Include all records from the first line through the last
line.
RANGE=/FIRST Include only the first line.
RANGE=/LAST Include all records from the first line through the last
line.
RANGE=LAST Include only the last line.

1.75 EXPORT (AllFusion CA-Librarian Master File)

Writes to an existing AllFusion CA-Librarian master file from the active AWS
and/or one or more Advantage CA-Roscoe library members.
1.75.1 Syntax
EXPORT (AllFusion CA-Librarian Master File)
──┬────────────────────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──────────
│ ┌──
─────────────┐ │ └─UNIt=charstr─┘
┬───────────┬┴──┘
──┬────────────────┬──┬───────────────────────┬─────────────────
└─VOLume=charstr─┘ └─RANge=─┬───┬──┬────┬──┘
└─p─┘ └─/q─┘
──┬──────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────
└─PASsword=charstr─┘
Operand Description
DSName= Name of the AllFusion CA-Librarian master file to which data
will be written.
(dsnmem) Name of a AllFusion CA-Librarian module. It
can be specified with either the DSNAME or
MEMBER operand but not with both.
MEMber= Name of a AllFusion CA-Librarian module to be updated.
Note: If DSNAME or MEMBER specifies a AllFusion
CA-Librarian master file module name, the AllFusion
CA-Librarian LIBAUDIT option is invoked. If LIBAUDIT
is not available, an error occurs. Do not specify a module
name when adding a new module.
assumed to be in the active AWS. The input can be specified as
either:
[ pfx. ] mem Contents of library member. The prefix is
required if the member is not in the library of
the user signed on.
Any combination of the AWS and/or library members can be
specified as long as the total number of input sources does not
exceed 10. The same source can be specified more than once. If

multiple input sources are specified, they must be separated by

slashes.
| UNIt= Required for mass storage devices. (UNIT= cannot be used with
| AllFusion CA-Librarian data sets defined as VSAM.) Specify
3380V or VIRTUAL.
VOLume= Serial number of the volume on which the data set is to be
written. VOLUME is required if the data set is not cataloged.
| (VOLUME= cannot be used with AllFusion CA-Librarian data
| sets defined as VSAM.)
designated by the keywords FIRST (for p) and LAST (for q).) If
RANGE is not specified, the entire contents of the input source is
written. If p is omitted, FIRST is assumed. If q is omitted, LAST
is assumed. If only one number is specified, its position is
determined by the absence or presence of the slash.
PSWd= Password for the AllFusion CA-Librarian master file module.
PSWD is required if the module is password protected.
1.75.2 Notes
Restrictions:

to the prompts:
ENTER DATA SET NAME

Exporting to AllFusion CA-Librarian Files:

■ If a AllFusion CA-Librarian master file and module name are specified,
EXPORT always attempts to invoke the AllFusion CA-Librarian LIBAUDIT
option prior to updating the file.
| Do not specify the module name in the Advantage CA-Roscoe EXPORT
| command when adding a new module.
| ■ If LIBAUDIT is not available (for releases below 3.9), EXPORT terminates
| with the appropriate error message.
■ If -PGMR, -LANG, -DESC, -HST, -COM, -JCL, -JCLT, or -HSTD precede
the first line of data, they are included 'as is' in the generated AllFusion
CA-Librarian control stream. These control statements must occur in the
order specified by the appropriate AllFusion CA-Librarian documentation.
■ All AllFusion CA-Librarian control statements that appear after the first
data record are passed to LIBAUDIT for processing.
| ■ To add a new member, the first data record must be a --ADD control
| statement and the module name must not be specified in the Advantage
| CA-Roscoe EXPORT command.
| ■ Using a AllFusion CA-Librarian-specific operand in the EXPORT command
| will restrict processing to AllFusion CA-Librarian only. (MVS and
| AllFusion CA-Panvalet access will not be attempted.)
Output From Updating a AllFusion CA-Librarian File:

■ The output from EXPORT consists of an updated AllFusion CA-Librarian
master file, a message (if applicable), and a library member.
■ The contents of the library member correspond to the batch AllFusion
CA-Librarian REPORT listing (there is no analogue in EXPORT for the
batch INDEX or LIST files). The member is placed on the library according
to the options chosen by site management. The options and their defaults
are:
Name LIBUPD
Size 1,000 lines. Execution terminates if the update causes the
resulting output to exceed the site maximum.
Owner The user. If site management assigns ownership to a control
profile, the user cannot delete the member.
Contents The output from the current update replaces the output from
the previous update. Site management can create a generation
name so that the output from the previous update is not lost.
■ The library member should be listed to determine the results of the update.
There is normally no other record of an EXPORT update.


MPORT N/A
1.75.3.1 Examples
The following examples assumes that messages EXP60, EXP68 and EXP69 have
command.
■ To add a module to the AllFusion CA-Librarian master file LIBR.MAST
where the input consists of five records in the active AWS and begins with
a -ADD control statement identifying the module:
EXPORT DSNAME=LIBR.MAST
The summary messages would be:
EXP6: 5 LCS RECORDS INPUT
LIBR.MAST - APPLIED VIA IOU
ON VOLUME STOR3 - IOU REPORT: AA.LIBUPD
■ To write the first 50 records in the active AWS to the module named XXX:
EXPORT DSNAME=ABC.MAST(XXX) INPUT= RANGE=FIRST/5
ABC.MAST(XXX) - MEMBER REPLACED ON VOL STOR3
500.
line.
line.

1.76 EXPORT (AllFusion CA-Panvalet File)

Writes to an existing AllFusion CA-Panvalet member from the active AWS and
one or more library members.
1.76.1 Syntax
EXPORT (AllFusion CA-Panvalet File)
──┬────────────────┬──┬─────────────────┬───────────────────────
└─ACCess=charstr─┘ └─CONtrol=charstr─┘
──┬────────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬──────────────────────
│ ┌─Y─┐ │ └─LANguage=charstr─┘
└─FORmat=─┴─N─┴──┘
──┬────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──────────────────────────
└─SLEvel=charstr─┘ └─USEr=charstr─┘
──┬────────────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────
│ ┌──
─────────────┐ │
┬───────────┬┴──┘
──┬───────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────
└─RANge=─┬───┬──┬────┬──┘
└─p─┘ └─/q─┘
Operand Description
DSName= Name of the AllFusion CA-Panvalet library data set to be
written to.
(dsnmem)
One- to ten-character name of an AllFusion
CA-Panvalet member. It can be specified with
either the DSNAME or MEMBER operand but not
with both. If omitted, a prompt is issued.
MEMber= One- to ten-character name of an AllFusion CA-Panvalet
member to be created or replaced.
ACCess= One- to five-digit AllFusion CA-Panvalet access code.
Interpretation by AllFusion CA-Panvalet is based on the
member security level.
ACCESS is used when replacing an existing AllFusion
CA-Panvalet member. It may not used if the AllFusion
CA-Panvalet member does not exist (when creating a new
member.)

CONtrol= One- to five-digit code required by AllFusion CA-Panvalet to

override any restricted access to the library system. The code
is not member-specific.
FORmat= Designate AllFusion CA-Panvalet member formatting by
specifying:
Y Normal AllFusion CA-Panvalet member formatting
based on Language type. Y is the default.
N Data is moved as is.
FORMAT is used when creating new AllFusion CA-Panvalet
members. It may not be used when replacing existing
AllFusion CA-Panvalet members.
LANguage= One- to eight-character standard AllFusion CA-Panvalet
language type code. This operand is not permitted when
replacing AllFusion CA-Panvalet members. If omitted, the
default is UNSPEC.
SLEvel= 1 digit AllFusion CA-Panvalet member security level, specified
as:
0 No member security.
1, 2, or 3 Standard AllFusion CA-Panvalet member security
options.
The defaults are:
■ 0 - when creating a new AllFusion CA-Panvalet member.
■ no change - when replacing an AllFusion CA-Panvalet
member.
Note: When replacing a member, the security level cannot be
changed if the User code is also changed because a
new User code requires a changed Access code.
USEr= One- to four-digit user code; leading zeros may be omitted.
When member security level is set to 0, the User code is
ignored by AllFusion CA-Panvalet and displayed in the
IMPORT directory list. When member security level is set to 1,
2, or 3, the User code is part of the required Access code for
the member, and is not displayed in the IMPORT directory
list.
The defaults are:
■ 0000 - when creating a new AllFusion CA-Panvalet
member.
■ no change - when replacing an AllFusion CA-Panvalet
member.
Note: When specified, the User code is changed after the
member is replaced or created.


assumed to be in the active AWS. The input can be specified
as either:
[ pfx. ] mem Contents of library member. The prefix is
required if the member is not in the library of
the user signed on.
Any combination of the AWS or library members can be
specified as long as the total number of input sources does not
exceed 10. The same source can be specified more than once.
If multiple input sources are specified, they must be separated
by slashes.
designated by the keywords FIRST (for p) and LAST (for q).)
If both p and q are omitted, the entire contents of the input
source is written. If p is omitted, FIRST is assumed. If q is
omitted, LAST is assumed. If only one number is specified, its
position is determined by the absence or presence of the slash.
1.76.2 Notes
Restrictions:

to the prompts:
ENTER DATA SET NAME
Exporting to AllFusion CA-Panvalet Members:

■ AllFusion CA-Panvalet library members are created if they do not exist or

replaced if they exist.
■ AllFusion CA-Panvalet member subsets cannot be created or replaced.
■ By default, Advantage CA-Roscoe attempts to EXPORT to AllFusion
CA-Panvalet members after attempting to access the data set using
AllFusion CA-Librarian.
■ Using an AllFusion CA-Panvalet-specific operand or a 9-10 character
member name in the EXPORT command restricts processing to AllFusion
CA-Panvalet only. (MVS and AllFusion CA-Librarian access is not
attempted.)
Processing may be further restricted by specifying the following operands:
ACCESS To ensure AllFusion CA-Panvalet member update (no new
member created).
FORMAT or LANGUAGE
To ensure new AllFusion CA-Panvalet member creation (no
accidental member replacement.)

IMPORT N/A
1.76.3.1 Example
The following example assumes that messages EXP60, EXP68 and EXP69 have
command.
■ To replace the AllFusion CA-Panvalet member XXX in library ABC.PANV,
where input consists of 250 records in the library member AAA.COBMOD:
EXPORT DSNAME=ABC.PANV(XXX) INPUT=AAA.COBMOD
EXP6: 25 RECORDS WRITTEN TO PANVALET LIBRARY
AAA.PAN(XXX) - MEMBER REPLACED ON VOL STOR3
500.

line.
line.

1.77 FETCH
1.77 FETCH
Brings all or part of a library member into the active AWS.
1.77.1 Syntax
FEYCH Command
──Fetch──mem──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬──────┬─────────────
└─p─┬───┬──┘ └─STart v─┘ └─BY i─┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
mem Name of the library member.
p q Number of the first and last lines to be brought into the active
AWS. If only one number is specified, only that line is retrieved.
STart Starting value for renumber operation.
BY Increment value, not exceeding six digits in length, for the new line
numbers.
1.77.2 Notes
Remembering Member Name:
■ When a FETCH command is issued, the library member name is stored for
later use by the UPDATE or SAVE command. The name is retained until:
– The AWS is deleted,
– Another FETCH command is issued, or
– A SAVE command is executed with a different name.
■ The STATUS AWS command displays the name of the last library member
fetched, updated or saved.
Overlaying Data:
■ FETCH overlays the contents of the active AWS (if any) with the
designated library member. If the specified library member is not found,
the contents of the AWS is not affected.

1.77 FETCH
Renumbering the AWS:

■ By default, the sequence numbers associated with the library member are
used when the data is placed in the AWS. The START or BY operands can
be used to change the sequence numbers. If only a START value is
specified, the increment value used with the last RENUMBER or FETCH
command is used. If only a BY value is specified, that value is used as
both the starting and increment value.

AWS At the first line in the AWS.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
XCOPY, XCOPYS,
XCOPYX
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN N/A
COPY
IMPORT
MERGE
Renumber AWS Contents: Renumber AWS Contents:
RENUMBER N/A

1.77 FETCH
1.77.4.1 Examples
■ To copy all of the library member named INVLIST into the active AWS
and renumber the AWS from 50 by 50:
FETCH INVLIST START 5 BY 5
■ To copy lines 500 through 2700 from the library member SAMPLE, which
is owned by the individual assigned the prefix ABC, and to renumber the
AWS from 100 by 100:
FETCH ABC.SAMPLE 5 27 BY 1

1.78 FILL
1.78 FILL
Forces a string of characters into specific columns of the active AWS.
1.78.1 Syntax
FILL Command
──FILL──┬─────────────────────────────────────────┬───────────
├─F───────────────────────────────────────┤
├──┬───┬─ e───────────────────────────────┤
│ └─s─┘ │
└─┬──────────┬──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬─┘
└─/string/─┘ └─p─┬───┬──┘ └─LITeral─┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
F Terminates FILL after forcing the string into the first line found
within the specified range.
s e Number of the starting and ending columns to be affected by the
operation. If only one number is specified, it is assumed to be the
/string/ String which may not exceed 80 characters in length and must be
bound by delimiters.
p q Number of the first and last lines to be filled by the string. If only
one number is specified, only that line is filled.
interpretation.
1.78.2 Notes
Results of FILL Execution:

■ If the string contains:
– More characters than fit within the specified column range, FILL
terminates.
– Fewer characters than the column range will hold, the string is
repeated until the columns are filled. If necessary, the last duplication
of the string is truncated to fit within the range.

1.78 FILL
Changing FILL Column Boundaries:

■ By default, the entire line is replaced by the specified string. To change the
column boundaries for:
(for example, FILL 20 30 /ABC/). After the
equal to e.
FILL 12 72). From the terminal, the command affects only the AWS. When
executed from within an RPF program, the command is comparable to SET
BOUNDS ALL. The range remains in effect until changed by a SET
and e operands.
Specifying the 'Fill' String:

■ Regardless of the form in which the data is displayed, the 'fill' string can
be specified in either character format or its hexadecimal representation.
THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.

1.78 FILL

AWS With FILL: At the end of the active AWS or given range.
(If TRACE EDIT is in effect and tracing is ended with an
attention, the position is uncertain). With FILL F: If a
match is found, at that line. If no match is found, at the
end of the active AWS or given range.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

Add String to Line: Add String to Line:
PREFIX N/A
SUFFIX
EDIT E, EE, EB, ET
XLATE XL, XLB, XLT
Trace Edits7colon Trace Edits:
SET EDITCHNG N/A
1.78.4.1 Examples
■ To cause lines 100 through 300 of the active AWS to contain a continuous
string of asterisks:
FILL // 1 3
■ To cause columns 1 through 3 to contain the string ABC:
FILL 1 3 /ABC/
■ To clear columns 30 through 255 of lines 1200 through 3800 and then to fill
columns 30 through 48 of those same lines with the string 'FILLER PIC X(
).':
FILL 3 255 / / 12 38
FILL 3 48 /FILLER PIC X( )./ 12 38

1.79 FIND
1.79 FIND
The FIND command has two functions:
■ To verify the existence of a library member and display information about
it.
■ To position a pointer within the active AWS to the first line containing a
specific string.
Both uses of the FIND command is discussed individually on the following

pages.

1.80 FIND (Member)
1.80 FIND (Member)

To verify the existence of a library member.
1.80.1 Syntax
FIND (Member) Command
──FIND──mem───────────────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
mem Name of the library member to be found.
1.80.2 Notes
The information displayed about the member contains the:
■ Library member name.
■ Member description or blanks if there is no description.
■ Date the member was created or last accessed.
■ Date the member was last updated or blanks if the member has never been
updated.
■ Number of lines in the member.
■ Member's sequence number attribute showing either: 1) the starting
column and length of the sequence number field, or 2) NOSEQ.
■ Member's access attribute, shown as: S (for SHARED), E (for EXECONLY),
or R (for RESTRICTED).

INFO LIB N/A

1.81 FIND (String)
1.81 FIND (String)

To position a pointer within the active AWS to the first line containing a
string.
1.81.1 Syntax
FIND (String) Command
──FIND──/string/──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬───────
└─p─┬───┬──┘ └─LITeral─┘ └─context─┘
└─q─┘
──┬─────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─Mix─┘
Operand Description
/string/ Search string, which may not exceed 80 characters in length and
one number is specified, only that line is searched.
interpretation.
following:
or IMB.)

1.81 FIND (String)

1.81.2 Notes
This command is intended for use in RPF programs.

can be limited to specific columns by using the SET BOUNDS primary
command or, if the AWS is attached, the BOUNDS line command. The
range remains in effect until changed by another SET BOUNDS primary
command or BOUNDS line command.

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.


1.81 FIND (String)

strings that:
period, or comma).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.


AWS A match is found, at that line. If no match, at the end of
the given range.
DSN
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

1.81 FIND (String)

BOTTOM N/A
POINT
TOP
1.81.4.1 Example
To position the pointer to the first occurrence of the string WIDGET in the
active AWS and then delete the line at which the pointer is positioned:
FIND /WIDGET/ DELETE

1.82 FIRST
1.82 FIRST
Searches the attached data and begins the display with either:
■ First occurrence of a particular character string
■ First occurrence of a specific location within job output
Both uses of the FIRST command are discussed individually on the following
pages.
To begin the display with the first line containing a particular character string.
1.82.1 Syntax
FIRST Command
──FIRST──┬───────┬──┬──────────┬──┬───────────────┬────────────
└─scope─┘ └──┬───┬─e─┘ └─string─┬───┬──┘
└─s─┘ └─n─┘
──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬──────────────
└─position─┘ └─LITeral─┘ └─context─┘ └─Mix─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, locates and displays the first occurrence of the
reattached and searched for the specified string.
(Abbreviate as L.)
string Search string, that cannot exceed 80 characters in length. If omitted,
the string specified with the previously executed EXCL, FIRST,
INCL, LAST, NEXT, or PREV primary or line command or the
ATTACH primary command is used.

1.82 FIRST

position Designates the screen positioning that is to occur when a match is
found. If omitted, the positioning currently in effect is used. If
specified, it must be one of the following:
CJUSTIFIED Alters the display margins only if the matching
string does not fall within the current margins.
(Abbreviate as CJUST or CJ.)
JUSTIFIED Alters the display margins so that the first
character of the matching string begins in the
left-most position of the line. (Abbreviate as JUST
or JUS.)
CENTERED Alters the display margins to center the matching
string on the line. If centering would cause an
invalid left margin (less than 1), the display is not
altered. (Abbreviate as CENT or CEN.)
LOCKED Never alters the display margins even if the
matching string occurs to the left or right of the
current margins. (Abbreviate as LOCK or LOC.)
interpretation.
following:
or IMB.)

1.82 FIRST

Note: The position, LITERAL, or context keywords may be
specified in any order as long as they are placed at the end
of the command.
1.82.2 Notes
(for example, FIRST 20 30 ABC). After the
equal to e.

1. includes a space (for example, FIRST 'A B'),
2. is numeric (for example, FIRST /578/),
3. matches one of the command's keyword operands (as in, FIRST
/JOB/).

specified in either character format or its hexadecimal representation. Thus,
the string THE can be specified as either:
THE or X'E3C8C5'

1.82 FIRST

X'string'
characters.

strings that:
period, or comma).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.

1.82 FIRST
FIRST Command Display:

■ If the string is not found, the screen is unchanged aside from a message
being displayed.
■ If the string is found, the resulting display begins with the line containing
the string. The AWS display is modifiable. (Use the F operand of the
SEARCH command to produce a non-modifiable AWS display.) The
display resulting from searching a data set object, job output file and/or
library member is not modifiable.


AWS If match found, at that line.
range.
DSN If match found, at that line.
JOB If match found, at that line.
LIB If match found, at that line.

(blank) FIRST
LAST LAST
NEXT NEXT
PREV PREV
EXCL EXCL
INCL INCL
OMIT
SEARCH

1.82 FIRST
1.82.4.1 Examples
■ To begin the display with the first occurrence of the string PAY in the
currently attached and displayed data:
FIRST PAY
■ To begin the display with the first occurrence of the string ABC in columns
1 through 50 of the data that is currently attached and displayed:
FIRST 1 5 ABC
■ To begin the display with the first occurrence of a previously specified
string that appears in columns 30 through 60:
FIRST 3 6
■ To reattach the currently attached job and begin the display with the first
occurrence of the word EXEC:
FIRST JOB EXEC WORD
Because the string is qualified, a word such as EXECUTE will not match
the specified string. To find the first occurrence of EXECUTE, either spell
the word out in full or qualify the string, as in:
FIRST JOB EXEC PREFIX
■ To reattach the active AWS and begin the display with the first occurrence
of the string DIVISION in the next 200 lines:
FIRST AWS DIVISION 2
■ To reattach the previously attached data set object and begin the display
(by centering the line) with the first occurrence of a previously specified
string occurring in columns 60 through 90:
FIRST DSN 6 9 CENTERED
■ To find the first occurrence of the string LIB in the currently attached data:
FIRST /LIB/
The search string is bound by delimiters since it matches a keyword
operand of the command.

1.83 FIRST JOB
1.83 FIRST JOB

To begin the display at the first occurrence of a specific location within job
output.
1.83.1 Syntax
FIRST JOB Command
──FIRST──┬─────┬──┬──────┬────────────────────────────────────
└─Job─┘ ├─File─┤
├─Page─┤
└─Line─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, uses the value specified with the previously
executed FIRST, LAST, NEXT, or PREV primary command.
Job Causes the pending job to be reattached at the designated location.
File Repositions display to begin with the first file of the attached and
displayed job. (Abbreviate as FILE, FIL, or F.)
Page Repositions display to begin with the first page of the job output
file currently displayed. (Abbreviate as PAGE, PAG, or P.)
Line Repositions display to begin with the first line of the job output file
currently displayed. (Abbreviate as LINE, LIN, or L.)
1.83.2 Notes
■ L, an abbreviation of the LINE operand, may only be used when the JOB
(or J) operand is also specified.
■ The displayed job output is not modifiable.

AWS N/A
DSN N/A
JOB At the designated file, page or line.
LIB N/A

1.83 FIRST JOB

LAST [ JOB ] N/A
NEXT [ JOB ]
PREV [ JOB ]
1.83.4.1 Examples
■ To reattach the previously attached job and begin the display with the first
file:
FIRST JOB FILE
■ To display the first file of job output that is attached and displayed:
FIRST FILE
■ To display the first page of the job output file that is currently attached
and displayed:
FIRST PAGE

1.84 FIRST Line Command

Locates and positions the display to begin with the first occurrence of a
specified search string in the active AWS.
1.84.1 Syntax
FIRST Line Command
──FIRST──┬──────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
is used.
1.84.2 Notes
The line on which FIRST is entered is included in the search.


THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.


FIRST Line Command Display:

■ The display produced by FIRST contains modifiable lines.

FIRST (blank)
LAST LAST
NEXT NEXT
PREV PREV
EXCL EXCL
INCL INCL
OMIT
SEARCH
1.84.3.1 Examples
■ To find the first occurrence of the string PROCEDURE:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P =============
FIRST /PROCEDURE/ION DIVISION.
3

■ To find the first occurrence of a previously specified string:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================= T O P ==============
FIRST IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
3

1.85 FREE
1.85 FREE
Deallocates one or more files that the user previously allocated for use under
ETSO.
1.85.1 Syntax
FREE Command
──FREE──┬─ALL──────────────────┬──────────────────────────────
│ ┌──
──────────┐ │
┬────────┬┴──┤
├─ddname──
│ └─ddname─┘ │
└─DSN=dsn──────────────┘
Operand Description
ALL Deallocates all files.
ddname DD name of the file to be deallocated. A maximum of 10 names
may be deallocated.
dsn Name of data set to be deallocated.
1.85.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ The FREE command is valid only when the Extended Time-Sharing Option
(ETSO) is active.
■ If you are using the FREE command in an RPF and have multiple DDs
specified using a single FREE command, an error encountered may cause
some DDs to remain allocated. In RPF processing, an error encountered
on a single line will stop the read of data for the remainder of the line. So,
if for any reason an error is encountered with one of the DDs, any DDs
specified after that DD will not be freed.
To avoid this, specify one FREE command for each DD on separate lines of
your RPF.
Releasing Concatenation Allocation:

■ To deallocate a data set that was originally part of a concatenated
allocation, use either FREE ALL or FREE ddname.

1.85 FREE

ALLOCATE N/A
CALL
CANCEL
DIVERT
QUERY ALLOCATE
QUERY CALL
QUERY DIVERT
RESUME
SET ESCAPE

1.86 HELP
1.86 HELP
Provides information about all primary, line, and Monitor commands plus all
RPF commands and facilities.
1.86.1 Syntax
HELP Command
──Help──┬────────────────────┬──┬──────────┬──────────────────
└─command──┬───────┬─┘ ├─Function─┤
└─level─┘ ├─Syntax───┤
└─Level────┘
Operand Description
With no operand, displays a description of the HELP facility.
command Name of a command or facility.
level Name of subcommand or command/facility qualification.
Function Displays only description.
Syntax Displays only command syntax.
Level Displays list of members providing additional or related
information.
1.86.2 Notes
Entering HELP With No Operand:
■ When HELP is entered, the resulting display identifies how to obtain
information about:
– HELP members that containing information that should be reviewed
by all Advantage CA-Roscoe users.
– The command notation conventions used in the HELP displays.
– The PF keys used to scroll through and between HELP displays.
Entering HELP With Operands:

■ The resulting display includes the function, syntax (with description) and,
when appropriate, list of associated levels.
■ The level operand qualifies a command or facility. It allows for:
– Direct access to a two-word command (for example, HELP SET MODE
or HELP PRINT STATUS),
– Command and its subcommand (for example, HELP DISPLAY
ACTIVE), or

1.86 HELP
– Qualified command or facility (for example, HELP MESSAGE CMD01).

■ If the FUNCTION, SYNTAX, or LEVEL operand is specified, the resulting
display is restricted to the requested information. To obtain additional
information, reenter the HELP command without the FUNCTION,
SYNTAX, or LEVEL operand. Exception: When FUNCTION, SYNTAX, or
LEVEL is used at a 3270-type terminal, the PF keys described below can be
used to display additional information.
Using PF Keys:
■ The HELP facility uses the following PF key settings:
PF7/19 Scrolls back to the beginning of the current level.
PF8/20 Scrolls forward within the current level.
PF10/22 Scrolls back to the previous level.
PF11/23 Scrolls forward to the next level.
■ If there is no additional information within a level or there is no previous
or next level, the display is unchanged.
Using Abbreviations:
■ Short and/or alternate forms of a command or level may be specified (for
example, HELP SUB provides information about the SUBMIT command).
■ The short forms of the FETCH, LIST, and SAVE commands (F, L, and S,
respectively) are exceptions to this rule.
– If F, L, or S is entered as the only operand of the HELP command, it is
assumed to be an operand abbreviation (for example, HELP F displays
the function of the HELP command; not the description of the FETCH
command).
– If F, L, or S is the first operand, it is treated as the short form of the
command (for example, HELP F S displays the syntax of the FETCH
command).
1.86.2.1 Examples
■ To display general information about the MOVE primary and line

commands:
HELP MOVE
■ To display all available information about the MOVE primary command:
HELP MOVE PRIMARY
■ To display a description of the message CMD01:
HELP MESSAGE CMD1
■ To display only the syntax of the ACTIVE subcommand of DISPLAY:
HELP DISPLAY ACTIVE SYNTAX

1.87 IMPORT
1.87 IMPORT
Copies all, part, or directories of the following into the active AWS or a library
member:
■ MVS data set
■ AllFusion CA-Librarian Master File
■ AllFusion CA-Panvalet library file
Each use of the IMPORT command is discussed individually on the following

pages.

1.88 IMPORT (MVS Data Set)

Copies all or part of an MVS data set into the active AWS or a library member.
1.88.1 Syntax
INPORT (MVS data Set) Command
──IMPort──DSName=dsn─┬──────────┬───┬────────────────────┬─────
├─(dsnmem)─┤ └─TO=mem─┬────────┬──┘
├─()──────┤ └─UPDATE─┘
└─(V)──────┘
──┬──────┬──┬───────────────────┬───────────────────────────────
├─ASIs─┤ ├─INClude=(charstr)─┤
└─HEX──┘ └─EXClude=(charstr)─┘
──┬──────────────────────────┬──┬─────────────────────┬─────────
│ ┌─,────┐ │ └─RECords=(p─┬────┬─)─┘
dsnmem┴─'─┘
└─RANge='dsnmem── └─,q─┘
──┬────────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──────────────────────
└─SEQfld─┬────────┬──┘ └─UNIt=charstr─┘
├─=s l───┤
└─=COBOL─┘
──┬────────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬──┬───────┬───────────
└─VOLume=charstr─┘ └─PASsword=charstr─┘ └─NOTTR─┘
──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬──WRAP=v────────────────────────────
└─OFFSET=s─┘ └─TRUNC=e─┘
Operand Description
DSName= Fully qualified name of the data set to be copied. The name may
be further qualified with one of the following:
(dsnmem)
Name of a PDS member.
(*) Displays formatted listing of a PDS directory.
(v) Relative generation number of the generation data set
being retrieved. It can be 0 (most current) or a
negative number.
TO= Name of the library member that is to contain the copied data.
If the library member exists, the operation can be qualified with:
UPDATE Causes the contents of member to be overlaid. If
omitted, the member is not overlaid and IMPORT
fails.
If the member does not exist, it is created. (If UPDATE is
specified, it is ignored.)

If this operand is omitted, the designated data is copied into the

active AWS.
ASIs Binary data is retrieved with no binary character replacement. If
omitted, all non-printable, non-displayable characters are replaced
with spaces to prevent terminal errors when listing binary data.
Do not display binary data.
HEX Each retrieved record is broken into segments of 32 bytes and
presented as a series of hexadecimal display lines interspersed
with EBCDIC display lines. Each record is preceded by a field
identifying its relative offset from the start of the record.
Note: HEX and ASIs are mutually exclusive. If both are entered,
HEX has precedence.
INClude=/EXClude=
Criteria to be used for copying data. INCLUDE and EXCLUDE
are ignored if the request is for a PDS directory.
The criteria may be specified as:
──┬─INClude=─┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─EXClude=─┘
──(─┬──────┬─/charstr1/─┬───────────┬──┬──────────┬─)──────────
└─NOT,─┘ └─s─┬────┬──┘ ├─OR───────┤
└─,e─┘ └─,AND,...─┘
The parameters, which may optionally be enclosed in

parentheses, must not contain any spaces.
NOT Negates the string it precedes. If the string is matched
and the operation is INCLUDE, the record is not
copied; if the operation is EXCLUDE, the record is
copied.
charstr1 One- to 35-character string appearing in the record(s)
to be copied. A maximum of 10 strings can be defined,
combined by ANDs or ORs.
s e Starting and ending columns to be scanned within the
record. The values must be entered on the same line
as the string to which they apply. If the starting
column is greater than the record length, the record is
rejected for INCLUDE operations and accepted for
EXCLUDE. If the ending column is greater than the
actual record length, IMPORT scans through the last
position of the record. If the ending column is omitted,
the search begins at the starting column and continues
through the end.

AND Strings on both sides of the AND must match for the
record to be included or excluded.
OR Only one string on either side of the OR must match
for the record to be included or excluded.
RANge= Name of the first and last PDS member to be retrieved. If only
one name is specified, that member module and all others
beginning with that name are retrieved.
RANGE= limits retrieval of a PDS directory to within a specified
range. The limits must be within collating sequence. All
members/modules whose names are within the collating
sequence defined by the range limits are listed. "(*)" must be
specified after the value for DSName=.
RECords= Number of the first and last record to be copied. p and q can be
specified as FIRST and LAST, respectively. If only one number is
specified, the input is copied from that record to the end. If
RECORDS= is omitted, all records are copied. They are selected
by their relative record number within the input data set unless
the SEQFLD operand is used, in which case records are selected
on the basis of their sequence number within the data.
SEQfld Location of preexisting sequence number field on the input
records. If omitted or specified ASIS, the sequence number field is
assumed to be in columns 73 through 80. To designate a
different location, include:
=s l Starting column and length of the sequence number
field.
=COBOL Sequence number field is in columns 1 through 6.
IMPORT terminates if the location of the sequence field is not
within the record or the field does not contain numeric
characters.
Specify SEQFLD in combination with the RECORDS operand to
copy records by existing record number. If RECORDS is not
specified, SEQFLD has no effect.
(Abbreviate as UNI.)
VOLume= Serial number of the pack on which the requested data set
resides. (Abbreviate as VOL.)
If operands are entered from the terminal and VOLUME is
omitted, a catalog search for the volume is performed. If the data
is not cataloged, IMPORT prompts for the volume serial number.
VOLUME is required if UNIT is specified. If VOLUME is
omitted, IMPORT does not issue a prompt.

PASsword= Data set password established by the site. If omitted and the data
set is password protected, a prompt is issued.
NOTTR Causes IMPORT to bypass its check for a last TTR pointer of 000
in the data set's DSCB. NOTTR should be used when, for
example, a data set has been updated but for some reason the
TTR pointer has not been.
OFFSET= Starting location of that portion of the record that is to be copied.
If omitted, the default is 0 (the beginning of the record). The
value cannot be less than 0 or greater than: 1) the length of the
record, or 2) the value specified with TRUNC=.
TRUNC= Ending location of that portion of the record that is to be copied.
If omitted, the default is 32767. The value cannot be less than 0 or
the value specified with OFFSET=.
WRAP= Maximum number of characters to be included on a line in the
active AWS. If omitted, the default is 255. The value may be
between 1 and 255. (If the record length is greater than 255 or the
specified segmentation value, the records being copied are
written to the active AWS as a series of segments that do not
exceed 255 or the specified segmentation value.)
If the record length (LRECL) is less than or equal to 255, it is
possible to rejoin the record segments; if the record length id
greater than 255, it is not possible to rejoin the segments.
1.88.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ IMPORT is a Monitor command. Site management has the option of
Note that operands placed in the AWS or library member are read and
executed at once. If they are incomplete or invalid, no prompting occurs
and no retries are permitted. IMPORT issues an error message and
terminates.
Including Operands with the Command:

■ If IMPORT is entered with operands, the combined length of all the
operands cannot exceed 200 characters.
■ If IMPORT is entered with no operand, the user is prompted. In response
to the prompts:
ENTER DSNAME
Enter only the data set name; do not enter the keyword DSNAME=.
ENTER IMPORT OPERANDS

Enter one or more operands. The combined length of the operands cannot
exceed 200 characters per line. To indicate a continuation, terminate the
IMPORT Criteria:
■ To be copied, an MVS data set must meet the following criteria:
1. It must be resident on a single direct access volume available to
Advantage CA-Roscoe.
2. It may not be under exclusive control by another task executing in the
computer nor allocated by DSNAME in the Advantage CA-Roscoe JCL.
3. Its data set organization must be PS or PO.
4. Its record format must not be undefined or variable spanned.
5. KEYLEN must not be greater than 0. (If it is greater than 0, only the
data portion of the record is retrieved.)
6. Its access must not be prevented by site specifications made by the
system programmer.
7. It must not be in a format that requires a special handler (for example,
SYSCTLG data sets).
IMPORT Destination:
AWS The requested data replaces the contents of the active AWS. The
new data is numbered from 1 with an increment of 1.
Library Member
The member is created if it does not exist. If the member exists, its
contents is overlaid if the UPDATE operand is specified. If
UPDATE is omitted, the IMPORT operation terminates. The new
data is numbered from 1 with an increment of 1.
■ Before a record is written, unprintable characters are replaced by spaces.
Only the following character sets are kept: numerics, alphabetics
(uppercase and lowercase) and special characters. Specify the ASIS
operand if character replacement is not to be performed.
Attention Handling:
■ The Attention key can be used to interrupt an IMPORT operation.
■ The ATTN or BREAK key can be used at TTYs to cancel an input line. This
permits a retry (reentry) of the cancelled line. When IMPORT prompts for
a special operand (for example, DSNAME), the input must begin in the
leftmost position of the terminal line.
Note: A leading space causes IMPORT to terminate.


=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT
XCOPY, XCOPYS, I, IB, IM (MASK), TE
XCOPYX
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
MERGE
1.88.3.1 Examples
■ The following example illustrates IMPORT (with its operands) as entered

from the terminal. (Terminal input is in lower-case; prompts from IMPORT
are in uppercase.)
import
IMP1: ENTER IMPORT OPERAND:
records=first,1 seqfld=COBOL vol=sys2
IMP2: ENTER DSNAME
sys1.COBOL.source(pgmx)
IMP99: END OF IMPORT
■ To import the member TEST from ROSCOE.SAMPLE and place it in the
library member named MYTEST:
IMPORT DSN=ROSCOE.SAMPLE(TEST) TO=MYTEST
■ To display directory information about only those members falling within
the range A through C:
IMPORT DSN=ROSCOE.SAMPLE() RANGE='A,C'
■ To copy only the data in positions 10 through 50 of the data set
ROSCOE.SHORT:
IMPORT DSN=ROSCOE.SHORT OFFSET=1 TRUNC=5

The following examples illustrate ways to use specific IMPORT operands.

■ To INCLUDE and EXCLUDE records from the input data set.
INClude=/sales/5,9,and,/jones/24,
or,
/sales/5,9,and,/ smith
or,
NOT,/jones/,and,not,/smith/,and, /commissions/52,7
■ To qualify the range of input records to be copied:
records=250 only record 250 is copied.
records=250,last records 250 through the end are copied.
records=first,249 first 249 records are copied.
records=300,900 records 300-900 are copied.
■ To specify the sequence number field location:
seqfld sequence number field in columns 73 through 80.
seqfld=COBOL field in columns 1 through 6.
seqfld=77,4 field in columns 77 through 80.

1.89 IMPORT (AllFusion CA-Librarian Master File)

Copies a module or directory from an AllFusion CA-Librarian master file into
the active AWS or a library member.
1.89.1 Syntax
IMPORT (AllFusion CA-Librarian Master File)
──IMPort──DSN=dsn─┬──────────┬───┬────────────────────┬────────
├─(module)─┤ └─TO=mem─┬────────┬──┘
└─()──────┘ └─UPDATE─┘
──┬──────┬──┬───────────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬─────────
└─ASIs─┘ ├─INClude=(charstr)─┤ └─LIBarian=charstr─┘
└─EXClude=(charstr)─┘
──┬─────────────┬──┬──────────────┬─────────────────────────────
└─ARC=charstr─┘ └─PGMr=charstr─┘
──┬──────────────────────────┬──┬─────────────────────┬─────────
│ ┌─,────┐ │ └─RECords=(p─┬────┬─)─┘
dsnmem┴─'─┘
──┬────────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──────────────────────
└─SEQfld─┬────────┬──┘ └─UNIT=charstr─┘
├─=s l───┤
└─=COBOL─┘
──┬────────────────┬──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬──WRAP=v────────
└─VOLume=charstr─┘ └─OFFSET=s─┘ └─TRUNC=e─┘
Operand Description
DSName= Fully qualified name of the AllFusion CA-Librarian Master File.
The name may be further qualified with one of the following:
(module) Name of an AllFusion CA-Librarian module. If the
AllFusion CA-Librarian module is archived, the
current level is copied.
(*) Displays formatted listing of an AllFusion
CA-Librarian index.
This operand is required, except when LIB-I is specified.
fails.


active AWS.
INClude=/EXClude=
are ignored if the request is for an AllFusion CA-Librarian index
listing.
──┬─INClude=─┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────
──(──┬──────┬──/charstr/──┬───────────┬──┬──────────┬──)───────
└─NOT,─┘ └─s─┬────┬──┘ ├─OR───────┤
└─,e─┘ └─,AND,...─┘

copied.
charstr1 One-to 35-character string appearing in the record(s) to
be copied. A maximum of 10 strings can be defined,
through the end.
LIBrarian- Type of data to be copied from a module of an AllFusion
CA-Librarian Master File, specified as one of the following:

H Copies only history records. The first six positions of the

record contain the record date in the form yymmdd.
I Copies only index information. It is presented in the form:
module name, password, date of last update
(mmddyyhhmm), programmer name, and description.
This operand need not be specified if DSN=dsn(*) is
specified. If used when a module name (for example,
DSN=A(B)) or module qualifiers (for example,
RANGE='A,B') are used, only index information for the
designated module(s) is provided.
E Embedded -INC statements found in the module are
expanded. If sequence number selection is being performed,
it is suspended during the expansion of the included
module, since the sequence number is in a different order.
N Embedded -INC statements are not expanded (default).
ARC= Level of AllFusion CA-Librarian module to be copied. The
module must be in ARCHIE format.
yymmddhhmmss
Date and time when the desired module was
current. An even number of digits may be omitted
starting from the right. Omitted digits are assumed
to have the highest values that are consistent with
the values of those digits that are specified.
Lx Absolute level number as shown on AllFusion
CA-Librarian Update Report; x may be 0 through
65535.
-y Relative level number. y may be 0 through 255. The
current level is -0; -1 is one level older than the
current.
If omitted and the module is in ARCHIE format, the most
recently created level of the module is copied.
PGMr= One-to 15-character programmer name as it appears in AllFusion
CA-Librarian index. It is used to qualify the index listing created
by LIBRARIAN-I to permit a selective retrieval by programmer
name.
RANge= Name of the first and last AllFusion CA-Librarian module to be
retrieved. If only one name is specified, that module and all
others beginning with that name are retrieved.
RANGE= limits retrieval of an AllFusion CA-Librarian index to
within a specified range. The limits must be within collating
sequence. All members modules whose names are within the
collating sequence defined by the range limits are listed.

specified, the input is copied from that record to the end. If
RECORDS= is omitted, all records are copied. They are selected
by their relative record number within the input data set unless
the SEQFLD operand is used, in which case records are selected
on the basis of their sequence number within the data.
field.
characters.
| (Abbreviate as UNI. UNIT= cannot be specified with AllFusion
| CA-Librarian data sets defined as VSAM.)
VOLume= Serial number of the pack on which the requested data set
| resides. (Abbreviate as VOL. VOLUME= cannot be specified
| with AllFusion CA-Librarian data sets defined as VSAM .)
If operands are entered from the terminal and VOLUME is
omitted, a catalog search for the volume is performed. If the data
is not cataloged, IMPORT prompts for the volume serial number.
VOLUME is required if UNIT is specified. If VOLUME is
omitted, IMPORT does not issue a prompt.


1.89.2 Notes
Restrictions:
terminates.

to the prompts:
ENTER DSNAME
IMPORT Destination:
Library Member

Attention Handling:
leftmost position of the terminal line. Note: A leading space causes
IMPORT to terminate.

=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT
XCOPYX
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
MERGE
1.89.3.1 Examples

are in uppercase.)
import
records=first,1 seqfld=COBOL vol=sys2
IMP2: ENTER DSNAME
libr.mast(pgmx)
■ To import the member TEST from LIBR.MAST and place it in the library
member named MYTEST:
IMPORT DSN=LIBR.MAST(TEST) TO=MYTEST
■ To display index information about only those modules falling within the
range A through C:
IMPORT DSN=LIBR.MAST() RANGE='A,C'

or
IMPORT DSN=LIBR.MAST() RANGE='A,C' LIBRARIAN-I
■ To display index information for only the module IGG019MP on
LIBR.MAST:
IMPORT DSN=LIBR.MAST() RANGE='IGG19MP'
or
IMPORT DSN=LIBR.MAST(IGG19MP) LIBRARIAN-I

or,
or,
seqfld=COBOL field in columns 1 through 6.
■ To specify date and time values with the ARC operand:
ARC=80 level current on 12/31/80 at 23:59:59.

1.90 IMPORT (AllFusion CA-Panvalet Member)

Copies all or part of an AllFusion CA-Panvalet member into the active AWS or
a library member.
1.90.1 Syntax
IMPORT (AllFusion CA-Panvalet Member)
──IMPort──DSN=dsn─┬───────────────────────┬────────────────────
├─(member─┬─────────┬─)─┤
│ └─.subset─┘ │
└─()───────────────────┘
──┬────────────────────┬──┬────────────────┬────────────────────
└─TO=mem─┬────────┬──┘ └─ACCess=charstr─┘
└─UPDATE─┘
──┬─────────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬─────────────────────
└─CONtrol=charstr─┘ │ ┌─No──┐ │
└─EXPand=─┴─Yes─┴──┘
──┬──────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬────────────────────────
└─LANguage=charstr─┘ └─PGMr=charstr─┘
──┬──────────────────┬──┬────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬────
│ ┌─Yes─┐ │ └─STAtus=charstr─┘ └─USEr=charstr─┘
└─SUBset=─┴─No──┴──┘
──┬──────┬──┬───────────────────┬───────────────────────────────
└─ASIs─┘ ├─INClude(charstr)──┤
└─EXClude=(charstr)─┘
──┬──────────────────────────┬──┬─────────────────────┬─────────
│ ┌─,────┐ │ └─RECords=(p─┬────┬─)─┘
dsnmem┴─'─┘
──┬────────────────────┬──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬─────────────
└─SEQfld─┬────────┬──┘ └─OFFSET=s─┘ └─TRUNC=e─┘
├─=s,l───┤
└─=COBOL─┘
──┬────────┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─WRAP=v─┘
Operand Description
DSN= One-to 44-character data set name of the AllFusion CA-Panvalet
library to be copied. The name must be further qualified with one
of the following:
(member) One-to ten-character name of the AllFusion
CA-Panvalet member (digits and special characters are
permitted.)

Note: Only the first 8 characters of the member name

are passed to RPF session variables DSNMEM
and MEMBER.
When copying to AllFusion CA-Panvalet members that
are Supersets, you must specify:
.subset One-to ten-character subset name (digits
and special characters are permitted.) If no
subset is specified, all subsets for the
Superset will be retrieved.
(*) Displays an AllFusion CA-Panvalet directory listing.
fails.
active AWS.
ACCess= One-to five-digit AllFusion CA-Panvalet access code (leading
zeros may be omitted.)
ACCESS is not used for retrieval of most of the directory
information. The LASTUPDATE ID column contains SECURE for
members which cannot be accessed using the specified Access
code.
CONtrol= One-to five-digit code required by AllFusion CA-Panvalet to
override any restricted access to the library system. The code is
not member-specific.
EXPand= Designate if AllFusion CA-Panvalet is to expand ++INCLUDE
commands during member retrieval. Specify:
N Do not expand ++INCLUDE commands. NO (or N) is
the default.
Yes Expand ++INCLUDE commands.
EXPAND is ignored for directory retrieval.
If AllFusion CA-Panvalet returns an error for a ++INCLUDE (for
example, PM007 MEMBER NOT FOUND), the ++INCLUDE
record is imported but not expanded. Advantage CA-Roscoe
messages will identify the AllFusion CA-Panvalet error and the
record which failed.
Note: The ++INCLUDE statement must begin in column 8.

LANguage=
One- to eight-character standard AllFusion CA-Panvalet language
type code. If omitted, the default is all Language type codes
included in the directory list.
LANGUAGE is ignored for member retrieval. For directory
retrieval, LANGUAGE restricts the member list to those matching
the specified Language type code.
Note: The directory display uses a 5-character Language type
code. The displayed values correspond to the 8-character
values, but do not necessarily match exactly. If a one-to
five-character code is specified (for example, ASMB), it is
translated to the corresponding one- to eight-character
value before AllFusion CA-Panvalet is called.
PGMr= One-to eight-character programmer name as it appears in
AllFusion CA-Panvalet directory. It is used to qualify the
directory list to permit a selective retrieval by programmer name.
Last Update ID selects by the column in the directory list.
SUBset= Designate if Subset entries are to be listed for directory retrieval.
Specify:
Yes List Subset entries. YES (or Y) is the default.
N Do not list Subset entries.
SUBSET is ignored for member retrieval.
STAtus= 3-character status mask value used to restrict the directory
retrieval. Each of the 3 characters can be one of three values.
■ For Character 1, specify P, T, or ?, where:
P Production
T Test
? Either
■ For Character 2, specify E, D, or ?, where:
E Enabled
D Disabled
? Either
■ For Character 3, specify A, I, or ?, where:
A Active
I Inactive
? Either
The default for STATUS is ???. STATUS is ignored for member
retrieval.
USER= One-to four-digit user code; leading zeros may be omitted.
USER will restrict the directory list to members with the specified
user code.

The default is to retrieve all user codes. USER is ignored for

member retrievals.
INClude=/EXClude=
are ignored if the request is for an AllFusion CA-Panvalet
directory list.
──┬─INClude=─┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────
──(─┬──────┬─/charstr1/─┬───────────┬──┬──────────┬─)──────────
└─NOT,─┘ └─s─┬────┬──┘ ├─OR───────┤
└─,e─┘ └─,AND,...─┘

copied.
charstr1 One-to 35-character string appearing in the record(s) to
be copied. A maximum of 10 strings can be defined,
through the end.

RANge= Name of the first and last AllFusion CA-Panvalet member to be

retrieved. If only one name is specified, that member and all
others beginning with that name are retrieved.
RANGE= limits retrieval of an AllFusion CA-Panvalet directory
list to within a specified range. The limits must be within
collating sequence. All members modules whose names are
within the collating sequence defined by the range limits are
listed.
specified, the input is copied from that record to the end. If p and
q are omitted, all records are copied. They are selected by their
relative record number within the input data set unless the
SEQFLD operand is used, in which case records are selected on
the basis of their sequence number within the data.
field.
characters.

1.90.2 Notes
Restrictions:
terminates.

to the prompts:
ENTER DSNAME
IMPORT Destination:
Library Member
Attention Handling:

leftmost position of the terminal line. Note: Leading space causes IMPORT
to terminate.
AllFusion CA-Panvalet IMPORT Directory Display:
The following table lists all information displayed in an AllFusion CA-Panvalet

directory request for a member:
Table 1-1. AllFusion CA-Panvalet Directory List
Column Title Characters Contents

Name 1-10 Member name or Subset name indented
character 2 characters
LV 0-3 digits Level
| LOCK DATE MM/DD/YY If locked, date member was locked,
| otherwise blank
| LOCK ID 1-8 User id who locked the member
| characters
LAST UPDATE MM/DD/YY If locked, date member was locked if
DATE not locked, date member was last
updated
LAST UPDATE 1-8 If locked, user id which locked member
ID characters if not locked, user id which updated
member last
SECURE Not available due to member security)
USER CODE/SLV 4 digits User code (Security level not 1,2, or 3)
SLVn Security Level (1,2, or 3)
STA 3 characters Member status
LCK 1 character Y= member locked
N=member not locked
FMT 1 character N= NOFORMAT option used when
member created
blank= Normal member formatting
COMMENT 1-50 comment
characters


=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT
XCOPYX
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
MERGE
1.90.3.1 Examples

are in uppercase.)
import
records=first,1 seqfld=COBOL
IMP2: ENTER DSNAME
panv.library(pgmx)
■ To import the member TEST from PANV.LIBRARY and place it in the
library member named MYTEST:
IMPORT DSN=PANV.LIBRARY(TEST) TO=MYTEST
■ To display index information about only those modules falling within the
range A through C:
IMPORT DSN=PANV.LIBRARY() RANGE='A,C'
■ To display index information for only the module IGG019MP on
PANV.LIBRARY:
IMPORT DSN=PANV.LIBRARY() RANGE='IGG19MP'


or,
or,
seqfld=COBOL
field in columns 1 through 6.

1.91 INCL
1.91 INCL
Locates and displays all lines containing a specific character string.
1.91.1 Syntax
INCL Command
──INCL──┬───────┬──┬──────────┬──┬─────────────────┬───────────
└─scope─┘ └──┬───┬─e─┘ └─/string/─┬───┬──┘
└─s─┘ └─n─┘
──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬──────────────
Operand Description
With no operand, locates and displays all lines containing the
(Abbreviate as L.)
string Search string, which cannot exceed 80 characters in length. If
omitted, the string specified with the previously executed EXCL,
FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command or
the ATTACH primary command is used.

1.91 INCL

or JUS.)
LITeral Prevents the search string from being interpreted (for example,
interpretation.
following:
followed by a non-alphanumeric character). (Abbreviate
as WOR.)
IMB.)
END Treat the string as either ending or being a complete

1.91 INCL
Note: The position, LITERAL or context keywords may be

specified in any order as long as they are placed at the of
the command.
1.91.2 Notes
INCL Requirements/Scope:
■ This command is valid only when SET DISPLAY NUMX is in effect.
■ The search for lines containing the string begins with the first displayed
line or the line at which the pointer is currently positioned.

(for example, INCL 20 30 ABC). After the
equal to e.

1. includes a space (for example, INCL 'A B'),
2. is numeric (for example, INCL /578/),
3. matches one of the command's keyword operands (for example, INCL
/JOB/).

1.91 INCL

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.

strings that:
period, or comma).

1.91 INCL

non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.

INCL Command Display:

■ If matching strings are not found, the resulting display begins with the last
other than INCL with no operand or by pressing the Enter key without
– Indicates the number of matching lines.
pressed (for example, scroll forward causes INCL to scan towards the
end of the data from the current location), or
2. When the active AWS is attached, entering the INCL line command,
with no operand, in the sequence number field of a line and pressing
ENTER. The scan begins with that line and continues towards the of
the data.
■ The resulting display is:
– Modifiable if produced when searching the active AWS.
– Semi-modifiable if produced when searching a Selection List (function
codes may be entered).
– Non-modifiable if produced when searching a data set,
member/module, job output file or library member.
■ To see the data following a particular line in the INCL display:

1.91 INCL
– With the AWS, type an asterisk (*) in the sequence number field of the
appropriate line and press the Enter key.
– With any other form of attached data, 1) use the POINT command (for
example, POINT LINE 500), or 2) place the cursor at the desired line
(using the cursor positioning keys) and press the Enter key.

AWS If match found, at the first line.
If no match, at the end of the active AWS or given range.
DSN If match found, at the first line.
JOB If match found, at the first line.
LIB If match found, at the first line.

FIRST FIRST
LAST LAST
NEXT NEXT
PREV PREV
EXCL EXCL INCL
OMIT
SEARCH
1.91.4.1 Examples
■ To locate and display every line containing the word PROC in the
currently attached data:
INCL PROC WORD
Because the string is qualified, a word such as PROCEDURE will not
match. To find those lines containing a word beginning with PROC, you
might enter:
INCL PROC PREFIX
■ To locate and display every line in the currently attached data that
contains the string XYZ in columns 10 through 50:

1.91 INCL
INCL 1 5 XYZ
■ To search the next 60 lines and display every line containing the string
DIVISION:
INCL DIVISION 6
■ To reattach the currently attached job and then locate and display every
line containing the string AWS in columns 10 through 50:
INCL JOB 1 5 /AWS/
The search string is qualified since it matches a keyword operand of the
command.
■ To reattach the previously attached data set object and display every line
(without altering the screen positioning) that contains the previously
specified string:
INCL DSN LOCKED

1.92 INCL Line Command

Locates and displays every line that contains the specified search string.
1.92.1 Syntax
INCL Line Command
──INCL──┬──────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────
is used.
1.92.2 Notes
The line on which INCL is entered is included in the search.


THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.



INCL Line Command Display:

■ If matching strings are not found, the resulting display begins with the last
other than INCL with no operand or by pressing the Enter key without
– Indicates the number of matching lines.
1. Entering the INCL line command, with no operand, in the sequence
number field of a line and pressing Enter. The scan begins with that
line and continues towards the end of the active AWS, or
pressed (for example, scroll forward causes INCL to scan towards the
end of the active AWS from the current location).
■ To see the data that follows a particular line in the INCL display, type an
asterisk (*) in the sequence number field of the appropriate line and press
the Enter key.

FIRST FIRST
LAST LAST
NEXT NEXT
PREV PREV
EXCL EXCL
INCL
OMIT
SEARCH

1.92.3.1 Examples
■ To display every line in the AWS that contains the string PROCEDURE:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P =============
INCL /PROCEDURE/ION DIVISION.
3
■ To display every line containing the previously specified string:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P =============
INCL IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
3

1.93 INFO
1.93 INFO
To provide information about one of the following:
■ Data set
■ Library member
■ Volume
Each use of the INFO command is discussed individually on the following

pages.

1.94 INFO DSN
1.94 INFO DSN

| Information provided by INFO is divided into two parts. The first part
| describes the data set itself. The second part provides either specific
| information about each extent, or specific information about each tape volume.
1.94.1 Syntax
INFO DSN Command
──INFO DSN──dsn─┬──────────┬───────────────────────────────────
├─(dsnmem)─┤
└─(v)──────┘
──┬───────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────
│ ┌──
───────────┐ │
┬─────────┬┴──┘
└─Volume charstr──
└─charstr─┘
──┬─────────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────
│ ┌──
───────────┐ │
┬─────────┬┴──┘
└─charstr─┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────
└─PSWd charstr─┬─────────┬──┘
└─charstr─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────┬────────────────
└─NODSPLY─┬─────────────┬──┬─────────────┬──┘
└─MCD charstr─┘ └─ARC charstr─┘
Operand Description
dsn One-to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set about
which information is desired. The name may be qualified with:
dsnmem
Name of the PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian
module about which information is desired. (See Notes
for additional information.)
group) data set, specified as 0 (most current) or a minus
number (for example, -1).
Volume One-to six-character serial number of the volume on which the
the data set is not cataloged.
Note: Volume can be specified as VOLUME, VOL, V.
UNIT One-to eight-character unit name associated with the device

1.94 INFO DSN

not cataloged and resides on a mass storage device.
PSWd Password, established by the site, for the designated data set. If
omitted and a password is required, access is denied.
NODSPLY Suppresses the display of the information. (This operand is
intended for use in RPF programs to update the contents of the
data set variables.)
Required when requesting information about a PROD2 module.
Site-dependent when requesting information about a master file
containing PROD2 modules.
ARC Archive level of the AllFusion CA-Librarian master file module
about which information is desired. (The module must be in
ARCHIE format.) If omitted, the most current level of the
module is assumed. The level may be specified in one of the
following forms:
Lx Absolute level number (between 0 and 65535)
as reported on the AllFusion CA-Librarian
Update Report.
-y Relative level number between 0 and 255. The
current level is -0; -1 is one level older than the
current.
yymmddhhmmss Date and time when the desired archive level
was current. An even number of digits
(starting from the right) may be omitted. They
are assumed to have the highest values
consistent with the values of the specified
digits.
1.94.2 Notes
RPF Variables:
■ The RPF data set variables are always updated to contain the appropriate
information.
Using the NODSPLY Operand:

■ With NODSPLY, the appropriate RPF data set variables are set to the
attributes of the designated data set, member or module.
■ To obtain PDS member/AllFusion CA-Librarian module attributes, the
NODSPLY operand must be used with the command. If a
member/module name is specified and NODSPLY is omitted, the
command is rejected.

1.94 INFO DSN
■ When obtaining information about AllFusion CA-Librarian master

files/modules, the MCD and ARC operands can be used to qualify the
extent of information desired.
Data Set Information:

■ The information is provided in two parts. The first describes the data set
itself while the second provides specific information about each extent.
■ The data set information includes:
DATA SET Name of the data set about which information is
desired.
ENTRY TYPE Catalog entry type. (Cataloged data sets only.)
MGMTCLAS SMS management class.
STORCLAS SMS storage class.
VOLUMES Serial number of the volume(s) on which the data set
resides. A maximum of six volumes can be shown.
| DEV TYPE Name of the unit(s) on which the data set resides. A
| maximum of six units can be shown.
| SEQ NO Sequence number of the data set on the first tape
| volume.
DATACLAS SMS data class.
| ALLOCATED TRACKS
| Total number of tracks allocated on all volumes.
| USED TRACKS Number of tracks used on all volumes.
| ALLOCATED EXTENTS
| Total number of extents allocated on all volumes.
| USED EXTENTS Number of extents used on all volumes.
ALLOCATED DIR BLOCKS
Number of directory blocks allocated.
USED DIR BLOCKS
Number of directory blocks used.
NUMBER OF MEMBERS
Number of members in the PDS or modules in an
AllFusion CA-Librarian Master File.
DSORG Data set organization.
RECFM Record format or record organization (if VSAM data
set).
LRECL Logical record length or average record length (if
VSAM data set).

1.94 INFO DSN
BLKSIZE Block size or maximum record length (if VSAM data

set).
KEYLEN Key length.
KEYOFF Key offset.
SECURITY Security status of the data set, shown as:
nnnn Name of site security package (for
example, RACF, ACF2, TSS).
PWWR Password required for WRITE access.
PWRD Password required for READ access.
UNITS Allocation unit type (ABS, BLK, CYL, or TRK).
1ST EXTENT Number of allocation units in the first extent.
SECONDARY EXTENT
Number of allocation units for each subsequent
extent.
CREATED Creation date.
ACCESSED Date last referenced (data set opened).
EXPIRATION Expiration date.
The information about the extents includes:
EXTENT NO. Extent number.
1ST TRACK (CCHH)
Starting CCHH address of the extent (in
hexadecimal) and relative number on the volume (in
EBCDIC).
LAST TRACK (CCHH)
Ending CCHH address of the extent (in hexadecimal)
and relative number on the volume (in EBCDIC).
TRACKS Number of tracks allocated.
| ■ The extents information includes:
| EXTENT NO. The total number of extents allocated on all volumes.
| 1st TRACK (CCHH)
| Starting CCHH address of the extent (in hexadecimal) and
| relative number on the volume (in EBCDIC).
| last TRACK (CCHH)
| Ending CCHH address of the extent (in hexadecimal) and
| relative number on the volume (in EBCDIC).
| TRACKS Total number of tracks allocated on all volumes.
| VOLUME Serial number of the volume on which the extent resides.

1.94 INFO DSN
| USED EXTENTS
| Total number of extents used on all volumes.
| ■ The volumes information includes:
| VOLUME NO The tape volume sequence number.
| VOLUME The tape volume serial number.
| SEQ NO The sequence number of the data set on the tape volume.
| DEVTYPE Name of the unit on which the data set resides.

DSN I (display menu) N/A

1.95 INFO LIB
1.95 INFO LIB

To provide information about a library member.
1.95.1 Syntax
INFO LIB Command
──INFO LIB──mem──┬─────────┬──────────────────────────────────
└─NODSPLY─┘
Operand Description
mem Name of the library member about which information is desired.
NODSPLY Suppresses the display of information. (This operand is intended
for use in RPF programs to update the contents of the library
variables.)
1.95.2 Notes
RPF Variables:
■ The RPF library variables are always updated to contain the appropriate
information.
Library Member Information:

■ The member information includes:
PREFIX Prefix assigned to the individual who owns the
member.
NAME Name of the library member.
LAST ACCESS Date the member was last accessed.
LAST UPDATE Data the member was last updated.
CREATION Date the member was created.
RECORD COUNT Number of lines in the member.
BLOCK COUNT Number of library blocks used by the member.
ATTRIBUTE Member's access attribute.
SEQUENCE Member's sequence number attribute.
DESCRIPTION Member's description, if available.

1.95 INFO LIB

LIB I (display menu) N/A
FIND

1.96 INFO VOL
1.96 INFO VOL

To provide information about a volume.
1.96.1 Syntax
INFO VOL Command
──INFO VOL──string──┬──────────────┬──┬─────────┬─────────────
└─UNIT charstr─┘ └─NODSPLY─┘
Operand Description
string Serial number of the volume about which information is desired.
UNIT One-to eight-character unit name associated with the device type
on which the volume resides. Required only if a mass storage
volume.
NODSPLY Suppresses the display of information. (This operand is intended
for use in RPF programs to update the contents of the data set
variables.)
1.96.2 Notes
RPF Variables:
■ The RPF data set variables are always updated to contain the appropriate
information.
Volume Information:
■ The volume information includes:
VOLUME Serial number of the device.
ADDRESS Channel and unit address of the device.
DEVTYPE Physical device type.
DEVICE STATUS Status of the device at the time the information is
requested, shown in the form:
──┬───┬──┬──────┬──┬────┬─────────────────
└─x─┘ └─-yyy─┘ └─-z─┘
where any or all of the following information may

be displayed.

1.96 INFO VOL
If 'x' is shown, it is:

A Allocated
F Offline
O Online
S System residence volume
C Console
If 'yyy' is shown, it is:
BOX Hardware error
BSY Busy
MTP Mount pending
NRD Not ready
PND Offline pending
PUL Unload pending
RAL Restricted to allocation
SPD Suspended due to ASM use
SYS Allocated to system
If 'z' is shown, it is:
M Multi-system assignment
P Reserve pending
R Reserved/shared/exclusive control
VOLUME STATUS Status of the volume at the time the information is
requested, shown in the form:
ttt/uuuuu
where 'ttt' is shown as:
PRIV Volume mounted PRIVATE
PUB Volume mounted PUBLIC
STRG Volume mounted STORAGE
'uuuuu' is shown as:
RSDT Volume is resident
RSERV Volume is reserved
REMOV Volume is removable
TOTAL TRACKS ON VOLUME
Maximum number of data tracks on the
device.
TOTAL TRACKS USED Number of tracks in use on the device.
PERCENT OF VOLUME USED
Amount of space used on the device
rounded to the nearest integer.
CONTIG. FREE CYLINDERS Number of free cylinders in the largest
contiguous extent.

1.96 INFO VOL
TOTAL FREE CYLINDERS Total number of free cylinders on the

device.
CONTIG. FREE TRACKS Number of free tracks in the largest
contiguous extent.
TOTAL FREE TRACKS Total number of free tracks on the device.
FREE EXTENTS Number of extents not in use.
VTOC INDEX Code indicating whether the device has
an indexed VTOC and the current status
if one exists.
The code is shown as:
NONE Device has no indexed
VTOC.
ACTIVE Device has an indexed
VTOC; it is in use.
CREATED Device has an indexed
VTOC; never used.
DISABLED Device has an indexed
VTOC; it is inactive.
SMS CONTROL SMS status of the device shown as:
NO Not SMS managed.
INIT SMS managed in initial
status.
YES Volume is managed by SMS.
MAXIMUM BLOCK SIZE Largest valid block size for this device.
TRACK SIZE Number of bytes per device track.
TRACKS PER CYLINDER Number of tracks per device cylinder.
DATA SETS Number of data sets defined on the
device.
VTOC TRACKS Size of the device VTOC in tracks.
TOTAL DSCBS Maximum number of Data Set Control
Blocks in the VTOC.
FREE DSCBS Number of Data Set Control Blocks not
used in the VTOC.
PERCENT OF VTOC USED Amount of space used in the VTOC
rounded to the nearest integer.

1.96 INFO VOL

DSN I (display menu) N/A

1.97 INPUT
1.97 INPUT
Opens the Execution Area for the insertion of data into the active AWS.
1.97.1 Syntax
INPUT Command
──INPUT──┬──────────┬──┬───┬──────────────────────────────────
└─TExtentr─┘ └─o─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, lines are inserted at the top of the active AWS (if
the AWS is empty) or after the last line (if the AWS is not empty).
TExtentr Causes the screen to be opened to allow 'power typing'.
Note: Textentr can be specified the following ways:
TEXTENTR, TEX, TE.
v A line number.
1.97.2 Notes
Using TEXTENTR:
■ When TEXTENTR is specified, the format of the Execution Area changes so
that:
– The sequence number field is protected and invisible and the right
margin is ignored. This allows data to be entered in 'wrap' mode
(when the right margin is reached, the cursor automatically skips over
the invisible sequence number field allowing continuous data entry).
– Without TEXTENTR, the right margin marks the end of a 'word'. If the
right margin is reached in the middle of a word, the cursor is
positioned to the next line. Characters at the end of the previous line
are treated as one word; characters at the beginning of the new line are
treated as another word.

1.97 INPUT
– The current column boundaries are recognized when the data is

formatted after the Enter key is pressed.
– Any formatting done during data entry is also remembered. For
example, to begin a new paragraph, move the cursor to the next line
and enter one or more spaces, then move the cursor to the next line
and resume typing. The blank line separating the paragraphs is
remembered when your data is formatted.
– Restriction: TEXTENTR is not recognized when SET SEARCH DBCS is
in effect.
AWS Line Numbers:

the data is inserted after that line. If the line number does not exist, the
data is inserted at that line.
■ When lines are inserted:
In an empty AWS The current line number increment is
used as the starting value and increment.
Between existing AWS lines The line number increment is 1.
At the end of the AWS The current increment is used.
■ The RENUMBER command can be used to change the increment value.

AWS At the last line entered.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT
XCOPYX

1.97 INPUT

MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE
Renumber AWS Contents: Renumber AWS Contents:
RENUMBER N/A
1.97.4.1 Examples
■ To use 'power typing' to enter data at the end of the active AWS and have
that data formatted within the column boundaries of 10 and 45:
Type:
INPUT TEXTENTR

>
> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....>....
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
_
Then begin 'power typing.'

>
> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....>....
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
This sample shows how to enter data in wr
ap mode and have it formatted for you whe
The result is formatted output.

>
> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....>....
...... ========================== T O P ===========
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
2 This sample shows how you can enter
21 data in wrap mode and have it
22 formatted for you when you complete

1.98 Input Line Commands

Opens the Execution Area a specified number of lines for the insertion of data
into the active AWS.
1.98.1 Syntax
Input Line Commands
──┬─I──┬───┬──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
├─IB──┬───┬─┤
│ └─v─┘ │
└─IM──┬───┬─┘
└─v─┘
Command Description
I Insert one line for data entry after the line containing the command.
To insert multiple lines, specify:
v Number of lines to be inserted. It cannot exceed the number
of displayed lines following the line containing the command.
IB Insert one line for data entry before the line containing the
command. To insert multiple lines, specify:
v Number of lines to be inserted. It cannot exceed the number
of displayed lines preceding the line containing the command.
IM Insert one copy of the mask after this line. To insert multiple copies
of the mask, specify:
v Number of copies of the mask to be inserted. Any number of
mask lines can be inserted.
1.98.2 Notes
Command Placement:
■ I and IM may be specified in the sequence number field of the lines
designating the top and bottom of the active AWS. (The sequence number
field of these lines contains '......'.)

Inserting Multiple Lines:

■ When Iv or IBv is used to insert multiple lines,
– Lines on which data is entered are retained after the Enter key is
pressed. (A space is considered data.) The lines are assigned sequence
numbers and the sequence number field is unprotected.
– Lines on which no data has been entered are deleted.
Inserting a Mask:
■ IM is ignored if a mask is not defined. (Use the MASK line command to
define a mask.)
■ When IMv is used, the mask is inserted the specified number of times. The
lines are assigned sequence numbers and the field is unprotected.
■ Note that the OM, OMB and OMT line commands may be used to overlay
existing lines with a mask.

=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT
XCOPY, XCOPYS, (MASK), TE
XCOPYX
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE
Session Controls
SET AUTOINDENT
SET AUTOINSERT

1.98.3.1 Examples
■ To insert two data entry lines after line 100 of the active AWS, enter:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+..>
...... ================================ T O P ===
I21 1 DETAIL-LINE.
2 2 FILLER PIC X(5).
3 2 TOTAL PIC X(15).
And get the following results:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+..>
...... ================================ T O P ===
1 1 DETAIL-LINE.
......
......
■ To define a mask on line 100 and then to insert two copies of it after line
300 of the active AWS:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+..>
...... ================================ T O P ===
MASK 5 FILLER PIC X.
IM23 2 TOTAL PIC X(15).

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+..>
...... ================================ T O P ===
1 1 DETAIL-LINE.
31 5 FILLER PIC X.
32 5 FILLER PIC X.

1.99 JCK
1.99 JCK
Validates MVS JCL using Unicenter CA-JCLCheck.
1.99.1 Syntax
|
| JCK Command
| ──JCK──┬────┬──┬─────────┬────────────────────────────────────
| ├─-A─┤ └─charstr─┘
| ├─-D─┤
| └─-X─┘
| With no operand, syntax checks the contents of the active AWS.
| -A Causes information to be written to the active AWS.
| -D Causes the JCLOPTS to be displayed. JCK continues if there is input
| in the active AWS.
| -X Turns off Advantage CA-Roscoe's SVCs screening of issues.
1.99.2 Notes
■ JCK is a Monitor routine that allows Advantage CA-Roscoe users to
validate MVS JCL using some or all of the functions provided with
Unicenter CA-JCLCheck. Site management has the option of restricting the
use of this Monitor routine.
Using Unicenter CA-JCLCheck:

■ If Unicenter CA-JCLCheck is:
Installed at your site All Unicenter CA-JCLCheck options may be
specified with the JCK command. (See the
Unicenter CA-JCLCheck documentation for
information about all the options that are
available.)
Not installed The JCK command permits the use of a limited
version of Unicenter CA-JCLCheck. This limited
version performs complete JCL syntax checking
(including JES2 and JES3 control statements) and
allows the use of the options described next.
If the use of this command is not restricted, see
Appendix B for the extended syntax that permits
JCL saved in a library member to be validated.
Options Valid With Limited Version Of Unicenter CA-JCLCheck:

1.99 JCK
■ The following options may be specified with the JCK command. Unless
changed by site management, the options AUTOPROC, EASYPROC, and
TERM are always in effect.
| AUTOPROC (JES2 only) Causes Unicenter CA-JCLCheck to
| open and use the site's system procedure library.
| This is the default.
DEBUG [ (charstr v) ] Causes Unicenter CA-JCLCheck to terminate with
a user abend 1000 or 2222, so that a full
SYSUDUMP can be obtained. Normally, DEBUG is
used only at the request of the Advantage
CA-Roscoe Support Staff. However, it can be
useful in debugging user exit routines.
The operands 'charstr' and 'v' are optional. If
specified, 'charstr' must be a Unicenter
CA-JCLCheck error message number and 'v' must
| be an occurrence number. For example,
| DEBUG(66 2) causes Unicenter CA-JCLCheck to
| terminate with a U1000 abend after the second
| occurrence of error message CAY6066.
| If the operands are omitted, Unicenter
| CA-JCLCheck abends with a U2222 at the end of
| the job and issues the error message CAY6196I.
(See the Unicenter CA-JCLCheck Message Guide for a
description of these messages.)
EASYPROC Activates support for the CA-EASYPROCLIB
program product.
If specified, causes CA-JCLJCheck to use the site's
system procedure library if no PROCLIB is defined
within the JCL.
| FEature(n...n)|NOFEat Determines which of Unicenter CA-JCLCheck's
| special features are to be in effect, where n is the
| number of the corresponding special feature. There
| are several features available with the Unicenter
| CA-JCLCheck common component:
| Number Description
| 5 Sets the S.RC variable to the highest
| error message severity of all jobs
| analyzed in this run. Otherwise, the
| return code is set to the highest error
| message severity of the last job
| analyzed in this run.
| 20 Suppresses message CAY6086E for
| SYSOUT data sets. Unicenter
| CA-JCLCheck flags an invalid

1.99 JCK
| LRECL/BLKSIZE specification
| regardless of the statement type.
| Certain releases of JES ignore invalid
| DCB information on spooled data sets.
| 24 Issues CAY6088E message when only
| USER is coded on a job card, not the
| PASSWORD parameter.
NOSPIE Suppress the Unicenter CA-JCLCheck SPIE
function. If specified, Unicenter CA-JCLCheck
terminates if an 0Cx interrupt is encountered.
If omitted, Unicenter CA-JCLCheck intercepts 0Cx
abends with a user abend 1000 and prints relevant
diagnostic information on the Catastrophic Error
Report and formatted dumps identical to those
generated by the DEBUG option.
PASSWORD(charstr) Specifies the password to be used for accessing
read-protected VSAM catalogs.
PASSWORD may only be used if the VSAM
option is also in effect.
ROSLIMIT(v) Limits the number of statements that can be
processed by Unicenter CA-JCLCheck.
Because all tasks compete for the virtual storage in
the Advantage CA-Roscoe address space, sites that
have storage constraints should consider using this
option to restrict the size of job streams (including
PROCLIB statements) that may be processed
online.
The number (v) specifies Unicenter CA-JCLCheck
logical statements, which include all continuation
card images. The actual number of statements
processed will generally be higher than the
specified limit.
TERM Requests Unicenter CA-JCLCheck to produce
abbreviated report output, containing only the
erroneous statements and their associated
messages. The report is displayed at the terminal.
VSAM [REVERSE]
[(NOREVERS)]
Requests Unicenter CA-JCLCheck to support
VSAM catalogs.
This option allows Unicenter CA-JCLCheck to
invoke the IBM utility IDCAMS when it finds a
JOBCAT or STEPCAT statement defining a VSAM

1.99 JCK
catalog. If IDCAMS accepts the catalog, the utility

is called in lieu of standard catalog management
for the duration of the scope of the job or step
catalog.
Specify REVERSE to cause the catalogs to be
searched in reverse order (the system catalog first,
followed by the private catalog). This improves
performance for jobs whose data sets are cataloged
most often in the system catalog. Caution: Using
REVERSE produces incorrect results for data sets
cataloged in both the system and private catalog.
| The default is NOREVERSE, which is the normal
| search order.
Without this option, Unicenter CA-JCLCheck
handles VSAM data sets correctly only if the
Advantage CA-Roscoe JCL contains a JOBCAT or
STEPCAT statement defining the correct catalog.

COB
PLI

1.100 LAST
1.100 LAST
■ The last occurrence of a particular character string
■ The last occurrence of a specific location within job output
Both uses of the LAST command are discussed individually on the following
pages.

1.101 LAST
1.101 LAST
To begin the display with the last line containing a particular character string.
1.101.1 Syntax
LAST Command
──LAST──┬───────┬──┬──────────┬──┬───────────────┬─────────────
└─scope─┘ └──┬───┬─e─┘ └─string─┬───┬──┘
└─s─┘ └─n─┘
──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬──────────────
Operand Description
With no operand, locates and displays the last occurrence of the
(Abbreviate as L.)
FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT, or PREV primary or line command or

1.101 LAST
n Number of lines to be searched. If omitted, the default is: 1) the end

of the active AWS or library member, or 2) the site-defined search
limit for the data set object or job output.
or JUS.)
interpretation.
following:
or IMB.)

1.101 LAST

of the command.
1.101.2 Notes
(for example, LAST 20 30 ABC). After the
equal to e.

– Includes a space (for example, LAST 'A B')
– Is numeric (for example, LAST /578/)
– Matches one of the command's keyword operands (as in, LAST /JOB/)

1.101 LAST

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.

strings that:

1.101 LAST

period, or comma).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.
LAST Command Display:

being displayed.
the string. Only the AWS display is modifiable. (Use the F operand of the
display resulting from searching a data set object, job output file or library
member is not modifiable.


If no match, at the start of the active AWS or given
range.
If no match, at the start of the file or given range.
If no match, at the start of the file or given range.
If no match, at the start of the member or given range.

1.101 LAST

FIRST FIRST
LAST
NEXT
NEXT
PREV
PREV
EXCL EXCL
INCL INCL
OMIT
SEARCH
1.101.4.1 Examples
■ To begin the display with the last occurrence of the string PAY in the
LAST PAY
■ To begin the display with the last occurrence of the string ABC in columns
1 through 50 of the data that is currently attached and displayed:
LAST 1 5 ABC
■ To begin the display with the last occurrence of a previously specified
LAST 3 6
■ To reattach the currently attached job and begin the display with the last
LAST JOB EXEC WORD
the specified string. To find the last occurrence of EXECUTE, either spell
LAST JOB EXEC PREFIX
■ To reattach the active AWS and begin the display with the last occurrence
LAST AWS DIVISION 2

1.101 LAST
(by centering the line) with the last occurrence of a previously specified
LAST DSN 6 9 CENTERED
■ To find the last occurrence of the string LIB in the currently attached data:
LAST /LIB/

1.102 LAST JOB
1.102 LAST JOB

To begin the display at the last occurrence of a specific location within job
output.
1.102.1 Syntax
LAST JOB Command
──LAST──┬─────┬──┬──────┬─────────────────────────────────────
├─Page─┤
└─Line─┘
Operand Description
File Repositions display to begin with the last file of the attached and
Page Repositions display to begin with the last page of the job output file
currently displayed. (Abbreviate as PAGE, PAG, or P.)
Line Repositions display to begin with the last line of the job output file
1.102.2 Notes

AWS N/A
DSN N/A
LIB N/A

1.102 LAST JOB

FIRST [ JOB ] N/A
NEXT [ JOB ]
PREV [ JOB ]
1.102.4.1 Examples
■ To reattach the previously attached job and begin the display with the last
file:
LAST JOB FILE
■ To display the last file of job output that is attached and displayed:
LAST FILE
■ To display the last page of the job output file that is currently attached and
displayed:
LAST PAGE

1.103 LAST Line Command

Locates and positions the display to begin with the last occurrence of a
1.103.1 Syntax
LAST Line Command
──LAST──┬──────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
is used.
1.103.2 Notes

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.


word THE matches the string / THE /; the words THE, THERE and
LAST Line Command Display:

■ The display produced by LAST contains modifiable lines.

FIRST FIRST
LAST
NEXT
NEXT
PREV
PREV
EXCL EXCL
INCL INCL
OMIT
SEARCH
1.103.3.1 Examples
■ To find the last occurrence of the string PROCEDURE:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P =============
LAST /PROCEDURE/ION DIVISION.
3
■ To find the last occurrence of a previously specified string:


> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================= T O P ==============
LAST IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
3

1.104 LIBRARY
1.104 LIBRARY
Attaches the Library Facility menu to the terminal and, optionally, displays a
function-related panel.
1.104.1 Syntax
LIBRARY Command
──LIBrary──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬───────────────────────────────
└─charstr─┘ └─mem─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, displays the Library Facility menu.
charstr One or more library facility function codes. If omitted, the Library
Facility menu is displayed. If specified, it must be one of the
following:
A Causes the Library Facility menu to be displayed with the
attach code in the OPTION field.
C Causes the Copy Function Panel to be displayed.
D Causes the Delete Function Panel to be displayed.
I Causes the Library Facility menu to be displayed with the info
code in the OPTION field.
P Causes the Print Function Panel to be displayed.
R Causes the Rename Function Panel to be displayed.
X Causes the Library Facility menu to be displayed with the
termination code in the OPTION field.
mem Name of the library member to be involved in this operation. The
name may be qualified with wildcard characters.
1.104.2 Note
If invalid or insufficient information is specified, the Library Facility menu is
displayed.

1.104 LIBRARY

ALTER N/A
ATTACH LIB
COPY LIB
DELETE
FETCH, CHAIN, MERGE
INFO LIB
PRINT LIB
RENAME
1.104.3.1 Examples
■ To display the Print Function Panel:

LIBRARY P
■ To display the Library Facility menu with the attach code in the
FUNCTION field and the appropriate member prefix and name in the
PREFIX and MEMBER fields:
LIBRARY A WIDGET

1.105 LIST
1.105 LIST
Displays all or part of the active AWS or library member at the terminal.
1.105.1 Syntax
LIST Command
──LIST──┬───────────────────┬──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬───────
└─mem─┬──────────┬──┘ └─p─┬───┬──┘ └─LITeral─┘
└─/string/─┘ └─q─┘
──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬─────────────────────────────────────────
└─context─┘ └─Mix─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, display the contents of the active AWS.
mem Name of the library member to be displayed.
bound by delimiters. The display begins at the first line containing
the string and continues from that point to the end of the range.
p q Number of the first and last lines to be searched for the string or
the display is to begin. If only one number is specified, only that
line is searched/displayed.
interpretation.
following:
as WOR.)

1.105 LIST

IMB.)
1.105.2 Notes
can be limited to specific columns using the SET BOUNDS primary
command or, if the AWS is attached, the BOUNDS line command. This

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.
:p/

1.105 LIST

strings that:
period, or comma).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.


1.105 LIST
Restriction:
■ At 3270-type terminals, LISTed data is not modifiable. Also, pressing the
Enter key or a PF key assigned a scroll function causes the data to be
scrolled forward.
■ To modify the data and be able to use the PF key scroll functions, the data
should be ATTACHed.

DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

ATTACH AWS N/A
ATTACH mem
1.105.4.1 Examples
■ To display lines 100 through 500 of the active AWS:

LIST 1 5
■ To begin the display with the first line containing the string DD:
LIST /DD/
■ To display the entire contents of the member XYZ:
LIST XYZ

1.106 LOOK
1.106 LOOK
Allows the commands associated with Unicenter CA-Look to be used from a
Advantage CA-Roscoe terminal.
1.106.1 Syntax
LOOK Command
──LOOK──┬────┬──┬─────────┬───────────────────────────────────
└─-F─┘ └─charstr─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, prompts the user for input.
-F Causes the result of the designated command to be written to the
active AWS.
charstr Any LOOK directive or Unicenter CA-Look command. The
directive or command is executed and the appropriate information
is displayed.
If omitted, LOOK prompts for a directive/command, executes it,
displays the appropriate information and then prompts for the next
directive/command.
1.106.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ LOOK is a Monitor command. Site management has the option of
■ This command allows Advantage CA-Roscoe users to access Unicenter
CA-Look Unicenter CA-Look can be used for realtime system performance
measurement and problem diagnosis. All Unicenter CA-Look facilities are
available to Advantage CA-Roscoe users.

1.106 LOOK
Using the -F Operand:

■ If the -F operand and a command are entered, it is comparable to the user
having entered:
RUN LOOK- mem
where the library member contains:
AWS
NOTERM
look command
END
LOOK Monitor Command Input:

■ Any Unicenter CA-Look command (as described in the appropriate
Unicenter CA-Look documentation) may be entered.
■ Any of the following LOOK directives may be entered:
- Repeats the last executed Unicenter CA-Look command. If
entered before any other Unicenter CA-Look commands, acts
as though D LOOK was entered.
* Input is taken from the library member named in the RUN
command. At end-of-file, LOOK terminates.
AWS Assigns the active AWS as the output destination. (Output
may be directed to the terminal and the AWS
simultaneously.)
END Terminates LOOK.
NOAWS Suppresses AWS output.
NOTERM Suppresses terminal output (except for LOOK prompts when
in conversational mode). Ignored unless AWS is in effect.
OFF Terminates LOOK.
TERM Assigns the terminal as an output destination (default).

1.107 LOWCASE
1.107 LOWCASE
Translates the characters within one or more lines of the active AWS to their
corresponding lowercase characters.
1.107.1 Syntax
LOWCASE Command
──LOWCASE── p──┬───┬──┬────────────┬──────────────────────────
└─q─┘ └─BOUNDS s e─┘
Operand Description
p q Number of the first and last lines to be translated. If only one
number is specified, only that line is translated.
BOUNDS
Starting and ending column boundaries. (Abbreviate as BNDS.)
If omitted, the column boundaries that are currently in effect are
used (alphabetic characters found outside of those boundaries are
not translated).
1.107.2 Notes
■ LOWCASE may be abbreviated as LC.
■ If a character does not have a corresponding lowercase character, it is not
translated.
Column Boundaries:
■ Alphabetic characters that are outside of the current or default column
boundaries are not translated. (By default, column boundaries extend
from column 1 through 80.)
■ To change the boundaries for:
A single execution: Specify the BOUNDS operand of this command.
After the command executes, the previously
established or default range is restored.
The terminal session: Use the SET BOUNDS primary command or the
BOUNDS line command. The range remains in
effect until changed by another SET BOUNDS
primary command or BOUNDS line command.

1.107 LOWCASE

On Input: On Input:
SET MODE N/A
STATUS SESSION display
Existing Data: Existing Data:
LC, LCC, LCB, LCT
TXTLCASE
TLC
UPCASE
UC, UCC, UCB, UCT

1.108 Lowercase Line Commands

corresponding lowercase characters.
1.108.1 Syntax
Lowercase Line Commands
──┬─LC─┬───┬──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
├─LCC───────┤
├─LCB───────┤
└─LCT───────┘
Command Description
LC Translate one line. To translate multiple lines, specify:
v Number of lines to be translated.
LCC Translate block of lines. LCC must be entered on the first and last
line of block to be translated. The range of lines does not have to be
displayed in its entirety on one screen. Scrolling, as well as other
line commands, can be performed while a line command is
pending.
LCB Translate all lines from the line containing the command through
LCT Translate all lines from the first line of the active AWS through the
1.108.2 Notes
■ If a character does not have a corresponding lowercase character, it is not
translated.
Column Boundaries:
■ Alphabetic characters that are outside of the current or default left or right
column boundaries are not translated. (By default, the column boundaries
extend from column 1 through 80.)
■ To change the boundaries, use the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen,
the SET BOUNDS primary command or the BOUNDS line command. The


On Input: On Input:
SET MODE N/A
LOWCASE
TLC
TXTLCASE
UC, UCC, UCB, UCT
UPCASE
1.108.3.1 Example
■ To translate the characters on line 300 and 400 to their corresponding

lowercase characters, enter:

> AWS(AAA.NOTES) SCRL FULL COLS 7 78
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ============================== T O P =========
1 TO: STAFF
2
LCB3 THIS REPORT PROVIDES THE INFORMATION
4 REQUESTED AT OUR LAST MEETING.

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ============================== T O P =========
1 TO: STAFF
2
3 this report provides the information
4 requested at our last meeting.
■ Assuming the AWS contains only the lines shown above, the same result
could be achieved by typing:
LC2 in the sequence number field of line 300, or
LCC in the sequence number field of lines 300 and 400.

1.109 LSHIFT
1.109 LSHIFT
Shifts left all or a range of lines in the active AWS.
1.109.1 Syntax
LSHIFT Command
──LSHift── v──┬──────────┬──┬────────────┬──┬──────────┬──────
└─p─┬───┬──┘ └─BOUNDS s e─┘ └─TEXTStop─┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
v Number of positions the line is shifted to the left.
p q Number of the first and last line to be shifted.
BOUNDS Number of the first and last column to be affected by the shift
operation. (Abbreviate as BNDS.)
TEXTStop Designates that shifting stops for any line involved in the
operation if data would be shifted to the left of the specified or
default column boundary.
If omitted, data shifted to the left of the specified or default
column boundary is lost.
1.109.2 Notes
Column Boundaries:
■ Data that is outside of the current or default column boundaries is not
shifted. (By default, the column boundaries extend from column 1 through
80.)
A single execution Specify the BOUNDS operand of this command.
The terminal session Use the SET BOUNDS primary command or the

1.109 LSHIFT

AWS At the end of the active AWS or given range.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

RSHIFT ), )), )B, )T and
>, >>, >B, >T
(, ((, (B, (T and
<, <<, <B, <T
1.109.4.1 Examples
■ To shift the contents of every line in the active AWS ten spaces to the left
(inserting blanks in the first 10 spaces):
LSHIFT 1
■ To shift the contents of lines 100 through 500 five spaces to the left:
LSHIFT 5 1 5
■ To shift the contents of columns 50 through 70 two spaces to the left:
LSHIFT 2 BOUNDS 5 7
■ To shift the contents of columns 50 through 70 ten spaces to the left as
long as this does not cause any data to be lost:
LSHIFT 1 BOUNDS 5 7 TEXTSTOP
If TEXTSTOP is omitted, any data shifted beyond column 50 is lost. With
TEXTSTOP, shifting stops when data is detected in column 50.

1.110 MAIL
1.110 MAIL
Permits CA-eMAIL+ to be used during a Advantage CA-Roscoe terminal
session.
1.110.1 Syntax
MAIL Command
──MAIl────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.110.2 Notes
Start CA-eMAIL+ Session:
■ At sites using CA-eMAIL+, executing the MAIL command causes the
CA-eMAIL+ frontispiece to be displayed. (CA-eMAIL+ is an electronic
system for sending, receiving, storing, and managing correspondence.) All
facilities of CA-eMAIL+ are available to the Advantage CA-Roscoe users.
End CA-eMAIL+ Session:

■ To terminate the CA-eMAIL+ session, enter the OFF command.
Restriction:
■ The MAIL command cannot be issued when the Advantage CA-Roscoe
■ See the descriptions of the :commands for information about specific screen
escape actions that can be performed during a CA-eMAIL+ session.

1.111 MASK Line Command

Sets and resets a mask definition.
1.111.1 Syntax
MASK Command
──MASK──┬─────────┬───────────────────────────────────────────
└─charstr─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, eliminates a previously defined mask.
charstr Mask definition, which must not exceed the length of a terminal
line.
1.111.2 Notes
Defining a Mask:
■ No mask definition is in effect when the terminal user signs on.
■ To define a mask, type MASK in the sequence number field of the active
AWS. Position to the data portion of the same line and type the mask. It
must be the only data on the line. (The original contents of the line will be
redisplayed after the command is executed.
■ Once defined, the mask remains in effect until replaced by another
definition or is eliminated.
■ To eliminate a mask definition, either enter the MASK line command with
no definition or reattach that AWS.
Inserting a Mask:
■ Use the IM line command to insert the mask one or more times at a
specific location.
■ Use the OM, OMB, and OMT to overly lay one or more lines with the
mask.


=n
I, IB, IM, TE
INPUT
OM, OMB, OMT
1.111.3.1 Examples
See the Input Line Commands for an example of both the MASK and IM line
commands.
See the Overlay Mask Line Commands for an example of overlaying multiple
lines with a mask.

1.112 MERGE
1.112 MERGE
Merges library members into the active AWS.
1.112.1 Syntax
MERGE Command
┌──
───────┐
┬─────┬┴───────────────────────────────────────
──MERGE──mem───
└─mem─┘
Operand Description
mem Name of the library member to be merged. A maximum of 21
library members can be specified, provided that the command fits
on a single line.
1.112.2 Notes
■ The contents of the active AWS are deleted before the merge occurs.
■ The members are merged by their line numbers. If one of the designated
members contains a line number that already exists within the AWS, the
line associated with the fetched member replaces the line already in the
AWS.
■ The library members are fetched in the order specified. The AWS assumes
the attributes of the last library member named.
If one of the members is not found, execution terminates. Any members
already fetched into the AWS remain there.
■ If only one member name is specified, the result is the same as a FETCH
command.

AWS At the first line in the AWS.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

1.112 MERGE

=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT
XCOPYX
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
IMPORT
1.112.4.1 Examples
■ To merge the contents of three library members within the active AWS:
MERGE ABC DEF GHI
where the members contain:
ABC DEF GHI
9 xxxxx 1 aaaaa 3 %%%%%%%%%
91 yyyyy 2 bbbbb 92 zzzzzzzzz
3 ccccc
After the command is executed, the AWS will contain:
1 aaaaa
2 bbbbb
3 %%%%%%%%%
9 xxxxx
91 yyyyy
92 zzzzzzzzz

1.113 MESSAGE
1.113 MESSAGE
Sends a message to the operator console.
1.113.1 Syntax
MESSAGE Command
──MESSAGE──string─────────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
string Message to be sent to the operator. Delimiters are not required.
1.113.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ Site management has the option of disabling the use of this command.
■ If it is not disabled, the message is immediately sent to the operator
console.
Message Length:
■ The maximum length of a message is 90 characters minus the user's
sign-on key and a space. (The message received by the operator is prefixed
with the user's sign-on key.) To illustrate, if a user's sign-on key is 10
characters, the text of the message cannot exceed 79 characters.

SEND N/A

1.114 MOVE
1.114 MOVE
Moves one or more lines within the active AWS from one location to another.
1.114.1 Syntax
MOVE Command
──Move── p──┬───┬── o─────────────────────────────────────────
└─q─┘
Operand Description
p q Number of the first and last lines to be moved. If only one number
is specified, only that line is affected.
v A line number.
1.114.2 Notes
■ The move operation is destructive (lines are deleted from their original
location when transferred to their new location.
■ MOVE can be specified in the following ways:
MOVE, MOV, M.
AWS Line Numbers:

■ When the moved lines are placed between existing lines in the AWS or
1. When the moved lines are placed to the end of the AWS, the current
increment is used.
Moving Lines Within the AWS:

■ A range of AWS lines cannot be moved to a position within that range.
■ An error occurs if the result of the operation causes a line number to
exceed 999999.

1.114 MOVE

AWS At the last line moved.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT
XCOPYX
M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE
1.114.4.1 Examples
■ To move lines 100 through 500 after the 800:

MOVE 1 5 8
■ To move the line at which the pointer is currently positioned through the
end of the AWS to before the first line in the AWS:
MOVE ,, T
■ To move the line at which the pointer is currently positioned and the next
nine lines after line 300:
MOVE 1 3

1.115 Move Line Commands

Moves one or more lines within the active AWS from one location to another.
1.115.1 Syntax
Move Line Commands
──┬─M─┬───┬──┬────────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
├─MM───────┤
├─MB───────┤
└─MT───────┘
Command Description
M Move one line. To move multiple lines, specify:
v Number of lines to be moved.
MM Move block of lines. MM must be entered on the first and last line
of the block to be moved. The range of lines to be moved does not
have to be displayed in it entirety on one screen. Scrolling and
other line commands can be performed while a line command is
pending.
MB Move all lines from the line containing the command through the
MT Move all lines from the first line of the active AWS through the line
1.115.2 Notes
■ The move operation is destructive (lines are deleted from their original
location.)
Destination Line Commands:

■ A destination line command must be specified with a move line command.
The destination line command does not have to be specified on the same
screen as the move line commands. Scrolling, as well as other line
commands, can be performed while a line command is pending.


=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT
XCOPYX
MOVE
CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE
1.115.3.1 Examples
■ To move lines 100 and 200 after line 400:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ============================== T O P =========
M21 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
3
A4 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.
■ To move all lines from line 300 through the end of the AWS to before line
100:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ============================== T O P =========
B1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
MB3

1.116 NEXT
1.116 NEXT
■ The next occurrence of a particular character string or
■ The next occurrence of a specific location within job output.
Both uses of the NEXT command are discussed individually on the following
pages.

1.117 NEXT
1.117 NEXT
To begin the display with the next line containing a particular character string.
1.117.1 Syntax
NEXT Command
──NEXT──┬───────┬──┬──────────┬──┬───────────────┬─────────────
└─scope─┘ └──┬───┬─e─┘ └─string─┬───┬──┘
└─s─┘ └─n─┘
──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬──────────────
Operand Description
With no operand, locates and displays the next occurrence of the
LIB Causes the pending library member or Selection List to
be reattached and searched for the specified string.
(Abbreviate as L.)
s e Number of the starting and ending columns to be searched for
the string. If only one number is specified, it is assumed to be the
ending column. The ending column cannot exceed: 1) 255, or 2)
the record length of the data set object.

1.117 NEXT

left-most position of the line. (Abbreviate as
JUST or JUS.)
invalid left margin (less than 1), the display is
not altered. (Abbreviate as CENT or CEN.)
interpretation.
context Qualifies the search string within the data. If omitted, the search
is for the string exactly as entered. If specified, it must be one of
the following:
complete entity (it is preceded by a
non-alphanumeric character and followed by either
an alphanumeric or non-alphanumeric character).
(Abbreviate as BEG.)
PREFIX Treat the string as beginning an entity (it is
preceded by a non-alphanumeric character and
followed by an alphanumeric character). (Abbreviate
as PRE.)
preceded and followed by an alphanumeric
character). (May also be specified as IMBED;
abbreviate as EMB or IMB.)

1.117 NEXT
SUFFIX Treat the string as ending an entity (it is preceded

by an alphanumeric character and followed by a
specified in any order as long as they are placed at the
end of the command.
1.117.2 Notes
equal to e.

– Includes a space (for example, NEXT 'A B')
– Is numeric (for example, NEXT /578/)
– Matches one of the command's keyword operands (as in, NEXT
/JOB/)

1.117 NEXT

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.

strings that:

1.117 NEXT

period, or comma).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.
NEXT Command Display:

being displayed.


range.

1.117 NEXT

FIRST FIRST
LAST LAST
NEXT
PREV
PREV
EXCL EXCL
INCL INCL
OMIT
SEARCH
1.117.4.1 Examples
■ To begin the display with the next occurrence of the string PAY in the
NEXT PAY
■ To begin the display with the next occurrence of the string ABC in
columns 1 through 50 of the data that is currently attached and displayed:
NEXT 1 5 ABC
■ To begin the display with the next occurrence of a previously specified
NEXT 3 6
■ To reattach the currently attached job and begin the display with the next
NEXT JOB EXEC WORD
the specified string. To find the next occurrence of EXECUTE, either spell
NEXT JOB EXEC PREFIX
■ To reattach the active AWS and begin the display with the next occurrence
NEXT AWS DIVISION 2
(by centering the line) with the next occurrence of a previously specified
NEXT DSN 6 9 CENTERED

1.117 NEXT
■ To find the next occurrence of the string LIB in the currently attached data:
NEXT /LIB/

1.118 NEXT JOB
1.118 NEXT JOB

To begin the display at the next occurrence of a specific location within job
output:
1.118.1 Syntax
NEXT JOB Command
──NEXT──┬─────┬──┬──────┬─────────────────────────────────────
├─Page─┤
└─Line─┘
Operand Description
The Job operand must be used if the display is not active (the job is
not displayed).
File Repositions display to begin with the first file of the attached and
Page Repositions display to begin with the first page of the job output
Line Repositions display to begin with the first line of the job output file
1.118.2 Notes

AWS N/A
DSN N/A
LIB N/A

1.118 NEXT JOB

FIRST [ JOB ] N/A
LAST [ JOB ]
PREV [ JOB ]
1.118.4.1 Examples
■ To reattach the previously attached job and begin the display with the next
file:
NEXT JOB FILE
■ To display the next file of job output that is attached and displayed:
NEXT FILE
■ To display the next page of the job output file that is currently attached
and displayed:
NEXT PAGE

1.119 NEXT Line Command

Locates and positions the display to begin with the next occurrence of a
1.119.1 Syntax
NEXT Line Command
──NEXT──┬──────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
is used.
1.119.2 Notes
The search for the next occurrence begins with the line following the line


THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.


NEXT Line Command Display:

■ The display produced by LAST contains modifiable lines.

FIRST FIRST
LAST LAST
NEXT
PREV
PREV
EXCL EXCL
INCL INCL
OMIT
SEARCH
1.119.3.1 Examples
■ To find the next occurrence of the string PROCEDURE:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P =============
NEXT /PROCEDURE/ION DIVISION.
3

■ To find the next occurrence of a previously specified string:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================= T O P ==============
NEXT IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
3

1.120 NOSEQ
1.120 NOSEQ
Sets the sequence number attribute for the active AWS to suppress Advantage
CA-Roscoe-maintained sequence numbers from being included when the AWS
contents is PRINTed or SUBMITted.
1.120.1 Syntax
NOSEQ Command
──NOSEQ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.120.2 Note
■ Once established, NOSEQ remains in effect until specifically changed by
the SEQ command or overridden by the sequence number attribute of a
fetched or saved library member.

SEQ N/A

1.121 NOTE
1.121 NOTE
Assigns a name to a specific line in the attached data.
1.121.1 Syntax
NOTE Command
──NOTE──┬───────────┬──charstr────────────────────────────────
├─scope─────┤
└──┬────┬──┘
├─+v─┤
└─-v─┘
Operand Description
data is assumed. If specified, it must be one of the following:
DSN Causes the sequential data set, PDS member or AllFusion
CA-Librarian module to be reattached and positioned to the
designated line. (Abbreviate as D.)
JOB Causes the job to be reattached and positioned to the
designated line. (Abbreviate as J.)
LIB Causes the library member to be reattached and positioned to
the designated line. (Abbreviate as L.)
* Location of the line that is to be named. If omitted or specified
without qualification, the name is assigned to the first displayed
line. The location may be qualified by using:
+v First displayed line plus v lines.
-v First displayed line minus v lines.
charstr One-to six-character name that is to be assigned to the designated
line.
1.121.2 Notes
Data Set Objects:
■ The names are retained as long as the sequential data set, PDS member or
AllFusion CA-Librarian module is attached. They are implicitly dropped
when the data is detached.
Job Output File:

■ The names may be saved when the job is detached if the command
DETACH JOB NOACT is used.

1.121 NOTE
Library Member:
■ The names are retained as long as the member is attached. They are
implicitly dropped when the member is detached.

DROP N/A
POINT
STATUS NOTES
1.121.3.1 Examples
■ To assign the name NAME1 to the first displayed line:

NOTE NAME1
■ To assign the name NAME2 to the line that is five lines after the first
displayed line:
NOTE +5 NAME2
■ To assign the name NAME3 to the first displayed line of the job that is
attached but not currently displayed:
NOTE JOB NAME3

1.122 Note Line Commands

Creates a box within the active AWS that contains one or more comment lines
which conform to the requirements of the specified language.
1.122.1 Syntax
Note Line Commands
──┬─┬─NA─┬───┬──┬─┬───────────────────────────────────────────
│ │ └─v─┘ │ │
│ └─NNA───────┘ │
├─┬─NB─┬───┬──┬─┤
│ │ └─v─┘ │ │
│ └─NNB───────┘ │
├─┬─NC─┬───┬──┬─┤
│ │ └─v─┘ │ │
│ └─NNC───────┘ │
├─┬─NF─┬───┬──┬─┤
│ │ └─v─┘ │ │
│ └─NNF───────┘ │
├─┬─NJ─┬───┬──┬─┤
│ │ └─v─┘ │ │
│ └─NNJ───────┘ │
├─┬─NM─┬───┬──┬─┤
│ │ └─v─┘ │ │
│ └─NNM───────┘ │
├─┬─NP─┬───┬──┬─┤
│ │ └─v─┘ │ │
│ └─NNP───────┘ │
└─┬─NR─┬───┬──┬─┘
│ └─v─┘ │
└─NNR───────┘
Command Description
NA Create an Assembler comment box containing one or v number of
lines.
NB Create a BASIC comment box containing one or v number of lines.
NC Create a COBOL comment box containing one or v number of lines.
NF Create a FORTRAN comment box containing one or v number of
lines.
NJ Create a JCL comment box containing one or v number of lines.
NM Create a macros comment box containing one or v number of lines.
NP Create a PL/I comment box containing one or v number of lines.
NR Create an RPF comment box containing one or v number of lines.
NNA Block form of comment box for Assembler.
NNB Block form of comment box for BASIC.

NNC Block form of comment box for COBOL.

NNF Block form of comment box for FORTRAN.
NNJ Block form of comment box for JCL.
NNM block form of comment box for Macros.
NNP Block form of comment box for PL/I.
NNR Block form of comment box for RPF.
1.122.2 Notes
Comment Box Format:
■ A comment box consists of a top line, one or more comment lines and a
bottom line. As illustrated in the example, the top and bottom lines contain
dashes and are inserted before and after the designated comments.
Formatting Comment Lines:

■ The data on each line to be included in a comment box must be
preformatted to conform to the particular programming language; data
that does not conform is overlayed. For example, when generating a
comment box within an RPF program, a :* is placed in columns 1 and 2
and an * is placed in column 71.
Generate Empty Comment Box:

■ In the sequence number field of the appropriate line, enter the I or IB line
command with the number of lines to be included in the box. Enter a
blank on each inserted line. Then enter the appropriate note line command
to encompass those lines.
1.122.2.1 Example
■ To generate a COBOL comment box around lines 100 and 200, enter:

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ============================== T O P =========
NNC1 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED
NNC2 SHIPPING COST REPORT.


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ============================== T O P =========
1 ---------------------------------------------
1 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED
2 SHIPPING COST REPORT.
21 ---------------------------------------------

1.123 NOTRACE
1.123 NOTRACE
Disables the trace facility.
1.123.1 Syntax
NOTRACE Command
──NOTRACE──┬──────┬───────────────────────────────────────────
└─Edit─┘
Operand Description
Edit Identifies the trace operation being performed.
1.123.2 Notes
■ NOTRACE disables the display of lines changed by an EDIT or FILL
command.
■ To enable the trace facility, use the TRACE EDIT command.

FILL N/A
Change Character/String: Change Character/String:
EDIT E, EE, EB, ET
XLATE XL, XLB, XLT
SET EDITCHNG N/A
TRACE

1.124 OFF
1.124 OFF
Terminates a Advantage CA-Roscoe session.
1.124.1 Syntax
OFF Command
──OFF──┬────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────
└─vtamid──┬────────────┬─┘
├─charstr1───┤
└─/charstr2/─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, terminates the user's session.
vtamid (VTAM only.) Site-defined VTAM application ID. If a Advantage
CA-Roscoe VTAM applid is specified, the Advantage CA-Roscoe
sign-on screen is displayed, bypassing the VTAM screen.
charstr1 An undelimited string which is specified in the form:
key</pass</code/>>
key User's sign-on key or an asterisk (*). If an asterisk is
specified, the sign-on key of the user currently signed on
is reused. If either a sign-on key or asterisk is specified,
both the VTAM screen and Advantage CA-Roscoe
sign-on screen are bypassed.
pass User's password or an asterisk (*). If an asterisk is
specified, the password of the user currently signed on is
reused.
code User's group code or an asterisk (*). If an asterisk is
specified, the group code of the user currently signed on
is reused.
/charstr2/ Any string of characters that is bound by delimiters. This operand
should be used when passing information to a VTAM application
that is not assigned to Advantage CA-Roscoe.
1.124.2 Notes
Using OFF:
■ During split-screen processing, OFF may be entered in the Command Area
of either screen.
Saving AWS Contents:

1.124 OFF
■ By default, if an AWS has a recoverable attribute, and is not empty when

OFF is entered, the contents of each AWS(s) are saved in the library as the
members SAVAWSnn, where nn is a unique ID.
Using an Undelimited String:

■ When an undelimited string is specified, each component is padded to its
maximum length (22, 10 and 8 characters, respectively).
■ If the site's security package limits the length of a sign-on key to seven
characters, the delimited string (/charstr2/) should be used.

OFFON N/A
1.124.3.1 Examples
Assume that a site is running two different versions of Advantage CA-Roscoe

and that their VTAM applications IDs are ROSCOE1 and ROSCOE2. Further,
assume that a site is running another application which is assigned the applid
of XXX.
■ To terminate a session on ROSCOE1 and begin a session on ROSCOE2,
bypassing just the VTAM screen:
OFF ROSCOE2
■ To terminate a session on ROSCOE2 and begin a session on ROSCOE1,
bypassing both the VTAM screen and ROSCOE1 sign-on screen:
OFF ROSCOE1 JONES/MYPASS
or
OFF ROSCOE1 /
■ To terminate a session on ROSCOE2 and begin a session under the
application assigned the XXX applid, passing information appropriate for
that application:
OFF XXX /ABCDEFG XYZ/

1.125 OFFON
1.125 OFFON
Terminates a Advantage CA-Roscoe session and displays the Advantage
CA-Roscoe sign-on screen.
1.125.1 Syntax
OFFON Command
──OFFON──┬───────────────────────────┬────────────────────────
└─key─┬──────────────────┬──┘
└─/pass─┬───────┬──┘
└─/code─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, terminates the user's session and displays the
Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen.
key User's sign-on key or an asterisk (*). If an asterisk is specified, the
sign-on key of the user currently signed on is reused. If either a
sign-on key or asterisk is specified, both the VTAM screen and
Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen are bypassed.
pass User's password or an asterisk (*). If an asterisk is specified, the
password of the user currently signed on is reused.
code User's group code or an asterisk (*). If an asterisk is specified, the
group code of the user currently signed on is reused.
1.125.2 Notes
Using OFFON:
■ During split-screen processing, OFFON may be entered in the Command
Area of either screen.
Saving AWS Contents:

■ By default, if any AWS has a recoverable attribute, and is not empty when
OFFON is entered, the contents of each AWS(s) is saved in the library as
the members SAVAWSnn, where nn is a unique ID.

OFF N/A

1.126 OMIT
1.126 OMIT
Displays only those lines of the active AWS that do not contain a specific
string.
1.126.1 Syntax
O<IT Command
──Omit──┬───┬──┬──────────┬──┬──────────────────┬──────────────
└─F─┘ └──┬───┬─e─┘ └─/string/p─┬───┬──┘
└─s─┘ └─q─┘
──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬────────────────────────────
└─LITeral─┘ └─context─┘ └─Mix─┘
Operand Description
F Terminates OMIT after displaying the first line that does not
contain the specified string.
interpretation.
following:
followed by a non-alphanumeric character.) (Abbreviate
as WOR.)

1.126 OMIT

IMB.)
1.126.2 Notes

(for example, OMIT 20 30 ABC). After the
equal to e.
OMIT 12 72). From the terminal, the command affects only the AWS.
When executed from within an RPF program, the command is comparable
to SET BOUNDS ALL. The range remains in effect until changed by a SET
and e operands.

1.126 OMIT

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.

strings that:
period, or comma).

1.126 OMIT

non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.
OMIT Command Display:

■ The resulting display includes the number and contents of each line that
does not contain the specified string.
■ The displayed lines are not modifiable. Use the EXCL primary or line
command to obtain a modifiable display.


AWS With OMIT: At the end of the active AWS of given
range. (If TRACE EDIT is in effect and tracing is ended
with an attention, the position is uncertain.) With OMIT
F: If a match is found, at that line. If no match, at the
end of the active AWS or given range.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

FIRST FIRST
LAST LAST
NEXT NEXT
PREV PREV

1.126 OMIT

EXCL EXCL
INCL INCL
SEARCH
1.126.4.1 Examples
■ To display all lines not containing the string XYZ:

OMIT /XYZ/
■ To display all lines not containing XYZ in columns 73 through 80:
OMIT 73 8 /XYZ/
■ To display all lines not containing XYZ in the next 10 lines:
OMIT /XYZ/ 1

1.127 Overlay Mask Line Commands

Overlays one or more lines within the active AWS with a mask.
1.127.1 Syntax
Overlay Mask Line Commands
──┬─OM─┬───┬──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
├─OMB───────┤
└─OMT───────┘
Command Description
OM Overlays one line with a pre-defined mask. To overlay multiple
lines, specify:
OMB Overlays all lines from the line containing the command through
OMT Overlays all lines from the first line of the active AWS through the
1.127.2 Notes
Overlaying Line(s):
■ Only blank characters in the target destination line(s) are overlaid with the
corresponding characters from the mask.
■ OM, OMB and OMT are ignored if a mask is not defined. (Use the MASK
line command to define a mask.)
■ Use appropriate destination line commands to overlay one or more lines
with copied/moved data.

=n
I, IB, IM, TE
INPUT
O, OB, OD, OT

1.127.3.1 Examples
■ To define a mask on line 100 and then to overlay the blank characters on
lines 200, 300 and 400 with that mask, enter:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+..>
...... ================================ T O P ===
MASK PIC X( ).
OM32 2 FIELD-NAME-1
3 2 FIELD-NAME-2
4 2 FIELD-NAME-3-VERY-LONG

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.
...... ================================ T O P =
1 1 DL-DETAIL-LINE.
2 2 FIELD-NAME-1 PIC X( ).
3 2 FIELD-NAME-2 PIC X( ).
4 2 FIELD-NAME-VERY-LONGIC X( ).
■ Notice line 400. Since the mask only overlays blank characters, only a
portion of the mask has been placed on that line.

1.128 ORDER
1.128 ORDER
Reorders a selection list according to user specified criteria. The following can
be ordered:
■ The records of an AWS
■ A Library Selection List
Both uses of the ORDER command are described individually on the following
pages.

1.129 ORDER AWS
1.129 ORDER AWS

Reorders the records of an AWS.
1.129.1 Syntax
ORDER AWS Command
──ORDER──┬─────┬──┬─────────┬──┬────┬──Cols─┬───┬─e────────────
└─AWS─┘ └─awsname─┘ └─BY─┘ └─s─┘
┌─ASCending──┐
──┼────────────┼──┬──────────────────────┬─────────────────────
└─DEScending─┘ ├─AND──────────────────┤
│ ┌──
─────────┐ │
┬───────┬┴──┤
├─& order──
│ └─order─┘ │
└─@────────────────────┘
Operand Description
AWS Causes records in the currently active AWS to be reordered.
awsname Name of the AWS to be reordered.
BY Optional extra-word, permitted for continuity.
Cols Starting (s) and ending (e) column boundaries for the sort
criteria. If s is omitted, the default is 1.
Column can be specified as COLS, COL, or C.
ASCending Reorders specified field(s) in ascending sequence.
DEScending Reorders specified field(s) in descending sequence.
AND, &, @ Permits multiple sort criteria to be specified. Required if
using multiple COL sorting boundaries.
A maximum of six order criteria are permitted.
1.129.2 Notes
Default:
■ ASCending is the default sequence for reordering records in the AWS.

1.129 ORDER AWS
Usage:
■ The ORDER command can be specified as ORD or ORDER.
The Ampersand as Command Delimiter:

■ If sites or users set the '&' as a command delimiter, it will override the sort
syntax and function as a delimiter. The word 'and' or the '@' may be used
in this case.
To use the '&' within the ORDER command, the command delimiter must
be set to another character.
Sorting Multiple Column Groups:

■ When sorting more than one group of data in the AWS, the sort will be
done in order of the column specification.
■ The first sort columns specified have precedence over all subsequent
column boundaries to be sorted (for example: ORDER AWS COL 1 5 AND
COL 8 10, will sort columns 1 through 5 first and then columns 8 through
10 are further sorted with respect to the first sort).
1.129.2.1 Example
■ To sort the following data in alphabetical (ascending) order by user and

their corresponding ages in descending order:

>
>AWS() SCRL FULL COLS 1 72 A<ROS1>
><...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7..
=================================== T O P ==============================
ABLE 19 yes
BAKER 32 yes
FOX 29 no
ABLE 3 yes
CHARLIE 27 no
DOG 18 no
ABLE 25 no
CHARLIE 23 yes
================================= B O T T O M ==========================


1.129 ORDER AWS
Type:
ORDER AWS BY COL 1 7 ASC AND BY COL 15 16 DES

>
>AWS() SCRL FULL COLS 1 72 A<ROS1>
><...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7..
=================================== T O P ==============================
ABLE 3 yes
ABLE 25 no
ABLE 19 yes
BAKER 32 yes
CHARLIE 27 no
CHARLIE 23 yes
DOG 18 no
FOX 29 no
================================= B O T T O M ==========================

Note: Because ASC is the default sort sequence, and the word 'BY' is an extra
word, the following command would produce the same results as
above:
ORDER AWS COL 1 7 @ COL 15 16 DES

1.130 ORDER DSN
1.130 ORDER DSN

|
| Permits the user to specify the order lists in the data set facility.
|1.130.1 Syntax
|
| ORDER DSN Command
| ──ORDER DSN──┬──────┬──┬─────────┬──fieldname──────────────────
| └─list─┘ ├─BY──────┤
| └─DEFAULT─┘
| ──┬────────────┬──COL─┬───┬─e──┬──────────────────────┬────────
| ├─ASCending──┤ └─s─┘ ├─AND──────────────────┤
| └─DEScending─┘ │ ┌──
─────────┐ │
| ┬───────┬┴──┤
├─& order──
| │ └─order─┘ │
| └─@────────────────────┘
| Note: If no operands are specified, then the DFLT field of the current
| selection list is reordered.
| DSN Designates that the Data Set Selection List is to be reordered and
| attached if it is not already current.
| list Designates the selection list type to be reordered. If omitted, the
| current selection list is reordered.
| VOLLIST Volume selection list.
| CATLIST Cataloged data set selection list.
| PDSLIST Partitioned data set selection list.
| LBRLIST AllFusion CA-Librarian module selection list.
| LODLIST Load member selection list.
| VTOLIST VTOC data set selection list.
| BY Optional extra-word, permitted for continuity.
| DFLT Designates that the selection list is to be ordered by the default
| sort criteria.

1.130 ORDER DSN
| List Default
| CATLIST Data-set-name
| PDSLIST MEMber
| LBRLIST MEMber
| LODLIST MEMber
| VTOLIST Data-set name
| fieldname Designates the field to be reordered. If omitted, the DFLT field

| will be reordered. If specified, it must be one of the following:
| For VOLLIST:
| VOLume Field containing volume serial name. Volume
| may be specified in the following ways:
| VOLUME, VOL.
| UNIT Field containing the volume unit address.
| DEVTYPE Field containing the device type.
| CONTG-CYL Field containing the number of contiguous
| cylinders. Contiguous cylinders may be
| specified in the following ways: CONTG-CYL,
| CYL-CONTG.
| AVAIL-CYL Field containing the number of available
| cylinders. Available cylinders may be specified in
| the following ways: AVAIL-CYL, CYL-AVAIL.
| CONTG-TRK Field containing the number of contiguous
| tracks. Contiguous tracks may be specified in
| the following ways: CONTG-TRK, TRK-CONTG.
| AVAIL-TRK Field containing the number of available tracks.
| Available tracks may be specified in the
| following ways: AVAIL-TRK, TRK-AVAIL.
| AV-XT Field containing the average extent count.
| TOTAL-TRK Field containing the total number of tracks.
| Total number of tracks may be specified in the
| following ways: TOTAL-TRK, TRK-TOTAL.
| USED-TRK Field containing the number of used tracks.
| Used tracks may be specified in the following
| ways: USED-TRK, TRK-USED.
| %USED Field containing the percent of used space.
| MAXBLK Field containing the maximum block size.
| TRKSIZE Field containing the track size.

1.130 ORDER DSN
| TRK/CYL Field containing the number of tracks per

| cylinder. Tracks per cylinder may be specified in
| the following ways: TRK/CYL, TRK-CYL.
| #DSNS Field containing the number of data sets.
| USED-XT Field containing the number of used extents.
| VTOC-TRK Field containing the number of tracks used by
| the VTOC.
| TOTAL-DSCB Field containing the total number of Data Set
| Control Blocks. Total number of Data Set
| Control Blocks may be specified in the following
| ways: TOTAL-DSCB, DSCB-TOTAL.
| DSCB-FREE Field containing the number of free Data Set
| Control Blocks. Free Data Set Control Blocks
| DSCB-FREE, FREE-DSCB.
| D%USED Field containing the percent of used DSCB space.
| INDEX Field containing the indexed VTOC status.
| SMS Field containing the indexed SMS status.
| DEVSTAT Field containing the device status.
| VOLSTAT Field containing the volume status.
| For CATLIST:
| Data-Set-Name Field containing the data set name. Data set
| name may be specified in the following ways:
| DATA-SET-NAME, DATASET, DSN.
| TYPE Field containing the data set type.
| VOLume Field containing the volume name. VOLume
| VOLUME, VOL.
| DEVice Field containing the device type. DEVice may be
| specified in the following ways: DEVICE, DEV.
| ORG Field containing the data set orginization.
| RecFM Field containing the record format. Record
| format may be specified in the following ways:
| RECFM, RFM.
| BLKSiZe Field containing the block size. Block size may
| be specified in the following ways: BLKSIZE,
| BLKSZ.
| LRECL Field containing the logical record length.
| CREDT Field containing the creation date.

1.130 ORDER DSN
| REFDT Field containing the reference date.

| EXPDT Field containing the expiration date.
| TRKS Field containing the number of tracks.
| INUSE Field containing the number of tracks in use.
| %USED Field containing the percent used.
| EXTents Field containing the number of extents. Extents
| EXTENTS, EXTENT, EXT.
| MGMTCLAS Field containing the SMS managment class.
| Management class may be specified in the
| following ways: MGMTCLAS, MCLASS.
| STORCLAS Field containing the SMS storage class. Storage
| class may be specified in the following ways:
| STORCLAS, SCLASS.
| DATACLAS Field containing the SMS data class. Data class
| DATACLAS, DCLASS.
| For PDSLIST:
| MEMber Field containing the names of the pds members.
| Member may be specified in the following ways:
| MEMBER, MEM.
| VV.MM Field containing the version and modification
| level. Version may be specified in the following
| ways: VV.MM, VVMM.
| CREATEd Field containing the date created. Date created
| CREATED, CREATE, CRTDT.
| Last-Mod-Date Field containing the last modified date. Last
| modified date may be specified in the following
| ways: LAST-MOD-DATE, LMD.
| Last-Mod-Time Field containing the last modified time. Last
| modified time may be specified in the following
| ways: LAST-MOD-TIME, LMT.
| SIZE Field containing the member size.
| INIT Field containing the initial member size.
| MODify Field containing the modification count. Modify
| MODIFY, MOD.
| TTR Field containing the relative track address.
| USER Field containing the member user id.

1.130 ORDER DSN
| For LBRLIST:
| MEMber Field containing the names of the AllFusion
| CA-Librarian modules. Member may be
| specified in the following ways: MEMBER, MEM.
| PaSsWorD Field containing the AllFusion CA-Librarian
| module password. Password may be specified in
| the following ways: PASSWORD, PSWD.
| Last-MoDified Field containing the last modified date and time.
| Last modified may be specified in the following
| ways: LAST-MODIFIED, LMD.
| DESCription Field containing the AllFusion CA-Librarian
| module description. Description may be
| specified in the following ways: DESCRIPTION,
| DESC.
| CREATEd Field containing the creation date. Created may
| be specified in the following ways: CREATION,
| CREATED, CREATE.
| ProGraMmeR Field containing the AllFusion CA-Librarian
| module programmer name. Programmer name
| PROGRAMMER, PGMR.
| LANGuage Field containing the AllFusion CA-Librarian
| module language. Language may be specified in
| the following ways: LANGUAGE, LANG.
| SSTAT Field containing the AllFusion CA-Librarian
| module status.
| BLocKS Field containing the number of blocks. Blocks
| BLOCKS, BLKS.
| RECordS Field containing the number of records. Records
| RECORDS, RECS.
| For LODLIST:
| MEMber Field containing the names of the load library
| members. Member may be specified in the
| following ways: MEMBER, MEM.
| ATTRibutes Field containing the load library member
| attributes. Attributes may be specified in the
| following ways: ATTRIBUTES, ATTR.

1.130 ORDER DSN
| SIZE Field containing the load library member size.

| loadEP Field containing the load library member
| entry point. Entry point may be specified in the
| following ways: LOADEP, EP.
| ALIAS-of Field containing the load library member for
| which this member is an alias. Alias may be
| specified in the following ways: ALIAS-OF,
| ALIAS
| SSI-data Field containing the SSI data. SSI data may be
| specified in the following ways: SSI-DATA, SSI.
| For VTOLIST:
| Data-Set-Name Field containing the data set name. Data set
| name may be specified in the following ways:
| DATA-SET-NAME, DSN.
| ORG Field containing the data set organization.
| Organization may be specified in the following
| ways: ORGANIZATION, ORG.
| RecFM Field containing the record format. Record
| format may be specified in the following ways:
| RECFM, TFM.
| BLocKSZ Field containing the block size. Block size may
| be specified in the following ways: BLOCKSZ,
| BLKSZ.
| CREDT Field containing the creation date. Created may
| be specified in the following ways: CREATED,
| CREATE, CREDT.
| REFDT Field containing the reference date. Reference
| REFERENCE, REFDT.
| IN-USE Field containing the number of tracks in use. In
| use may be specified in the following ways:
| IN-USE, INUSE.
| EXT Field containing the number of extents.
| ASCending Reorders specified field(s) in ascending sequence.

1.130 ORDER DSN
| DEScending
| Reorders specified field(s) in descending sequence.
| COL Starting (s) and ending (e) column boundaries for the reorder
| field. Enables sorting within fields. Column counts start at the
| beginning of a field and end at the end of that same field. If 's' is
| omitted, the default is 1.
| AND, &, @ Optional extra-words, permitted for continuity when reordering
| multiple sort criteria.
|1.130.2 Notes
| ■ A maximum of six order criteria are permitted.
| ■ If the Data Set Facility is not active, or the list type requested is not active,
| the ORDER command is ineffective. The user receives an appropriate error
| message.
| ■ If the Data Set Facility is not displayed and the user is in another facility,
| issuing the ORDER command suspends the current facility, and the Data
| set facility is made current.
|1.130.3 Usage
| ■ The ORDER command can be specified as either: ORD or ORDER.
| ■ When specifying COL, it must follow the field-name that contains the
| columns to be reordered (for example, ORDER DSN CATLIST VOL COL 1
| 3 DES AND DEV to order a catalog selection list to sort by the first three
| characters of the VOLume name in descending order, and by the DEVice).
|1.130.4 Field-name Attribute Defaults

| Each field-name is assigned a default attribute of ascending.
|1.130.5 The Ampersand as Command Delimiter

| If sites or users set the & as a command delimiter, it will override the sort
| syntax and function as a delimiter. The word 'and' or the '@' may be used in
| this case.
| To use the '&' within the ORDER command, the command delimiter must be
| set another character.

1.130 ORDER DSN
|1.130.6 Fields Containing Dates

| The fields that contain dates are sorted in chronological order of year, month,
| and then day. If a different sorting order is desired, or is the sort is to be
| literal, the COL operand must be used to designate the columns of data to be
| reordered.
| Note: For dates, ascending order sorts from oldest date to newest. Descending
| order sorts from newest date to oldest.

| ATTACH DSN OR
| REFRESH DSN
| SET DSN ORDER

1.131 ORDER LIB
1.131 ORDER LIB

Reorders a Library Selection List based on user specified criteria.
1.131.1 Syntax
ORDER LIB Command
──ORDER──┬─────┬──┬────┬──fieldname──┬────────────┬────────────
└─LIB─┘ └─BY─┘ ├─ASCending──┤
└─DEScending─┘
──COL─┬───┬─e──┬──────────────────────┬────────────────────────
└─s─┘ ├─AND──────────────────┤
│ ┌──
─────────┐ │
┬───────┬┴──┤
├─& order──
│ └─order─┘ │
└─@────────────────────┘
Operand Description
With no operands, reorders the library MEMBER field.
LIB Designates that the Library Selection List is to be reordered and
attached if it is not already current.
BY Optional extra-word, permitted for continuity.
field-name Designates the field to be reordered. If omitted, the Member field
will be reordered. If specified, it must be one of the following:
MEMber Field containing the names of the library
members.
Member can be specified as MEMBER, or MEM.
DESCription Field containing description of members, if
available.
Description can be specified as DESCRIPTION or
DESC.
LINes Field containing the number of lines each
member contains. Lines can be specified as
LINES, LINE, or LIN.
ATR Field containing member access attributes.
Access attribute can be specified as ATTRIBUTES,
ATTRIBUTE, ATTR, or ATR
SEQno Field containing member sequence number
attribute.
Sequence number attribute can be specified as
SEQATR, SEQNO, or SEQ.

1.131 ORDER LIB
CREated Field containing the date each member was

created.
Created can be specified as CREATED, CREATE,
CREATION, or CRE.
UPDated Field containing the date each member was last
updated. Updated can be specified as UPDATED,
UPDATE, or UPD.
ACCess Field containing the date each member was last
accessed. Access can be specified as ACCESSED,
ACCESS, or ACC.
CRT (SEL ALT FULL only) Field containing the
method in which the data was created.
ASCending Reorders specified field(s) in ascending sequence.
DEScending
Reorders specified field(s) in descending sequence.
COL Starting (s) and ending (e) column boundary for the reorder field.
Enables sorting within fields (for example, to sort by prefixes,
suffixes, and soforth.). Column counts start at the beginning of a
field and end at the end of that same field.
If s is omitted, the default is 1.
Column can be specified as COLS, COL, or C.
AND, &, @ Optional extra-word, permitted for continuity when reordering
multiple sort criteria.
1.131.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ A maximum of six order criteria are permitted.
■ If the Library facility is not active, the ORDER command is ineffective. The
user receives an appropriate error message.
■ If the Library facility is not displayed and the user is in another facility,
issuing the ORDER command suspends the current facility, and the
Library facility is made current.
Usage:
■ The ORDER command can be specified as ORD or ORDER.
■ When specifying COL, it must follow the field-name that contains the
columns to be reordered (for example, ORDER LIB CREATE COL 7 8 DES
to sort by the year each member was created, in descending order).
Field-name Attribute Defaults:

■ Each field-name is assigned a default ascending or descending attribute:

1.131 ORDER LIB
Field-name Attribute
Member Ascending
Description Ascending
Lines Descending
Created (date) Descending
Updated (date) Descending
Access (date) Descending
Access Attribute Ascending
Sequence Attribute Ascending
The Ampersand as Command Delimiter:

■ If sites or users set the '&' as a command delimiter, it overrides the sort
syntax and function as a delimiter. The word 'and' or the '@' may be used
in this case.
To use the '&' within the ORDER command, the command delimiter must
be set to another character.
Entry Status:
■ Any entry in the selection list that has the status of being deleted,
renamed, or removed is pushed to the end of the member list.
Fields Containing Dates:

■ The fields that contain dates are sorted in chronological order of year,
month, and then day. If a different sorting order is desired, or if the sort is
to be literal, the COL operand must be used to designate the columns of
data to be reordered.
Note: For dates, ascending order sorts from oldest date to newest.
Descending order (default) sorts from newest date to oldest.

ATTACH LIB OR
REFRESH LIB
SET LIB ORDER

1.131 ORDER LIB
1.131.3.1 Examples
■ To sort the following list by descending lines:

>
>LIB() SCRL FULL COLS 1 79 LINE 1
><...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
=================================== T O P =====================================
SIGNON KEY MATCH (SPEC+) MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES
USER1 3 11 N/A 65
MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO
ROS.SPECAASP DOC - SPECIFICATION FOR AWSASP 54 RES NOSEQ
ROS.SPECEXCL DOC - SPECIFICATION FOR EXCL 36 RES 73,8
ROS.SPECORDR 236 SHR 73,8
================================= B O T T O M =================================

Type:
ORDER LIB BY LINES DES

>
><...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
=================================== T O P =====================================
USER1 3 11 N/A 65
ROS.SPECEXCL DOC - SPECIFICATION FOR EXCL 36 RES 73,8
ROS.SPECAASP DOC - SPECIFICATION FOR AWSASP 54 RES NOSEQ
================================= B O T T O M =================================

Note: Because DES is the default attribute for LINES, the following
command would produce the same results as above:
ORDER LIB LINES
■ To sort the following list by last character qualifier in the member name,
and by access date from oldest to newest:

1.131 ORDER LIB

>
><...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
=================================== T O P =====================================
SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES
USER1 7 9 N/A 45
MEMBER DESCRIPTION CREATED UPDATED ACCESS
ROS.ROSCO1D DOC - SAMPLE LETTER 1/17/89 4/3/91 4/3/91
ROS.ROSCO1R RPF - SIGNON PROFILE 6/28/89 1/22/9 5/3/91
ROS.ROSCO1J JCL - JCL TO CREATE A TAPE 9/5/89 3/3/91 3/3/91
ROS.ROSCO2D DOC - LIST OF AREACODES 1/4/91 1/4/89 12/13/9
ROS.ROSCO2R RPF - PGM TO DISPLAY JOB 2/24/9 5/12/9 8/2/9
ROS.ROSCO2J JCL - JCL FOR IEBCOPY UTIL 6/14/9 9/19/9 9/19/9
ROS.ROSCO3R RPF - PGM TO ATTACH A JOB 2/24/9 3/18/9 2/24/91
================================= B O T T O M =================================

Type:
ORDER LIB MEM COL 14 ASC ACCESS ASC

>
><...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
=================================== T O P =====================================
SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES
USER1 7 9 N/A 45
MEMBER DESCRIPTION CREATED UPDATED ACCESS
ROS.ROSCO2D DOC - LIST OF AREACODES 1/4/91 1/4/89 12/13/9
ROS.ROSCO1D DOC - SAMPLE LETTER 1/17/89 4/3/91 4/3/91
ROS.ROSCO2J JCL - JCL FOR IEBCOPY UTIL 6/14/9 9/19/9 9/19/9
ROS.ROSCO1J JCL - JCL TO CREATE A TAPE 9/5/89 3/3/91 3/3/91
ROS.ROSCO2R RPF - PGM TO DISPLAY JOB 2/24/9 5/12/9 8/2/9
ROS.ROSCO3R RPF - PGM TO ATTACH A JOB 2/24/9 3/18/9 2/24/91
ROS.ROSCO1R RPF - SIGNON PROFILE 6/28/89 1/22/9 5/3/91
================================= B O T T O M =================================


1.132 ORDER Line Command

Reorders a selection list based on specified data or cursor positioning.
1.132.1 Syntax
ORDER Line Command
──OR──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Command Description
OR Reorders selection list.
1.132.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ The OR line command only reorders the designated field by its default
attribute. Reordering by any other criteria can be done using the primary
ORDER command.
Field Attribute Defaults:
Field-name Attribute
Member Ascending
Description Ascending
Lines Descending
Created (date) Descending
Updated (date) Descending
Access (date) Descending
Access Attribute Ascending
Sequence Attribute Ascending
Input Data:
■ A field is reordered based on the data entered into the STATUS input area.
■ If there is no field-name in the STATUS input area, Advantage CA-Roscoe
assumes the list is to be ordered by the field where the cursor is
positioned.

■ The input data must be the field-name that corresponds to the field that is
to be reordered:
MEMber Field containing the names of the library members.
Specify MEMBER or MEM.
DESCription Field containing description of members, if available.
Specify DESCRIPTION or DESC.
LINes Field containing the number of lines each member
contains.
Specify LINES, LINE, or LIN.
ATR Field containing member access attributes.
Specify ATTRIBUTES, ATTRIBUTE, ATTR, or ATR.
SEQno Field containing member sequence number attribute.
Specify SEQATR, SEQNO, or SEQ.
CREated Field containing the date each member was created.
Specify CREATED, CREATE, CREATION, or CRE.
UPDated Field containing the date each member was last updated.
Specify UPDATED, UPDATE, or UPD.
ACCess Field containing the date each member was last accessed.
Specify ACCESSED, ACCESS, or ACC.

ATTACH LIB
ORDER LIB
REFRESH LIB
SET LIB ORDER
1.132.3.1 Example
■ To sort the following list by ascending descriptions, specify OR to the left

of the member name and the field in the STATUS input area:


>
><...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
=================================== T O P =====================================
USER1 3 11 N/A 65
OR ROS.SPECAASP DESCRIPTIONDOC - AWSASP SPECIFICATION 54 RES NOSEQ
ROS.SPECEXCL DOC - EXCL SPECIFICATION 36 RES 73,8
================================= B O T T O M =================================

>
><...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
=================================== T O P =====================================
USER1 3 11 N/A 65
ROS.SPECAASP DOC - AWSASP SPECIFICATION 54 RES NOSEQ
ROS.SPECEXCL DOC - EXCL SPECIFICATON 36 RES 73,8
================================= B O T T O M =================================
Note: If there is no field-name in the STATUS input area, the list is ordered
by the field in which the cursor is positioned.

1.133 PASSWORD
1.133 PASSWORD
Establishes or cancels a sign-on password.
1.133.1 Syntax
PASSWORD Command
──PASSWORD──┬──────────────────────────────┬──────────────────
└─cur-pswd──new-pswd──ver-pswd─┘
Operand Description
cur-pswd Character string representing the current sign-on password.
new-password One-to 10 character string representing the new password. A
slash (/) may not be used as a password nor as a character
within the password. If the password is controlled by an
external security system, the length is determined by the
security system.
ver-pswd One-to ten-character string that must match the password
used for new-pswd. This is to verify the new password
setting. A slash (/) may not be used as a password nor as a
character within the password. If the password is controlled
by an external security system, the length is determined by
the security system.
1.133.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ Site management can restrict the use of this command.
Using a Password:
■ Once a password is established, it must be entered whenever the user
signs on to Advantage CA-Roscoe.
– At 3270-type terminals: The password is not displayed when entered.
– At typewriter devices: The password is masked.
■ When an external security system is being used to control the password,
the rules of the external security system determine the use and
characteristics of the password.

1.134 POINT
1.134 POINT
Positions the following data:
■ The AWS pointer to a specific line in the AWS.
■ The display of an attached data set object at a specific location.
■ The display of attached job output at a specific location.
■ The display of an attached library member/Selection List at a specific
location.
Each use of the POINT command is discussed individually on the following

pages.

1.135 POINT AWS
1.135 POINT AWS

To position the AWS pointer to a specific line in an AWS.
1.135.1 Syntax
POINT AWS Command
──POINT──┬──────────┬──┬──────────────────────┬───────────────
└─p─┬───┬──┘ └─AWS─┬───────┬─LINE v─┘
└─q─┘ └─aname─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, positions the pointer to the first line in the active
AWS. The display is not changed.
p q Number of the first and last lines to be used when positioning the
pointer. The display is not changed.
If a range is specified, the pointer is positioned to the first valid line
number within the range.
If one number is specified, the pointer is positioned to that line.
aname Name of an existing AWS. If omitted, the currently active AWS is
assumed.
v Line that is to begin the displayed, specified as a numeric value (for
example, LINE 5), or
T Display is to begin with the first line in the AWS.
B Display is to end with the last line in the AWS.
* Display is to begin with the line at which the pointer is
positioned. May be qualified with:
*+v Current location of the pointer plus v number of
lines.
*-v Current location of the pointer minus v number of
lines.
1.135.2 Notes
Using Positional Expressions:
■ If a positional expression places the pointer:
– Before the first line of the AWS,
– The pointer is positioned to the first line, or
– The display begins with the first line.
■ After the last line of the AWS, a message is displayed.

1.135 POINT AWS

AWS With no operand, at the first AWS line.
With operand, at the first line found in the specified
range.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

BOTTOM N/A
FIND
TOP
1.135.4.1 Examples
■ To position the pointer to line 100:

POINT 1
■ To position the pointer to the first existing line found between line 1 and
line 600:
POINT 1 6
This might be useful if, for example, you do not know the number of the
first line within the active AWS.
■ To position the pointer to the twentieth line before the current position:
POINT -2
■ To position the pointer to the bottom of the AWS named SAMPLE:
POINT AWS SAMPLE B

1.136 POINT DSN
1.136 POINT DSN

To begin the display of an attached data set object at a specific location.
1.136.1 Syntax
POINT DSN Command
──POINT──┬─────┬──┬─charstr─┬─────────────────────────────────
└─DSN─┘ └─Line v──┘
Operand Description
DSN Required only when the previously attached data is not currently
displayed.
charstr Name previously assigned by the NOTE command.
v Line that is to begin the display, specified as a numeric value (for
T Display begins with the first line in the data set object.
B Display begins with the last line in the data set object.
* Display begins with the line at which the pointer is
lines.
lines.
1.136.2 Notes
■ All NOTE names are automatically deleted when the data is detached.

– Before the first line of the data set object, the pointer is positioned to
the first line.
– After the last line of the data set object, a message is displayed.

1.136 POINT DSN

DROP N/A
NOTE
STATUS NOTES
1.136.3.1 Examples
■ To begin the display with the line assigned the name of NOTE1:
POINT NOTE1
■ To begin the display with line 2500:
POINT LINE 25
■ To reattach the previously attached data and begin the display with the
line that is five lines after the line at which the pointer is currently
positioned:
POINT DSN LINE +5

1.137 POINT JOB
1.137 POINT JOB

To begin the display of attached data at a specific location.
1.137.1 Syntax
POINT JOB Command
──POINT──┬─────┬──┬─charstr────────────────────────────┬──────
└─Job─┘ └─┬────────┬──┬────────┬──┬────────┬─┘
└─File v─┘ └─Page v─┘ └─Line v─┘
Operand Description
Job Required only when the previously attached job is not currently
displayed.
File File that is to begin the display, specified as a numeric value (for
example, FILE 3), or
* Display begins with the file at which the job pointer is
*+v Current location of the pointer plus v number of files.
*-v Current location of the pointer minus v number of files.
If FILE is omitted and a job is attached, the current file is assumed.
If a job is not attached, the file displayed when the job was last
attached is assumed.
Note: File can be specified as FILE, FIL, or F.
Page Page that is to begin the display, specified as a numeric value (for
example, PAGE 3), or
* Display begins with the page at which the job output pointer
is positioned. May be qualified with:
pages.
pages.
If PAGE is omitted and a job is attached, the beginning of the
current file is assumed. If a job is not attached, the beginning of the
file displayed when the job was last attached is assumed.
Note: Page can be specified as PAGE, PAG, or P.
Line Line that is to begin the display, specified as a numeric value (for
example, LINE 5) , or

1.137 POINT JOB
T Display begins with the first line.

B Display begins with the last line.
* Display begins with the line at which the job output
pointer is positioned. May be qualified with:
lines.
lines.
If LINE is omitted and a job is attached, the beginning of the
current file is assumed. If a job is not attached, the beginning of the
file displayed when the job was last attached is assumed.
Note: Line can be specified as LINE, LIN, or L.
1.137.2 Notes
NOTE Names:
■ If the site has enabled the global note pad facility, the form of the
DETACH JOB command used determines whether the note names for a
job will be saved from one attachment to another.

– Before the first file, page or line, the pointer is positioned to the first
file, page or line.
– After the last file, page or line, a message is displayed.

DROP N/A
NOTE
STATUS NOTES

1.137 POINT JOB
1.137.3.1 Examples
■ To begin the display of attached data with the line assigned the name of
NOTE1:
POINT NOTE1
■ To reattach the previously attached job and begin the display with the line
assigned the name of NOTE2:
POINT JOB NOTE2
■ To reattach the previously attached job and begin the display with the the
tenth line of the fourth file:
POINT JOB FILE 4 LINE 1
■ To reposition the display of attached job output to 30 lines beyond the first
displayed line:
POINT LINE +3

1.138 POINT LIB
1.138 POINT LIB

To begin the display of an attached library member/Selection List at a specific
location.
1.138.1 Syntax
POINT LIB Command
──POINT──┬─────┬──┬─charstr─┬─────────────────────────────────
└─LIB─┘ └─Line v──┘
Operand Description
LIB Required only when the previously attached library
member/Selection List is not currently displayed.
v Line that is to begin the display, specified as a numeric value (for
T Display begins with the first line.
B Display begins with the last line.
* Display begins with the line at which the library pointer is
lines.
lines.
1.138.2 Notes
■ All NOTE names are automatically deleted when the data is detached.

– Before the first line of the library member Selection List, the pointer is
positioned to the first line.
– After the last line of the member/Selection List, a message is
displayed.

1.138 POINT LIB

DROP N/A
NOTE
STATUS NOTES
1.138.3.1 Examples
■ To begin the display of the attached library member with assigned the
name MYNOTE:
POINT MYNOTE
■ To begin the display of the attached library member at line 1200:
POINT LINE 12
■ To reattach the previously attached library member and begin the display
with the line that is five lines after the line at which the pointer is
currently positioned:
POINT LIB LINE +5

1.139 PREFIX
1.139 PREFIX
Prefixes all or a range of lines in the active AWS with a character string.
1.139.1 Syntax
Prefix Command
──PREfix──/string/──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬─────────────────
└─P─┬───┬──┘ └─LITeral─┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
/string/ Prefix string, which may not exceed 80 characters in length and
p q Number of the first and last lines to be involved in the operation. If
only one number is specified, only that line is prefixed.
interpretation.
1.139.2 Notes
■ The prefix is not added to a line if that action would cause the line to
Specifying the 'Prefix' String:

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.

1.139 PREFIX
■ Unless requested otherwise, a hex string is interpreted as a request to use

X'C1', it is treated as a request to use the string A).
To prevent interpretation, use the qualifier LITERAL (for example, X'C1'

DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

FILL N/A
SUFFIX
EDIT E, EE, EB, ET
XLATE XL, XLB, XLT
1.139.4.1 Example
■ To prefix lines 100 through 500 of the active AWS with the string 123:
PREFIX /123/ 1 5

1.140 PREV
1.140 PREV
■ The previous occurrence of a particular character string
■ The previous occurrence of a specific location within job output
Both uses of the PREV command are discussed individually on the following
pages.

1.141 PREV
1.141 PREV
To begin the display with the previous line containing a particular character
string.
1.141.1 Syntax
PREV Command
──PREV──┬───────┬──┬──────────┬──┬───────────────┬─────────────
└─scope─┘ └──┬───┬─e─┘ └─string─┬───┬──┘
└─s─┘ └─n─┘
──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬──────────────
Operand Description
With no operand, locates and displays the prior occurrence of the
AWS Causes the active AWS to be reattached and searched for the
specified string. (Abbreviate as A.)
reattached and searched for the specified string. (Abbreviate
as L.)

1.141 PREV
n Number of lines to be searched. If omitted, the default is: 1) the end

of the active AWS or library member, or 2) the site-defined search
limit for the data set object or job output.
or JUS.)
interpretation.
following:
or IMB.)

1.141 PREV

Note: The position, LITERAL or context keywords may be
of the command.
1.141.2 Notes
equal to e.

– Includes a space (for example, PREV 'A B')
– Is numeric (for example, PREV /578/)
– Matches one of the command's keyword operands (as in, PREV /JOB/)

1.141 PREV

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.

strings that:

1.141 PREV

period, or comma).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.
PREV Command Display:

being displayed.


range.

1.141 PREV

FIRST FIRST
LAST LAST
NEXT NEXT
PREV
EXCL EXCL
INCL INCL
OMIT
SEARCH
1.141.4.1 Examples
■ To begin the display with the prior occurrence of the string PAY in the
PREV PAY
■ To begin the display with the prior occurrence of the string ABC in
columns 1 through 50 of the data that is currently attached and displayed:
PREV 1 5 ABC
■ To begin the display with the prior occurrence of a previously specified
PREV 3 6
■ To reattach the currently attached job and begin the display with the prior
PREV JOB EXEC WORD
the specified string. To find the prior occurrence of EXECUTE, either spell
PREV JOB EXEC PREFIX
■ To reattach the active AWS and begin the display with the prior
occurrence of the string DIVISION in the next 200 lines:
PREV AWS DIVISION 2

1.141 PREV
(by centering the line) with the prior occurrence of a previously specified
PREV DSN 6 9 CENTERED
■ To find the prior occurrence of the string LIB in the currently attached
data:
PREV /LIB/

1.142 PREV JOB
1.142 PREV JOB

To begin the display at the previous occurrence of a specific location within job
output.
1.142.1 Syntax
PREV JOB Command
──PREV──┬─────┬──┬──────┬─────────────────────────────────────
├─Page─┤
└─Line─┘
Operand Description
File Repositions display to begin with the prior file of the attached and
Page Repositions display to begin with the prior page of the job output
Line Repositions display to begin with the prior line of the job output
file currently displayed. (Abbreviate as LINE, LIN, or L.)
1.142.2 Notes

AWS N/A
DSN N/A
LIB N/A

1.142 PREV JOB

FIRST [ JOB ] N/A
LAST [ JOB ]
NEXT [ JOB ]
1.142.4.1 Examples
■ To reattach the previously attached job and begin the display with the
prior file:
PREV JOB FILE
■ To display the prior file of job output that is attached and displayed:
PREV FILE
■ To display the prior page of the job output file that is currently attached
and displayed:
PREV PAGE

1.143 PREV Line Command

Locates and positions the display to begin with the previous occurrence of a
1.143.1 Syntax
PREV Line Command
──PREV──┬──────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
is used.
1.143.2 Notes
■ The search for the previous occurrence of the string begins with the line
preceding the line containing the command.


THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.


PREV Line Command Display:

■ The display produced by PREV contains modifiable lines.

FIRST FIRST
LAST LAST
NEXT NEXT
PREV
EXCL EXCL
INCL INCL
OMIT
SEARCH
1.143.3.1 Examples
■ To find the prior occurrence of the string PROCEDURE:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P =============
PREV /PROCEDURE/ION DIVISION.
3

■ To find the prior occurrence of a previously specified string:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================= T O P ==============
PREV IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
3

1.144 PRINT
1.144 PRINT
Prints all or part of the designated data at a system or 328x-type printer.
1.144.1 Syntax
PRINT Command
──Print──┬────────────────────────────────────────┬────────────
├─'tag'──────────────────────────────────┤
│ ┌─AWS─┐ │
├──┴─────┴──┬──────────┬─────────────────┤
│ └─p─┬───┬──┘ │
│ └─q─┘ │
├─Dsn─┬──────────┬──┬───────┬──┬──────┬──┤
│ └─p─┬───┬──┘ └─NOHDR─┘ └─FULL─┘ │
│ └─q─┘ │
├─Job─┬──────────┬───────────────────────┤
│ └─p─┬───┬──┘ │
│ └─q─┘ │
├─Lib─┬──────────┬──┬───────┬──┬──────┬──┤
│ └─p─┬───┬──┘ └─NOHDR─┘ └─FULL─┘ │
│ └─q─┘ │
│ ┌──
─────────────────┐ │
mem─┬──────────┬─┴────────────────────┤
├──
│ └─p─┬───┬──┘ │
│ └─q─┘ │
└─SCReen─┬──────────┬────────────────────┘
└─p─┬───┬──┘
└─q─┘
──┬──────────────┬──┬───────┬──┬────────┬──┬──────────┬─────────
└─COL s─┬───┬──┘ ├─NUM───┤ └─COPy v─┘ ├─NOTIFY───┤
└─e─┘ └─NONUM─┘ └─NONOTIFY─┘
──┬───────┬──┬──────────────────┬──┬───────────────┬────────────
├─INSEP─┤ └─FORMAT─┬─DUMP─┬──┘ │ ┌─DEF─┐ │
└─NOSEP─┘ ├─CHEX─┤ └─TYPE─┼─ANS─┼──┘
└─WHEX─┘ └─MCC─┘
──┬──────┬──┬──────┬──┬─────┬──┬─────┬──┬──────┬──┬───────┬─────
└─TM v─┘ └─BM v─┘ └─FPA─┘ └─DBL─┘ └─CAPS─┘ └─BURST─┘
──┬─────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──┬───────────────┬──────────
└─FCB charstr─┘ └─DESt charstr─┘ └─CLAss charstr─┘
──┬──────┬──┬──────┬───────────────────────────────────────────
└─PW v─┘ └─PL v─┘

1.144 PRINT
Operand Description
With no operands, prints one copy of the contents of the active
AWS at the current printing location.
tag Name to be assigned to the print request. The name may
contain 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters, must start with an
alphabetic character, and be bound by apostrophes (').
AWS Designates that the entire contents of the active AWS is to be
printed. Can be qualified with:
p q Lines at which the operation begins and ends.
Dsn Designates that all of the currently attached data set object is to
be printed. Can be qualified with:
NOHDR Prevents Selection List header lines from being
printed.
FULL Causes the Selection List being printed to include
all available information. If omitted, only the
information included with the current format is
used. (Use the SELECT ALT command to change
the format.)
Job Designates that all of the currently attached job output file is to
be printed. Can be qualified with:
Lib Designates that all of the currently attached library member or
Selection List is to be printed. Can be qualified with:
NOHDR Prevents Selection List header lines from being
printed.
FULL Causes the Selection List being printed to include
all available information. If omitted, only the
information included with the current format is
used. (Use the SELECT ALT command to change
the format.)
mem Name of the library member to be printed. If multiple names
are specified, they may optionally be bound by parentheses.
Each name may be qualified with:

1.144 PRINT
SCReen Designates that the currently displayed screen is to be printed.

Can be qualified with:
COLS (s e) Number of the column at which the print operation is to
start and end within each line. 's' may be any value between 1
and the maximum line length; 'e' must be a value that is greater
than 's' and does not exceed the maximum line length.
If omitted, the entire line is printed.
NUM Designates that sequence numbers are to be included when the
data is printed.
NONUM Designates that sequence numbers are not to be included when
the data is printed.
Note: NUM and NONUM are mutually exclusive.
COPy (v) Number of copies to be printed. The maximum is a
site-defined value between 1 and 255. If specified, the total
number of pages (including all copies) cannot exceed the
site-specified print limit.
If omitted, the default is one copy.
NOTIFY Designates that a message is to be displayed when this request
is printed.
NONOTIFY Designates that no notification message is to be displayed when
this request prints.
Note:
■ NOTIFY and NONOTIFY are mutually exclusive. If neither
is specified, the site-defined default is used.
■ Site management has the option of prohibiting the use of
NOTIFY/NONOTIFY. If they are allowed, they can be used
to override the current notification setting of SET
RPSNOTIFY for this request.
INSEP Causes a page eject to occur between print sources when
multiple sources are specified in the same print request.
If omitted, the site-defined number of lines are skipped between
the sources.

1.144 PRINT
NOSEP Prohibits printing header and trailer separator pages for this
request. NOSEP is valid only if header and trailer pages are
printed by default and only if allowed by site management.
If omitted, the site-defined default is used.
FORMAT Specify the format in which the data is to be printed as:
DUMP Each line will be formatted with offsets, hex data
and EBCDIC data to the right of the line. Trailing
blanks are not shown in the print-out.
CHEX Each line will be formatted with offsets and hex
data to the right of the line.
VHEX Each line will be formatted in character data with
the hex data shown vertically below.
If omitted when doing a PRINT SCREEN, the data is printed in
its currently displayed format. If omitted when printing any
other type of data, the data is printed in character format only.
TYPE Specify the output format as:
DEF Form control pseudo-commands are recognized. A top
and bottom margin may be set (by TM and BM
operands).
ANS ANSI print control characters are recognized.
MCC Machine printer control characters are recognized.
If omitted, the default is TYPE DEF.
TM (Valid only with TYPE DEF.) (v) Number of blank lines to be
skipped from the top of the page before printing begins. 'v' may
be 0 through 99.
BM (Valid only with TYPE DEF.) (v) Number of blank lines to be
skipped at the bottom of the page. 'v' may be 0 through 99.
FPA Forces physical page alignment (page ejects for each separator
and print body).
If omitted, physical page alignment is not forced.

1.144 PRINT
DBL Causes lines containing data to be double spaced when printed.

If omitted, the data is single spaced.
CAPS Causes lowercase and uppercase characters to be printed as
uppercase characters. (The data itself is not changed.)
BURST Causes the output to be burst into separate sheets. (Valid only
when printing data at a system printer that supports the
burster-trimmer-stacker option.)
FCB (valid for JES printers only) One-to four-character name of the
FCB (forms control buffer) image to be used.
DESt Name of the printing location where the request is to print for
this execution of PRINT.
If omitted, the request is printed at the current (or default)
printing location.
CLAss Print class to be used at the location where the request is to
print.
If classes are used at your site, you will be told which classes are
valid for 328x-type printers and which are valid for system
printers.
PW (v) Width of the paper in printing columns. 'v' may be 0 through
255.
PL (Valid only with TYPE DEF.) (v) Length of the paper in number
of print lines. On printers with hardware capability to set page
length, v must match the paper length specified to the printer.
'v' may be 0 through 99.
If omitted, the default is site-defined.
1.144.2 Notes
Scheduling a Print Request:
■ A 'print request' is any data directed to a system or 328x-type printer.
■ When the PRINT command is executed, the data is scheduled for printing
and a message is displayed. The message contains the tag (if specified),
print request number assigned by Advantage CA-Roscoe, and the printing
location. Once scheduled, ALL references to a specific print request must
be by tag name or number.
■ If a printer has an unrecoverable error while a request is printing, the
request is placed on the hold queue. When the printer is back in operation,
use the PRINT RELEASE command to place the held request on the ready
queue.

1.144 PRINT
PRINT Command Operands:

■ The operands may be specified in any order. Also, multiple operands may
be specified as long as the command fits on a single line.
Identifying Data to be Printed (AWS/DSN/JOB/LIB/SCREEN):

■ Keyword operands identify the data to be printed, where:
AWS Required when printing the AWS contents in conjunction
with any other print source. When printing only the active
AWS contents, PRINT and PRINT AWS are synonymous.
DSN Required to print the attached data set object or Data Set
Selection List.
JOB Required to print the attached job output file or the Job
Selection List.
LIB Required when printing the attached Library Selection List or
member.
mem Name of the library member to be printed. It need not be
attached. If it belongs to another user, include that
individual's prefix (for example, AAA.MEM1).
SCREEN Required to print the currently displayed screen.
■ With one restriction, data from any of these print sources may be
combined to form a single print request, as in:
PRINT AWS 100 200 AWS 500 1200 or
PRINT MYMEM1 MYMEM2 100 500 MYMEM3 or
PRINT DSN LIB JOB AAA.MEM1 AWS SCREEN
The restriction is that a single print request may not include more than 12
print sources.
Alternate Print Screen:

■ If an RPF program or other application (for example, ETSO or
CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal, the current screen can be printed
by entering:
:P
in any unprotected field and pressing PF12. The cursor must immediately
follow the command. (Note that the colon and PF key assignment are the
Advantage CA-Roscoe defaults. Use the STATUS SYSTEM display to
determine if the site has changed these defaults.)

1.144 PRINT
Selecting Specific Line/Column Ranges (p/q/COLS):

■ By default, all of the data on every line is printed. To limit the operation
to:
Specific Lines: Specify the appropriate line number(s) with the
command, as in:
PRINT DSN 1200 2500
If the data does not include line numbers (such as
the current screen display or a Selection List), the
data is assumed to be numbered from one by one.
If line limits are omitted and the number of lines to
be printed exceeds the site-defined maximum, the
site-defined number of lines are printed.
Specific Columns: Specify the appropriate column numbers with the
COLS operand, as in:
PRINT JOB COLS 10 65
If the data does not include a Scale Line (such as the
current screen display), the first displayed character
is assumed to be column one.
If column limits are not specified and the width of
the line to be printed exceeds the width of the page
(for example, a 132-character line is to be printed on
a page that is 80 characters wide), the line is
wrapped to the next line. The maximum line lengths
are:
AWS = 255 characters.
DSN = 32767 characters.
JOB = 255 characters.
LIB = 255 characters.
SCR = Width of the terminal screen.
The maximum line length may be specified as two
consecutive commas (,,), as in:
PRINT MEMBER1 COLS 200 ,,
The formatting controls provided explicitly or
implicitly using the TYPE operand are ignored when
a column range is specified.

1.144 PRINT
Controlling Sequence Numbers (NUM/NONUM):

■ The NUM and NONUM operands designate whether sequence numbers
are to be included when the data is printed. (If sequence numbers are
included, they are placed in columns 1 through 6.)
■ If neither operand is specified when printing:
– AWS contents - The sequence number attribute of the active AWS is
used. (Use the SEQ or NOSEQ command to change this attribute.)
– Attached data set object, job output file or library member/Selection
List - The current display format is used (if SET DISPLAY NUM is in
effect, sequence numbers will be included.)
– Unattached library member - The member's sequence number attribute
is used.
– Screen display - No sequence numbers are included.
Controlling Page/Request Separators (INSEP/NOSEP):

■ If neither INSEP nor NOSEP are specified, site-defined options control
page ejects between requests or between separator pages and the body of a
request.
Formatting Data (FORMAT):

■ The FORMAT option allows a request to be printed in a system dump
format, character hex format or vertical hex format.
■ With FORMAT DUMP and FORMAT CHEX, the output is in a wide or
narrow format, depending on the page width requested. If:
– A page width (PW) is specified with the command, that value is used.
– No page width is specified, the default page width associated with the
printer is used.
■ In either case, if the width is less than 132, the request is printed using the
narrow format. If the width is 132 or greater, the wide format is used.
Formatting Output (TYPE):
If TYPE is omitted, the default is TYPE DEF. If it is specified, one of the

following keywords must be included.
DEF The data can be formatted using the:
■ TM and BM operands to designate the top and bottom margin,
respectively.
■ Pseudo-commands:
.sk v or :SK v Skips v number of lines. (If the number exceeds
the remaining lines to be printed, a page eject
occurs.)

1.144 PRINT
.TOP or :TOP Skips to a new page.

Pseudo-commands must start with a period (.) or colon (:), begin in
the first position of the line, and be the only data on that line.
(Use the : when including pseudo-commands in an RPF program.)
■ If the line length exceeds 132 or the defined width (PW) of the
paper, the excess characters are wrapped to the next line.
ANS ANSI printer control characters are assumed to be in the first position
of each line and are not printed.
■ The supported control characters are:
blank
space one line
0 space two lines
- space three lines
+ suppress line space
1 eject
Any other character in the first position is treated as a blank.
■ When TYPE ANS is used to print a job output file, the job must
have been ATTACHed with the CC option.
■ If the length of the line to be printed:
– Equals the hardware-defined maximum print position: The
plus sign (+) is ignored (no overstriking occurs).
– Exceeds the hardware-defined maximum print position or the
defined width (PW) of the paper: The excess characters are
truncated.
MCC Machine printer control characters are assumed to be in the first
position of each line and are not printed.
■ TYPE MCC is meant to be used when printing an attached job
output file. (Note that unpredictable results may occur if the job
output was not ATTACHed with the CC option.)
■ If the lines of a print request are 132 characters in length and the
printer is defined to shift one space to the right, the shift does not
occur.
Controlling Top and Bottom Margins (TM/BM):

■ TM and BM are recognized only if TYPE DEF is specified or is used as the
default.
■ These operands define the top and bottom margins on a physical page.
The sum of their values must be less that the physical length of the paper.
If these margins are incorrect, either the site-default values or zero is used.
Forcing Page Alignment (FPA):

1.144 PRINT
■ FPA is implied when TYPE ANS is specified.

■ It is useful with TYPE DEF when the printer has been specified by site
management to ignore page ejects.
Changing Printing Location (DEST):

■ Printing locations are associated with terminals. To display the names of
the locations associated with the terminal being used, issue the command:
PRINT LOCATION
The first displayed location is the default location assigned to the terminal.
The current printing location (which is either the default or a previously
assigned alternate) is preceded by an asterisk.
■ To change the printing location for a single execution, use the DEST
operand, as in:
PRINT DEST PR17
■ To change the printing location for the remainder of the terminal session,
before executing the PRINT command(s), use the command:
SET RPSDEST
Designating Site-Defined Class (CLASS):
■ When CLASS is specified with DEST, the data is printed at the printer
with the matching printer class at the specified printing location.
■ When CLASS is specified without DEST, the data is printed at the printer
with the matching printer class at the current printing location.
■ If CLASS is specified with a valid class that is not defined for the
designated printing location, the data is held until the definition is
changed.
Defining Paper Size (PW/PL):

■ Use PW and PL to define the physical width and length of the paper. They
should only be used when the paper in the printer differs from the type of
paper for which the printer was initially defined.
■ If the value you specify with PW is greater that the hardware-defined
maximum print position, the maximum print position is used.

DSN P (data set object) N/A
LIB P (library object)
SET RPSNOTIFY (control
notification message)
STATUS JOB (job output)

1.144 PRINT
1.144.3.1 Examples
■ To print all of the attached data set object at the current printing location:
PRINT DSN
■ To print all of the library member named TEST and the active AWS plus
lines 500 through 990 of the library member named DATA at the current
printing location:
PRINT TEST AWS DATA 5 99
■ To print the contents of columns 60 through 90 of the attached job output
file at the current printing location:
PRINT JOB COLS 6 9
■ To print the currently displayed screen and to include sequence numbers
in the printed output:
PRINT SCR NUM
■ To print three copies of the library member SAMPLE and to assign that
request the tag name MANY:
PRINT 'MANY' SAMPLE COPY 3
■ To print lines 1200 through 2500 of the attached job output file and to
receive notification when the request is printed:
PRINT JOB 12 25 NOTIFY
■ To print lines 22000 through 22020 of the attached data set object and have
each line formatted with offsets, hexadecimal data and EDCDIC data to the
right of each line:
PRINT DSN 22 222 FORMAT DUMP
■ To print the contents of the active AWS at the printing location identified
as OTHER1:
PRINT DEST OTHER1
where OTHER1 is not the default or current printing location for the
terminal.
■ To print the contents of the library member REPORT with a top margin of
10 and a bottom margin of 8:
PRINT REPORT TM 1 B 8
TYPE DEF is the default. Thus, the TM and BM operands are recognized
and the data may contain the formatting pseudo-commands.

1.145 PRINT CANCEL
1.145 PRINT CANCEL

Terminates one or more previously scheduled print requests.
1.145.1 Syntax
PRINT CANCEL Command
──Print Cancel──┬─All────────────────────────────┬────────────
├─request────────────────────────┤
└─Dest string─┬───────────────┬──┘
└─Class charstr─┘
Operand Description
ALL Terminates all of the user's outstanding print requests.
request Request(s) to be terminated, specified as either:
tag Name assigned by user to a request.
number Number assigned by Advantage CA-Roscoe to a request.
Leading zeros are not required.
A maximum of 12 requests can be specified, provided the command
fits on a single line. Optionally, the request(s) may be bound by
parentheses.
Dest Name of the printing location at which the user's outstanding print
requests are to be terminated. (Abbreviate as DES or D.)
Class Number of printer class. If specified, only the print requests for that
class are terminated at the designated location. If omitted, all classes
for the designated location are affected. (Abbreviate as CLA or C.)
1.145.2 Notes
■ This command does not allow the user to cancel another user's print
request(s).
Using a 'Tag' Name:

■ If a tag is specified and there are multiple requests with the same tag
name, the first matching request is cancelled.
Cancelling Print Requests:
■ If PRINT CANCEL is issued and the request is:
– On the print request queue (waiting to print) - the request is deleted
from the queue.
– Printing - printing stops after the current buffer is printed, the request
is terminated and the next available request is selected for printing.

1.145 PRINT CANCEL
■ All pending copies of the print request are cancelled.
Error Handling:
■ If an error occurs when a list of requests are to be cancelled, requests up to
the request in error are cancelled; the request in error and any subsequent
requests are not cancelled.
1.145.2.1 Example
■ To cancel all requests at the HOME1 printing location:

PRINT CANCEL DEST HOME1

1.146 PRINT DEVICE
1.146 PRINT DEVICE

Provides a list of all printers and their status.
1.146.1 Syntax
PRINT DEVICE Command
──Print DEVice──┬──────────────────┬──────────────────────────
├─charstr─┬─────┬──┤
│ └─Phy─┘ │
├─NOAttach─────────┤
└─REPly mem────────┘
Operand Description
With no operands, writes information about all printers to the
member ZZZZZDEV and then attaches the member for display.
charstr Name of the printer for which logical status information is to be
displayed.
Phy Displays the status of a physical node.
NOAttach
Suppresses the display of the information written to the appropriate
library member. (Abbreviate as NOATT or NOA.)
REPly Name of the library member that is to contain the status
information. If omitted, the default name ZZZZZDEV is used. (If
the appropriate member does not exist, it is created in the user's
library. If the member exists, its contents are updated.)
1.146.2 Notes
PRINT DEVICE Display:
The following are the fields in the PRINT DEVICE display.

PRINTER Printer identification, shown as:
■ Actual printer name for 328x-type printers, or
■ JES for system printers. (For name, see PRINTER
NAME.)
LOCATION Name (destname) of the printing location.
CLASSES Classes assigned to the printer.
STATE State of the printer, where:
■ AVAIL (Available for printing.)
■ ACTIV (Printing.)

1.146 PRINT DEVICE
■ CLOSE (Not currently available for printing.)

■ UNAV (Not to be used by Advantage CA-Roscoe.)
■ TRNST (In transit
between states.)
ESTAT Extended state. (Reserved.)
COMND Pending command or condition. (Reserved.)
REQST# Advantage CA-Roscoe-assigned print request number.
TAG User-assigned name, if specified.
PRINTER NAME System printer name, if the field PRINTER contains JES.
PRINT DEVICE Printer-Name Display:
The following are the fields in the PRINT DEVICE Printer-Name display.
PRINT Printer identification.
STATE State of the printer, where:
■ ALLOC (Printing.)
■ CLOSE (Not currently available for printing.)
■ TRNST (In transit; between states.)
COMMAND Pending command or condition. (Reserved for future
use.)
CLASSES Classes assigned to the printer.
REQUEST# Advantage CA-Roscoe-assigned print request number.
CPEJECT Line skip information, where:
■ X = Lines skipped between leading and trailing
separators.
■ Y = Lines skipped between trailing and leading
separators.
LOCK Provides CA with debugging information.
LOGICAL FEATURES
Printer features (defined by the site).
CURRENT PAGE LENGTH/WIDTH
Current setting of page length and width (as specified in
PRINT command).

1.146 PRINT DEVICE
DEFAULT PAGE LENGTH/WIDTH

Default setting of page length and width (defined by the
site).
MAXIMUM PRINT POSITION
Hardware-defined maximum print position (defined by
the site).
CURRENT MARGINS
Current setting of top and bottom margins (as specified
in PRINT command).
DEFAULT MARGINS
Default setting of top and bottom margins (defined by
the site).
LOGICAL CONTROL
Controls defined by site, where:
■ FPA (Forced page alignment.)
■ DBL (Double-spacing.)
■ NOSEP (No separator page.)
■ NOSHFT (Do not shift lines of print request 1
position to the right.)
CHARACTER SET IN USE
Language code indicating the character set that the
printer uses (as defined by the site).
PRINTER DESCRIPTION
One-to 32-character site-assigned description of printer.
PRINT DEVICE Printer-Name PHY Display:
The basic display produced by this command contains information that is

common to all printers. Additional information is provided based on your
site's access method.
Information Common To All Printers

NODE Identification of network connection point.
ACCESS METHOD Access method.
BUFSIZ Device buffer size.
PENDING COMMAND
Pending command or condition. (Reserved.)
PENDING EXTENDED COMMAND
Pending extended command. (Reserved.)

1.146 PRINT DEVICE
STATE State of printer, where:

■ ACTIV (Printing.)
■ CLOSE (Not currently available for use.)
■ TRNST (In transit; between states.)
EXTENDED STATE (Reserved.)
VTAM Information
RUSIZ Request unit size.
DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS
Device characteristics (in hex).
SESSION PARAMETERS
Information shared between network and mode about
session.
LAST RPL STATUS
Status from last VTAM RPL (Request Parameter List).
CURRENT RPL ECB address and contents from current VTAM RPL.
BTAM Remote Information

DEVICE TYPE Type of device (for example, X'04' = printer).
DEVICE FLAGS
Current status of device.
BUFFER CMND
Device command code (for example, erase/write, write).
SENSE Processing flags. First byte indicates type of I/O request.
Second byte indicates response to request.
STATUS MESSAGE
Sense bytes from status message.
BTAM Local Information

DEVICE COMMAND
Operation type.
SENSE DECB sense bytes.
STATUS CSW status bytes.
ERROR Error status.

1.147 PRINT HOLD
1.147 PRINT HOLD

Holds one or more requests on the print request queue.
1.147.1 Syntax
PRINT HOLD Command
──Print Hold──┬─ALL────────────────────────────┬──────────────
├─request────────────────────────┤
└─Dest string─┬───────────────┬──┘
Operand Description
ALL Holds all of the user's outstanding print requests.
request Request(s) to be held, specified as either:
tag Name assigned by user to a request.
number Number assigned by Advantage CA-Roscoe to a request.
parentheses.
Dest Name of the printing location at which outstanding requests are to
be held. (Abbreviate as DES or D.)
class are held at the designated location. If omitted, all classes for
the designated location are affected. (Abbreviate as CLA or C.)
1.147.2 Notes
■ This command does not allow the user to hold another user's print
request(s).
Using a 'Tag' Name:

name, the first matching request is held.
Holding Print Requests:

■ If PRINT HOLD is issued and the request printing, printing stops and the
request is placed on the hold queue.
■ All pending copies of the print request are held.
Releasing a Held Request:

1.147 PRINT HOLD
■ Use the PRINT RELEASE command to place one or more requests on the
ready queue.
Error Handling:
■ If an error occurs when a list of requests are to be held, requests up to the
request in error are held; the request in error and any subsequent requests
are not held.
1.147.2.1 Example
■ To hold three print requests, REQ1, REQ2 and REQ3, at the current
printing location:
PRINT HOLD REQ1 REQ2 REQ3

1.148 PRINT LOCATION

Provides information about the printing location(s).
1.148.1 Syntax
PRINT LOCATION Command
──Print LOCation──┬─────────────────────┬──┬───────────┬──────
├─DLIST─┬─────────┬───┤ ├─NOAttach──┤
│ └─string1─┘ │ └─REPly mem─┘
├────────────────────┤
├─string2─────────────┤
└─System─┬─────────┬──┘
└─string3─┘
Operand Description
With no operands, writes information about the printing locations
comprising the destination list associated with the terminal to the
member ZZZZZLOC and then attaches the member for display.
DLIST Causes information about all of the destination lists to be displayed.
This operand may be qualified with:
string1 Name of a destination list about which printing location
information is desired.
* Causes detailed information about the current or default printing
location to be displayed.
string2 Actual name or alias of a printing location within the destination
list associated with the terminal.
System Causes information about every printing location defined at the site
to be displayed. (Abbreviate as SYS or S.) This operand can be
qualified with:
string3 Actual name or alias of a printing location about which
information is desired.
NOAttach
information. If omitted, the default name ZZZZZLOC is used. (If
the appropriate member does not exist, it is created in the user's
library. If the member exists, its contents is updated.)

1.148.2 Notes
Definitions:
■ A printing location consists of one or more printers.
■ A destination list consists of one or more printing locations. (Sites have the
option of grouping printing locations and assigning a name to each
grouping. These names become the destination list names.)
Determining Default Vs. Current Printing Location:

■ When displaying the destination list associated with the terminal, the first
printing location in the list is the default location (the location in effect
when you sign on). An asterisk marks the current printing location (either
the default or a location established by the SET RPSDEST command).
PRINT LOCATION Display:

■ The following information is displayed when you enter:
PRINT LOCATION (with no operands)
PRINT LOCATION DLIST string1
PRINT LOCATION SYSTEM
DESTINATION LIST NAME
Name of the destination list to which the terminal is
assigned. (Not displayed with PRINT LOCATION
SYSTEM.)
DESCRIPTION Description of the location (including alias).
STATE State of the location, where:
– AVAIL (Available for printing no printer(s) active.)
– ACTIV (Available for printing at least one printer
active.)
– CLOSE (Not currently available for printing.)
– UNAV (Printer not to be used by Advantage
CA-Roscoe.)
RECORDS Number of records ready to be printed.
REQS Number of requests ready to be printed.
SLCR Selection criteria.

REJECT Maximum number of lines per request that can be

queued (0 if no limit).
DV Number of printers assigned to to the location.
PRINT LOCATION DLIST
DESTINATION LIST NAME
Name(s) of the destination lists defined by the site.
# OF LOCATIONS ASSIGNED TO LIST
Total number of locations associated with each destination
list.
PRINT LOCATION
PRINT LOCATION string2
PRINT LOCATION SYSTEM string3
DESCRIPTION Description of the location (including alias).
STATE State of the location, where:
– AVAIL (Available for printing; no printer(s)
active.)
– ACTIV (Available for printing; at least one printer
active.)
– CLOSE (Not currently available for printing.)
– UNAV (Printer not to be used by Advantage
CA-Roscoe.)
PENDING COMMAND
Pending command or condition. (Reserved.)
SELECT Selection criteria.
RECORDS IN QUEUE
Number of records ready to be printed.
REQUESTS IN QUEUE
Number of requests ready to be printed.

LINES OUT Total number of lines printed at this location during

this session.
MAX LINES Maximum number of lines per request that can be
queued (0 if no limit).
MAX COPIES Maximum number of copies permitted.
PRINTERS AVAILABLE
Total number of available printers.
PRINTERS ALLOCATED
Total number of allocated printers.
PRINTERS UNAVAILABLE
Total number of unavailable printers.
PRINTERS List of printers assigned to the designated printing
location.

1.149 PRINT RELEASE
1.149 PRINT RELEASE

Releases one or more requests on the print request queue.
1.149.1 Syntax
PRINT RELEASE Command
──Print Release──┬─────┬──┬─ALL────────────────────────────┬──
└─TOP─┘ ├─request─┬─────┬────────────────┤
│ └─TOP─┘ │
└─Dest string─┬───────────────┬──┘
Operand Description
TOP Causes the request to resume printing with the first line of the first
page.
If specified immediately after PRINT RELEASE, all released
requests resume printing with the first line of the first page.
If specified after a request, only that request resumes printing with
the first line of the first page.
If omitted, printing resumes with the first line of the last page
printed before the request was held.
ALL Releases all of the user's outstanding print requests.
request Request(s) to be released, specified as:
tag Name assigned by user to request.
number
Number assigned by Advantage CA-Roscoe to request.
parentheses.
Dest Name of the printing location where the requests are to be released.
(Abbreviate as DES or D.)
class are released at the designated location. If omitted, all classes
for the designated location are affected. (Abbreviate as CLA or C.)

1.149 PRINT RELEASE
1.149.2 Notes
■ This command does not allow the user to release another user's print
request(s).
■ All pending copies of the print request are released.
Using a 'Tag' Name:

name, the first matching request is released.
Releasing a Request:
■ A released request is placed at the bottom of the ready queue.
Error Handling:
■ The command is ignored if the designated request is not currently held.
1.149.2.1 Example
■ To release print request REQ1 and begin printing with the page last
printed at the time the request was held, and to release print request REQ2
and begin printing from the first page:
PRINT RELEASE REQ1 REQ2 TOP

1.150 PRINT ROUTE
1.150 PRINT ROUTE

Changes the printing location for one or all of the terminal user's held print
requests.
1.150.1 Syntax
PRINT ROUTE Command
──Print ROUte──┬─request──────┬──TO──string2──────────────────
├─ALL──────────┤
└─Dest string1─┘
Operand Description
request Request(s) to be rerouted, specified as:
tag Name assigned by user to the request.
number
Number assigned by Advantage CA-Roscoe to the request.
parentheses.
ALL All of the user's held print requests are to be rerouted.
Dest Name of a printing location. All of the user's held requests at this
location are to be rerouted. (Abbreviate as DES or D.)
TO (string2) Name of the printing location to which the user's held
requests are to be routed.
1.150.2 Notes
Rerouting a Request:
■ A request that is to be rerouted must be held first (via PRINT HOLD
command). It is automatically released when it is rerouted.
Using a 'Tag' Name:

name, the first matching request is rerouted.
Error Handling:
■ If an error occurs when a list of requests is being rerouted, requests up to
the request in error are rerouted; the request in error and any subsequent
requests are not.

1.150 PRINT ROUTE
1.150.2.1 Examples
■ To reroute the request 128 to printing location RS97:

PRINT ROUTE 128 TO RS97
■ To reroute all of the user's held requests from PS44 to RS97:
PRINT ROUTE DEST PS44 TO RS97
■ To reroute all of the user's held requests, regardless of their current
printing location, to RS97:
PRINT ROUTE ALL TO RS97

1.151 PRINT STATUS
1.151 PRINT STATUS

Provides information on the status of outstanding print requests.
1.151.1 Syntax
PRINT STATUS Command
──Print Status─────────────────────────────────────────────────
──┬────────────────────────────────────────────┬────────────────
├─ALL────────────────────────────────────────┤
├─request────────────────────────────────────┤
├─System─────────────────────────────────────┤
└─Dest string─┬───────────────┬──┬────────┬──┘
└─Class charstr─┘ └─System─┘
──┬───────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────
├─NOAttach──┤
└─REPly mem─┘
Operand Description
With no operands, acts as though PRINT STATUS ALL was
entered. The information is written to the member ZZZZZSTA
which is then attached for display.
ALL Provides status information on all of the user's outstanding print
requests.
request Request(s) for which status information is desired, specified as:
[ pfx. ] tag Name assigned by user to the request.
[ pfx. ] number
Number assigned by Advantage CA-Roscoe to the
request. Leading zeros are not required.
A maximum of 12 requests can be specified,
provided the command fits on a single line.
Optionally, the request(s) may be bound by
parentheses. Requests are assumed to belong to the
user signed on unless a prefix is specified.
pfx.* Status information is provided on all outstanding
print requests for the owner of the designated
prefix.
Dest Name of the printing location for which status information is to be
provided. If specified with SYSTEM, information is provided about
all print requests at that destination. If SYSTEM is omitted,
information is provided only about outstanding requests belonging
to the user signed on. (Abbreviate as DES or D.)

1.151 PRINT STATUS
Class Number of the printer class for which status information is to be

displayed. If omitted, all printer classes are assumed. (Abbreviate
as CLA or C.)
System Provides status information on all outstanding print requests at the
printing location. (Abbreviate as SYS or S.)
NOAttach
information. If omitted, the default name ZZZZZSTA is used. (If the
appropriate member does not exist, it is created in the user's library.
If the member exists, its contents is updated.)
1.151.2 Notes
Error Handling:
■ If an error occurs when multiple requests are being processed, status
information is available for the requests up to the request in error.
Information is not provided for the request in error nor any subsequent
requests.
PRINT STATUS Request Display:
The following are the fields in the PRINT DEVICE display.

PREFIX Prefix of user who entered the print request.
REQUEST# Request number.
CLASS Class assigned to the request.
STATE Status of the request, where:
■ ACTIV (Currently printing.)
■ HOLD (Held.)
■ READY (Ready to be printed.)
■ QUEUE (Ready queue status.)
PENDING COMMAND
Pending command or condition, where:
■ ASIS (ACTIV, HOLD or READY request to be
printed starting with last page printed; if held or
from beginning, if new request.)
■ CANCL (ACTIV request to be cancelled.)
■ HOLD (ACTIV request to be held.)

1.151 PRINT STATUS
■ TOP (ACTIV, HOLD or READY request to be

printed from beginning.)
■ HELD (Ready queue is currently being held.
PRINTER Printer identification, if request is ACTIV.
TOTAL RECORDS Number of records spooled.
REMAINING RECORDS
Remaining records spooled.
COPIES Number of copies requested.
LAST PAGE# Relative number of last printed page.
PAGE LENGTH Page length, if specified in PRINT command.
PAGE WIDTH Page width, if specified in PRINT command.
TOP MARGIN Top margin, if specified in PRINT command.
BOTTOM MARGIN Bottom margin, if specified in PRINT command.
DISPOSITION Disposition of print requests, where:
■ NOSPL (Do not spool.)
■ NODEL (Do not delete.)
■ RENAM (Rename.)
■ DELET (Delete.)
■ NOCKP (Do not checkpoint.)
OPTIONS Options specified in PRINT command, where:
■ FPA (Physical page alignment required.)
■ DBL (Double space.)
■ NOSEP (Do separator pages.)
■ NOSHFT (Do not shift lines of print request 1
position to right.)
PRINT STATUS Display:
The following information is provided when you enter:

PRINT STATUS (with no operands)
PRINT STATUS ALL
PRINT STATUS SYSTEM
PRINT STATUS DEST string
PREFIX Prefix of user who entered the print request.

REQ# Request number.
STATE Status of request, where:
■ ACTIV (Currently printing.)
■ HOLD (Held.)

1.151 PRINT STATUS
■ READY (Ready to be printed.)

■ QUEUE (Status of ready queue.)
COMND Pending command or condition, where:
■ ASIS (ACTIV, HOLD or READY request to be printed
starting with last page printed, if held; or from
beginning, if new request.)
■ CANCL (ACTIV request to be cancelled.)
■ HOLD (ACTIV request to be held.)
■ TOP (ACTIV, HOLD or READY request to be printed
from beginning.)
■ HELD (Ready queue is being held.)
TOTRECS Number of records spooled.
REMRECS Remaining records spooled.
PRINTER Printer identification, if request is ACTIV.
CLASS Class assigned to request.
1.151.2.1 Examples
■ To obtain status information for all print requests in the system and place
that information into library member STATINFO:
PRINT STATUS SYSTEM REPLY STATINFO
■ To obtain status information for all print requests at the HOME1 printing
location:
PRINT STATUS DEST HOME1 SYSTEM
■ To obtain status information for all print requests for the user signed on:
PRINT STATUS

1.152 PURGE
1.152 PURGE
Cancels a job from the system queue.
1.152.1 Syntax
PURGE Command
──PURge──┬────┬──┬────────────────┬───────────────────────────
└─-K─┘ └─string─┬────┬──┘
└─,v─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, prompts for the job name.
-K Produces listing of the output from the cancelled job.
string Name of the job.
v Number of the job. Required when there are multiple jobs with the
same name.
1.152.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ PURGE is a user-contributed Monitor command. Site management has the
option of restricting use of this command.

1.153 QDSN
1.153 QDSN
|
| Invokes an RPF that displays information about the current data set editing
| session.
|1.153.1 Syntax
|
| QDSN Command
| ──QDSN────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
| There are no operands.
|1.153.2 Notes
| By default, it is executed from the RO prefix.
| ■ The QDSN command displays an informational panel containing the
| current data set edit status. As shown in the screen below, if you are not
| currently editing a data set, the display panel is blank.
| <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
|
| EDIT DATASET FACILITY
| CURRENTLY EDITING:
| DATA SET ===>

| VOLUME ===>
| UNIT ===>
| ■ To end the display, press Enter.

| ATTACH DSN N/A
| CDSN
| EDSN
| SDSN

1.153 QDSN
1.154 QUERY
Provides information about ETSO applications. Specifically, the following can
be displayed:
■ Information about all files the user has allocated for use under ETSO
■ Information about each currently executing ETSO application
■ Information about any input or output diversions that may currently be in
effect for applications executing under ETSO
Each use of the QUERY command is discussed individually on the following

pages.
1.154.1 QUERY ALLOCATE

To display information about all files the user has allocated for use under
ETSO.
1.154.1.1 Syntax
QUERY ALLOCATE Command

──Query ALLOCate──┬─────┬─────────────────────────────────────
└─AWS─┘
Operand Description
AWS Causes information to be written to the active AWS. If omitted, the
information is written to the terminal.
1.154.1.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ This command is valid only when the Extended Time-Sharing Option
(ETSO) is active.
QUERY ALLOCATE Display:

■ Information provided by QUERY ALLOCATE includes:
DDNAME DD name of the file.
TYPE Type of file allocated, shown as:
– * (the terminal)
– AWS
– DATASET (a sequential data set)
– GDG (a generation data group)
– LIBRARY (a library member)

1.154 QUERY
– PDS (a PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian

module)
– RPS
– SYSOUT
DISP Disposition of the file shown only if TYPE contains
DATASET, GDG or PDS.
MEMBER Name of the allocated AWS, Advantage CA-Roscoe
library member or PDS member.
DATA SET NAME Any of the following:
– Name of the allocated data set, if TYPE contains
DATASET, GDG or PDS; or
– Class and destination, if TYPE contains RPS; or
– Class, destination and form, if TYPE contains
SYSOUT.
1.154.1.3 Related Commands

ALLOCATE N/A
CALL
CANCEL
DIVERT
FREE
QUERY CALL
QUERY DIVERT
RESUME
SET ESCAPE
1.154.2 QUERY CALL

To display information about each currently executing ETSO application.
1.154.2.1 Syntax
QUERY CALL Command

──Query CALL──┬─────┬─────────────────────────────────────────
└─AWS─┘
Operand Description
AWS Causes information to be written to the active AWS. If omitted, the
information is written to the terminal.

1.154 QUERY
1.154.2.2 Notes
Restriction:
(ETSO) is active.
QUERY CALL Display:

■ Information provided by QUERY CALL includes:
– User sign-on key.
– Number of the presentation area in which the application is executing.
– Name of the execution application(s).
– Time application execution started.
– Number of CPU time slices used
– Amount of memory used below the 16MB line, followed by the
amount of memory used above the 16MB line.

ALLOCATE N/A
CALL
CANCEL
DIVERT
FREE
QUERY ALLOCATE
QUERY DIVERT
RESUME
SET ESCAPE
1.154.3 QUERY DIVERT

To display information about any input or output diversions that may
currently be in effect for applications executing under ETSO.
1.154.3.1 Syntax
QUERY DIVERT Command

──Query DIVERT──┬─────┬───────────────────────────────────────
└─AWS─┘

1.154 QUERY
Operand Description
AWS Causes the diversion information to be written to the active AWS. If
omitted, the information is written to the terminal.
1.154.3.2 Notes
Restriction:
(ETSO) is active.

ALLOCATE N/A
CALL
CANCEL
DIVERT
FREE
QUERY ALLOCATE
QUERY CALL
RESUME
SET ESCAPE

1.155 REFRESH
1.155 REFRESH
Redisplays a Selection List.
1.155.1 Syntax
REFRESH Command
──REFRESH──┬──────────────────┬───────────────────────────────
├─DSN─┬───────┬────┤
│ ├─QUICK─┤ │
│ ├─SHORT─┤ │
│ └─LONG──┘ │
└─LIB─┬─────────┬──┘
└─DEFAULT─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, refreshes the currently attached Selection List.
DSN Required only when reattaching a Data Set Facility Selection List
that is not currently displayed.
When refreshing a Data Set Facility Selection List, the operation
QUICK Causes the refreshed Selection List to contain only the
names of the appropriate data sets, members or modules.
SHORT Causes the refreshed Selection List to contain the
minimum information.
LONG Causes the refreshed Selection List to contain the
maximum available information.
Note: QUICK, SHORT and LONG are mutually exclusive. If
omitted, the refreshed display contains the same extent of
information as was previously displayed.
LIB Required only when reattaching a Library Facility Selection List that
is not currently displayed.
When refreshing a Library Facility Selection List, the operation may
be qualified with:
DEFAULT Causes the refreshed Selection List to be reordered in
the sequence defined by the SET LIB ORDER
command. If SET LIB ORDER was never specified, the
Selection List is ordered in its default sequence (by
MEMBER name).

1.155 REFRESH
1.155.2 Notes
■ When the REFRESH command is issued, the Selection List is redisplayed
with the most current information reflected. This is useful when, for
example, you have been deleting or renaming multiple entries on the list.
1.155.2.1 Examples
■ To refresh the current attached Selection List:

REFRESH
■ To reattach and refresh the previously displayed Data Set Facility Selection
List:
REFRESH DSN
■ To reattach and refresh the previously displayed Data Set Facility Selection
List and have the maximum available information displayed:
REFRESH DSN LONG
■ To refresh the currently attached Data Set Facility Selection List and have
the maximum available information displayed:
REFRESH LONG

1.156 RELEASE
1.156 RELEASE
Releases unused DASD space allocated to a data set.
1.156.1 Syntax
RELEASE Command
──RELEASE──Dsn──dsn─┬─────┬───┬────────────────┬───────────────
└─(v)─┘ └─Volume charstr─┘
──┬──────────────┬──┬──────────────┬───────────────────────────
└─UNIT charstr─┘ └─PSWd charstr─┘
Operand Description
dsn One- to 44-character fully qualified name of the sequential or
partitioned data set whose unused space is to be released. The
name may be qualified with:
v Relative generation number of the GDG (Generation Data
Group) data set for which unused space is to be released,
specified as 0 (most current) or a minus number (for example,
-1).
data set resides. Required if the data set is not cataloged.
(Abbreviate as VOL or V.)
UNIT One- to eight-character unit name associated with the device type
PSWd Password, established by the site, for the designated data set. If
omitted and a password is required, the release is denied.
1.156.2 Notes
Space is released on:
A track boundary if the extent containing the last record was allocated in
units of tracks or in units of average block length with
the ROUND parameter omitted.
A cylinder boundary if the extent containing the last record was allocated in
units of cylinders or in units of average block length
with the ROUND parameter specified.

1.156 RELEASE
Note: The ROUND parameter is not supported by the Data Set Facility
ALLOCATE command. It may be specified by the ETSO ALLOCATE
command or in a batch job by OS JCL.

DSN RL (display menu N/A

1.157 RENAME
1.157 RENAME
Used to rename one of the following:
■ An AWS
■ Data set, PDS member, AllFusion CA-Librarian module
■ Advantage CA-Roscoe library member
Each use of the RENAME command is discussed individually on the following

pages.
1.157.1 RENAME AWS

To rename an AWS.
1.157.1.1 Syntax
RENAME AWS Command

──RENAME──Aws──aname1──aname2─────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
aname1 Name of an existing AWS.
aname2 One- to eight-character new name to be assigned to the AWS. It
must conform to Advantage CA-Roscoe's member naming
conventions. The name may not be FLIP, NEXT, PREV, ROSn,
SYSn, or TMPn (where 'n' is a numeric value); nor may it be B, F,
N, P, T, or R.
If the name is specified as TEMP, a name is generated in the form
TMPn where 'n' is a unique character.

ALTER AWS N/A
CREATE AWS
1.157.1.3 Example
■ To change of the name of an existing AWS from SAMPLE to TEST:

RENAME AWS SAMPLE TEST

1.157 RENAME
1.157.2 RENAME DSN

To rename a data set, PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module.
1.157.2.1 Syntax
RENAME DSN Command

──RENAME Dsn──dsn─┬──────────┬───NEWNAME dsn─┬──────────┬──────
├─(v)──────┤ ├─(+v)─────┤
└─(dsnmem)─┘ └─(dsnmem)─┘
──┬──────────────────┬──┬────────────────┬──────────────────────
│ ┌──
──────────────┐ │ │ ┌──
────────────┐ │
Volume charstr┴─┘ └──
└── UNIT charstr┴─┘
──┬────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────────────
│ ┌──
────────────┐ │
PSWd charstr┴─┘
└──
Operand Description
renamed. The name may be qualified with:
v Relative generation number of the GDG data set to
be renamed, specified as 0 (most current) or a minus
number (for example, -1).
dsnmem One- to eight-character name of the PDS member or
AllFusion CA-Librarian module to be renamed.
NEWNAME
One- to 44-character fully qualified new name for the data set.
The name may be qualified with:
+v Relative generation number to be assigned to GDG
data set, specified as a value between 1 and 255.
dsnmem One- to eight-character new member module name.
the data set is not cataloged. (The volume(s) must be mounted
and online.) (Abbreviate as VOL or V.)
not cataloged and resides on a mass storage volume.

1.157 RENAME
If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or the

password.
1.157.2.2 Notes
Non-VSAM Data Sets/VSAM Objects:

■ RENAME may be used to rename non-VSAM data sets and the following
VSAM object types: AIX, CLUSTER, DATA, INDEX, PAGESPACE, and
PATH.
'Recatalog' Operation:
■ For SMS-managed data sets, a recatalog operations is always performed.
■ For non-SMS-managed data sets, a recatalog operation is performed if the
data set to be renamed is cataloged and the volumes on which the rename
is performed match those specified in the catalog.

DSN R (display menu) N/A
1.157.2.4 Examples
■ To rename the data set SAMPLE.ONE to SAMPLE.TWO:

RENAME DSN SAMPLE.ONE NEWNAME SAMPLE.TWO
■ To rename the member/module XXX on SAMPLE.TWO to YYY:
RENAME DSN SAMPLE.TWO(XXX) NEWNAME YYY
1.157.3 RENAME (LIB)

To rename a library member and, optionally, change its description and
attributes.
1.157.3.1 Syntax

1.157 RENAME
RENAME(LIB) Command
──RENAME──mem1──mem2──┬───────────┬──┬───────────────────┬─────
└─/charstr/─┘ ├─SEQ─┬──────────┬──┤
│ ├─s─┬───┬──┤ │
│ │ └─l─┘ │ │
│ └─COBOL────┘ │
└─NOSEQ─────────────┘
──┬────────────┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
├─Shared─────┤
├─Execonly───┤
└─Restricted─┘
Operand Description
mem1 Name of the existing library member.
mem2 New name for the library member. The name must comply with
Advantage CA-Roscoe's member naming conventions and must not
currently exist in the user's library.
/charstr/ One- to 30-character delimited description to be assigned to the
member.
SEQ Sets attribute to allow the insertion of sequence numbers when the
library member is submitted for background execution. With no
further qualification, causes sequence numbers to be placed in
s l Starting column and length of the sequence number field.
The maximum length of the is field is 8 characters. If
COBOL
Causes sequence numbers to be placed in columns 1
through 6.
NOSEQ Sets attribute to prevent the insertion of sequence numbers when
the library member is submitted for execution.
Shared Sets attribute to allow anyone to access or execute the member; only
the owner can change or delete it.
owner can access, change or delete it. (This operand is intended for
RPF programs.)
Restricted
Sets attribute to allow only the owner to execute, access, change or
delete the member.

1.157 RENAME
1.157.3.2 Notes

■ RENAME can be used to change member attributes while changing the
member's name. RENAME has no effect on the content of the library
member.
can rename that member.

Change Attributes: N/A
ALTER
INFO LIB display
LIB R (display menu)
UPDATE
1.157.3.4 Examples
■ To change the name of a library member from BEGIN to END, without

changing the attributes of that member:
RENAME BEGIN END
■ To rename a member and change the description and access attribute:
RENAME BEGIN END /SAMPLE LIBRARY MEMBER/ S

1.158 RENUMBER
1.158 RENUMBER
Renumbers all or a range of lines within the active AWS. Optionally, changes
the increment used by COPY, INPUT, and MOVE and causes the sequence
numbers to be placed within the data.
1.158.1 Syntax
RENUMBER Command (Basic Form)
──Renumber──┬───┬──i──────────────────────────────────────────
└─V─┘
RENUMBER Command (Extended Form)

──Renumber──┬───────────────────────┬──────────────────────────
├─FRom n─┬───────────┬──┤
│ └──┬────┬─n─┘ │
│ └─TO─┘ │
├─EXcl n─┬───────────┬──┤
│ └──┬────┬─n─┘ │
│ └─TO─┘ │
└─TO n──────────────────┘
──┬────────────────────────┬──┬────────┬───────────────────────
├─STart v─┬───────────┬──┤ └─IN s e─┘
│ └──┬────┬─i─┘ │
│ └─BY─┘ │
└─BY i───────────────────┘
Operand Description
With no operand, changes both the starting value and increment to
100 and uses those values to renumber all of the lines within the
active AWS.
v i Starting number and increment value for the renumber operation.
The increment value cannot exceed six digits in length. If it is the
only value specified, it changes the increment value that is used the
next time data is added to the end of the AWS. (The AWS is not
renumbered.)
FRom Number of the first line to be included in the range of lines being
renumbered.
EXcl Number of the first line to be excluded from the range of lines
being renumbered.
TO Number of the last line to be included or excluded in the
renumbering operation. If omitted, the operation continues to the
end of the AWS.

1.158 RENUMBER
Note: If neither FROM nor EXCLUDE are specified, the operation

begins with the first line of the AWS.
STart Starting value for the renumber operation.
BY Increment value for the new line number. The value cannot exceed
six digits in length. If omitted, the default is 100.
IN Starting column and length of the field into which the new
sequence numbers are to be placed. The maximum length is eight
digits.
1.158.2 Notes
Adding Sequence Numbers to AWS:
■ The sequence numbers associated with the data in the AWS are maintained
externally from the data itself. The numbers are shown with the data when
the data is displayed, SUBMITted or PRINTed.
■ To add the sequence numbers to the data in the AWS, use the IN operand.
WARNING:
If data exists in the designated columns, the data is overlaid by the
sequence numbers. Also, since these numbers become part of the data,
they are not affected by subsequent renumber operations.
Command Ignored:
■ If renumbering would result in a line number that exceeds the maximum
allowable line number, renumbering does not occur.

DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

Renumber AWS Contents: N/A
FETCH

1.158 RENUMBER
1.158.4.1 Examples
■ To renumber all of the lines in the AWS with a starting value of 100 and
an increment value of 100:
RENUMBER
■ To renumber all lines within the AWS with a starting value of 5 and
increment value of 10:
RENUMBER START 5 BY 1 or
RENUMBER START 5 1 or
RENUMBER 5 1
■ To change the increment value to 20 when data is added to the end of the
AWS by a COPY, INPUT, or MOVE operation:
RENUMBER BY 2 or RENUMBER 2
■ To renumber only lines 100 through 900 of the AWS with a starting value
of 10 and increment value of 5:
RENUMBER FROM 1 TO 9 START 1 BY 5
■ To renumber the entire AWS from 100 by 100 and have the sequence
numbers placed within columns 1 through 6:
RENUMBER START 1 BY 1 IN 1 6

1.159 REPEAT Line Commands

Repeats line(s) one or more times after itself.
1.159.1 Syntax
REPEAT line Commands
──┬─R─┬───┬───┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
└─RR─┬───┬──┘
└─v─┘
Operand Description
R Single line to be repeated after itself.
RR Block of lines to be repeated. RR must be entered on the first and
last line of the block to be repeated.
v Number of times the line(s) are to be repeated. If omitted, the
line(s) are repeated once.
1.159.2 Notes
Repeating Multiple Lines:
■ When repeating multiple lines, the designated lines are repeated
immediately following the line containing the last RR command.
■ If a number is specified with both RR line commands, the first value is
used.

=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT
XCOPYX
COPY
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT


CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE
1.159.3.1 Example
■ To copy line 800 after itself three times, enter:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P =============
R38 2 FILLER PIC X.
9 1 COL-HEAD-1.
The result is:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ================================ T O P =======
8 2 FILLER PIC X.
81 2 FILLER PIC X.
82 2 FILLER PIC X.
83 2 FILLER PIC X.
9 1 COL-HEAD-1.

1.160 RESET Line Command
1.160 RESET Line Command

Resets all pending and/or invalid line commands.
1.160.1 Syntax
RESET Line Command
──RESET───────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.160.2 Notes
Using RESET:
■ RESET may be specified in the sequence number field of the lines
designating the top and bottom of the active AWS. (The sequence number
field of these lines contain '......'.)
■ When RESET is entered,
– Any line commands that have not yet been executed are cancelled.
– Any primary commands that have not yet been executed are ignored.
– Any changes made to the data displayed in the Execution Area are
ignored.
Alternate Methods:
■ All pending line commands and errors are also cancelled by:
– Primary commands that cause the screen to be reattached.
– Deleting an entry by using the ERASE EOF key or the Delete key.
– Overtyping an invalid entry with blanks. (Overtyping the entry with
anything other than blanks does not cancel the pending line
command.)

1.161 RESUME
1.161 RESUME
Resumes execution of a previously suspended ETSO application.
1.161.1 Syntax
RSUME Command
──RESUME──ETSO────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.161.2 Notes
Restriction:
(ETSO) is active.
Suspended Applications:
■ If an application is suspended, the message ETSO PENDING is displayed
on the System Information Line. (Only applications using the ETSO
Application Programming Interface have the option of suspending
execution.)
■ To display information about suspended applications, issue the QUERY
CALL command.

:U N/A
ALLOCATE
CALL
CANCEL
DIVERT
FREE
QUERY ALLOCATE
QUERY CALL
QUERY DIVERT
SET ESCAPE

1.161 RESUME
1.162 RSHIFT
Shifts right all or a range of lines in the active AWS.
1.162.1 Syntax
RSHIFT Command
──RSHift── v──┬──────────┬──┬────────────┬──┬──────────┬──────
└─p─┬───┬──┘ └─BOUNDS s e─┘ └─TEXTStop─┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
v Number of positions the line is shifted to the right.
p q Number of the first and last line to be shifted.
BOUNDS Number of the first and last column to be affected by the shift
operation. (Abbreviate as BNDS or B).
TEXTStop Designates that shifting stops for any line involved in the
operation if data would be shifted to the right of the specified or
default column boundary.
If omitted, data shifted to the right of the specified or default
column boundary is lost.
1.162.2 Notes
Column Boundaries:
80.)
To change the boundaries for:

■ A single execution: Specify the BOUNDS operand of this command. After
the command executes, the previously established or default range is
restored.
■ The terminal session: Use the SET BOUNDS primary command or the
BOUNDS line command. The range remains in effect until changed by
another SET BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line command.

1.162 RSHIFT

DSN N/A
JOB N/A
N/A

), )), )B, )T and
>, >>, >B, >T
LSHIFT (, ((, (B, (T and
<, <<, <B, <T
1.162.4.1 Examples
■ To shift the contents of every line in the active AWS ten spaces to the right
(inserting blanks in the first 10 spaces):
RSHIFT 1
■ To shift the contents of lines 100 through 500 five spaces to the right:
RSHIFT 5 1 5
■ To shift the contents of columns 50 through 70 two spaces to the right:
RSHIFT 2 BOUNDS 5 7
■ To shift the contents of columns 50 through 70 ten spaces to the right as
long as this does not cause any data to be lost:
RSHIFT 1 BOUNDS 5 7 TEXTSTOP
If TEXTSTOP is omitted, any data shifted beyond column 70 is lost. With
TEXTSTOP, shifting stops when data is detected in column 70.

1.163 RUN
1.163 RUN
Initiates execution of a Monitor command.
1.163.1 Syntax
RUN Command
──RUN──charstr1─┬────┬───┬─────┬──┬──────────┬─────────────────
└─-p─┘ └─mem─┘ └─p──┬───┬─┘
└─q─┘
──┬────────────┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
└─/charstr2/─┘
Operand Description
charstr1 Name of the Monitor command to be executed. The name must
contain at least 3 characters and no more than 8 characters.
-p Processing option used by the command. There should be no
space between Monitor command name and -p.
mem Name of a library member to be used as input to the command.
If omitted, the contents of the active AWS is used as input to the
command.
p q Number of the first and last lines of the active AWS or library
member to be used as input to the command.
/charstr2/ String to be passed to the command. It may not exceed 200
characters in length.
1.163.2 Notes
Using RUN:
■ RUN can be used to invoke any Monitor routine. It is optional when the
input is from an inline string or the active AWS.
■ RUN is required when the input is from a library member or from a range
of lines in the active AWS or library member.
■ Appendix B contains information about the Monitor commands that use
the extended facilities provided by RUN.

1.163 RUN
Using a Processing Option:

■ Advantage CA-Roscoe uses the -A processing option to indicate that input
to the Monitor command is from an alternate source, not from an inline
string. The alternate source can be a named library member or the AWS if
a library member is not named.
Using an Inline String:

■ When using a inline string, it:
1. Must be delimited if the RUN command is specified.
2. Must not be delimited if the RUN command is omitted.
Abbreviation:
■ RUN may be abbreviated as V.

AWS Input: If the input is read from the active AWS, at the
last line. Output: If the Monitor command writes to the
active AWS, the position is uncertain.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A
1.163.3.1 Examples
■ To execute the EXPORT Monitor command using the contents of the active
AWS as input:
EXPORT-A or
RUN EXPORT-A
■ To execute the IMPORT Monitor command using an inline string as input:
IMPORT DSN=ROSCOE.SAMPLE or
RUN IMPORT /DSN=ROSCOE.SAMPLE/
■ To execute the EXPORT Monitor command using lines 500 through 700 of
the library member MYDSN as input:
RUN EXPORT-A MYDSN 5 7

1.163 RUN
1.164 SAVE
Places the contents of the active AWS into the library as a member.
1.164.1 Syntax
SAVE Command
──Save── mem──┬──────────┬──┬──────────┬───────────────────────
└─p──┬───┬─┘ └─/chrstr/─┘
└─q─┘
──┬───────────────────┬──┬────────────┬────────────────────────
├─SEQ─┬──────────┬──┤ ├─Shared─────┤
│ ├─s─┬───┬──┤ │ ├─Execonly───┤
│ │ └─l─┘ │ │ └─Restricted─┘
│ └─COBOL────┘ │
└─NOSEQ─────────────┘
Operand Description
mem Name to be assigned to the library member being created. The
name must comply with Advantage CA-Roscoe's member naming
conventions and must not currently exist in the user's library.
p q Number of the first and last lines within the active AWS to be
saved.
/charstr/ One- to 30-character description to be assigned to the member.
qualification, causes sequence numbers to be placed in columns 73
through 80. The qualifications are:
field.
COBOL Causes sequence numbers to be placed columns 1
through 6.
owner can access, change or delete it. (This attribute is intended for
RPF programs.)

1.164 SAVE
Restricted
delete the member.
1.164.2 Notes
Member Naming Conventions:
■ A library member name must:
– Be one to eight unique character in length (the name must not already
exist in your library).
– Begin with an alphabetic or national character. The remainder of the
name may be any combination of alphanumeric or national characters.
Default Description/Attributes:
■ If no description or attributes are specified in the SAVE command, the
following applies:
– The member does not have a description.
– The member's sequence number attribute is the same as the sequence
attribute of the AWS when the data was saved. (The sequence attribute
of the AWS is SEQ 73 8 at sign-on. This can be changed by issuing a
SEQ or NOSEQ command or by fetching a library member with a
different attribute.)
– The member's access attribute is the site-defined default attribute. (This
can be changed by issuing the SET SAVEATTR command.)
Error Conditions:
■ If an error occurs, the contents of the AWS are retained in the AWS and
are not saved as the contents of a library member.

DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

1.164 SAVE
Primary Command(s) Line Commands(s)

UPDATE (when used in RPF N/A
program)
1.164.4.1 Examples
■ To save the entire contents of the active AWS as the member PROG:
SAVE PROG /SAMPLE COBOL PROGRAM/
■ To save lines 1200 through 3900 of the active AWS as the member TEST:
SAVE TEST 12 39 /TEST DATA FOR PROG/

1.165 SCALE
1.165 SCALE
(Typewriter devices only.) Types out a scale line.
1.165.1 Syntax
SCALE Command
──SCALE───────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.165.2 Note
■ The scale line is aligned with the data portion of a listing. For example:
....+....1....+....2....+.... 1 THIS IS DATA

1.166 SCREEN
1.166 SCREEN
Allows the terminal user to alter the number of rows and columns comprising
the display.
1.166.1 Syntax
SCREEN Command
──SCReen──┬───────────────────────┬──┬───────┬────────────────
├─2─────────────────────┤ └─CLEAR─┘
├─3─────────────────────┤
├─4─────────────────────┤
├─5─────────────────────┤
├─Primary───────────────┤
├─Alter─────────────────┤
├─Flip──────────────────┤
└─Row v─┬────────────┬──┘
└─Column── v─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, resets the screen to its original size.
2 Sets the screen size to 24 rows by 80 columns.
Primary Sets the screen to the primary size as defined by the site.
(Abbreviate as PRI or P.)
Alter Sets the screen to the alternate size as defined by the site.
(Abbreviate as ALT or A.)
Flip Reverses the screen size from primary to alternate or vice versa.
Row Number of rows to be included in the display. The number must
not be less than 11 or exceed the terminal constraints.
Column Number of columns to be included in the display. The number
must not be less than 80 or exceed the terminal constraints.
(Abbreviate as COL or C.)
CLEAR Clears the screen output buffer of any data before the command is
executed. Execution is not paused when the command is executed
from within an RPF program.

1.166 SCREEN
1.166.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ SCREEN may not be used when:
– A partial-screen split is in effect.
– The screen was split using :S or :W.
– A full-screen split is in effect and an RPF program executing in either
screen contains a SET SCREEN NOMODIFY. (The SET SCREEN
command is described in the RPF Language Guide.)
– Accessing Advantage CA-Roscoe through XTPM.
■ If multiple commands are entered in the Command Area, any command(s)
following SCREEN is ignored.
Using 2, 3, 4 Or 5:
The operands 2 through 5 can be used at any:

■ Non-IBM terminal that has an external hardware switch to alter the screen
size to a model 2, 3, 4 or 5 (for example, Lee Data terminals).
■ IBM terminal that supports the create-partition structured field.
■ IBM terminal that supports the specified number as either the primary or
alternate screen size.
Using PRIMARY, ALTER And FLIP:

■ The operands PRIMARY, ALTER and FLIP can be used at any 3270-type
terminal to switch back and forth between the terminal's primary and
Using ROW And COLUMN: The operands ROW and COLUMN can be used
at any:
■ IBM terminal that supports the create-partition structured field.
■ IBM terminal that supports the specified number as either the primary or
Using CLEAR:
■ When the SCREEN command is executed from within a RPF program,
program execution is paused. When a program is paused, the user can
enter any Advantage CA-Roscoe command. This presents a problem for
sites with restricted users. If the pause is permitted, the site's control of the
restricted user's session is bypassed.

1.166 SCREEN
■ The CLEAR operand should be used when the SCREEN command is to be

executed from within a restricted user's RPF program. It prevents the
program from being paused after the command is executed.
■ If CLEAR is not used and the restricted user's program is paused, the user
is signed off. (To prevent a site losing control of a restricted user's session,
the user's RPF program cannot be paused.)
■ When CLEAR is used, any output directed to the terminal by commands
issued prior to the SCREEN command are lost. To ensure that the output
is displayed, the program can force its display before SCREEN is issued.
This can be done, for example, by executing a dummy READ command
before the SCREEN command.

1.167 Scroll Line Commands

Allows a screen display to be scrolled. A screen display may be scrolled by:
■ Line
■ Page
■ Top or bottom of the active AWS
The Scroll Line commands are discussed individually on the following pages.
1.167.1 Scroll Line Commands (By Line)

To scroll a screen display by line. The line may be implicitly referenced or
explicitly specified.
1.167.1.1 Syntax
Scroll Line Commands (By Line)

────┬────┬──v────────────────────────────────────────────────
├─+v─┤
└─-v─┘
Operand Description
* Line containing * is to be scrolled to the top of the screen display. *
+v Number of lines forward from the line containing the * to
obtain scroll location.
-v Number of lines backward from the line containing the * to
obtain scroll location.
v Number of the line that is to be scrolled to the top of the screen
display. Leading zeros are optional.
1.167.1.2 Examples
■ To scroll line 13000 to the top of the display, use *:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P ==============
11 1 DETAIL-LINE.
12 2 FILLER PIC X.

or, enter the number:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P ==============
13 2 DETAIL-LINE.
12 2 FILLER PIC X.
■ To scroll the line five lines after line 11000 to the top of the display:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P ==============
+5 1 DETAIL-LINE.
12 2 FILLER PIC X.
■ To scroll the line four lines before line 11000 to the top of the display:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P ==============
-4 1 DETAIL-LINE.
12 2 FILLER PIC X.
13 2 FILLER PIC X.
1.167.2 Scroll Line Commands (By Page)

To scroll a screen display by page.
1.167.2.1 Syntax
Scroll Line Commands (By Page)

──┬─+─┬──P──┬───┬─────────────────────────────────────────────
└─-─┘ └─v─┘
Operand Description
+P Scroll forward one or v number of pages.
-P Scroll backward one or v number of pages.
1.167.2.2 Notes
■ A page is equivalent to the number of lines in the Execution Area.

■ The Program Function keys may not be used to scroll the display.

1.167.2.3 Examples
■ To scroll the display forward three pages:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P ==============
+P3 1 DETAIL LINE.
12 2 FILLER PIC X.
■ To scroll the display backward five pages:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P ==============
-P5 1 DETAIL LINE.
12 2 FILLER PIC X.
13 2 FILLER PIC X.
1.167.3 Scroll Line Commands (To Top/Bottom)

To scroll a screen display to top or bottom of the active AWS.
1.167.3.1 Syntax
Scroll Line Commands (To Top/Bottom)

──┬─B-──┬───┬─┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
└─T+──┬───┬─┘
└─v─┘
Operand Description
B- Scroll to the bottom. Can be qualified with:
v Number of lines to be subtracted from the bottom to obtain
the scroll location.
T+ Scroll to the top. Can be qualified with:
v Number of lines to be added to the top to obtain the scroll
location.
1.167.3.2 Note
■ The Program Function (PF) keys may also be used to scroll the display.

1.167.3.3 Examples
■ To scroll to the top of the active AWS:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P ==============
T+1 1 DETAIL-LINE.
12 2 FILLER PIC X.
■ To scroll to the bottom of the active AWS less four lines:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P ==============
B-4 1 DETAIL-LINE.
12 2 FILLER PIC X.

1.168 SDSN
1.168 SDSN
|
| Invokes an RPF that saves or updates data set edit information and
| discontinues the data set editing session.
|1.168.1 Syntax
|
| SDSN Command
| ──SDSN──┬────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────
| │ ┌──
──────┐ │
| chrstr┴──┘
└─PSWd──
| PSWd Password(s), established by the site, for the designated data set or
| AllFusion CA-Librarian master file. If omitted, and a password is
| required, access is denied.
| If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or
| AllFusion CA-Librarian master file module password.
| If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data set
| password, and the second is treated as the AllFusion CA-Librarian
| password.

| By default, it is executed from the RO prefix.
| Primary Command(s) Line Commands(s)

| ATTACH DSN N/A
| EDSN
| CDSN
| QDSN

1.169 SEARCH
1.169 SEARCH
Displays only those lines of the active AWS that contain a specific string.
1.169.1 Syntax
──SEArch─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──────
├─F─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
├──┬───┬─e──────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ └─s─┘ │
└─/string/─┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬──┘
└─p──┬───┬─┘ └─LITeral─┘ └─context─┘ └─Mix─┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
F Terminates SEARCH after displaying the first line that does not
contain the specified string.
interpretation.
following:
as WOR.)

1.169 SEARCH

IMB.)
1.169.2 Notes

(for example, SEARCH 20 30 ABC). After the
equal to e.
SEARCH 12 72). From the terminal, the command affects only the AWS.
When executed from within an RPF program, the command is comparable
to SET BOUNDS ALL. The range remains in effect until changed by a SET
and e operands.

1.169 SEARCH

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.


1.169 SEARCH
strings that:
period, or comma).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.
SEARCH Command Display:

■ The resulting display includes the number and contents of each line that
does not contain the specified string.
■ The displayed lines are not modifiable. Use the INCL primary or line
command to obtain a modifiable display.


AWS With SEARCH: At the end of the active AWS of given
range. (If TRACE EDIT is in effect and tracing is ended
with an attention, the position is uncertain.) With
SEARCH F: If a match is found, at that line. If no
match, at the end of the active AWS or given range.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

1.169 SEARCH

FIRST FIRST
LAST LAST
NEXT NEXT
PREV PREV
EXCL EXCL
INCL INCL
OMIT
1.169.4.1 Examples
■ To display all lines containing the string XYZ:

SEARCH /XYZ/
■ To display all lines containing XYZ in columns 73 through 80:
SEARCH 73 8 /XYZ/
■ To display all lines containing XYZ in the next 10 lines:
SEARCH /XYZ/ 1

1.170 SELECT
1.170 SELECT
Repositions the display between different levels. SELECT may be used in the
following ways:
■ To reposition the display between different occurrences of named AWSs
■ To reposition the display between different levels within the Data Set
Facility
■ To reposition the display between different levels within the Library
Facility
Each use of the SELECT command is discussed individually on the following

pages.
1.170.1 SELECT AWS

To reposition the display between different occurrences of named AWSs.
1.170.1.1 Syntax
SELECT AWS Command

──SELect Aws──┬─ALT─┬───┬──┬──┬─────────┬──┬────────┬──────────
│ └─v─┘ │ └─NOPOINT─┘ └─NOATTR─┘
├─aname──────┤
├─PREV───────┤
├─NEXT───────┤
├─FLIP───────┤
└──┬─+v─┬───┘
└─-v─┘
──┬─────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─DISCARD─┘
Operand Description
ALT Causes the current STATUS AWS display to be changed to the
next sequential format. To display a specific format, specify:
v Number of the alternate display format.
aname Name of the AWS that is to be displayed.
PREV Causes the previously displayed AWS to be displayed.
NEXT Causes the next AWS to be displayed.
FLIP Causes the display to 'bounce' between the currently active AWS
and the previously active AWS.
*+v Causes the AWS that is v number of AWSs forward from the
currently active AWS to be displayed.

1.170 SELECT
*-v Causes the AWS that is v number of AWSs backward from the
currently active AWS to be displayed.
NOPOINT Causes the internal SELECT pointer position to be ignored. If
omitted, the display begins with the line that had been the first
displayed line when the designated AWS was previously
displayed.
NOATTR Causes the attributes associated with the current AWS to remain
in effect when the designated AWS is activated. (The previously
defined attributes of the selected AWS are overridden.)
DISCARD Causes the currently active AWS to be discarded when the
designated AWS is activated.
1.170.1.2 Notes
Activating an AWS:
■ When an AWS is displayed using SELECT, it becomes the currently active
AWS.
■ SELECT fails if the designated AWS is active (currently displayed in either
split screen or being used by an executing RPF program).
■ If an AWS was created with the attribute:
– EXPLICIT - it can only be selected by its name (for example, SELECT
AWS TEST).
– IMPLICIT - it can be selected by the PREV, NEXT, and FLIP operands.
Using PREV and NEXT:

■ These operands allow you to 'scroll' through AWSs created with the
IMPLICIT attribute. If the screen is split, the AWS current with the 'other'
split screen is bypassed.
Using FLIP:
■ If you include FLIP when assigning this command to a PF key (for
example, LET PF2 = 'SELECT AWS FLIP'), you can 'bounce' between the
current and prior AWSs by pressing that PF key.
Using NOPOINT:
■ Advantage CA-Roscoe maintains two internal pointers for each AWS. One
pointer is used by SELECT to mark the line beginning the display. The
other pointer marks the line affected by the execution of a command.
■ The NOPOINT operand designates that the SELECT pointer position is to
be ignored. For example, assume that when the AWS named TEST1 was
last displayed, the display began with line 7200. Now assume that another
AWS is active and you issue the command:
POINT AWS TEST1 LINE 5

1.170 SELECT
If you then enter:

SELECT AWS TEST 1
the display begins with line 7200 (the line at which the SELECT pointer is
positioned).
If, however, you enter:
SELECT AWS TEST1 NOPOINT
the display begins with line 500 (the line at which the command pointer is
positioned).
1.170.1.3 Internal Pointer Position

AWS At the first line.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

ATTACH AWS N/A
POINT AWS
1.170.1.5 Examples
■ To activate the AWS named TEST1:

SELECT AWS TEST1
■ To active the previously active AWS:
SELECT AWS PREV
■ Assume that the AWS names TEST1 is currently active. To activate the
AWS named TEST2 and discard the AWS that is currently active (TEST1):
SELECT AWS TEST2 DISCARD

1.170 SELECT
1.170.2 SELECT DSN

To reposition the display between different levels within the Data Set Facility.
1.170.2.1 Syntax
SELECT DSN Command

──SELect──┬─────┬──┬─ALT─┬───┬─────────────────┬──────────────
└─Dsn─┘ │ └─v─┘ │
├─CAT───────────────────────┤
├─DIR───────────────────────┤
├──┬────────┬─ dsn─┬─────┬──┤
│ └─MEMber─┘ └─mem─┘ │
├─MENU──────────────────────┤
├─NEXT──────────────────────┤
├─PREV──────────────────────┤
├─VOL───────────────────────┤
└─VTOC──────────────────────┘
Operand Description
DSN Required only when reattaching a data set object.
ALT Causes the current display to be changed to the alternate display
format. If there is no alternate format, the display is unchanged.
With the Menu: 'Bounces' the display between the last
available specific and generic data set
name.
With Selection Lists: Displays the next sequential alternate
format. To display a specific alternate
format, specify:
| v Number of the alternate display.
| Specifying 1 or 3 displays the last DSN
| wildcard to be selected.
| Specifying 2 or 4 displays the last fully
| qualified DSN to be selected.
With an AllFusion CA-Librarian module:
'Bounces' the display between the source
code and the module history records.
CAT Causes a previously displayed Catalog Selection List to be
redisplayed.
DIR Causes a PDS/LIBRARIAN Selection List to be displayed. It is
either:
■ The previously displayed PDS or AllFusion CA-Librarian
Selection List, or

1.170 SELECT
■ The PDS or AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List associated

with the member/module currently displayed.
dsn Name of the data set, member or module to be displayed. If the
name contains:
■ A period (for example, TEST.A), it is treated as a data set name.
If the name was on a previously displayed Catalog or VTOC
Selection List, the appropriate List is displayed. If it did not
appear on a previous List and a:
1. Catalog Selection List was previously displayed, the catalog
is searched for the data set, or
2. VTOC Selection List was previously displayed, the volume
is searched for the data set.
■ More than six characters, it is treated as a member/module
name. If it did not appear in a previously displayed PDS or
AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List, the current
PDS/AllFusion CA-Librarian master file is searched for the
designated member/module.
■ Six or less characters, the name is treated as:
1. A member/module name if a PDS or AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List was previously displayed.
2. A volume serial number, if a PDS or AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List was was not previously
displayed.
Use the MEMBER keyword if a member/module name could
be mistaken for a data set name or volume serial number.
MENU Causes the Data Set Facility menu to be displayed.
NEXT Causes the 'next' function specified on the last displayed Selection
List to be performed.
PREV Causes the previous level in the data set processing hierarchy to be
redisplayed. If there is no previous level, the Data Set Facility menu
is displayed.
VOL Causes the previously displayed Volume Selection List to be
redisplayed.
VTOC Causes a VTOC Selection List to be displayed. Depending on the
current display, either the previously displayed Selection List is
redisplayed or a Selection List representing the contents of the
volume on which the currently displayed data set resides is
displayed.

1.170 SELECT
1.170.3 SELECT LIB

To reposition the display between different levels within the Library Facility.
1.170.3.1 Syntax
SELECT LIB Command

──SELect──┬─────┬──┬─ALT─┬───┬────────┬───────────────────────
└─LIB─┘ │ └─v─┘ │
├─DIR──────────────┤
├──┬────────┬─ mem─┤
│ └─MEMber─┘ │
├─MENU─────────────┤
├─NEXT─────────────┤
└─PREV─────────────┘
Operand Description
LIB Required only when reattaching the Library Facility.
ALT Causes the current display to be changed to the alternate display
format. If there is no alternate format, the display is unchanged.
To display a specific alternate format, specify:
| v Number of alternate format to be displayed.
| Specifying 1 displays the last fully qualified library member
| to be selected.
| Specifying 2 displays the last member selected by an RPF.
| Specifying 3 displays the last wildcard selection.
| Specifying 4 displays the last selection by prefix only.
With a Selection List: The next sequential or specific format is
displayed.
With the menu: 'Bounces' the display (sequentially or by
number) to show the different types of
available information.
DIR Causes the Library Selection List to be displayed.
MEMBER One- to eight-character name of the library member to be
displayed. (Use MEMBER when the member name matches a
command operand.)
MENU Causes the Library Facility menu to be displayed.
NEXT Causes the next function, specified on the last displayed Selection
List, to be performed.
PREV Causes the previous level in the processing hierarchy to be
redisplayed. If there is no previous level, the Library Facility
menu is displayed.

1.170 SELECT
1.171 SEND
Sends a message to another Advantage CA-Roscoe terminal user.
1.171.1 Syntax
SEND Command
──SEND──┬─────┬──┬─KEY=key─┬──┬──────────┬──┬─────┬────────────
├─AWS─┤ └─PFX=pfx─┘ └─/string/─┘ └─NOW─┘
└─mem─┘
──┬─────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─NODSPLY─┘
Operand Description
AWS Causes the contents of the active AWS to be used as the message.
mem Name of the library member containing the message.
Note: If neither AWS nor a library member name is specified,
the string operand is required.
KEY= Sign-on key of the person to receive the message.
PFX= 2- or 3-character Advantage CA-Roscoe prefix of the person to
receive the message.
string Note to be sent. It must be bound by delimiters and not exceed
64 characters in length.
NOW Causes the message to be transmitted only if the recipient of the
message is currently signed on and receiving messages. If the
recipient is not signed on or is not receiving messages, the sender
is notified and no message is transmitted.
NODSPLY Causes the message to be placed in the recipient's library member
ZZZZZMSG. No message is displayed on the Response Line of
the recipient's terminal.
1.171.2 Notes
To Send a One-Line Message:
■ Identify the recipient by that individual's sign-on key or prefix and include
a One- to 64-character message with the command.
■ The message is displayed on the Response Line the next time the recipient
presses Enter or any PF key.

1.171 SEND
To Send a Multi-Line Message:

■ Place the text of the message in either the AWS or a library member. Then
issue the SEND command, identifying the location of the message, as in:
SEND AWS KEY=SPECHT /AGENDA FOR STAFF MEETING/
■ In this example, the message is assumed to be in the active AWS and the
string is used as a note, identifying the message being sent.
The next time the recipient presses Enter or any PF key, the following
message is displayed:
MSG FROM key IN MEMBER Zmddhhmm string
where 'key' is the sign-on key of the sender, 'Zmddhhmm' is the name of
the member in the recipient's library that contains the multi-line message,
and 'string' is the optional note specified by the sender.
Contents of the Member ZZZZZMSG:

■ Whether or not the recipient is signed on, a two-line entry is added to the
top of the member ZZZZZMSG in the recipient's library.
■ For a one-line message, the entry is in the form:
date, time, sender sign-on key
message
■ For a multi-line message, the entry is in the form:
date, time, sendersign-on key
MESSAGE IN MEMBER: pfx.Zmddhhmm [ note ]
■ The name of the library member Zmddhhmm identifies the month (in
hexadecimal), day, hour and minute the member was created in the
recipient's library.
Controlling the Display of Received Messages:

■ Excluding the use of the NOW operand, the recipient always receives
messages that are sent to that individual. The display of those messages
can be controlled by the SET SEND command. (See SET SEND for

Transmit: N/A
MESSAGE
Control Display
SET SEND
STATUS SESSION

1.171 SEND
1.171.3.1 Examples
■ To send a one-line message that is displayed on the Response Line of the

recipient's terminal and written to the library member ZZZZZMSG owned
by that individual:
SEND KEY=SMITH /PLEASE SEE ME SOON/
■ To send a one-line message that is displayed only if the recipient is signed
on and receiving messages:
SEND KEY=SMITH /MUST SEE YOU IMMEDIATELY/ NOW
■ To send a one-line message that is not to be displayed on the Response
Line of the recipient's terminal:
SEND KEY=SMITH /THE PASSWORD IS 'ABLE'/ NODSPLY
SEND KEY=SMITH /SEE YOUR MEMBER ZZZZZMSG/
In this example, the first SEND places its message in the member
ZZZZZMSG of the recipient's library. Because NODSPLY is specified, the
message is not displayed. The second SEND is then used to tell the
recipient to view the library member.

1.172 SEQ
1.172 SEQ
Sets the sequence number attribute for the active AWS and, optionally, places
sequence numbers in that AWS.
1.172.1 Syntax
SEQ Command
──SEQ──┬────┬──┬──────────┬───────────────────────────────────
└─IN─┘ ├─s─┬───┬──┤
│ └─l─┘ │
└─COBOL────┘
Operand Description
With no operand, sets the attribute to use columns 73 through 80 as
the sequence number field.
IN Causes the sequence numbers to be added to the contents of the
active AWS.
s l Number of the starting column and length of the sequence number
field. If the starting column is omitted, the default is 73. If the
length is omitted, the default is 8. (The maximum allowed length is
8.)
COBOL Sets the attribute to use columns 1 through 6 as the sequence
number field.
1.172.2 Notes
Attribute Setting:
■ The AWS sequence number attribute is used when the contents of the
AWS is PRINTed, SAVEd, or SUBMITted.
■ Once established, the attribute remains in effect until:
– Specifically changed by the NOSEQ command or different operands of
the SEQ command, or
– Overridden by the sequence attribute of a FETCHed or SAVEd library
member.

1.172 SEQ
Adding Sequence Numbers to AWS:

■ To add sequence numbers to the data in the AWS, use the IN operand.
WARNING: If data exists in the designated columns, the data is overlaid
by the sequence numbers.
Including Sequence Numbers When PRINTing/SUBMITting Data:

■ The AWS sequence number attribute controls whether the Advantage
CA-Roscoe-maintained sequence numbers are to be included with the data
when it is PRINTed or SUBMITted. If the sequence numbers are to be
included and data is in the designated sequence number field, no line
number is inserted in that field. Data is not overlaid with a sequence
number.

NOSEQ N/A
RENUMBER
1.172.3.1 Examples
■ To change the sequence number attribute of the active AWS to make

columns 73 through 80 as the sequence number field:
SEQ
■ To change the sequence number attribute of the active AWS to have
columns 1 through 6 be the sequence number field and to place the current
sequence numbers in that field:
SEQ IN COBOL

1.173 SET Summary
1.173 SET Summary

Allows various session parameters to be set by the user.
The list below summarizes the SET command parameters. Each use of the SET
command is described individually on the following pages.
1. To change or deactivate a special character that is to be used as the
command delimiter:
SET ...
| 2. To permit the user to specify what action is to be taken during the ALLOC
| Dsn command process for a data set migrated by the IBM product
| DFHSM.
| SET ALLRECALL ...
3. To deactivate or reactivate pausing command execution when the
ATTACH command is executed:
SET ATTACH ...
4. To control the automatic sign-off facility:
SET AUTOFF ...
5. To control the location of the cursor when lines are inserted for data entry:
SET AUTOINDENT ...
6. To control the number of lines to be inserted when lines inserted by a
prior I or IB line command are filled:
SET AUTOINSERT ...
7. To specify data protection and highlighting attributes for the active AWS:
SET AWSDSPLY ...
8. To set column boundaries that are to be used by any subsequent primary
or line command that edits, locates or shifts data:
SET BOUNDS ...
9. To designate the language character set representing the data that the user
can enter and display at the terminal:
SET CHARSET ...
10. To change the number of lines comprising the Command Area of the
screen:
SET CMDLINES ...
11. To designate the AWS that is to receive the data copied using :C:
SET COPYDEST ...

1.173 SET Summary
12. To designate the cursor location after a command is executed:

SET CURSOR ...
13. To designate the format of dates displayed by Advantage CA-Roscoe at the
terminal:
SET DATEFORM ...
14. To define the screen display format:
SET DISPLAY ...
| 15. To permit the user to specify the order lists in the data set facility:
| SET DSN ORDER ...
16. To designate the type of messages that are to be directed to the member
ZZZZZCMP when a compress request is executed:
SET DSNCMLST ...
17. To alter the default number of lines to be searched within an attached data
set object:
SET DSNCNT ...
18. To designate whether the Data Set Facility is to attempt to read data sets
whose DSCB indicates that they are empty:
SET DSNEMPTY ...
19. To permit the user to specify what action is to be taken when an operation
is to be performed on a data set migrated by the IBM program product
DFHSM:
SET DSNRECALL ...
20. To designate whether lines affected by an edit operation are to be
identified:
SET EDITCHNG ...
21. To designate the extent of the deletion that is to occur when the ERASE
EOF key is pressed:
SET EOF ...
22. To designate an escape sequence from an application executing under
ETSO:
SET ESCAPE ...
23. To define the trailing character that is to be used in lines within the active
AWS:
SET FILL ...
24. To designate the Help search library.
SET HELPPFX ...

1.173 SET Summary
| 25. To permit the user to specify what action is to be taken during the ALLOC
| Dsn command process for a data set migrated by the IBM product
| DFHSM.
| SET INFRECALL ...
26. To change the default number of lines to be searched within attached job
output:
SET JOBCNT ...
27. To designate the Library Selection List display order:
SET LIB ORDER ...
28. To control expansion of AllFusion CA-Librarian -INC statements
encountered in submitted jobs:
SET MASTER ...
29. To designate the character translation mode:
SET MODE ...
30. To control the display of informational Monitor command messages
written to the terminal:
SET MONLEVEL ...
31. To control the display of informational Advantage CA-Roscoe command
messages written to the terminal:
SET MSGLEVEL ...
32. To designate the special character that is to be used when assigning
multiple commands to a PF/PA key:
SET PFKDELIM ...
33. To designate whether sequence numbers are to be printed on output when
the PRINT command is issued:
SET RPSDEF ...
To designate whether separator pages are to surround print requests
issued by the PRINT command:
SET RPSDEF ...
34. To change the current/default printing location that is to be used when the
PRINT command is issued:
SET RPSDEST ...
35. To designate whether a notification message is to be displayed after a print
request is printed:
SET RPSNOTIFY ...
36. To designate the default access attribute for a a new library member:
SET SAVEATTR ...

1.173 SET Summary
37. To change the scroll field value:

SET SCROLL ...
38. To designate: 1) the screen positioning that is to occur when the FIRST,
LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL, or EXCL primary commands locate a string, or
2) whether the data to be searched may be encoded in DBCS format:
SET SEARCH ...
39. To control the display of received SEND messages:
SET SEND ...
| 40. To designate how a screen is to be SPLIT:
| SET SPLIT ...
41. To designate the type of SPF directory information to be added to the
directory entry for a member:
SET STATS ...
42. To define the characteristics of the data to be submitted:
SET SUBMIT ...
43. To enable or disable the display of Advantage CA-Roscoe identification
information:
SET SYSID ...
44. To control the automatic terminal lock facility:
SET TLOCK ...
45. To enable or disable the display of user identification information:
SET USERID ...
1.173.1 SET
1. To change or deactivate a special character that is to be used as the
command delimiter.
1.173.1.1 Syntax
SET Command
──SET──┬─x───┬────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─OFF─┘
Operand Description
x Any special character.
OFF Deactivates the command delimiter.

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.1.2 Notes
Default:
■ The ampersand (&) is the default command delimiter at sign-on (SET &).
Site management has the option of changing this default.
Using a Command Delimiter:

■ The command delimiter lets you enter multiple commands on a line, as in:
FETCH ABC & ATTACH
■ When entering multiple commands, each command must be complete
within the line (continuation of commands is not allowed).
Using Command Delimiter and String Delimiter:

■ When specifying a string operand, the special character used as the
command delimiter must not be used as the string delimiter or within the
string itself, as in:
FIRST &XYZ& No string defined since first & terminates the
command.
FIRST /XYZ & ABC/ String improperly defined; & terminates the string.

Change Delimiter: Change Delimiter:
SET PFKDELIM N/A
Change Setting: Change Setting:

STATUS SESSION display: N/A
|1.173.2 SET ALLRECALL

| 2. Permits the user to specify what action is to be taken during the ALLOC
| Dsn command process for a data set migrated by the IBM product DFHSM.
|1.173.2.1 Syntax
|
| SET ALLRECALL Command
| ┌─WAIT───┐
| ──SET ALLRECALL──┼─NOWAIT─┼───────────────────────────────────
| └─NONE───┘

1.173 SET Summary
| WAIT Recall request made; user waits for it to complete. User can
| terminate wait by signalling attention interrupt. If this occurs,
| user regains control of terminal and the DFHSM request
| continues as a background request.
| NOWAIT Recall request made; user immediately regains control of
| terminal. (The user is informed of the number assigned by
| DFHSM to request.)
| NONE The user is informed that data set recalls are prohibited.
|1.173.2.2 Notes
| Default:
| ■ SET ALLRECALL WAIT is the default at sign-on.
| Using SET ALLRECALL:
| When an operation is requested for a migrated data set, the action performed
| depends on the current setting.
1.173.3 SET ATTACH

3. To deactivate or reactivate pausing command execution after an ATTACH
command is executed.
1.173.3.1 Syntax
SET ATTACH Command

┌─PAUSE───┐
──SET ATTACH──┴─NOPAUSE─┴─────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
PAUSE Reactivates the pause facility.
NOPAUSE Deactivates the pause facility.
1.173.3.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET ATTACH PAUSE is the default at sign-on.
Using SET ATTACH:
When executing multiple commands that include attach, command execution

is:

1.173 SET Summary
■ Paused if SET ATTACH PAUSE is in effect. For example, if PAUSE is in

effect when the following commands are executed from the terminal:
FETCH TEST1
ATTACH
COPY TEST2 T
the ENTER key must be pressed to continue execution (to execute the
COPY command).
If they are executed from within an RPF, GO must be entered to resume
program execution.
■ Not paused if SET ATTACH NOPAUSE is in effect and an ATTACH
command is followed by another command (the subsequent commands are
executed and then the display occurs). For example, if NOPAUSE is in
effect when the following commands are executed:
FETCH TEST1
ATTACH
COPY TEST2 T
■ The display contains the results of the FETCH and COPY operations
(whether the commands are executed from the terminal or within an RPF
program).
■ While SET ATTACH may be entered from the terminal, it is meant for use
within RPF programs.

STATUS SESSION display N/A
Attach Data: Attach Data:
ATTACH N/A
1.173.4 SET AUTOFF

4. To control the automatic sign-off facility.
1.173.4.1 Syntax
SET AUTOFF Command

──SET AUTOFF──┬─────┬─────────────────────────────────────────
├─ON──┤
├─v───┤
├─MAX─┤
└─OFF─┘

1.173 SET Summary
Operand Description
With no operand, resets the time limit to the site-default time
period.
ON Activates the automatic sign-off facility and sets the interval to the
site-defined default.
v Number of minutes of no activity to be allowed before the terminal
is signed off. The number of minutes must be specified as a
positive integer between 1 and the site- defined maximum. (The
site-defined maximum may be greater than the default time period.)
MAX Sets the time limit to the site-defined maximum.
OFF Deactivates the automatic sign-off facility. Valid only when the
user (not the site) enabled the facility.
1.173.4.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ Site management may restrict use of this command.
Automatic Sign-off Facility:
A terminal is automatically signed off when:

■ There has been no activity within the specified time limit. ('No activity'
means that Advantage CA-Roscoe is waiting for the user to enter a
command or respond to terminal output.)
■ The sign-on screen is displayed for the specified time period and no one
has signed on.
■ If the site has not enabled the automatic sign-off facility, the user may do
so using the SET AUTOFF ON command.


1.173 SET Summary
1.173.5 SET AUTOINDENT

5. To control the location of the cursor when lines are inserted for data entry.
1.173.5.1 Syntax
SET AUTOINDENT Command

┌─OFF─┐
──SET AUTOINDENT──┴─ON──┴─────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
OFF Deactivates the automatic indentation facility.
ON Activates the automatic indentation facility.
1.173.5.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET AUTOINDENT OFF is the default at sign-on. Site management has the
option of changing this default.
Abbreviation:
■ AUTOINDENT may be abbreviates as AIND.
Using SET AUTOINDENT ON:

■ The automatic indentation facility is available when the user inserts line
using the:
– INPUT primary command.
– I or IB line command.
– PF key that is assigned the 'input' function.
■ When one or more lines are inserted, the cursor is positioned under the
first data character of the preceding data line.

On Input: On Input:
N/A I, IB

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.6 SET AUTOINSERT

6. To control the number of lines to be inserted when lines inserted by a prior I
or IB line command are filled.
1.173.6.1 Syntax
SET AUTOINSERT Command

┌─OFF/1─┐
──SET AUTOINSERT──┼─ON────┼───────────────────────────────────
└─v─────┘
Operand Description
OFF Deactivates the automatic line insertion facility.
ON Activates the automatic line insertion facility with the current line
insertion value.
v Number of lines to be inserted, specified as a value between 1 and
256. Setting a value also activates the facility.
1.173.6.2 Notes
Defaults:
■ The defaults at sign-on are OFF and 1 (where 1 is the line insertion value
used if SET AUTOINSERT ON is issued). Site management has the option
of changing these defaults.
Abbreviation:
■ AUTOINSERT may be abbreviated as AINS.
Using SET AUTOINSERT ON or SET AUTOINSERT v:

■ If the automatic line insertion facility is active and the user fills all of the
lines provided by the I or IB line command, one or v number of lines are
inserted every time the user fills existing data entry lines and presses the
ENTER key.
■ If the facility is activated by specifying a value (for example, SET
AUTOINSERT 3), that value is remembered for the remainder of the
terminal session. If, during that session, the facility is deactivated and then
later reactivated by SET AUTOINSERT ON, the previously specified value
is used as the line insertion value.

1.173 SET Summary

On Input: On Input:
N/A I, IB
1.173.7 SET AWSDSPLY

7. To specify data protection and highlighting attributes for the active AWS.
(3270-type terminals only.)
1.173.7.1 Syntax
SET AWSDSPLY Command

┌─U──┐
──SET AWSDSPLY──┼─UH─┼────────────────────────────────────────
├─S──┤
└─SH─┘
Operand Description
U Contents of the active AWS are unprotected when displayed.
UH Contents of the active AWS are unprotected and highlighted when
displayed.
S Contents of the active AWS are protected when displayed. (Data
cannot be entered into the active AWS and attached data cannot be
modified.)
SH Contents of the active AWS are protected and highlighted when
displayed. (Data cannot be entered into the active AWS and
attached data cannot be modified.)
1.173.7.2 Notes
Defaults:
■ SET AWSDSPLY U is the default at sign-on.
Using SET AWSDSPLY:

■ While SET AWSDSPLY can be entered from the terminal, it is meant for
use within RPF programs.

1.173 SET Summary

STATUS AWS display N/A
1.173.8 SET BOUNDS

8. To set column boundaries that are to be used by any subsequent primary or
line command that edits, locates or shifts data.
1.173.8.1 Syntax
SET BOUNDS Command

──SET BOUNDS──┬───────┬──┬─────────────────┬──────────────────
└─scope─┘ ├─OFF─────────────┤
└──┬───┬──┬────┬──┘
└─s─┘ └─,e─┘
Operand Description
With no operands, resets the range to the maximum for the data
that is currently attached (equivalent to SET BOUNDS OFF).
scope Qualify the operational range of this command.
If omitted and data is attached, the operation applies to the
currently attached data.
If omitted and no data is attached, AWS is assumed if the
command is entered from the terminal; ALL is assumed if the
command is executed from within an RPF program.
If specified, it must be:
ALL Designates that the operation of this command is to apply
to all forms of attached data.
AWS Designates that the operation of this command is to apply
only to the active AWS.
DSN Designates that the operation of this command is to apply
only to attached data sets.
JOB Designates that the operation of this command is to apply
only to attached job output.
LIB Designates that the operation of this command is to apply
only to attached library members.
OFF Causes the column range to be reset to the maximum for the
currently attached data. (NONE is a synonym for OFF.)

1.173 SET Summary
s,e Number of the starting and ending columns to be included within

the boundary.
If s is omitted, the default is 1.
If e is omitted, the default is the end of the line.
1.173.8.2 Notes
Default Settings:
■ At sign-on, the default column boundaries are:
AWS = 1-80
DSN = 1-32767
JOB = 1-255
LIB = 1-80
■ When SET DISPLAY NUMX is in effect, the current column boundaries are
displayed on the Scale Line.
Abbreviations:
■ SET BOUNDS may be abbreviated as SET BNDS or SET BND.

STATUS DISPLAY display BOUNDS
1.173.8.4 Examples
■ To set the column boundaries for the currently attached and displayed
data to 10 and 50:
SET BOUNDS 1 5
■ To set the column boundaries for the active AWS to 1 and 72; and the
boundaries for attached data sets and job output to 90 through 132:
SET BOUNDS AWS 1 72 DSN JOB 9 132
■ To set the column boundaries for the library member to 1 and 50:
SET BOUNDS LIB 1 5
or
SET BOUNDS LIB ,5
■ To set the column boundaries for the currently attached data to the
maximum and set the column boundaries for the active AWS to 7 and 72:
SET BOUNDS OFF AWS 7 72

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.9 SET CHARSET

9. To designate the language character set representing the data that the user
can enter and display at the terminal.
1.173.9.1 Syntax
SET CHARSET Command

──SET CHARSET──charstr────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
charstr One of the language character set codes that site management has
defined as valid at the site.
1.173.9.2 Notes
Default:
■ Unless overridden by the site, the default language character set code is
U.S. ENGLISH.
When to Use SET CHARSET:

■ Sites with terminals that support specific language character sets can
designate which character sets Advantage CA-Roscoe is to recognize.
■ If site management has defined multiple language codes, you are told what
language character set codes are valid. SET CHARSET may then be used to
designate which character set is to be used at the current terminal.
Note: If only one character set is in effect, this command is ignored.


1.173 SET Summary
1.173.10 SET CMDLINES

10. To change the number of lines comprising the Command Area of the
Advantage CA-Roscoe screen.
1.173.10.1 Syntax
SET CMDLINES Command

──SET CMDLines──┬───────┬─────────────────────────────────────
├─v1────┤
├─,v2───┤
└─CLEAR─┘
Operand Description
v1 Numeric value between 1 and 3 designating the number of lines
that are to comprise the Command Area of the current presentation
area.
v2 Numeric value between 1 and 3 specifying the number of command
lines that are to be in each presentation area the next time the
screen is split.
CLEAR Clears the screen output buffer of any data before the command is
executed. Execution is not paused when the command is executed
from within an RPF program.
1.173.10.2 Notes
Default:
■ As distributed, the default is SET CMDLINES 3,1 (the current presentation
area contains three command lines and each presentation area when the
screen is split will contain one command line.) Site management has the
Abbreviation:
■ CMDLINES may be abbreviated as CMDL or CMDLINE.
Using SET CMDLINES:

■ First Operand: The first numeric value specified with SET CMDLINES
takes affect immediately.
If the screen is currently split, it changes the size of the presentation area
containing the cursor; it has no affect on the inactive presentation area.
■ Second Operand: The second value takes affect the next time the screen is
split or resplit. If the screen is currently split, it has no affect on either split
screen.

1.173 SET Summary
■ SET CMDLINES do not violate the minimum size of a presentation area

when the screen is split. Thus, there may be cases where the requested
number of command lines are not provided.
Using SET CMDLINES Within an RPF Program:

■ When SET CMDLINES is executed, program execution is paused. When a
program is paused, the user can enter any Advantage CA-Roscoe
command. This causes a problem for sites with restricted users. If the
pause is permitted, the site's control of the restricted user's session is
bypassed.
■ The CLEAR operand should be used when SET CMDLINES is executed
from within a restricted user's RPF program. It prevents the program from
being paused after the command is executed.
■ If CLEAR is not used and the restricted user's program is paused,
Advantage CA-Roscoe signs the user off. (To prevent a site losing control
of a restricted user's session, Advantage CA-Roscoe does not allow that
user's RPF program to be paused.)
■ When CLEAR is used, any output directed to the terminal by commands
issued prior to the SET CMDLINES are lost. To ensure that the output is
displayed, the program can force its display before SET CMDLINES is
issued. This can be done, for example, by executing a dummy READ
command before the SET CMDLINES.

1.173.11 SET COPYDEST

11. To designate the AWS that is to receive data copied using :C.
1.173.11.1 Syntax
SET COPYDEST Command

──SET COPYDEST──┬───────┬─────────────────────────────────────
└─aname─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, removes the current destination.
aname Name of the AWS that is to receive the copied data.

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.11.2 Notes
Default:
■ As distributed, there is no default :C copy destination.
Using SET COPYDEST:

■ Before :C can be used to copy the currently displayed screen, the AWS that
is to receive the copied data must be designated by either SET COPYDEST
or the modifiable STATUS SESSION display.
■ The AWS to receive the data must exist and must not be active. (If the
screen is split, the AWS must not be active in either split screen.)

1.173.12 SET CURSOR

12. To designate the cursor location after a command is executed.
1.173.12.1 Syntax
SET CURSOR Command

┌─Init─┐
──SET CURSOR──┼──────┼────────────────────────────────────────
├─Home─┤
└─Data─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, resets the cursor to the site default.
Init Causes the cursor to be placed in the first line of the Command
Area when data is initially attached. Thereafter, the cursor remains
in the area appropriate for the type of command just executed.
Home Causes the cursor to be placed in the first line of the Command
Area when data is initially attached. Thereafter, the cursor returns
to the Command Area following the execution of most primary,
Monitor or line commands. The only time the cursor is not returned
to the Command Area is when a command is entered that opens
the active AWS for data entry.

1.173 SET Summary
Data Causes the cursor to be placed in the first modifiable field of the
Execution Area when data is initially attached. Thereafter, the
cursor remains in the area appropriate for the type of command just
executed.
1.173.12.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET CURSOR INIT is the default at sign-on. Site management has the
Restriction:
■ The SET CURSOR command is recognized only when SET MODE NUMX
is in effect.

STATUS DISPLAY display N/A
1.173.13 SET DATEFORM

13. To designate the format of dates displayed by Advantage CA-Roscoe at the
terminal.
1.173.13.1 Syntax
SET DATEFORM Command

┌─American──────┐
──SET DATEFORM──┼─European──────┼──┬─Short─┬──────────────────
└─International─┘ └─Long──┘
Operand Description
American Displays the date in the form mm/dd/yy.
(Abbreviate as AMER or A.)
European Displays the date in the form dd/mm/yy.
(Abbreviate as EURO or E.)
International
Displays the date in the form yy-mm-dd.
(Abbreviate as INTL or I.)
Short Only the last two digits of the year are to be displayed (for
example, 89).

1.173 SET Summary
Long The year is to be displayed as four digits (for example, 1989).
1.173.13.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET DATEFORM AMERICAN is the default at sign-on. Site management
has the option of changing this default.
Using SHORT/LONG:
| ■ The operands SHORT and LONG affect the results returned by the RPF
| function DATEFUN and various RPF variables. For information on the
| affected variables, refer to the Advantage CA-Roscoe RPF Language Guide.

1.173.14 SET DISPLAY

14. To define the screen display format.
1.173.14.1 Syntax
SET DISPLAY Command

──SET DISplay──┬───────┬──┬───────────┬────────────────────────
└─scope─┘ └─s─┬────┬──┘
└─,e─┘
──┬─────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────────
└──┬──────┬─ charstr1─┘
└─FLIP─┘
──┬────────────────────────────────────┬───────────────────────
└──┬──────┬─ charstr2─┬───────────┬──┘
└─FLIP─┘ └─ charstr3─┘
Operand Description
With no operands, resets the display margins for the currently
attached data to begin with the first position of the line and extend
the width of the terminal screen. (The format of the data and
display are unchanged.)
scope Qualify the operational range of this command.
If omitted and data is attached, the operation applies to the

1.173 SET Summary
If omitted and no data is attached, AWS is assumed if the

command is entered from the terminal; ALL is assumed if the
command is executed from within an RPF program.
If specified, it must be:
ALL Designates that the operation of this command is to apply
to all forms of attached data.
AWS Designates that the operation of this command is to apply
only to the active AWS.
DSN Designates that the operation of this command is to apply
only to attached data sets.
JOB Designates that the operation of this command is to apply
only to attached job output.
LIB Designates that the operation of this command is to apply
only to attached library members.
s Number of column to which the left margin is set. If omitted, the
default is 1.
,e Number of the column to which the right margin is set. If omitted,
the default is the width of the terminal screen.
FLIP Allows the display to be 'bounced' between character format and its
hexadecimal representation. FLIP is only meaningful when this
command is assigned to a PF key.
charstr1 Designate how the data is to be displayed. If omitted, the default is
CHAR. If specified, it must be:
HEX Causes the data to be displayed in both character format
and its hexadecimal representation.
CHAR Causes the data to be displayed in character format only.
FLIP Allows the sequence number field display to be 'bounced' between
various formats. FLIP is only meaningful when this command is
assigned to a PF key.
charstr2 Designate the sequence number display format. If omitted, the
default is NUMX. (Site management has the option of changing the
default.) If specified, it must be:
NUM Causes each display line to begin with a protected
6-digit sequence number field, followed by the data
field.
NUMX Causes each display line to begin with an unprotected
6-digit sequence number field, followed by the data
field.
NONUM Causes each display line to consist of a single data
field; there is no sequence number field.

1.173 SET Summary
NUM2 Causes each line to be presented as two display lines

where the first contains the protected sequence
number and the second contains the data field.
charstr3 Designate the alternate sequence number display format. This
operand is only meaningful when this command is assigned to a PF
key. If specified, it must be one of the keyword operands described
with charstr2. If omitted, the defaults are:
If charstr2 is charstr3 default is

FLIP NUM NONUM
FLIP NUMX NONUM
FLIP NONUM NUMX if AWS attached; otherwise,
NUM
FLIP NUM2 NONUM
1.173.14.2 Notes
Display Margins:
■ Left Margin Only:
If only the left margin is specified (for example, SET DISPLAY AWS 12),
the display begins at the designated location and continues for the width
of the screen.
■ Right Margin Only:
If only the right margin is specified and the value is:
1. Greater than the current right margin, the display shifts so that the
displayed data ends at the new location. (For example, if the display
margins were 1 and 72 and SET DISPLAY, 120 is entered, the display
shifts to show columns 49 through 120.)
2. The same as the current right margin, the display remains unchanged.
3. Less than the current right margin, the display begins with the left
margins and continues to the value specified. (For example, if the
display margins were 1 and 72 and SET DISPLAY ,50 is entered, the
display shows only columns 1 through 50.)
Data Display:
■ When the sequence number display format is NONUM, NUM or NUMX,
data may be displayed in both character format and its hexadecimal
representation.

1.173 SET Summary
■ Modifying Data:
The contents of an attached library member, data set object or job output
file is never modifiable.
When the active AWS is attached and:
– NUM or NONUM is in effect, the character data is modifiable; the hex
data is not modifiable.
– NUMX is in effect, both the character data and its hexadecimal
representation are modifiable. (Exception: If the displayed data
includes characters that are not printable, the character display shows
a non-modifiable space. The hexadecimal representation of that
character is modifiable.)
■ Using SET DISPLAY HEX:
Note: HEX is ignored when the sequence number display format is
NUM2. The data is only displayed in character format.
While HEX is in effect, no character translation is performed even if SET
MODE BASIC is in effect. This means that if a lowercase alphabetic
character is entered, it is not translated to uppercase.
Assume that the currently attached data contains the following two lines
when SET DISPLAY HEX is entered:
1 ABCDEFG
2 1234567
The resulting display looks like:
1 ABCDEFG
4CCCCCCC4444444444444444444444444...
1234567...
_________________________________...
2 1234567
FFFFFFF4444444444444444444444444...
91234567...
_________________________________...
If FLIP is specified before either HEX or CHAR and this command is
assigned to a PF key, the display can be 'bounced' between a character
format display and a hexadecimal representation every time the PF key is
pressed.
Sequence Number Display Format:

■ NUMX only has affect when the active AWS is attached. If used with any
other form of attached data, it is treated as NUM.

1.173 SET Summary

1.173.14.4 Examples
■ To set the display margins for the active AWS to 10 and 50:
SET DISPLAY AWS 1 5
■ To set the display margins for attached data sets and job output to begin
in column 50 and extend the width of the terminal screen:
SET DISPLAY DSN JOB 5
■ To set the display margins for attached library members to 1 and 50:
SET DISPLAY LIB ,5
■ To set the display margins for attached job output to begin with column 7
and have the data displayed in both character format and its hexadecimal
representation:
SET DISPLAY JOB 7 HEX
■ To set: 1) the display margins for the currently attached data to 7 and 72
and have the sequence number field unprotected and 2) the attached job
output display to character format only:
SET DISPLAY 7 72 NUMX JOB CHAR
■ To change the assignment of PF1 to allow the display to be 'bounced'
every time the key is pressed:
LET PF1 = 'SET DISPLAY FLIP NUM NUMX'
|1.173.15 SET DSN ORDER

| 15. To permit the user to specify the order lists in the data set facility.
|1.173.15.1 Syntax
|
| SET DSN ORDER Command
| ──SET DSN ORDER──┬──────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬────────────
| └─list─┘ ├─BY──────┤ └─fldname─┘
| └─DEFAULT─┘
| ──┬────────────┬──┬──────────────┬─────────────────────────────
| ├─ASCending──┤ └─Cols─┬───┬─e─┘
| └─DEScending─┘ └─s─┘

1.173 SET Summary
| list Designates the selection list type to be reordered. If omitted, the
| current selection list is reordered.
| VOLLIST Volume selection list.
| CATLIST Cataloged data set selection list.
| PDSLIST Partitioned data set selection list.
| LIBLIST AllFusion CA-Librarian module selection list.
| LODLIST Load member selection list.
| VTOLIST VTOC data set selection list.
| BY Optional extra-word, permitted for continuity.
| DFLT Designates that the selection list is to be ordered by the default sort
| criteria.
| List Default
| CATLIST Data-set-name
| PDSLIST MEMber
| LIBLIST MEMber
| LODLIST MEMber
| VTOLIST Data-set name
| fieldname
| Designates the field to be reordered. If omitted, the DFLT field is
| reordered. If specified, it must be one of the following:
| For VOLLIST:
| VOLume Field containing volume serial name. Volume may
| be specified in the following ways: VOLUME, VOL.
| UNIT Field containing the volume unit address.
| DEVTYPE Field containing the device type.
| CONTG-CYL Field containing the number of contiguous
| cylinders. Contiguous cylinders may be specified
| in the following ways: CONTG-CYL, CYL-CONTG.
| AVAIL-CYL Field containing the number of available cylinders.
| Available cylinders may be specified in the
| following ways: AVAIL-CYL, CYL-AVAIL.
| CONTG-TRK Field containing the number of contiguous tracks.
| Contiguous tracks may be specified in the
| following ways: CONTG-TRK, TRK-CONTG.

1.173 SET Summary
| AVAIL-TRK Field containing the number of available tracks.

| Available tracks may be specified in the following
| ways: AVAIL-TRK, TRK-AVAIL.
| AV-XT Field containing the average extent count.
| TOTAL-TRK Field containing the total number of tracks. Total
| number of tracks may be specified in the following
| ways: TOTAL-TRK, TRK-TOTAL.
| USED-TRK Field containing the number of used tracks. Used
| tracks may be specified in the following ways:
| USED-TRK, TRK-USED.
| %USED Field containing the percent of used space.
| MAXBLK Field containing the maximum block size.
| TRKSIZE Field containing the track size.
| TRK/CYL Field containing the number of tracks per cylinder.
| Tracks per cylinder may be specified in the
| following ways: TRK/CYL, TRK-CYL.
| #DSNS Field containing the number of data sets.
| USED-XT Field containing the number of used extents.
| VTOC-TRK Field containing the number of tracks used by the
| VTOC.
| TOTAL-DSCB Field containing the total number of Data Set
| Control Blocks. Total number of Data Set Control
| Blocks may be specified in the following ways:
| TOTAL-DSCB, DSCB-TOTAL.
| DSCB-FREE Field containing the number of free Data Set
| Control Blocks. Free Data Set Control Blocks may
| be specified in the following ways: DSCB-FREE,
| FREE-DSCB.
| D%USED Field containing the percent of used DSCB space.
| INDEX Field containing the indexed VTOC status.
| SMS Field containing the indexed SMS status.
| DEVSTAT Field containing the device status.
| VOLSTAT Field containing the volume status.
| For CATLIST:
| Data-Set-Name Field containing the data set name. Data set name
| DATA-SET-NAME, DATASET, DSN.
| TYPE Field containing the data set type.

1.173 SET Summary
| VOLume Field containing the volume name. VOLume may

| be specified in the following ways: VOLUME, VOL.
| DEVice Field containing the device type. DEVice may be
| specified in the following ways: DEVICE, DEV.
| ORG Field containing the data set orginization.
| RecFM Field containing the record format. Record format
| may be specified in the following ways: RECFM,
| RFM.
| BLKSiZe Field containing the block size. Block size may be
| specified in the following ways: BLKSIZE, BLKSZ.
| CREDT Field containing the creation date.
| REFDT Field containing the reference date.
| INUSE Field containing the number of tracks in use.
| EXTents Field containing the number of extents. Extents
| may be specified in the following ways: EXTENTS,
| EXTENT, EXT.
| MGMTCLAS Field containing the SMS managment class.
| Management class may be specified in the
| following ways: MGMTCLAS, MCLASS.
| STORCLAS Field containing the SMS storage class. Storage
| class may be specified in the following ways:
| STORCLAS, SCLASS.
| DATACLAS Field containing the SMS data class. Data class
| DATACLAS, DCLASS.
| For PDSLIST:
| MEMber Field containing the names of the pds members.
| Member may be specified in the following ways:
| MEMBER, MEM.
| VV.MM Field containing the version and modification level.
| Version may be specified in the following ways:
| VV.MM, VVMM.
| CREATEd Field containing the date created. Date created
| may be specified in the following ways: CREATED,
| CREATE, CRTDT.

1.173 SET Summary
| Last-Mod-Date Field containing the last modified date. Last

| modified date may be specified in the following
| ways: LAST-MOD-DATE, LMD.
| Last-Mod-Time Field containing the last modified time. Last
| modified time may be specified in the following
| ways: LAST-MOD-TIME, LMT.
| SIZE Field containing the member size.
| INIT Field containing the initial member size.
| MODify Field containing the modification count. Modify
| may be specified in the following ways: MODIFY,
| MOD.
| USER Field containing the member user id.
| For LIBLIST:
| MEMber Field containing the names of the AllFusion
| CA-Librarian modules. Member may be specified
| in the following ways: MEMBER, MEM.
| PaSsWorD Field containing the AllFusion CA-Librarian
| module password. Password may be specified in
| the following ways: PASSWORD, PSWD.
| Last-MoDified Field containing the last modified date and time.
| Last modified may be specified in the following
| ways: LAST-MODIFIED, LMD.
| DESCription Field containing the AllFusion CA-Librarian
| module description. Description may be specified
| in the following ways: DESCRIPTION, DESC.
| CREATEd Field containing the creation date. Created may be
| specified in the following ways: CREATION,
| CREATED, CREATE.
| ProGraMmeR Field containing the AllFusion CA-Librarian
| module programmer name. Programmer name
| PROGRAMMER, PGMR.
| LANGuage Field containing the AllFusion CA-Librarian
| module language. Language may be specified in
| the following ways: LANGUAGE, LANG.
| SSTAT Field containing the AllFusion CA-Librarian
| module status.
| BLocKS Field containing the number of blocks. Blocks may
| be specified in the following ways: BLOCKS, BLKS.

1.173 SET Summary
| RECordS Field containing the number of records. Records

| may be specified in the following ways: RECORDS,
| RECS.
| For LODLIST:
| MEMber Field containing the names of the load library
| members. Member may be specified in the
| following ways: MEMBER, MEM.
| ATTRibutes Field containing the load library member attributes.
| Attributes may be specified in the following ways:
| ATTRIBUTES, ATTR.
| SIZE Field containing the load library member size.
| loadEP Field containing the load library member
| entry point. Entry point may be specified in the
| following ways: LOADEP, EP.
| ALIAS-of Field containing the load library member for which
| this member is an alias. Alias may be specified in
| the following ways: ALIAS-OF, ALIAS
| SSI-data Field containing the SSI data. SSI data may be
| specified in the following ways: SSI-DATA, SSI.
| For VTOLIST:
| Data-Set-Name Field containing the data set name. Data set name
| DATA-SET-NAME, DSN.
| ORG Field containing the data set organization.
| Organization may be specified in the following
| ways: ORGANIZATION, ORG.
| RecFM Field containing the record format. Record format
| may be specified in the following ways: RECFM,
| TFM.
| BLocKSZ Field containing the block size. Block size may be
| specified in the following ways: BLOCKSZ, BLKSZ.
| CREDT Field containing the creation date. Created may be
| specified in the following ways: CREATED,
| CREATE, CREDT.
| REFDT Field containing the reference date. Reference may
| be specified in the following ways: REFERENCE,
| REFDT.

1.173 SET Summary

| IN-USE Field containing the number of tracks in use. In
| use may be specified in the following ways:
| IN-USE, INUSE.
| EXT Field containing the number of extents.
| ASCending
| Sorts the field in ascending order.
| DEScending
| Sorts the field in ascending order.
| Col [ s ] e
| Reorders specific part(s) of fields by starting and ending column
| boundaries. This enables sorting by prefixes, suffixes, or parts of
| dates (days, months, years).
| When specifying COLs, it must follow the field-name that contains
| the columns to be reordered. (Specify COLS, COL, or C.)
| Column counts start at the beginning of a field and end at the end
| of that same field. They do not follow the number line count.
|1.173.15.2 Notes
| ■ A maximum of six order criteria are permitted.

| ■ If the Data Set Facility is not active, or the list type requested is not active,
| the ORDER command is ineffective. The user receives an appropriate error
| message.
| ■ If the Data Set Facility is not displayed and the user is in another facility,
| issuing the ORDER command suspends the current facility, and the Data
| set facility is made current.
|1.173.15.3 Usage
| ■ The ORDER command can be specified as either: ORD or ORDER.

| ■ When specifying COL, it must follow the field-name that contains the
| columns to be reordered (for example, ORDER DSN CATLIST VOL COL 1
| 3 DES AND DEV to order a catalog selection list to sort by the first three
| characters of the VOLume name in descending order, and by the DEVice).

1.173 SET Summary
|1.173.16 Field-name Attribute Defaults

| Each field-name is assigned a default attribute of ascending.
|1.173.17 The Ampersand as Command Delimiter

| If sites or users set the & as a command delimiter, it overrides the sort syntax
| and function as a delimiter. The word 'and' or the '@' may be used in this case.
| To use the '&' within the ORDER command, the command delimiter must be
| set another character.
|1.173.18 Fields Containing Dates

| The fields that contain dates are sorted in chronological order of year, month,
| and then day. If a different sorting order is desired, or is the sort is to be
| literal, the COL operand must be used to designate the columns of data to be
| reordered.
| Note: For dates, ascending order sorts from oldest date to newest. Descending
| order sorts from newest date to oldest.

| ATTACH DSN OR
| REFRESH DSN
| ORDER DSN
1.173.20 SET DSNCMLST

16. To designate the type of messages that are to be directed to the member
ZZZZZCMP when a compress request is executed.
1.173.20.1 Syntax
SET DSNCMLST Command

┌─Error─┐
──SET DSNCMLST──┴─Info──┴─────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
Error Causes the member ZZZZZCMP to be created/updated only when
a request fails.

1.173 SET Summary
Info Causes the member ZZZZZCMP to be created/updated after each

Data Set Facility compress request.
1.173.20.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET DSNCMLST ERROR is the default at sign-on. Site management has
the option of changing this default.
Member ZZZZZCMP:
■ The member ZZZZZCMP is used to contain diagnostic messages resulting
from performing a Data Set Facility compress request.

1.173.21 SET DSNCNT

17. To alter the default number of lines to be searched within an attached data
set object.
1.173.21.1 Syntax
SET DSNCNT Command

──SET DSNCNT──┬─────┬─────────────────────────────────────────
├─v───┤
└─MAX─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, resets the search limit to the site default.
v Number of lines to be searched. The number must be a positive
integer between 1 and the site-defined maximum. (The site-defined
maximum is usually greater than the default number of lines.)
MAX Sets the number of lines to the site-defined maximum.

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.21.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ Use of this command may be restricted by site management.
Searching a Data Set Object:

■ When the EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary command is
used to search the currently attached data set object, it searches:
– The number of lines specified with the command, as in:
FIRST /WIDGET/ 1
– The site-defined default number of lines or the number of lines
specified by the SET DSNCNT command, as in:
SET DSNCNT 1
FIRST /WIDGET/

(for current value)
Display Setting: Display Setting:
US SYSTEM display N/A
(for site default and maximum
values)
1.173.22 SET DSNEMPTY

18. To designate whether the Data Set Facility is to attempt to read data sets
whose DSCB (Data Set Control Block) indicates that they are empty.
1.173.22.1 Syntax
SET DSNEMPTY Command

┌─OFF─┐
──SET DSNEMPTY──┴─ON──┴───────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
OFF Prohibits attempts to read a data set that is marked as empty.
ON Causes an attempt to be made to read a data set that is marked as
empty.

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.22.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET DSNEMPTY OFF is the default at sign-on. Site management has the
option of changing this default or restricting the use of this command.
Using SET DSNEMPTY ON:

■ Having SET DSNEMPTY ON in effect is useful in those circumstances
where, for example, the user wants to browse a data set that is still OPEN
and being written to by another job.

1.173.23 SET DSNRECALL

19. To permit the user to specify what action is to be taken when an operation
is to be performed on a data set migrated by the IBM program product
DFHSM.
1.173.23.1 Syntax
SET DSNRECALL Command

┌─WAIT───┐
──SET DSNRECALL──┼─NOWAIT─┼───────────────────────────────────
└─NONE───┘
Operand Description
WAIT Recalls data sets using foreground requests.
NOWAIT Recalls data sets using background requests.
NONE Prohibits data sets from being recalled.
1.173.23.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET DSNRECALL WAIT is the default at sign-on.
Using SET DSNRECALL:

■ When an operation is requested for a migrated data set, the action
performed depends on the current SET DSNRECALL setting, where with:

1.173 SET Summary
WAIT The recall request is made and the user waits for it to complete.
The user can terminate the wait by signalling an attention
interrupt. If this occurs, the user regains control of the terminal
and the DFHSM request continues as a background request.
NOWAIT The recall request is made and the user immediately regains
control of the terminal. (The user is informed of the number
assigned by DFHSM to the request.)
NONE The user is informed that data set recalls are prohibited.

1.173.24 SET EDITCHNG

20. To designate whether lines affected by an edit operation are to be
identified.
1.173.24.1 Syntax
SET EDITCHNG Command

┌─OFF─┐
──SET EDITCHNG──┬──┴─────┴──┬───────┬──┬──────────────────────
│ └─RESET─┘ │
├─ON───────────────────┤
└─RESET────────────────┘
Operand Description
OFF Disables the change facility. May be qualified with:
RESET Resets the sequence number field.
ON Enables the change facility.
RESET Resets the sequence number field; the change facility remains
enabled.
1.173.24.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET EDITCHNG OFF is the default at sign-on. Site management has the
Using SET EDITCHNG ON:

1.173 SET Summary
■ When SET EDITCHNG ON is in effect, the change facility is activated. The

execution of any subsequent EDIT primary command or E, EE, EB, or ET
line command causes the change indicator (==CHG>) to appear in the
sequence number field of the affected lines.
■ The change indicator remains displayed until:
– The contents of the active AWS is replaced,
– The RESET line command is issued, or
– SET EDITCHNG OFF or RESET is specified.
Using SET EDITCHNG RESET:
■ When SET EDITCHNG RESET is entered, the change indicator is removed
from the sequence number field. Subsequent executions of the edit
commands causes affected lines to contain the indicator.
Using SET EDITCHNG OFF:

■ SET EDITCHNG OFF deactivates the change facility. If the change
indicator appears in the sequence number field of any line, it remains
displayed.
■ To remove the change indicators:
– When deactivating the facility, enter SET EDITCHNG OFF RESET
– After the facility is deactivated, use the RESET line command.
The change indicators are also removed when the active AWS contents is
replaced.

EDIT E, EE, EB, ET
XLATE XL, XLB, XLT
TRACE EDIT / NOTRACE N/A

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.25 SET EOF

21. To designate the extent of the deletion that is to occur when the ERASE
EOF key is pressed.
1.173.25.1 Syntax
SET EOF Command

┌─DELETE1─┐
──SET EOF──┼─DELETE──┼────────────────────────────────────────
└─ERASE───┘
Operand Description
DELETE1 Causes all or part of a line to be deleted.
If SET FILL BLANK is in effect and the left display margin is
column one, the entire line is deleted. If the left display margin is
not column one, data beyond the right display margin is not
deleted.
If SET FILL NULL is in effect, the cursor is in column one and
the left display margin is column one, the entire line is deleted. If
the cursor is positioned to any other column (regardless of the
left display margin), data beyond the right display margin is not
deleted.
DELETE Causes all or part of a line to be deleted.
If SET FILL BLANK is in effect, the entire line is deleted if all of
the data within the current display margins is erased.
If SET FILL NULL is in effect, the entire line is deleted if the
cursor is in the first displayed position (not necessarily column
one). If the cursor is placed anywhere else, the contents of the
line is deleted from the cursor position to the end of the display.
ERASE Causes the displayed contents of the line to be deleted.
If the cursor is in the first displayed position of the line (not
necessarily column one) when ERASE EOF is pressed, all of the
displayed data is deleted, the line itself remains. (Data to the
right or left of the current display margins is not deleted.)
If the cursor is in any other position, the data from the cursor
location to the right display margin is deleted.

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.25.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET EOF DELETE1 is the default at sign-on. Site management has the

1.173.26 SET ESCAPE

22. To designate an escape sequence from an application executing under
ETSO.
1.173.26.1 Syntax
SET ESCAPE Command

──SET ESCAPE──┬────────┬──────────────────────────────────────
└─string─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, resets .. as the escape indicator.
string One- to three-character string.
1.173.26.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET ESCAPE .. is the default at sign-on. Site management has the option of
changing this default.
Restriction:
(ETSO) is active.
Using SET ESCAPE:

■ If the default escape indicator is not to be used, the replacement indicator
must be specified prior to executing the CALL command.
Using the Escape Indicator:

1.173 SET Summary
■ The terminal user can force end-of-input or application termination by

entering the escape indicator:
– In response to a prompt for input, or
– When the terminal is paused while output is being written to it.

1.173.26.4 Examples
■ To designate /* as the escape indicator and initiate execution of the

application MORTGAGE:
SET ESCAPE /
CALL MORTGAGE
■ To designate end-of-input when the application is prompting for input:
/
1.173.27 SET FILL

23. To define the trailing character that is to be used in lines within the active
AWS.
1.173.27.1 Syntax
SET FILL Command

┌─Null──┐
──SET FILL──┴─Blank─┴─────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
Null Line is null filled.
Blank Line is blank filled. (To insert data in a line, blanks or other
characters must first be deleted.)
1.173.27.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET FILL NULL is the default at sign-on. Site management has the option
of changing this default.
Using SET FILL:

1.173 SET Summary
■ While SET FILL can be entered from the terminal, it is meant for use

1.173.28 SET HELPPFX

24. To specify the Help search library.
1.173.28.1 Syntax
SET HELPPFX Command

──SET HELPPFX──┬─────────────────────┬────────────────────────
└─string─┬─────────┬──┘
└─string2─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, resets the Help search library to the site default.
| string Help library to be used, specified as:
pfx Prefix associated with user library that is to be treated as
Help library.
DFLT Causes site-defined Help library to be recognized. Ignored
if there is no site-defined library.
NONE Prevents the site-defined Help library from being
recognized. Ignored if there is no site-defined library.
| string2 Additional user specified Help library to be used, specified as:
| pfx Prefix associated with user library that is to be treated as
| Help library.
| DFLT Causes site-defined Help library to be recognized. Ignored
| if there is no site-defined user specified library.
| NONE Prevents the site-defined Help library from being
| recognized. Ignored if there is no site-defined user
| specified library.

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.28.2 Notes
Defaults/Maximums:
| ■ By default, one Help library is available. If your site has defined two
| library prefixes, you may establish two Help libraries, where:
1. both are user defined
2. one is user defined and the other is site defined
3. both are site defined
| If your site has only defined one Help prefix, any attempt to establish a
| second Help library is ignored.
Search Hierarchy:
■ If two Help libraries are in effect and a user enters a HELP command, the
search is:
1. The library associated with the first operand specified.
2. The library associated with the second operand specified.
■ When the first matching library member is found, the search ends and the
Help data is displayed.
Session Variables:
■ To identify the Help libraries currently in effect, use the three associated
session variables.
S.HELPPFX Displays the name(s) of the active Help libraries.
S.HELPPFX1 Displays the name of the Help library set by the
HELPPFX= startup parameter.
S.HELPPFX2 Displays the name of the Help library set by the
| HELPPFX1= startup parameter. If no user specified Help
| library has been defined, this is blank.
|1.173.29 SET INFRECALL

| 25. Permits the user to specify what action is to be taken during the ALLOC
| Dsn command process for a data set migrated by the IBM product DFHSM.
|1.173.29.1 Syntax
|
| SET INFRECALL Command
| ┌─WAIT───┐
| ──SET INFRECALL──┼─NOWAIT─┼───────────────────────────────────
| └─NONE───┘

1.173 SET Summary
| WAIT Recall request made; user waits for it to complete. User can
| terminate wait by signalling attention interrupt. If this occurs,
| user regains control of terminal and the DFHSM request
| continues as a background request.
| NOWAIT Recall request made; user immediately regains control of
| terminal. (The user is informed of the number assigned by
| DFHSM to request.)
| NONE The user is informed that data set recalls are prohibited.
|1.173.29.2 Notes
| Default:
| ■ SET INFRECALL WAIT is the default at sign-on.
| Using SET INFRECALL:
| When an operation is requested for a migrated data set, the action performed
| depends on the current setting.
1.173.30 SET JOBCNT

26. To alter the default number of lines to be searched within attached job
output.
1.173.30.1 Syntax
SET JOBCNT Command

──SET JOBCNT──┬─────┬─────────────────────────────────────────
├─v───┤
└─MAX─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, resets the search limit to the site default.
v Number of lines to be searched. The number must be a positive
integer between 1 and the site-defined maximum. (The site-defined
maximum is usually greater than the default number of lines.)
MAX Sets the number of lines to the site-defined maximum.

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.30.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ Use of this command may be restricted by site management.
Searching Job Output:

■ When the EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary command is
used to search the currently attached job, it searches:
– The number of lines specified with the command, as in:
FIRST /WIDGET/ 1
– The site-defined default number of lines or the number of lines
specified by the SET JOBCNT command, as in:
SET JOBCNT 1
FIRST /WIDGET/

(for current value)
Display Setting: Display Setting:
STATUS SYSTEM display N/A
(for site default and maximum
values)
1.173.31 SET LIB ORDER

27. To designate the default Library Selection List display order.
1.173.31.1 Syntax
SET LIB ORDER Command

──SET LIB ORDER──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬──┬────────────┬──────
├─BY──────┤ └─fldname─┘ ├─ASCending──┤
└─DEFAULT─┘ └─DEScending─┘
──┬──────────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────────
└─Cols─┬───┬─e─┘
└─s─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, resets the Library Selection List order to the
default: ascending by MEMBER field.

1.173 SET Summary
fldname Designates the Selection List field that is to be sorted; all Library
Selection List displays are based on the order of this field. The
fields consist of the following:
MEMber
DESCription
LINes
ATR
SEQno
CREated
UPDated
ACCess
CRT
Note: The above field names may be abbreviated as shown (by
uppercase) or they may be specified in their entirety. See
the ORDER LIB command for further information.
ASCending Sorts the field in ascending order. (Specify ASCENDING or ASC.)
DEScending
Sorts the field in ascending order. (Specify DESCENDING or
DES.)
Col [ s ] e Reorders specific part(s) of fields by starting and ending column
boundaries. This enables sorting by prefixes, suffixes, or parts of
dates (days, months, years).
When specifying COLs, it must follow the field-name that
contains the columns to be reordered. (Specify COLS, COL, or C.)
Column counts start at the beginning of a field and end at the
end of that same field. They do not follow the number line count.
DEFAULT Resets the Library Selection List order to the default: ascending
by MEMBER field.
1.173.31.2 Notes
■ All Library Selection Lists are sorted based on this SET command.
■ The SET LIB ORDER command does not cause the Library ASP to become
active. However, if the Library Selection List is displayed, it is refreshed.
■ The information set with this command is recorded in the user's profile
area.

ATTACH LIB OR
ORDER
REFRESH LIB

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.31.4 Example
■ To order all Library Selection List displays by member line count in

descending order:
SET LIB ORDER LINES DES
1.173.32 SET MASTER

28. To control expansion of embedded AllFusion CA-Librarian -INC statements
encountered in submitted jobs.
1.173.32.1 Syntax
SET MASTER Command

┌─OFF────┐
──SET MASTER──┼─ON─────┼──────────────────────────────────────
└─string─┘
Operand Description
OFF Deactivates -INC expansion. The AllFusion CA-Librarian master file
name currently in effect is retained.
ON Reactivates -INC expansion. The previously specified AllFusion
CA-Librarian master file is used to handle -INC expansion.
string Name of the AllFusion CA-Librarian master file to be used to
expand -INC statements encountered in a submitted job. (The file
remains in effect until explicitly changed by another SET MASTER
command or until the user's session is terminated.) -INC expansion
is activated.
1.173.32.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET MASTER OFF is the default at sign-on. Site management has the
option of changing this default to enable -INC expansion and designate an
AllFusion CA-Librarian master file.

+INC Expansion: +INC Expansion:
SET SUBMIT N/A

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.32.4 Example
■ To activate -INC expansion and use the AllFusion CA-Librarian master file
LIB.MAST.SAMPLE to expand -INC statements encountered in the active
AWS:
SET MASTER LIB.MAST.SAMPLE
SUBMIT
1.173.33 SET MODE

29. To designate the character translation mode.
1.173.33.1 Syntax
SET MODE Command (Character Sets)

┌─Basic────┐
──SET MODE──┼─Standard─┼──────────────────────────────────────
└─Xtendedd─┘
or
SET MODE Command (Nondisplayable Characters)

┌─Nopreserve─┐
──SET MODE──┴─Preserve───┴────────────────────────────────────
or
SET MODE Command (Case Sensitive Characters)

┌─NOMIX─┐
──SET MODE──┴─MIX───┴─────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
Basic Character set is uppercase alphabetics, numerals and special
characters. (All terminal input is translated to uppercase.)
Standard Character set is reset to site-defined default.
Xtended Character set is uppercase and lowercase alphabetics, numerals and
special characters. (All uppercase and lowercase alphabetic
terminal input is retained exactly as entered. Commands, library
member names and required alphabetic operands are translated to
uppercase before interpreting them.)
| Nopreserve
| Non-displayable characters are translated to blanks when other data
| on the same line is entered/changed.

1.173 SET Summary
| Preserve Non-displayable characters are not translated to blanks when other

| data on the same line is entered/changed.
| NOMIX Search commands, such as FIRST, NEXT, and soforth, are case
| sensitive. The search is for the exact search string.
| MIX Search commands, such as FIRST, NEXT, and so forth, are not case
| sensitive. The search is for any combination of string characters (in
| upper and lower case) that match the search string.
1.173.33.2 Notes
Defaults at Sign-on:
■ SET MODE BASIC
■ SET MODE NOPRESERVE
■ SET MODE NOMIX Site management has the option of changing all of the
above defaults.
Using SET MODE PRESERVE:

■ When SET MODE PRESERVE is in effect, the locations that contain
non-displayable characters are protected from overtyping. This also affects
data that is included with hardware insert, delete, and the Erase EOF key;
their range on a given line now stops at the first non-displayable character
location.
Associated Variables:
■ Use the session variables S.TRANMODE and S.TRANND to check the
current setting of the translation modes command setting.

Change Existing Data: Change Existing Data:
LOWCASE LC, LCC, LCB, LCT
TXTLCASE TLC
UPCASE UC, UCC, UCB, UCT

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.34 SET MONLEVEL

30. To control the display of informational Monitor command messages written
to the terminal.
1.173.34.1 Syntax
SET MONKEVEL Command

┌─Error─┐
──SET MONLEVEL──┴─Info──┴─────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
Error Causes only error messages to be written to the terminal.
Info Causes informational and error messages to be written to the
terminal.
1.173.34.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET MONLEVEL ERROR is the default at sign-on. Site management has
Using SET MONLEVEL:

■ While this command can be entered from the terminal, it is meant for use
in RPF programs.
Using SET MONLEVEL ERROR:

■ When SET MONLEVEL ERROR is in effect, informational messages are not
displayed. (These messages include conformational messages such as those
issued by EXPORT plus the termination messages. Informational messages
are noted as such in the Messages and Codes manual.)
If, for example, EXPORT is executed from within an RPF program, the
resulting informational message could cause the program to be
interrupted.
– If a panel is active, displaying the message terminates the panel.
– If WRITEs/READs are being performed, the user could become
confused if a message is shown on the Response Line when a prompt
is displayed in the Execution Area.

1.173 SET Summary
■ SET MONLEVEL ERROR suppresses these messages. When these

messages are suppressed, execution is not paused. (Each message is
available to an RPF program using the S.LASTERR session variable.)

Message Control: Message Control:
SET MSGLEVEL N/A
1.173.35 SET MSGLEVEL

31. To control the display of informational Advantage CA-Roscoe command
messages written to the terminal.
1.173.35.1 Syntax
SET MSGLEVEL Command

┌─Info──┐
──SET MSGLEVEL──┴─Error─┴─────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
Info Causes informational and error messages to be written to the
terminal.
Error Causes only error messages to be written to the terminal.
1.173.35.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET MSGLEVEL INFO is the default at sign-on.
Using SET MSGLEVEL:

■ While this command may be entered at the terminal, it is intended for use
in RPF programs.
Using SET MSGLEVEL ERROR:

■ When SET MSGLEVEL ERROR is in effect, information messages are not
displayed. The messages returned from a successful execution of the
SUBMIT or PRINT command are examples of such messages.
(Informational messages are noted as such in the Advantage CA-Roscoe
Messages and Codes Guide.)

1.173 SET Summary
If, for example, SUBMIT is executed from within an RPF program, the
resulting informational message could cause the program to be
interrupted.
– If a panel is active, displaying the message terminates the panel.
– If WRITEs/READs are being performed, the user could become
confused if a message is shown on the Response Line when a prompt
is displayed in the Execution Area.
■ SET MSGLEVEL ERROR suppresses these messages. When these messages
are suppressed, execution is not paused.

Message Control: Message Control:
SET MONLEVEL N/A
1.173.36 SET PFKDELIM

32. To designate the special character that is to be used as a delimiter when
assigning multiple commands to a PF/PA key.
1.173.36.1 Syntax
SET PFKDELIM Command

──SET PFKDELIM──charstr───────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
charstr Special character that is to be used as the command delimiter in
PF/PA key assignments.
1.173.36.2 Notes
Default:
■ As distributed, the default is SET PFKDELIM /.
WARNING:
If SET PFKDELIM is used to change the delimiter, all of the PF/PA key
assignments containing multiple commands must be changed to use the
same delimiter.

1.173 SET Summary

Change Delimiter: Change Delimiter:
SET & N/A
|1.173.37 SET RPSDEF

| 33. To designate the printing of sequence numbers and separator pages when
| using the PRINT command.
|1.173.38 Syntax
|
| SET RPSDEF Command
| ──SET RPSDEF──┬─┬─NUM───┬─┬───────────────────────────────────
| │ └─NONUM─┘ │
| ├─┬─SEP───┬─┤
| │ └─NOSEP─┘ │
| └─DEFAULT───┘
| NUM Causes 6-digit sequence numbers to be printed on output.
| NONUM Causes output to be printed without sequence numbers.
| SEP Causes separator pages to be printed, according to the CPEJECT=
| value.
| NOSEP Causes output to be printed without starting and trailing
| separator pages.
| DEFAULT Causes output to be printed with the default sequence number
| and separator page settings. (See the complete explanation of
| default in the notes below.)
|1.173.38.1 Notes
| Restriction:
| ■ Only one operand may be specified with each SET RPSDEF command. If
| you want to set sequence numbers and page separators, you must issue
| two SET RPSDEF commands.
| Default:
| ■ As distributed, the default setting for sequence numbers and separator
| pages is DEFAULT.

1.173 SET Summary
| ■ DEFAULT is not a specific setting; it indicates that the data to be printed

| has the attributes that are displayed or with which it was saved.
| Specifically,
| 1. If sequence numbers are part of the data in ATTACHed AWS contents,
| jobs, data set members, or library members, they are printed. If the
| members do not contain sequence numbers, the PRINTed output does
| not contain sequence numbers.
| 2. If a library member has been saved using the SEQ/NOSEQ operands
| of the SAVE command, that attribute is used when a PRINT member
| command is issued.
| 3. If :P is issued, the contents of the screen are printed. If the screen
| contains sequence numbers, they are printed regardless of what SET
| RPSDEF attributes are defined.
| Overriding RPSDEF:
| ■ If a PRINT command is issued containing the attributes NUM/NONUM or
| INSEP/NOSEP, the current RPSDEF values are overridden for that
| execution only.
| Changing RPSDEF Settings:

| ■ When you change the sequence number or separator page attributes (via
| SET RPSDEF), those values become the current attributes, and remain in
| effect for the duration of the session or until explicitly changed.
| ■ If you want a specific RPSDEF attribute to always be in effect, include the
| SET RPSDEF command in your sign-on program. (See Chapter 10 in the
| User Guide for more information about creating sign-on programs.)
| Using Print Panels:

| ■ Use the Data Set Facility and Library Facility print panels to display
| information about RPS printing attributes. Select P (Print Members) from
| the main selection menus and the Print Data Set panel and the Print Library
| Member panel contains the current attribute values.
| ■ The Seq Numbrs ===> and the Separator ===> fields on the print panels
| are updated to correspond to the value(s) set by the SET RPSDEF
| command. New attribute values are displayed when a refresh of the panel
| takes place.
| Note: Changes made to fields on the Print Data Set and the Print Library
| Member panels (by overtyping) are only effective for members
| printed from those panels. Once the panels are terminated, the
| default values or the values set by the SET RPSDEF command
| determine the output of all PRINT commands.

1.173 SET Summary
|1.173.38.2 Related Commands

| One-Time Override: One-Time Override:
| NUM/NONUM Operand of PRINT N/A
| SEP/NOSEP Operand of PRINT N/A
| View Setting: View Setting:
| Print Library Member panel N/A
| Print Data Set panel N/A
1.173.39 SET RPSDEST

34. To change the current/default printing location that is to be used when the
PRINT command is issued.
1.173.39.1 Syntax
SET RPSDEST Command

──SET RPSDEST──┬────────┬─────────────────────────────────────
└─string─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, resets the current printing location to the default
printing location.
string Name of the printing location that is to become the current printing
location.
1.173.39.2 Notes
Current Printing Location:

■ If no destination is specified with the PRINT command, the print request
prints at the terminal's current/default printing location, where:
– The current printing location is either the default printing location or
the location established by the SET RPSDEST command or modifiable
STATUS SESSION display.
– The default location is the printing location in effect for that terminal
when the user signs on.
■ When you change a printing location (via SET RPSDEST or the modifiable
STATUS SESSION display), that location becomes the current location. It
remains the current location for the duration of the session or until
explicitly changed.

1.173 SET Summary

One-Time Override: One-Time Override:
DEST Operand of PRINT N/A
1.173.40 SET RPSNOTIFY

35. To designate whether a notification message is to be displayed after a
PRINT request is printed.
1.173.40.1 Syntax
SET RPSNOTIFY Command

┌─OFF─┐
──SET RPSNOTIFY──┴─ON──┴──────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
ON Notification messages are to be displayed.
OFF Notification messages are not to be displayed.
1.173.40.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ Site management has the option of restricting use of this facility.
■ If this facility is allowed, SET RPSNOTIFY can be used to change the
site-default for the terminal session.
Default:
■ As distributed, the default is SET RPSNOTIFY OFF. Site management has

One-Time Override: One-Time Override:
NOTIFY/NONOTIFY operands of N/A
PRINT

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.41 SET SAVEATTR

36. To designate the default access attribute to be used whenever a new library
member is created.
1.173.41.1 Syntax
SET SAVEATTR Command

┌─Shared─────┐
──SET SAVEATTR──┴─Restricted─┴────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
Shared Sets the attribute to allow anyone to access or execute the member;
only the owner can change or delete it.
Restricted
Sets the attribute to allow only the owner of the member to execute,
access, change or delete the member.
1.173.41.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET SAVEATTR SHARED is the default at sign-on. Site management has
When the Default Attribute Is Used:
The default attribute is used when:

■ The SAVE command is executed and no access attribute is specified for the
library member being created.
■ The UPDATE command is used within an RPF program to create a library
member.
■ The TO= operand is used to create a member from data that is being
IMPORTed.


1.173 SET Summary
1.173.42 SET SCROLL

37. To set the SCRL field value. (3270-type terminals only.)
1.173.42.1 Syntax
SET SCROLL Command

┌─Full──┐
──SET SCROLL──┼─Csr───┼───────────────────────────────────────
├─FRAme─┤
├─Half──┤
├─Page──┤
└─v─────┘
Operand Description
Full Causes the display to scroll one line less than the number of lines in
the Execution Area when a forward or backward scrolling key is
pressed.
Csr Causes the display to scroll to begin or end with the: 1) line
containing the cursor when a forward or backward scrolling key is
pressed, or 2) column containing the cursor when a left or right
scrolling PF key is pressed.
FRAme Causes the display to scroll the number of data lines in the
Execution Area when a forward or backward scrolling PF key is
pressed.
Half Causes the display to scroll one-half the number of lines in the
Execution Area when a forward or backward scrolling PF key is
pressed.
Page Causes the display to scroll the number of data lines in the
Execution Area when a forward or backward scrolling key is
pressed.
v Number of lines the display is to scroll when a forward or
backward scrolling PF key is pressed. The number must be an
integer between 1 and 9999.
1.173.42.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET SCROLL FULL is the default at sign-on. Site management has the
Using SET SCROLL:

■ While SET SCROLL can be entered from the terminal, it is meant for use

1.173 SET Summary
■ To change the scroll amount, the terminal user may either overtype the
SCRL field of the System Information Line or issue this command. (Any
of the values shown with this command may be entered in the SCRL
field.)
1.173.43 SET SEARCH

38. To designate: 1) the screen positioning that is to occur when the FIRST,
LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL, or EXCL primary commands locate a string, or 2)
whether the data to be searched may be encoded in DBCS format.
1.173.43.1 Syntax
SET SEARCH Command

──SET SEARCH──┬──┬───────┬─position─┬─────────────────────────
│ └─scope─┘ │
└─┬─NODBCS─┬──────────┘
└─DBCS───┘
Operand Description
scope Qualifies the operational range of this command. If omitted, the
operation applies to the currently attached data. If specified, it must
be one of the following:
AWS Designates that positioning is to apply to the active AWS.
(Abbreviate as A.)
DSN Designates that positioning is to apply to the attached data
set object. (Abbreviate as D.)
JOB Designates that positioning is to apply to the attached job
output. (Abbreviate as J.)
LIB Designates that positioning is to apply to attached library
members. (Abbreviate as L.)
position Designates the screen positioning that is to occur. If omitted, the
default is CJUSTIFIED (Conditional Justification). If specified, it
must be:
or JUS.)

1.173 SET Summary

NODBCS Designates that the data to be searched does not include a
double-byte character set.
DBCS Designates that the data to be searched does include a double-byte
character set.
Note: NODBCS and DBCS are mutually exclusive. If neither is
specified, NODBCS is the default.
1.173.43.2 Notes
Using NODBCS/DBCS:
■ The positioning keyword operands and NODBCS/DBCS are mutually
exclusive.
■ DBCS should only be specified by those individuals who have specified a
language character set that recognizes DBCS.

(for screen positioning)
STATUS SESSION display
(for NODCBS/DBCS setting)
1.173.44 SET SEND

39. To control the display of received SEND messages.
1.173.44.1 Syntax
SET SEND Command

┌─ALL──┐
──SET SEND──┼─OPER─┼──────────────────────────────────────────
└─NONE─┘

1.173 SET Summary
Operand Description
ALL Permits all messages created by the SEND command to be
displayed at the terminal. (All messages added to the user's library
member ZZZZZMSG as appropriate.)
OPER Permits only those messages sent by the operator to be displayed.
(All messages are added to ZZZZZMSG.)
NONE Prohibits the display of any message. (All messages are added to
ZZZZZMSG.)
1.173.44.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET SEND ALL is the default at sign-on.
Member ZZZZZMSG:
■ If the display of messages is being restricted (by either NONE or OPR), the
user should periodically check the member ZZZZZMSG to see if any
activity has occurred. It is also a good practice to check this library
member when the display restriction is removed.

Transmit Message: Transmit Message:
MESSAGE N/A
SEND
|1.173.45 SET SPLIT

| 40. To designate how the screen is to be SPLIT when pressing the PF key
| assigned to the SPLIT function. (3270-type terminals only)
|1.173.45.1 Syntax
|
| SET SPLIT Command
| ──SET SPLIT──┬─FULL─┬─────────────────────────────────────────
| ├─CSR──┤
| └─PART─┘
| FULL Requests a full-screen split regardless of cursor position.

1.173 SET Summary
| CSR Requests a screen split based on the cursor position.

| If the cursor is positioned within the first or last 11 lines of the
| physical screen or to the middle line of the screen, a partial-screen
| split occurs.
| If the cursor is positioned on the last displayable line of the current
| screen, a full-screen split occurs.
| PART Requests a partial-screen split regardless of cursor position.
|1.173.45.2 Notes
| Default:
| ■ SET SPLIT CSR is the default at sign-on. Site management has the option
| of changing the default.
| Partial-Screen Split:
| ■ To divide the screen equally:
| Position the cursor within the first or last 11 lines of the physical screen or
| to the middle of the screen and press the PF key assigned to SPLIT.
| ■ To divide the screen unequally:
| Position the cursor to any line other than those used to perform an equal
| (or full) screen split and press the PF key assigned to SPLIT.
|1.173.45.3 Related Commands

| Change Setting: Change Setting:
| STATUS SESSION display N/A
1.173.46 SET STATS

41. To designate whether SPF-type directory information is to be
added/updated to the PDS directory entry for a member.
1.173.46.1 Syntax
SET STATS Command

┌─ASIS─┐
──SET STATS──┼─ON───┼─────────────────────────────────────────
└─OFF──┘
Operand Description
ASIS Causes only existing directory information to be updated.

1.173 SET Summary
ON Causes SPF directory information to be added or updated to the

directory entry for the member.
OFF Prevents directory information from being added.
1.173.46.2 Notes
Default:
■ SET STATS ASIS is the default at sign-on. Site management has the option
of changing the default.
Using SET STATS ON:

■ SET STATS ON causes the appropriate member statistics information to be
placed in the directory entry whenever the member of a partitioned data
set is added or updated.
Using SET STATS ASIS:

■ SET STATS ASIS causes member statistics information to be updated only.
If a member is new or has no statistics, no statistics are added to the
directory.

1.173.47 SET SUBMIT

42. To define the characteristics of data to be submitted.
1.173.47.1 Syntax
SET SUBMIT Command

──SET SUBMIT──┬─NOSeq─┬──┬─INClude───┬──┬─CARD──┬─────────────
└─SEQ───┘ └─NOInclude─┘ ├─PRT───┤
├─WIDE──┤
└─COL v─┘
Operand Description
NOSeq Designates that sequence numbers are not to be included in the
data. Ignored if the AWS or member attribute is NOSEQ.
SEQ Designates that sequence numbers are to be included in the data
and placed in the location designated by the attribute. Ignored if
the AWS or member attribute is NOSEQ.

1.173 SET Summary
INClude Designates that +INC statements are to be expanded when

encountered in submitted job streams.
NOInclude Deactivates +INC statement expansion. (Abbreviate as NOINC or
NOI).
Note: See the Advantage CA-Roscoe User Guide for information
about +INC expansion.
CARD Designates that the data to be submitted is 80 positions wide.
PRT Designates that the data to be submitted is 133 positions wide.
WIDE Designates that the data to be submitted is 254 positions wide.
COL Numeric value between 8 and 254 that designates the width of
the data to be submitted.
1.173.47.2 Notes
Default:
The defaults at sign-on are:

■ Sequence number attribute of the data to be submitted, or NOSEQ if the
data exceeds 80 characters in width
■ NOINCLUDE
■ CARD
Restrictions:
■ Only one operand may be specified per command (for example, SET
SUBMIT SEQ INCLUDE is invalid).
■ At non-JES2 sites, it is invalid to attempt to set the width to a value other
an 80.

-INC Expansion: -INC Expansion:
SET MASTER N/A
Sequence Numbers: Sequence Numbers:
For AWS: N/A
NOSEQ and SEQ
For Library Member:
SAVE, UPDATE, and
RENAME

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.47.4 Examples
■ To exclude sequence numbers when submitting data:

SET SUBMIT NOSEQ
SUBMIT
■ To include sequence number and have embedded +INC statements
expanded:
SET SUBMIT SEQ
SET SUBMIT INCLUDE
SUBMIT
1.173.48 SET SYSID

43. To enable or disable the display of Advantage CA-Roscoe identification
information.
1.173.48.1 Syntax
SET SYSID Command

──SET SYSID──┬─ON──┬──────────────────────────────────────────
└─OFF─┘
Operand Description
ON At VTAM sites, causes Advantage CA-Roscoe's applid to be
displayed on the Response Line.
At BTAM sites, causes Advantage CA-Roscoe's jobname to be
displayed.
OFF Prevents the display.
1.173.48.2 Notes
Default:
■ The default at sign-on is site defined.

SET USERID N/A

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.49 SET TLOCK

44. To control the automatic terminal lock facility.
1.173.49.1 Syntax
SET TLOCK Command

──SET TLOck──┬─ON───────┬─────────────────────────────────────
├─v────────┤
├─MAX──────┤
├─NOW──────┤
├─OFF──────┤
├─LOGoff───┤
└─NOLogoff─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, sets the inactivity period to the site-defined
default.
ON Activates the terminal lock facility and sets the inactivity period
to the site-defined default.
v Numeric value representing the number of minutes of inactivity
that may occur before the Terminal Lock screen is displayed.
MAX Sets the inactivity period to the site-defined maximum.
NOW Causes the Terminal Lock screen to be immediately displayed.
OFF Deactivates the terminal lock facility.
LOGoff Allows the OFF command to be entered on the Terminal Lock
screen.
NOLogoff Prohibits the OFF command from being entered on the Terminal
Lock screen. (Abbreviate as NOLOG or NOL).
1.173.49.2 Notes
Terminal Lock Facility:

■ This facility is only available at VTAM or BTAM sites using 3270-type
terminals.
■ To resume a 'locked' session, the user must enter his/her password. Thus,
the Terminal Lock screen is not displayed if the user does not have a
password.
■ 'Inactivity' means that Advantage CA-Roscoe is waiting for the user to
enter a command or respond to terminal output.

1.173 SET Summary
Using LOGOFF/NOLOGOFF:
■ If SET TLOCK LOGOFF is in effect when the Terminal Lock screen is
displayed, the user has the option of entering either the appropriate
password or the OFF command.
■ If SET TLOCK NOLOGOFF is in effect, the user must enter the appropriate
password.
Alternate Terminal Lock Invocation:

■ If an RPF program or other application (for example, ETSO or
CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal, the Terminal Lock screen can be
displayed by entering:
:L
in any unprotected field and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately
follow the command.) Note that the colon and PF key assignment are the
Advantage CA-Roscoe defaults. Use the STATUS SYSTEM display to
determine if the site has changed these defaults.

1.173.50 SET USERID

45. To enable and disable the display of user identification information.
1.173.50.1 Syntax
SET USERID Command

──SET USERID──┬─ON──┬─────────────────────────────────────────
└─OFF─┘
Operand Description
ON Causes the user's prefix and sign-on key to be displayed on the
Response Line.
OFF Prevents the display.

1.173 SET Summary
1.173.50.2 Notes
Default:
■ The default at sign-on is site defined.

SET SYSID N/A

1.174 Shift Line Commands

Shifts all or a range of lines. Lines may be shifted to the:
■ Left
■ Right
The Shift Line commands are discussed individually on the following pages.
1.174.1 Shift (Left) Line Commands

To shift one or more lines to the left.
1.174.1.1 Syntax
Shift Left Line Commands

──┬─(─┬───┬───┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
├─((─┬───┬──┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─(B─┬───┬──┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─(T─┬───┬──┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─<─┬───┬───┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─<<─┬───┬──┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─<B─┬───┬──┤
│ └─v─┘ │
└─<T─┬───┬──┘
└─v─┘
Operand Description
( Shift one line to the left.
(( Shift block of lines to the left. (( must be entered on the first and
last line of the block to be shifted. The range of lines does not have
to be displayed in its entirety on one screen. Scrolling and other line
(B Shift all lines left from the line containing the command through
(T Shift all lines left from the first line of the active AWS through the
< Shift one line to the left - stopping if data is encountered.
<< Shift block of lines to the left - stopping if data is encountered. <<
must be entered on the first and last line of the block to be shifted.

<B Shift all lines left from the line containing the command through
the last line of the active AWS. (If data is encountered, the
operation stops.)
<T Shift all lines left from the first line of the active AWS through the
line containing the command. (If data is encountered, the operation
stops.)
v Number of positions to be shifted. If omitted, the data is shifted one
position to the left.
1.174.1.2 Notes
Protecting Data:
■ When the ( form of the line command is used, data shifted to the left of
the current column boundary is lost.
■ When the < form of the command is used, the operation terminates if data
would be shifted beyond the current left column boundary.
Column Boundaries:
80.)
■ To change the boundaries for the terminal session, use the SET BOUNDS
primary command or the BOUNDS line command. The range remains in
effect until changed by another SET BOUNDS primary command or
BOUNDS line command.

RSHIFT ), )), )B, )T and >, >>, >B, >T
LSHIFT
1.174.1.4 Example
■ Assume that the boundaries are set at positions 8 and 47 and that the
active AWS contains the following lines.
To shift line 100 thirty positions to the left or until data appears in the left
margin. To also shift lines 300 and 400 two positions to the left (with no
data protection):


> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P ==============
<31 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
((23 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.
((4 CONFIGURATION SECTION.
■ The result would be the following:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ========================== T O P ==============
4 CONFIGURATION SECTION.
1.174.2 Shift (Right) Line Commands

To shift one or more lines to the right.
1.174.2.1 Syntax
Shift Left Line Commands

──┬─)─┬───┬───┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
├─))─┬───┬──┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─)B─┬───┬──┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─)T─┬───┬──┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─>─┬───┬───┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─>>─┬───┬──┤
│ └─v─┘ │
├─>B─┬───┬──┤
│ └─v─┘ │
└─>T─┬───┬──┘
└─v─┘
Operand Description
) Shift one line to the right.
)) Shift block of lines to the right. )) must be entered on the first and
last line of the block to be shifted. The range of lines does not have
to be displayed in its entirety on one screen. Scrolling and other line
)B Shift all lines right from the line containing the command through

)T Shift all lines right from the first line of the active AWS through the
> Shift one line to the right - stopping if data is encountered.
>> Shift block of lines to the right - stopping if data is encountered. >>
must be entered on the first and last line of the block to be shifted.
>B Shift all lines right from the line containing the command through
the last line of the active AWS. (If data is encountered, the
operation stops.)
>T Shift all lines right from the first line of the active AWS through the
line containing the command. (If data is encountered, the operation
stops.)
v Number of positions to be shifted. If omitted, the data is shifted one
position to the right.
1.174.2.2 Notes
Protecting Data:
■ When the ) form of the line command is used, data shifted to the right of
the current column boundary is lost.
■ When the > form of the command is used, the operation terminates if data
would be shifted beyond the current right column boundary.
Column Boundaries:
80.)
■ To change the boundaries for the terminal session, use the SET BOUNDS
effect until changed by another SET BOUNDS primary command or
BOUNDS line command.

LSHIFT (, ((, (B, (T and <, <<, <B, <T
RSHIFT

1.174.2.4 Example
■ Assume that the boundaries are set at positions 1 and 80 and that the
active AWS contains the following lines.
To shift line 100 seven positions to the right and to shift lines 300 and 400
two positions to the right. (Note that the ) form provides no data
protection):

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.
...... ================================ T O P ========
>71 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
))43 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.
))4 CONFIGURATION SECTION.
■ The result would be the following:

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.
...... ================================ T O P ========
4 CONFIGURATION SECTION.

1.175 SIGNON
1.175 SIGNON
Enables or disables the execution of a sign-on procedure at sign-on.
1.175.1 Syntax
SIGNON Command
──SIGNON──┬─────┬─────────────────────────────────────────────
└─mem─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, cancels the existing sign-on procedure without
substituting a new one.
mem Name of the library member to be used as the sign-on procedure.
1.175.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ Use of this command can be restricted by site management.
Sign-on Procedure Member:

■ A sign-on procedure in another user's library can be designated as long as
it does not have a RESTRICTED attribute.

1.176 SORT
1.176 SORT
Invokes the system utility to sort the contents of the active AWS.
1.176.1 Syntax
SORT Command
──SORT──┬──────────────────────────────────┬──────────────────
└─┬──────┬──┬─────────┬──(s,l,f,c)─┘
└─SORT─┘ └─FIELDS=─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, issues a prompt.
SORT Optional.
FIELDS= Optional.
s Starting column number of the sort field.
l Length of the sort field.
f Format of the data in the sort field, specified as either:
CH Character
BI Binary
c Collating sequence, specified as either:
A Ascending
D Descending
1.176.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ SORT is a user-contributed Monitor command. Site management has the
option of restricting use of this command.
Input Requirements:
■ If a prompt is issued, the input to SORT must begin in the first position of
the line.
■ The syntax shows only the major sort field. Any number of successive
minor sort fields can be specified, provided that the combined length of
the sort criteria does not exceed 200 characters.

1.176 SORT
1.176.2.1 Examples
■ To perform an ascending sort on the contents of the active AWS according

to the 10-character string that begins in column 1:
SORT FIELDS=(1,1,CH,A)
■ To perform an ascending sort according to the 3-character string that
begins in column 4; within that collation, to perform a descending sort on
the 2-character string which begins in column 12:
SORT (4,3,CH,A,12,2,CH,D)

1.177 SPACE
1.177 SPACE
Displays the approximate number of free blocks remaining in the Advantage
CA-Roscoe library.
1.177.1 Syntax
SPACE Command
──SPACE───────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.177.2 Notes
■ SPACE causes the following messages to be displayed on the Response
Line:
LIB8 nnnnn LIBRARY BLOCKS AVAILABLE
where 'nnnnn' is the appropriate number of remaining free blocks.

1.178 STATUS
1.178 STATUS
Provides a variety of information about the user's session and activities during
the session.
The list below summarizes the STATUS command parameters. Each use of the
STATUS command is described individually on the following pages.
1. To display information about the active AWS plus AWSs that are currently
in use:
──STATUS AWS──┬──────┬──────────────────────────────────────────
└─LIST─┘
2. To display a list of previously executed primary and Monitor command

and RPF program names:
──STATUS COMMAND────────────────────────────────────────────────
3. To display information about the current display formats:

──STATUS──┬───────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────
└─DISPLAY─┬──────┬──┘
└─LIST─┘
4. To display information about the most recently attached job:

──STATUS──┬────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────
└─JOB─┬───┬──┘
└──┘
5. To display information about the currently defined NOTE names:

──STATUS──┬─────┬──NOTES────────────────────────────────────────
├─DSN─┤
├─JOB─┤
└─LIB─┘
6. To display information about the user's current session definition:
──STATUS SESSION──┬─────────┬───────────────────────────────────
├─charstr─┤
└─LIST────┘

1.178 STATUS
7. To display information about site-defined default and maximum values

that can be used with specific commands:
──STATUS SYSTEM─────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.178.1 STATUS AWS

1. To display information about the active AWS plus all AWSs that are
currently in use.
1.178.1.1 Syntax
STATUS AWS Command

──STAtus Aws──┬──────┬────────────────────────────────────────
└─LIst─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, displays the status information where the portion
showing the AWS attributes is modifiable.
LIst Produces a non-modifiable display.
1.178.1.2 Notes
Scrolling Display:
■ If the bottom marker (== END OF LIST ==) is not displayed, the number
of AWSs exceeds the screen size. Use PF keys to scroll the display.
Performing Functions:
■ Use this modifiable display to perform one or more of the following
functions by typing the appropriate code in the first field of the display:
A Attach AWS.
AT Alter AWS attributes. (Overtype appropriate field(s) within display
with the new attribute(s).)
D Delete AWS contents.
DS Delete AWS contents and discard AWS.
S Select AWS. (AWS is activated but not displayed.)
R Rename AWS. (Type the new AWS name in the STATUS field before
depressing Enter.)
X Terminate display.
* Position Selection List to begin with designated AWS.

1.178 STATUS
Selecting the Display:

■ The amount of available information exceeds the width of 80-character
screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. Use
the SELECT command to view a specific or the next sequential display.
(The numeric value shown with the following descriptions identifies the
alternate display in which each field appears.)
STATUS AWS Display:

■ The first line in the Execution Area remains constant and contains the
fields:
CURRENT Number of AWSs currently in effect.
MAX Number of AWSs that may be created.
■ Many of the remaining fields are modifiable. The following descriptions of
these fields include information about how their values may be changed.
NAME Name of the AWS. (ALT= All)
ROS MEMBER Name of the last FETCHed, SAVEd or UPDATEd
library member or (NONE). (ALT=1)
CHG Changed data indicator shown if the data in the AWS
is new (unnamed) or does not match the library
member identified by the last FETCH, COPY replace,
SAVE or UPDATE. (ALT= 1)
LINES Number of lines in the AWS or 0 if the AWS is
empty. (ALT= 1)
INCR Current line number increment or 100 if the AWS is
empty.
Change: Use the RENUMBER command. (ALT= 1)
LAST Number of the last line in the AWS or blank if the
AWS is empty. (ALT= 1)
CURRENT Number of the line at which the pointer is positioned
or blank if AWS empty. (ALT= 1)
ACT Number of the split screen (1 or 2) in which the AWS
is active. If no number is shown, the AWS is available
for use but is not active. (ALT= 1)
ASSOCIATED DATASET NAME
Fully-qualified name of the data set COPYed or
IMPORTed into the AWS or blank. (ALT= 1)

1.178 STATUS
VOLUME Serial number of the volume containing the COPYed

or IMPORTed data set or blank. (ALT= 1)
UNIT Unit name associated with the device on which the
data set resides or blank. (ALT= 1)
L-BOUNDS-R Default or current left and right column boundary
settings used by any command that located, edits or
shifts data.
Change: Use AT function code and overtype
appropriate field with the new column boundary; use
the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen, SET
BOUNDS command or BOUNDS line command.
(ALT= 2)
L-SET DIS-R Left and right display margins established by default,
the last executed SET DISPLAY command or the last
change made to either the STATUS DISPLAY or this
screen.
Change: Use AT function code and overtype
appropriate field with the new left or right display
margin; use the SET DISPLAY command or the
modifiable screen produced by STATUS DISPLAY.
(ALT= 2)
L-CUR DIS-R Left and right display margins temporarily set by the:
1) last command that located data outside of the
established display margins, or 2) value types in the
COLS field. (ALT= 2)
NUMBR Current or default sequence number display setting.
Change: Use AT function code and overtype field
with NUM, NUMX, NUM2 or NONUM; use the SET
DISPLAY command or the modifiable screen
produced by STATUS DISPLAY. (ALT= 2)
DISP Current or default data display mode.
Change: Use AT function code and overtype this field
with CHAR or HEX; use the SET DISPLAY command
or the modifiable screen produced by STATUS
DISPLAY. (ALT= 2)
POSTN Current or default screen positioning to occur as a
resulting of executing a FIRST, NEXT, LAST, PREV,
INCL or EXCL primary command.
with CJUSTIFIED, JUSTIFIED, CENTERED or
LOCKED; use SET SEARCH command or the
modifiable screen produced by STATUS DISPLAY.
(ALT= 2)

1.178 STATUS
FILL Current or default trailing character to be used in the

AWS.
with BLANK or NULL; use SET FILL command.
(ALT= 2)
MODE Current or default character translation mode.
with BASIC, XTENDED or STANDARD; use SET
MODE command or the modifiable screen produced
by STATUS DISPLAY. (ALT= 2)
TAB SETTINGS Current or default tab character followed by the tab
positions currently in effect.
Change: Use AT function code and overtype first field
with the special character to be used as the tab
character; use TAB command.
Overtype remaining fields with one to eight column
numbers; use TAB command. (ALT= 2)
CHARACTER SET Language character set code representing the data
that you can enter and display at the terminal.
with a language code defined at your site; use the
SET CHARSET command or modifiable screen
produced by STATUS SESSION. (ALT= 3)
RECOVERY Current or default setting indicating whether the
contents of this AWS is to be recovered in the event
of a session or system termination.
with REC or NREC; use ALTER AWS command.
(ALT= 3)
DISCARD Current or default setting indicating when this AWS
is to be discarded.
with SESSION, SPLIT, RPF or LEVEL; use ALTER
AWS command. (ALT= 3)
SELECT Current or default setting indicating how this AWS
may be referenced by the SELECT command.
with IMPLICIT EXPLICIT; use ALTER AWS
command. (ALT= 3)

1.178 STATUS
EOF Current or default extend of deletion that is to occur

when the ERASE EOF key is pressed.
with ERASE, DELETE, or DELETE1; use SET EOF
command. (ALT= 3)
DSPLY Current or default data protection and highlighting
attribute.
with U, UM, S, or SH; use SET AWSDSPLY. (ALT= 3)
SEQUENCE Current or default AWS sequence number attribute.
with NOSEQ, COBOL or two numeric values where
the first is the starting column and the second is the
length of the field (for example, 73 8); use SEQ or
NOSEQ command. (ALT= 3)
Note: This attribute is also altered by the execution
of the CHAIN, FETCH, MERGE, and SAVE
commands.
1.178.2 STATUS COMMAND

2. To display a list of previously executed primary and Monitor commands
and RPF program names.
1.178.2.1 Syntax
STATUS Command
──STAtus Command──────────────────────────────────────────────
1.178.2.2 Notes
Abbreviation:
■ COMMAND may be abbreviated as CMD, COM, or C.
STATUS COMMAND Display:

■ The display includes:
COMMAND BUFFER IS n BYTES AND CONTAINS v COMMANDS
where n indicates the size of the save area and v indicates the number of
commands saved.

1.178 STATUS
■ This message is followed by a list of the most recently executed primary

commands, Monitor commands and RPF programs. (The most recently
executed command is numbered 1.)
1.178.3 STATUS DISPLAY

3. To display information about the current display formats.
1.178.3.1 Syntax
STATUS DISPLAY Command

──STAtus──┬─────────┬──┬──────┬───────────────────────────────
└─DISplay─┘ └─LIst─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, produces a modifiable display showing the
current screen display formats. If a job is attached, displays the
information provided by STATUS JOB.
1.178.3.2 Notes
Scrolling Display:
■ The modifiable form of the display is scrollable if it exceeds the length of
the terminal screen.
■ The non-modifiable form (produced by the LIST operand) is not scrollable.
STATUS DISPLAY Display:

Bounds Default or current left and right column boundaries used
by commands that edit, locate and shift data.
Change: Overtype field BOUNDS LEFT or RIGHT with
appropriate column number; use SET BOUNDS primary
command. (If an AWS is attached, the BOUNDS line
command or modifiable display provided by the STATUS
AWS may also be used.)
SET DISPLAY Left and right display margins set by default, the last
executed SET DISPLAY command, or changes to this
display.
Change: Overtype SET DISPLAY LEFT or RIGHT with
appropriate column number; use SET DISPLAY command.
(If an AWS is attached, the modifiable display provided
by STATUS AWS may also be used.)

1.178 STATUS
CURRENT DISPLAY
Left and right display margins temporarily set by the last
command that located data outside of the SET DISPLAY
boundaries or by the value typed in the COLS field.
Change: This field is not modifiable.
MODE Character translation mode.
Change: Overtype field with BASIC, XTENDED or
STANDARD; use SET MODE command. (If an AWS is
attached, the modifiable display provided by STATUS
AWS may be used.)
CURSOR Cursor location setting.
Change: Overtype field with HOME, INIT, or DATA; use
SET CURSOR command.
■ Other display values include:
– Current or default sequence number display setting.
Change: Overtype field with NUM, NUMX, NUM2 or NONUM; use
SET DISPLAY command. (If an AWS is attached, the modifiable
display provided by STATUS AWS may be used.)
– Current or default data display mode.
Change: Overtype field with CHAR or HEX; use SET DISPLAY
command. (If an AWS is attached, the modifiable display provided by
STATUS AWS may be used.)
– Current or default screen positioning to occur as a result of executing a
FIRST, NEXT, LAST, PREV, INCL, or EXCL primary command.
Change: Overtype field with CJUSTIFIED, JUSTIFIED, CENTERED, or
LOCKED; use SET SEARCH command. (If an AWS is attached, the
modifiable display provided by STATUS AWS may be used.)
1.178.4 STATUS JOB

4. To display information about the most recently attached job.
1.178.4.1 Syntax
STATUS JOB Command

──STAtus──┬─────┬──┬───┬──────────────────────────────────────
└─Job─┘ └──┘

1.178 STATUS
Operand Description
With no operand, displays information about the currently attached
job. If no job is attached, displays the information provided by
STATUS DISPLAY.
Job Required only when the attached job is not currently displayed.
May be qualified with:
* Begins display at the location within the most recently
attached job output file that was previously displayed.
1.178.4.2 Notes
Scrolling Display:
■ If the number of files in the job exceeds the number of display lines, the
display may be scrolled.
STATUS JOB Display:

JOB NAME User-assigned job name.
NO System-assigned job number.
FILE Number of the file at which the output pointer is currently
positioned.
LINE Number of the line within the file at which the output
pointer is currently positioned.
PAGE/ Number of the page at which the pointer is currently
positioned.
LINE Number of the line within the page at which the pointer is
currently positioned.
FIND LIMIT Current search limit. (Changed by EXCL, FIRST, INCL,
LAST, NEXT, and PREV.)
I/O COUNT JES2: The number of blocks read from the spool.
JES3: This field is meaningless.
A Modifiable field. Use to: 1) begin the next display with the
designated file, or 2) change the print status.
FILE Advantage CA-Roscoe-assigned file number.
STA Print status. Changed by entry in field A.
C Modifiable field. Use to change the SYSOUT class.
DEST Modifiable field. Use to change the printer destination to a
different system or 328x-type printer.
LINES Number of output lines in each file.

1.178 STATUS
FORM Modifiable field. Use to change the output form number.

CPY Modifiable field. Use to change the number of copies of a
file that are to be printed.
NOTES File description.
STATUS JOB Display Messages:

■ The following messages may be included on the STATUS JOB display:
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED - JOB NOT ELIGIBLE FOR PRINT/NOPRINT
JES2 Job contains no held output data sets.
JES3 Job contains no held output data sets.
WARNING: MAX NUMBER OF FILES WAS REACHED.
The job contains more files than can be displayed. To view the
non-displayed files, mark for printing only those files that you still need to
review. Then enter DETACH JOB HOLD (to purge the non-print files).
When you reattach the job you see the "held" files plus the remaining files
that have not yet been displayed. (With an excessive number of files, this
procedure may have to be repeated.)
1.178.5 STATUS NOTES

5. To display information about the currently defined NOTE names.
1.178.5.1 Syntax
STATUS NOTES Command

──STAtus──┬─────┬──Notes──────────────────────────────────────
├─Dsn─┤
├─Job─┤
└─Lib─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, displays NOTE name information for the
Dsn Required only when reattaching the Data Set Facility which is not
currently displayed.
Job Required only when reattaching the job that is not currently
displayed.
Lib Required only when reattaching the Library Facility which is not
currently displayed.

1.178 STATUS
1.178.5.2 Notes
STATUS DSN NOTES Display:

■ This display includes:
NOTE NAME User-assigned name.
LINE Number of the 'named' line within the sequential data set,
PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module.
STATUS JOB NOTES Display:

FILE NAME Advantage CA-Roscoe-assigned file name.
NOTE NAME User-assigned name.
LINE Number of the 'named' line within the file.
PAGE/LINE Number of the page (within the file) containing the 'named'
line; number of the 'named' line within the page.
■ Since multiple users can attach the same job, the display may include
names added by other users.
STATUS LIB NOTES Display:
NOTE-NAME User-assigned name.
LINE Number of the 'named' line within the member.

DROP
NOTE
POINT
1.178.6 STATUS SESSION

6. To display information about the user's current session definition.
1.178.6.1 Syntax
STATUS SESSION Command

──STAtus Session──┬─────────┬─────────────────────────────────
├─charstr─┤
└─LIst────┘

1.178 STATUS
Operand Description
charstr One to four characters uniquely identifying the option that is to
begin the display. If omitted, the display begins with the first line
of the display.
1.178.6.2 Notes
Scrolling Display:
■ The modifiable form of the display may be scrolled if it exceeds the length
■ The non-modifiable form (produced by the LIST operand) is not scrollable.
STATUS SESSION Display:

ATTACH Current or default setting designating whether
execution is to pause after an ATTACH command is
executed.
Change: Overtype field with PAUSE or NOPAUSE; use
SET ATTACH command.
AUTOFF Two fields where the first shows the current number of
minutes of inactivity that is allowed before the
terminal is automatically signed off, and the second
shows the status of the automatic sign-off facility.
Change: Overtype the first field with a numeric value
not exceeding the site maximum and the second field
with ON or OFF; use SET AUTOFF command.
(STATUS SYSTEM shows the default and maximum
values.)
AUTOINDENT Current or default setting indicating whether the
cursor is to be automatically positioned under the first
data character of the preceding line when lines are
inserted by the I or IB line command.
Change: Overtype the field with ON or OFF; use SET
AUTOINDENT command.
AUTOINSERT Current or default setting indicating the number of
data entry lines to be inserted when all data entry lines
inserted by the I or IB line command have been used.
Change: When inactive, overtype first field with
numeric value indicating the number of lines to be
inserted. When active, overtype first field with numeric
value or OFF.

1.178 STATUS
CHAR SET Language character code representing the data that the
user can enter and display at the terminal.
Change: Overtype field with a language code defined
at your site; use SET CHARSET command. (If an AWS
is attached, the modifiable display provided by the
STATUS AWS command may be used.)
CMD LINE Two fields showing the current or default number of
lines comprising the Command Area in: 1) the current
presentation area, and 2) each presentation area when
the screen is next split.
Change: Overtype field(s) with numeric value between
1 and 3; use SET CMDLINES command.
COPYDEST Name of the AWS that is to receive data copied using
:C or (NONE) if no AWS has been designated.
Change: Overtype field with the name of an existing
AWS; use SET COPYDEST command.
CURREC Total number of lines that you have saved in the
library, or N/A if you have no library line limit
(MAXREC is NONE).
DATE FMT Two fields where the first shows the current or default
format used when dates are displayed at the terminal,
and the second shows whether the year is displayed as
two or four digits.
Change: Overtype first field with AMERICAN,
EUROPEAN or INTERNATIONAL and second field
with SHORT or LONG; use SET DATEFORM
command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default
values).
DELIMITER Current or default special character used to separate
(delimit) commands when multiple commands are
typed in the Command Area.
Change: Overtype field with any special character or
OFF; use SET command.
DSNCMLST Current or default setting designating the type of
messages that are to be directed to the member
ZZZZZCMP following COMPRESS requests.
Change: Overtype field with INFO or ERROR; use SET
DSNCMLST.
DSNCNT Current or default number of lines to be searched
within an attached data set object.
Change: Overtype field with MAX or a numeric value

1.178 STATUS
indicating the number of lines to be searched; use SET

DSNCNT command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the
default and maximum values.)
DSNEMPTY Current or default setting designating whether the
Data Set Facility is to attempt to read data sets whose
DSCB indicates that they are empty.
Change: Overtype field with ON or OFF; use SET
DSNEMPTY command.
DSNRECALL Current or default setting designating the action to be
taken when an operation is to be performed on data
sets migrated by the IBM program product DFHSM.
Change: Overtype field with WAIT, NOWAIT or
NONE; use SET DSNRECALL command.
EDITCHNG Current or default setting indicating whether the
sequence number field of lines affected by an edit
operation is to contain a change indicator.
EDITCHNG command.
ESCAPE Current or default escape character string used to exit
an application executing under ETSO.
Change: Overtype field with one- to three-character
string; use SET ESCAPE command.
EXECPFX Current or default RPF execution library setting(s).
Change: Overtype field(s) with a prefix, DFLT or
NONE; use SET EXECPFX command.
JOBCNT Current or default number of lines to be searched
within an attached job output.
Change: Overtype field with MAX or a numeric value
not exceeding the site-defined maximum; use SET
JOBCNT command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the
default and maximum values.)
LANGUAGE Language used for displayed messages and HELP
screens.
MASTER Current or default status of AllFusion CA-Librarian
-INC statement expansion. It shows NONE if this
facility is not active and no master file is in effect, or
ON or OFF and master file name if this facility is
active.
Change: Overtype first field with ON or OFF and
second field with name of AllFusion CA-Librarian

1.178 STATUS
master file (the name may be changed but not deleted);

use SET MASTER command.
MAXREC Maximum number of lines you may save in the library,
or NONE if there is no limit.
MONLEVEL Current or default setting designating whether Monitor
command informational messages are to be displayed.
MONLEVEL command.
MONTRAP Current or default setting designating whether Monitor
command error messages and prompts are to be
displayed.
MONTRAP command.
MSGLEVEL Current or default setting designating whether primary
command informational messages are to be displayed.
MSGLEVEL command.
PFKDELIM Default or current special character used to separate
(delimit) commands when multiple commands are
assigned to a PF key.
Change: Overtype field with any special character; use
SET PFKDELIM command.
RPSDEST Current or default printing location that is to be used
when the PRINT command is issued, or
NO DFLT (if no default location is assigned to this
terminal), or
NO ACT (if RPS is not currently active), or
NO AUTH (if this terminal is not authorized to use
RPS), or
NO AVAIL (if information cannot be obtained due to
site or RPS restrictions).
RPSNOTIFY Default or current setting designating whether
messages are to be displayed when PRINT requests are
printed.
RPSNOTIFY command.

1.178 STATUS
SAVE ATTR Current or default access attribute setting used when

you create (SAVE) a library member.
Change: Overtype field with SHARED or
RESTRICTED; use SET SAVEATTR command.
SEARCH Current or default setting designating the DBCS format
status.
Change: Overtype field with DBCS or NODBCS; use
SET SEARCH command.
SEND Current or default setting controlling the display of
received SEND messages.
Change: Overtype field with ALL, OPER, or NONE;
use SET SEND command.
| SPLIT Current or default setting controlling screen splits.
| Change: Overtype field with CSR, FULL, or PART; use
| SET SPLIT command.
STATS Current or default setting indicating whether SPF-type
directory information is to be added/updated to the
PDS directory entry for a member.
Change: Overtype field with ON, ASIS or OFF; use
SET STATS command.
STMTCNT Current or default RPF program loop limit (the
number of RPF statements that may be executed
without an intervening read/write operation).
Change: Overtype field with MAX, RESET or a
numeric value not exceeding 32760; use SET STMTCNT
command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default and
maximum values.)
SUBMIT Three fields showing the current or default setting
indicating the: 1) width of the data to be submitted, 2)
expansion of embedded +INC statements, and 3)
inclusion of sequence numbers.
Change: Overtype first field with CARD, PRT, WIDE
or a numeric value between 8 and 254, second with
INCLUDE or NOINCLUDE, and third field with SEQ
or NOSEQ; use SET SUBMIT command.
TLOCK Three fields showing: 1) number of minutes of
inactivity allowed before the Terminal Lock screen is
displayed, 2) current or default status of the automatic
terminal lock facility, and 3) whether OFF may be
entered from the Terminal Lock screen.
Change: Overtype first field with a numeric value not
exceeding site-defined maximum, second field with

1.178 STATUS
ON or OFF, and third field with LOGOFF or NOLOG;

use SET TLOCK command. The NOW operand may
only be used with SET TLOCK. (STATUS SYSTEM
shows the default and maximum values.)
WRITECNT Current or default RPF program terminal write limit
(the of terminal writes that can be executed without an
intervening read).
Change: Overtype field with numeric value not
exceeding 32760; use SET WRITECNT command.
1.178.7 STATUS SYSTEM

7. To display information about site-defined default and maximum values that
can be specified with specific commands.
1.178.7.1 Syntax
STATUS SYSTEM Command

──STAtus SYStem───────────────────────────────────────────────
1.178.7.2 Notes
STATUS SYSTEM Display:

AUTOFF The site-defined:
1. Status of the automatic sign-off facility,
2. Default time period before the terminal is signed off,
and
3. Maximum value that can be specified with the SET
AUTOFF command.
AUTTLOCK The site-defined:
1. Status of the automatic terminal lock facility,
2. Default time period before the Terminal Lock screen is
displayed, and
AUTTLOCK command.
DATE FORM The site-defined:
1. Format of dates displayed at the terminal and
2. Number of digits used to represent a year.

1.178 STATUS
DSNCNT The site-defined:

1. Maximum number of lines searched within a data set
object if no value is specified with the search-related
command, and
DSNCNT command.
JOBCNT The site-defined:
1. Maximum number of lines searched within a job file if
no value is specified with the search-related
command, and
JOBCNT command.
RCSESCCH The site-define special character that is to be used to prefix
one-character commands that are to be passed to RCS,
bypassing Advantage CA-Roscoe.
RCSESCPH The site-defined PF key that is to be used to indicate
direct input to RCS.
STMTCNT The site-defined:
– Default number of RPF statements that can be
executed without an intervening read/write operation,
and
– Maximum value that can be specified with the SET
STMTCNT command.

1.179 SUBMIT
1.179 SUBMIT
Submits the contents of the active AWS and one or more library members for
background execution.
1.179.1 Syntax
SUBMIT Command
──SUBmit──┬───────┬───────────────────────────────────────────
├─AWS───┤
│ ┌──
───┐ │
mem┴─┘
└──
Operand Description
With no operand, submits the contents of the active AWS.
AWS Causes the contents of the active AWS to be submitted.
Note: AWS can be specified alone or in conjunction with one or
more library member names.
mem Name of the library member to be submitted. A maximum of 21
library members can be specified, provided that the command fits
on a single line.
1.179.2 Notes
Syntax Checking:
■ Use the COBOL, JCK and PL/I syntax checkers to validate your jobs
before submitting them.
■ When a job stream is submitted, its first record is tested to see if it is a
valid JOB statement (it contains slashes in columns 1 and 2, followed
immediately by a valid job name, at least one space and the word JOB
followed by a space). If the JOB statement is invalid, the job is rejected.
■ The submitted job stream is not tested to see if it consists of one job or
multiple jobs.
■ A /* is appended to the end of the job stream.
■ A site-written validation routine can cause a job stream to be rejected. If
this occurs, a message is written to the terminal. The message originates
either from the site routine or from Advantage CA-Roscoe itself. If there is
a question about the reason for rejection, see your site management.

1.179 SUBMIT
Expanding Embedded Statements:

■ To expand Advantage CA-Roscoe +INC statements embedded within the
job stream, specify the INCLUDE operand with the SET SUBMIT
command before issuing the SUBMIT command.
■ To expand AllFusion CA-Librarian -INC statements embedded within the
job stream, specify the name of the appropriate AllFusion CA-Librarian
master file with the SET MASTER command before issuing the SUBMIT
command.
■ See the Advantage CA-Roscoe User Guide for a description of the +INC and
-INC statements.
Defining Input Data Width:

■ By default, the input data is assumed to be 80 characters in width.
■ At JES2 sites, data up to 254 characters in width may be submitted. To
have lines exceeding 80 characters in length accepted, specify the
appropriate operand with the SET SUBMIT command prior to submitting
the job.
Including/Excluding Sequence Numbers:

By default, when the width of the data being submitted is 80 characters or
less, the sequence number attribute of the active AWS and/or library
member controls whether sequence numbers are included in the data. If
the data exceeds 80 characters in width, the sequence number attribute is
ignored and NOSEQ is assumed. The SEQ and NOSEQ operands of the
SET SUBMIT command can be used to ensure that sequence numbers are
always included or excluded from the data.
Notification Messages:
■ Sites have the option of allowing their users to receive notification at their
terminals when a job completes execution. When this facility is provided,
site management informs their users as to how to receive this notification.
Viewing Job Output:

■ To view the output of the job at the terminal, use the ATTACH JOB
command. To change the attributes of the job output files, the job must
have been submitted with a special SYSOUT class. Site management
informs you what SYSOUT class(es) to use.

1.179 SUBMIT

DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A
1.179.3.1 Examples
■ To submit the contents of the AWS for execution:

SUBMIT
■ To submit the library member TESTJCL, the contents of the AWS and the
library member XYZ.TESTDATA:
SUBMIT TESTJCL AWS XYZ.TESTDATA

1.180 SUFFIX
1.180 SUFFIX
Suffixes all or a range of lines in the active AWS with a character string.
1.180.1 Syntax
SUFFIX Command
──SUFfix──/string/──┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬─────────────────
└─p──┬───┬─┘ └─LITeral─┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
/string/ Prefix string, which may not exceed 80 characters in length and
p q Number of the first and last lines to be suffixed. If only one number
is specified, only that line is suffixed.
interpretation.
1.180.2 Notes
■ The suffix is not added to a line if that action would cause the line to
Specifying the 'Suffix' String:

THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.
■ Unless requested otherwise, a hex string is interpreted as a request to use

1.180 SUFFIX


DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

FILL N/A
EDIT E, EE, EB, ET
XLATE XL, XLB, XLT
1.180.4.1 Example
■ To suffix lines 100 through 500 of the active AWS with the string 123:
SUFFIX /123/ 1 5

1.181 TAB
1.181 TAB
Establishes tab locations and changes the tab character.
1.181.1 Syntax
TAB Command
──TAB──┬─────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────
├─x───┤
│ ┌──
─┐ │
v┴─┘
└──
Operand Description
With no operand, cancels previously established tab positions.
x Special character or national currency symbol that is to be used as
the tab character.
v Number of the column at which a tab location is set. A maximum
of eight different tab locations can be defined.
1.181.2 Notes
At 3270-Type Terminals:
■ Tab Character:
The logical not sign (¬) is the default tab character. To change it, specify
TAB with only the desired special character (for example, TAB %).
■ Tab Locations:
To set or change tab locations, enter the TAB command with the
appropriate column numbers. When tab locations are in effect, the tab
character appears in the appropriate location(s) on the Scale Line.
To cancel existing locations, enter TAB with no operands.
■ Tabbing Data:
Once tab locations are established, the tab character can be used to format
the data:
– As you type it. After depressing the Enter key, the data is positioned
to begin at the appropriate location(s).
– After data is entered in the active AWS. The tab character must be
inserted before the column to which the subsequent data on the line is
to be positioned.

1.181 TAB
The tab character is treated as data if:

– No tab positions are defined.
– More tab characters are entered than the number of tab positions
defined.
– Use the hardware tab feature.
– If logical tab positions are not defined or more tabs are entered than
tab positions, the undefined or extra tab characters are replaced by
blanks.
1.181.2.1 Example
■ To set the tab character to & and to set four tab locations:
TAB &

TAB 12 16 2 35
> AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE_ SCRL FULL COLS 7 78
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
The result is the following:

> .<.1.&..+&...&....+....3....&....4....+....5..
...... ============================ T O P ============

1.182 Text-Related Primary Commands

Manipulates text within the active AWS. The following tasks may be
performed:
1. To center the text on one or more lines using:
TXTCENT p [q] [BOUNDS s e]
2. To reformat one or more text lines using:
TXTFLOW p q [COLS v] [BOUNDS s e]
3. To join two or more text lines using:
TXTJOIN p [q] [COLS v] [BOUNDS s e]
4. To translate the alphabetic characters comprising sentences within one or
more lines to their corresponding lowercase characters using:
TXTLCASE p [q] [BOUNDS s e]
5. To split one or more lines into two lines each using:
TXTSPLIT p [q] COLS v [BOUNDS s e]
Each task and the corresponding command are discussed individually on the
following pages.
1.182.1 Text-Related (TXTCENT)
1.182.1.1 Function
1. To center the text on one or more lines within the active AWS.
1.182.1.2 Syntax
TXTCENT Command
──TXTCENT── p──┬───┬──┬────────────┬──────────────────────────
Operand Description
p q Number of the first and last lines to be centered. If only one
number is specified, only that line is centered.
BOUNDS
Starting and ending column boundaries. (BOUNDS may be
abbreviated as BNDS.)
used (data found outside of those boundaries is not centered).

1.182.1.3 Notes
■ TXTCENT can be abbreviated as TC.
Column Boundaries:
boundaries are not centered. (By default, the column boundaries extend
– A single execution: Specify the BOUNDS operand of this command.
After the command executes, the previously established or default
range is restored.
– The terminal session: Use the SET BOUNDS primary command or the

AWS At the specified line or end of range.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

TC, TCC, TCB, TCT
INPUT TEXTENTR TE
TXTFLOW TF
TXTJOIN TJ
TXTSPLIT TS
1.182.1.6 Example
■ Assume that the active AWS contains the following lines and that the
column boundaries are set to columns 8 and 47. To center the text on lines
100 through 300 between the current column boundaries:


TXTCENT 1 3
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
2 SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES
3 DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND
4 DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
1.182.2 Text-Related (TXTFLOW)

2. To reformat one or more text lines within the active AWS.
1.182.2.1 Syntax
TXTFLOW Command
──TXTFLOW── p── q──┬────────┬──┬────────────┬─────────────────
└─Cols v─┘ └─BOUNDS s e─┘
Operand Description
p q Number of the first and last line to be reformatted.
COL Number of the column beyond which none of the designated text is
to appear.
If omitted and the command is executed from:
■ The terminal: The current or default right column or display
boundary is used whichever is less.
■ An RPF program: the current or default right column boundary
is used.
BOUNDS
If omitted, the current or default column or display boundary is
used as the left boundary and the COLS value or its default is used
as the right boundary.
If specified:

■ The starting column boundary (s) must be less than or equal to

the COLS value.
It indicates the left-most position of the flow operation.
■ The ending column boundary (e) must be equal to or greater
than the COLS value.
It indicates the right-most position of the text that is to be
included in the operation.
1.182.2.2 Notes
■ TXTFLOW may be abbreviated as TF.
Restriction:
■ TXTFLOW is not recognized when SET SEARCH DBCS is in effect.
Reformatting Text:
■ If the specified range of lines includes one or more paragraphs, the
integrity of each paragraph is maintained. The end of a paragraph is
indicated by:
– A blank line,
– A change in indentation, or
– The end of the active AWS.
■ A single space is used to separate words within a sentence.
■ Two spaces are inserted at the end of each sentence. The end of a sentence
is indicated by a period (.), colon (:), question mark (?) or exclamation
mark (!).
■ Consecutive spaces found within a line are retained.
■ Also see the 'Rules for Joining Lines' in the description of TXTJOIN.
Column Boundaries:
■ When TXTFLOW is executed from the terminal, text that is outside of the
current or default column or display boundaries is not reformatted. (By
default, the column boundaries extend from column 1 through 80.) When
TXTFLOW is executed from within an RPF program, the display
boundaries have no affect.

■ The reformatted lines:
– Begin at the default or current left column or display boundary. (The
display boundary has no affect when TXTFLOW is executed from
within an RPF program.)
EXCEPTION: If the text begins inside of the left column boundary, the
reformatted lines begin at the column which contained the left-most
character comprising those lines. For example, if the left column
boundary is set to 9 and all of the text lines begin in column 15, the
reformatted lines also begin in column 15.
– End at the default or current right column boundary or right display
margin, whichever is less. For example, if the terminal screen displays
72 characters and the right column boundary is set to:
Column 50 the reformatted text stops at column 50.
Column 80 the reformatted text stops at column 72.
■ If the COLS operand is specified, the command is ignored if the specified
value is beyond the right boundary margin.

AWS At last line containing reformatted text.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

TXTCENT TC, TCC, TCB, TCT
INPUT TEXTENTR TE
TF
TXTJOIN TJ
TXTSPLIT TS

1.182.2.5 Example
■ Assuming the boundaries are set at columns 8 and 47, to reformat the text
so that no text extends beyond column 30:

TXTFLOW 1,, COL 3
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
21 SHIPPING RATES
The result is:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
1 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN
2 ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST
3 REPORT. SHIPPING RATES
4 DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF
5 ORDER AND DISTRICT TO
6 WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.
■ To then reformat the text so that no text extends beyond column 47:
TXTFLOW 1,, COL 47
The resulting display would look like:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
2 SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES
3 DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND DISTRICT
4 TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.
1.182.3 Text-Related (TXTJOIN)

3. To join two or more text lines within the active AWS.
1.182.3.1 Syntax
TXTJOIN Command
──TXTJOIN──p──┬───┬──┬────────────┬──┬─CURSOR─┬───────────────
└─q─┘ └─BOUNDS s e─┘ └─Cols v─┘

Operand Description
p q Number of the first and last line to be joined. If only one number is
specified, the operation affects two lines. The line identified by p
and the line immediately following it.
BOUNDS
If omitted, the 'next' line is joined to the first at the point indicated
by the COLS value and continues until the end of the 'next' line or
the left boundary is reached.
If specified:
■ The starting column boundary (s) must be less than or equal to
the COLS value.
It indicates the left-most position at which the text is to be
joined.
■ The ending column boundary (e) must be equal to or greater
than the COLS value.
It indicates the right-most position of the text that is to be
included in the operation.
CURSOR Causes the 'next' line to begin immediately after the cursor's
position.
COLS Number of the column after which the 'next' line is to be joined to
the first.
If omitted, the data from the 'next' line is placed one position after
the last character on the designated line.
If specified and data appears in or after the position identified by
COLS, that data is overlaid by the data from the 'next' line.
1.182.3.2 Notes
■ TXTJOIN can be abbreviated as TJ.
Rules for Joining Lines

Note: The process when joining two lines is word-oriented, rather than
line-oriented, where a 'word' is any consecutive string of characters
separated from other words by one or more spaces.
■ When the command is executed, the designated line is examined to ensure
that the last word within the current or default column boundaries is
followed by a space.
■ If there is no space and the column boundary prevents the insertion of
one, the command is ignored.

■ If there is a space, the first word within the column boundaries of the
second line is then examined.
– If it is longer than the area remaining on the first line, the command is
ignored.
– If the word can be joined, it is placed immediately after the space on
the first line; the remaining words on the second line are shifted left to
the column boundary.
The next word on the second line is then examined. If it and a preceding
space will fit within the remaining space on the first line, it is joined to the
first and the remaining words on the second line are shifted left. If the
word does not fit, the command is ignored. This process continues until
the two lines are joined or until the next word on the second line does not
fit on the first.
Using the CURSOR Operand:

■ When CURSOR is used, the line numbers included with the command may
be specified as * (indicating the line containing the cursor) and ,,
(indicating the last line of the active AWS). For example,
TXTJOIN ,, CURSOR
causes every other line (from the line containing the cursor) through the
end of the active AWS to be joined to the preceding line immediately after
the cursor position.
■ CURSOR is especially useful when the command is assigned to a PF key.
For example, assume that PF5 is assigned the value:
LET PF5 = 'TXTJOIN CURSOR'
and the cursor is positioned to column 30 of a line. The line containing the
cursor receives the data from the 'next' line, beginning in column 31, when
PF5 is pressed.
■ If specific line numbers are specified with the command and the cursor is
not positioned to the first (or only) specified line, the command is ignored.
Column Boundaries:
■ Text that is outside of the current or default column boundaries is not
affected. (By default, the column boundaries extend from column 1
through 80.)

The terminal session: Use the SET BOUNDS primary command or

■ The value specified with the COLS operand must be within the column
boundaries that are currently in effect.

AWS At last line containing 'joined' text.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

INPUT TEXTENTR TE
TXTFLOW TF
TJ
TXTSPLIT
TS
1.182.3.5 Example
■ Assuming the boundaries are set to columns 8 and 47, to join line 2 and
the 'next' line (line 3):

TXTJOIN 2
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
3 SHIPPING RATES
4 DEPEND ON
5 WEIGHT OF ORDER AND
The result is:


> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
4 DEPEND ON
■ Continuing the example above, to join lines 4 and 5 and have the text from
line 5 begin one position after column 20 on line 4:
TXTJOIN 4 COL 20
The resulting display would look like:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
The same result would be achieved by entering: TXTJOIN * CURSOR

and then positioning the cursor to column 20 of line 4.
1.182.4 Text-Related (TXTLCASE)

4. To translate characters (except the first character of each sentence) within
one or more lines of the active AWS to their corresponding lowercase
characters.
1.182.4.1 Syntax
TXTLCASE Command
──TXTLCASE──p──┬───┬──┬────────────┬──────────────────────────
Operand Description
p q Number of the first and last line to be translated. If only one
number is specified, the operation affects only that line.
BOUNDS
If omitted, alphabetic characters outside of the current boundary
setting are not translated.

1.182.4.2 Notes
■ TXTLCASE can be abbreviated as TLC.
Restriction:
■ TXTLCASE is not recognized when SET SEARCH DBCS is in effect.
TXTLCASE is sentence-sensitive.
■ It ensures that each new sentence begins with a capital letter. (The end of
a sentence is indicated by a period (.), colon (:), question mark (?) or
exclamation mark (!).)
■ EXCEPTIONS:
1. If a new sentence is preceded by a character that does not have a
lowercase equivalent (for example, 1 or *), the first letter of the new
sentence is not capitalized.
2. If a character does not have a corresponding lowercase character, it is
not translated.
Column Boundaries:
■ To change the boundaries:

AWS At the specified line or end of range.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A


SET MODE N/A
STATUS SESSION
Change Data: Change Data:
TLC
UPCASE
UC, UCC, UCB, UCT
1.182.5 Text-Related (TXTSPLIT)

5. To split one or more lines within the active AWS into two lines each.
1.182.5.1 Syntax
TXTSPLIT Command
──TXTSPLIT──p──┬───┬──┬────────────┬──┬─CURSOR─┬──────────────
└─q─┘ └─BOUNDS s e─┘ └─Cols v─┘
Operand Description
p q Number of the first and last lines to be split. If only one number is
specified, only that line is split.
BOUNDS
If omitted, the line is split at the point indicated by the COLS value
and the 'next' line begins at the current left boundary.
If specified:
■ The starting column boundary (s) marks the position at which
the text is to begin; s must be less than or equal to the COLS
value.
■ The ending column boundary (e) marks the right-most position
of the text that is to be included in the operation; e must be
equal to or greater than the COLS value.
CURSOR Causes the text to be split at the location at which the cursor is
positioned.
COLS Number of the column at which the split is to occur.

1.182.5.2 Notes
■ TXTSPLIT can be abbreviated as TS.
Splitting Text:
■ Either the CURSOR or COLS operand must be used to indicate where the
text is to be split. Text from the designated position to the right boundary
is moved to begin at the left boundary of the 'next' line.
Using the CURSOR Operand:
■ When CURSOR is used, the line numbers included with the command may
be specified as * (indicating the line containing the cursor) and ,,
(indicating the last line of the active AWS). For example,
TXTSPLIT ,, CURSOR
causes every line (from the line containing the cursor) through the end of
the active AWS to be split at the point where the cursor is positioned.
■ CURSOR is especially useful when the command is assigned to a PF key.
For example, assume that PF5 is assigned the value:
LET PF5 = 'TXTSPLIT CURSOR'
and the cursor is positioned to column 30 of a line. The line containing the
cursor is split at column 30 when PF5 is pressed.
■ If specific line numbers are specified with the command and the cursor is
not positioned to the first (or only) specified line, the command is ignored.
Column Boundaries:
■ Text that is outside of the current or default column boundaries is not
affected by this command. (By default, the column boundaries extend
The terminal session: Use the SET BOUNDS primary command or
BOUNDS line command. This range remains in
■ The value specified with the COLS operand must be within the column
boundaries that are currently in effect.


AWS When splitting one line, at that line.
When splitting multiple lines, at the end of the active
AWS.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

INPUT TEXTENTR TE
TXTFLOW TF
TXTJOIN TJ
TXTSPLIT TS
1.182.5.5 Examples
■ Assuming the boundaries are set to columns 8 and 47, to split line 200 at
column 31 so that everything from that position to right boundary begins
at the left boundary of the 'next' line:

TXTSPLIT 2 COL 31
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
The result is:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
21 RATES

■ To split line 300 at column 18 and have the text from that position through
column 45 moved to the next line, beginning in column 10:

TXTSPLIT CURSOR BOUNDS 1 45
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
21 RATES
The result is:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
21 RATES
3 DEPEND ON
■ To split multiple lines (for example, 600 through the end of the active
AWS) at column 40 and have the text from that position through column
50 of each line moved to the 'next' line, beginning in column 20:
TXTSPLIT 6,, COL 4 BOUNDS 2 5

1.183 Text-Related Line Commands

Manipulates text within the active AWS. The following tasks may be
performed with line commands:
1. To center the text on one or more lines within a paragraph, use:
──┬─TC─┬───┬──┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
├─TCC───────┤
├─TCB───────┤
└─TCT───────┘
2. To open the Execution Area so that 'power typing' may be used to enter
data, use:
──TE────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3. To reformat one or more text lines within a paragraph, use:
──TF──┬───┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─v─┘
4. To join two adjacent text lines, use:
──TJ──┬───┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─v─┘
5. To translate the alphabetic characters comprising sentences within one or

more lines of a paragraph to their corresponding lowercase characters, use:
──TLC───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6. To split one text line into two and, optionally, insert one or more blank
lines between the split lines, use:
──TS──┬───┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─v─┘
Each task and the corresponding command are discussed individually on the
following pages.

1.183.1 Text Center Line Commands

To center the text on one or more lines within a paragraph in the active AWS.
1.183.1.1 Syntax
Text Centerline Commands

──┬─TC─┬───┬──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
├─TCC───────┤
├─TCB───────┤
└─TCT───────┘
Operand Description
TC Center one line. To center multiple lines, specify:
v Number of lines to be centered.
TCC Center block of lines. TCC must be entered on the first and last line
of block to be centered. The range of lines does not have to be
displayed in its entirety on one screen. Scrolling and other line
TCB Center all lines from the line containing the command through the
TCT Center all lines from the first line of the active AWS through the
1.183.1.2 Notes
Column Boundaries:
column boundaries are not centered. (By default, the column boundaries
■ To change the boundaries, use the SET BOUNDS primary command or the

INPUT TEXTENTR TE
TXTCENT -
TXTFLOW TF
TXTJOIN TJ
TXTSPLIT TS

1.183.1.4 Example
■ Assume that the active AWS contains the following lines and that the
column boundaries are set to columns 8 and 47.
To center the text on lines 100 through 300 between the column
boundaries:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
TCC1 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED
TCC3 DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
1.183.2 Text Enter Line Command

To open the Execution Area so that 'power typing' may be used to enter data
into the active AWS.
1.183.2.1 Syntax
Text Enter Line Command

──TE──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.183.2.2 Notes
Changes Affecting the Execution Area:
When TE is used,
■ The sequence number field is protected and invisible and the right margin
is ignored. This allows data to be entered in a 'wrap' mode (if the right
margin is reached when entering data, the cursor automatically skips over
the invisible sequence number field allowing continuous data entry).
■ The current column boundaries are recognized when the data is formatted
after the ENTER key is pressed.

Restriction:
■ TE is not recognized when SET SEARCH DBCS is in effect.

INPUT TEXTENTR
TXTFLOW TF
TXTJOIN TJ
TXTSPLIT TS
1.183.2.4 Example
■ Assume that the column boundaries for the active AWS are set to 10 and
45.
To open the Execution Area after line 100 to enter data:

> AWS SCRL FULL COLS 7 72
> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....>....5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
TE1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
...... ========================= B O T T O M =========
The screen below is open for data entry.

> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....>....5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
_
Text can be entered into the active AWS as shown below:

> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....>....5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
This sample shows how to enter data in wrap mod
e and have it formatted for you when you depres
Once ENTER is pressed, the data is formatted.


> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....>....5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
2 This sample shows how you can enter
21 data in wrap mode and have it
1.183.3 Text Flow Line Command

To reformat one or more text lines within a paragraph in the active AWS.
1.183.3.1 Syntax
Text Flow Line Command

──TF──┬───┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─v─┘
Operand Description
v Number of the column beyond which none of the designated text is to
appear. If omitted, the current right column or display boundary is
used, whichever is less.
1.183.3.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ TF is not recognized when SET SEARCH DBCS is in effect.
Reformatting Text Within a Paragraph:

■ The operation begins with the line containing the command and continues
until the end of the current paragraph. The end of a paragraph is indicated
by:
– A blank line
– A change in indentation
– The end of the active AWS
■ A single space is used to separate words within a sentence.
■ Two spaces are inserted at the end of each sentence. The end of a sentence
is indicated by a period (.), colon (:), question mark (?) or exclamation
mark (!).
■ Consecutive spaces found within a line are retained.
■ Also see the 'Rules for Joining Lines' in the description of the TJ line
command.
Column Boundaries:

■ Text that is outside of the current or default column or display boundaries

is not reformatted. (By default, the column boundaries extend from
column 1 through 80.)
■ To change the column boundaries, use the SET BOUNDS primary
command or the BOUNDS line command. The range remains in effect
until changed by another SET BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS
line command.
■ The reformatted lines:
– Begin at the default or current left column boundary.
EXCEPTION: If the text within the designated lines begins inside of
the left column boundary, the reformatted lines begin at the column
that contained the left-most character comprising those lines. For
example, if the left column boundary is set to 9 and all the text lines
begin in column 15, the reformatted lines also begin in column 15.
– End of the default or current right column boundary or right display
margin, whichever is less. For example, if the terminal screen displays
72 characters and the right column boundary is set to:
Column 50 the reformatted text stops at column 50
Column 80 the reformatted text stops at column 72
■ The command is ignored if the column number specified with the
command is beyond the current right boundary margin (for example, TF40
is ignored if the current right margin is 30).

INPUT TEXTENTR TE
TXTFLOW
TJ
TXTJOIN
TS
TXTSPLIT
1.183.3.4 Examples
■ Assume that the boundaries are set at positions 8 and 48.

To reformat the contents of the active AWS to extend to the right
boundary margin:


> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+..>.5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
TF1 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED
21 SHIPPING RATES
The result is:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+..>.5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
1 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED SHIPPING
2 COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES DEPEND ON
3 WEIGHT OF ORDER AND DISTRICT TO WHICH
4 ORDER SHIPPED.
■ If TF30 is then entered in the sequence number field of line 1, the resulting
display would be:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+..>.5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
1 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN
2 ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST
3 REPORT. SHIPPING RATES
4 DEPEND ON WEIGHT
5 ORDER AND DISTRICT TO
6 WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.
1.183.4 Text Join Line Command

To join two adjacent text lines.
1.183.4.1 Syntax
Text Join Line Command

──TJ──┬───┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─V─┘
Operand Description
v Number of the column after which the text from the following line is
to be placed. (If text appears on the line following the designated
column number, the text is overlaid.)
If omitted, the text begins one space after the last character of the line

1.183.4.2 Notes
Rules for Joining Lines:

Note: The process when joining two lines is word-oriented, rather than
line-oriented, where a 'word' is any consecutive string of characters
separated from other words by one or more spaces.
■ When TJ is executed, the line containing the command is examined to
ensure that the last word within the current or default column boundaries
is followed by a space.
■ If there is no space and the column boundary prevents the insertion of
one, the command is ignored.
■ If there is a space, the first word within the column boundaries of the
second line is then examined.
– If it is longer than the area remaining on the first line, the command is
ignored.
– If the word can be joined, it is placed immediately after the space on
the first line; the remaining words on the second line are shifted left to
the column boundary.
The next word on the second line is then examined. If it and a
preceding space fit within the remaining space on the first line, it is
joined to the first and the remaining words on the second line are
shifted left. If the word does not fit, the command is ignored. This
process continues until the two lines are joined or until the next word
on the second line does not fit on the first.
Column Boundaries:
■ Text that is outside of the current or default column boundaries are not
affected. (By default, the column boundaries extend from column 1
through 80.)
■ To change the boundaries, use the SET BOUNDS primary command or
■ If a column number is specified with the command (for example, TJ70), it
must be within the column boundaries currently in effect.

INPUT TEXTENTR TE
TXTFLOW TF
TXTJOIN
TS
TXTSPLIT

1.183.4.4 Examples
■ Assume that the boundaries are set to columns 8 and 47.

To join lines 200 and 201:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
TJ2 SHIPPING COST REPORT.
21 SHIPPING RATES
The result is:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
1.183.5 Text LowerCase Line Command

To translate characters (except the first character of each sentence) within one
or more lines of the active AWS to their corresponding lowercase characters.
1.183.5.1 Syntax
Text LowerCase Line Command

──TLC─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.183.5.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ TLC is not recognized when SET SEARCH DBCS is in effect.
Command Function:
■ The operation begins with the line containing the command and continues
until the end of the current paragraph. The end of a paragraph is indicated
by:
– A blank line
– A change in indentation
– The end of the active AWS

TLC is sentence-sensitive.
■ It ensures that each new sentence begins with a capital letter. (The end of a
sentence is indicated by a period (.), colon (:), question mark (?) or
exclamation mark (!).)
■ EXCEPTIONS:
1. If a new sentence is preceded by a character that does not have a
lowercase equivalent (for example, 1 or *), the first letter of the new
sentence is not capitalized.
2. If a character does not have a corresponding lowercase character, it is
not translated.
Column Boundaries:

SET MODE N/A
STATUS SESSION
Change Data: Change Data:
TXTLCASE
UC, UCC, UCB, UCT
UPCASE
1.183.7 Text Split Line Command

To split one text line into two and, optionally, insert one or more blank lines
between the split lines.
1.183.7.1 Syntax
Text Split Line Command

──TS──┬───┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─v─┘

Operand Description
v Number of lines to be inserted between split. If v is omitted, no
lines are inserted.
1.183.7.2 Notes
Designating Location of Split:

■ The position of the cursor within the Execution Area determines where the
line is to be split. The text up to the cursor remains on the line. The text
beginning with the cursor position and up to the right boundary is placed
on the second line, beginning at the left boundary.
■ Use the cursor positioning keys to place the cursor at the location where
the split is to occur. Do not use the space bar to position the cursor; any
text that it blanks out is lost.
Contents of 'Split' Line:

■ Leading blanks are deleted from the text that is placed on the second line.
■ If the split involves the entire line ( the cursor is placed in the first position
of the line or column boundary), all of the text is placed on the second
line. The line being split is retained, but is filled with blanks.
Column Boundaries:
■ By default, the column boundaries extend from column 1 through 80.
To change the boundaries, use the SET BOUNDS primary command or
■ The command is ignored if the cursor is not positioned within the column
boundaries.
Inserting Lines:
■ If a numeric value is specified with the command (for example, TS2), the
designated number of lines are inserted for data entry.
If the area within the column boundaries is blank (contains no text), the
designated number of data entry lines is still inserted.
■ Lines on which data is entered are retained after the ENTER key or a PF
key is pressed. (A space is considered data.) The lines are assigned
sequence numbers and the sequence number field is unprotected.
Lines on which no data has been entered are deleted.


INPUT TEXTENTR TE
TXTFLOW TF
TXTJOIN TJ
TXTSPLIT TS
1.183.7.4 Example
■ To split line 200 at position 31 (the cursor position) and insert two lines
between the split:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
TS22 SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES
The result is:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
......
......
21 RATES
■ If the word SHIPPING is typed on one of the inserted lines and nothing is
typed on the other, the resulting display would look like:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
21 SHIPPING
22 RATES

1.184 TIME
Display the current time and date.
1.184.1 Syntax
TIME Command
──TIME────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.184.2 Notes
Display Format:
■ The information written to the terminal is in the format:
mm/dd/yy hh.mm.ss ELAPSED hh.mm.ss - CPU time
and includes the:
– Current date
– Current time
– Elapsed time (the length of the terminal session)
– CPU time for the session

1.185 TOP
1.185 TOP
Positions the pointer to the first line of the active AWS.
1.185.1 Syntax
TOP Command
──TOP─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.185.2 Notes
■ TOP does not cause the display to be changed it only positions the pointer
to the first line of the active AWS.
■ While TOP can be entered from the terminal, it is intended for use in RPF
programs.

AWS At the end of the active AWS.
DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

BOTTOM N/A
FIND
POINT AWS

1.185 TOP
1.186 TRACE
Enables the trace facility.
1.186.1 Syntax
TRACE Command
──TRACE──┬──────┬─────────────────────────────────────────────
└─Edit─┘
Operand Description
Edit Identifies the trace operation being performed.
1.186.2 Notes
■ TRACE enables the display of lines changed by an EDIT or FILL
command.
■ Once enabled, the execution of either command is cause a non-modifiable
display of affected lines.
■ To disable the trace facility, use the NOTRACE command.
SET EDITCHNG:
■ The SET EDITCHNG command causes the sequence number field of each
line affected by an edit operation to contain a change indicator. The
display is scrollable and modifiable. Operands of this command can be
used to activate, deactivate and reset this facility.

EDIT E, EE, EB, ET
XLATE XL, XLB, XLT
race Edits: Trace Edits:
NOTRACE N/A
SET EDITCHNG

1.186 TRACE
1.187 TSO
Executes a TSO command.
1.187.1 Syntax
TSO Command
──TSO──┬─%execname─┬──┬────────────────┬──────────────────────
└─-TSO cmd──┘ └─cmp parameters─┘
Operand Description
execname Any TSO exec procedure name. The procedure may be
either a CLIST or a REXX EXEC.
TSO cmd Any TSO command name, including CALL.
cmd parameters Variable format parameters for the associated command.
1.187.2 Notes
Restriction:
■ Only sites running TSO/E 2.1 or above can use this command.
Using the TSO command:

■ The TSO command allows users to enter TSO commands from the
Advantage CA-Roscoe command line and from RPFs.
■ When the TSO command is executed, an Advantage CA-Roscoe Command
Processor is either activated by OS attach or, if the Command Processor is
already active, it is signaled with new input.
■ To execute CLISTs, a DD of SYSPROC should be allocated. For REXX
execs, allocate a DD of SYSEXEC. Advantage CA-Roscoe searchs these files
upon execution of a CLIST/REXX exec.
1.187.2.1 Examples
■ To allocate files to enable ISPF logon, enter:

TSO EXEC 'IDPRN.IDPRN1.CLIST(LOGTSO)'
■ To log onto ISPF, enter:
TSO ISPF 6
■ To execute the CLIST IPCSBLSG from Advantage CA-Roscoe, using
implicit (default) libraries, enter:
TSO %IPCSBLSG

1.187 TSO
1.188 TTY
Sets the speed characteristics for a typewriter device.
1.188.1 Syntax
TTY Command
──TTY──┬───────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────
├─v─────┤
└─OPT v─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, resets the speed characteristics to the site default.
v Number associated with a terminal type. (The number associated
with each terminal type and the defaults are available from site
management.)
OPT= v Code indicating the communications protocol to be supported,
specified as:
0 Communications to proceed in default mode.
1 Communications to support KERMIT protocol and
programming interface.
If omitted, the default is 0.

1.189 UNCATLG
1.189 UNCATLG
Uncatalogs a data set.
1.189.1 Syntax
UNCATLG Command
──UNCATlg──Dsn── dsn─┬─────┬──────────────────────────────────
└─(v)─┘
Operand Description
dsn One- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set to be
uncataloged. The name may be further qualified with:
v Relative generation number of GDG data set to be
uncataloged, specified as 0 (most current) or a minus number.
1.189.2 Notes
■ UNCATLG may not be used to uncatalog SMS-managed data sets.
■ UNCATLG may be used to uncatalog non-VSAM data sets and the
following types of VSAM catalog entries: ALIAS and GDGBASE.
■ The volumes on which the data set resides need not be mounted and
online to perform an uncatalog operation.

CATALOG N/A
DSN UC (display menu)

1.190 UPCASE
1.190 UPCASE
corresponding uppercase characters.
1.190.1 Syntax
UPCASE Command
──UPCASE── p──┬───┬──┬────────────┬───────────────────────────
Operand Description
p q Number of the first and last lines to be translated. If only one
number is specified, only that line is translated.
BOUNDS
used (alphabetic characters found outside of those boundaries are
not translated).
1.190.2 Notes
■ UPCASE may be abbreviated as UC.
■ If a character does not have a corresponding uppercase character, it is not
translated.
Column Boundaries:
The terminal session:
Use the SET BOUNDS primary command or the
BOUNDS line command. The range remains in effect
until changed by another SET BOUNDS primary

1.190 UPCASE

On Input: On Input:
SET MODE N/A
STATUS SESSION
TXTLCASE TLC
UC, UCC, UCB, UCT

1.191 UPDATE
1.191 UPDATE
Replaces the contents of a library member with all or part of the contents of
the active AWS.
1.191.1 Syntax
UPDATE Command
──Update──┬─mem─┬──┬────────────┬──┬───────────┬───────────────
└────┘ └─ p─┬────┬──┘ └─/charstr/─┘
└─ q─┘
──┬────────────────┬──┬────────────┬───────────────────────────
├─SEQ─┬───────┬──┤ ├─Shared─────┤
│ ├─ s────┤ │ ├─Execonly───┤
│ ├─ l────┤ │ └─Restricted─┘
│ └─COBOL─┘ │
└─NOSEQ──────────┘
Operand Description
mem Name of the library member whose contents are to be replaced.
* Causes the contents of the last FETCHed, SAVEd or UPDATEd
library member to be replaced.
p q Number of the first and last lines within the active AWS to be used
when replacing the contents of the library member. If q is omitted,
the entire member contents is replaced by line p. If both are
omitted, the entire active AWS replaces the entire member.
/charstr/ One- to 30-character delimited description to be assigned to the
member.
further qualification, causes sequence numbers to be placed in
field.
Cobol Causes sequence numbers to be placed in columns 1
through 6.

1.191 UPDATE
owner can access, change or delete it. (This attribute is intended for
RPF programs.)
Restricted
delete the member.
1.191.2 Notes
can update that member.

DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

ALTER
RENAME
1.191.4.1 Examples
■ To replace the contents of the last library member fetched, saved or

updated with the contents of the active AWS (existing attributes are not
changed):
U
■ To replace the contents of the library member ABC with the contents of
lines 500 through 1200 of the active AWS:
UPDATE ABC 5 12
■ To replace the contents of the library member DEF with the contents of the
active AWS and to change the description of the member:
UPDATE DEF /NEW DESCRIPTION/

1.191 UPDATE
1.192 Uppercase Line Commands

corresponding uppercase characters.
1.192.1 Syntax
Uppercase Line Commands
──┬─UC─┬───┬──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ │
├─UCC───────┤
├─UCB───────┤
└─UCT───────┘
Operand Description
UC Translate one line. To translate multiple lines, specify:
v Number of lines to be translated.
UCC Translate block of lines. UCC must be entered on the first and last
line of block to be translated. The range of lines does not have to be
displayed in its entirety on one screen. Scrolling and other line
UCB Translate all lines from the line containing the command through the
UCT Translate all lines from the first line of the active AWS through the
1.192.2 Notes
■ If a character does not have a corresponding uppercase character, it is not
translated. Column Boundaries:

1.192 Uppercase Line Commands

On Input: On Input:
SET MODE N/A
STATUS SESSION
TXTLCASE TLC
UPCASE
1.192.3.1 Example
■ To uppercase the contents of lines 100 and 200:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
1 identification division.
UCT2 program-id. tax-rept.
3
4 environment division.
The result is:

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.>..5..
...... ============================ T O P ============
3
4 environment division.
■ While the example uses the UCT command, the same result could be
achieved by typing:
– UC2 in the sequence number field of line 100, or
– UCC in the sequence number fields of lines 100 and 200.

1.193 WAIT
1.193 WAIT
Causes execution of the next command to be delayed for a specified number of
seconds.
1.193.1 Syntax
WAIT Command
──WAIT──┬───┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─v─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, causes Advantage CA-Roscoe to wait one second
before executing the next command.
v Number between 1 and 60 that represents the number of seconds
Advantage CA-Roscoe is to wait before executing the next
command.

1.194 WIDTH
1.194 WIDTH
(Typewriter devices only.) Specifies the physical width of the carriage.
1.194.1 Syntax
WIDTH Command
──WIDTH──┬───┬────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─v─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, sets the width to 80 characters.
v Number between 72 and 132 that represents the physical width of
the carriage.

1.195 XCOPY
1.195 XCOPY
Copies all or part of the designated data from the other split screen into the
active AWS of the screen containing the command.
1.195.1 Syntax
XCOPY Command
──XCopy──┬──────────────┬──o──┬────┬──┬───────┬───────────────
├─Dsn p─┬───┬──┤ └─Nv─┘ ├─NOHDR─┤
│ └─q─┘ │ └─FULL──┘
├─Job──────────┤
├─Lib──────────┤
└─mem──────────┘
Operand Description
Dsn Designates that the data set object attached in the other split screen
is to be copied into the active AWS of this screen.
Job Designates that the job output file attached in the other split screen
Lib Designates that the library member or Selection List attached in the
other split screen is to be copied into the active AWS of this screen.
mem Name of the library member to be copied into the active AWS of
this screen.
Note: If neither DSN, JOB, LIB nor a library member is specified,
one or more lines from the active AWS of the other split
screen are to be copied into the active AWS this screen.
p q Number of the first and last lines to be copied. If only one number
is specified, only that line is copied.
v A line number.

1.195 XCOPY
is N1.
1.195.2 Notes
Restrictions:
original location).
AWS Line Numbers:

■ When copied lines are placed between existing lines or before the first line
in the active AWS, associated line numbers are incremented by 1. When
the copied lines are placed to the end of the active AWS, the current
increment is used.
AWS Overflow:

1. Reside on an online DASD volume or a mass storage volume capable
of being staged. Tape volumes and offline DASD volumes may be
JCL.

1.195 XCOPY
system programmer.
■ When copying from a Selection List, the AWS is contain:
specified, and

occur when LISTing binary data.

■ When a member name is included in the command (for example, XCOPY
WIDGET), all of the designated member is copied into the active AWS.
The member need not be attached.
part of the member or Selection List attached in the other split screen is
copied into the AWS of the screen containing the command.

DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

1.195 XCOPY

=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT
XCOPYS, XCOPYX I, IB, IM (MASK), TE
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE
1.195.4.1 Examples
■ To copy, before the first line of the active AWS in this screen, all lines
beginning with the line at which the pointer is currently positioned
through the last line of the active AWS in the other split screen:
XCOPY ,, T
■ To copy lines 50 through 200 from the data set object attached in the other
split screen to, or immediately after, line 1200 of the AWS in this screen,
repeating those lines four times:
XCOPY DSN 5 2 12 N4
■ To copy lines 2300 through 540 from the job output file attached in the
other split screen into the AWS of this screen and to have those lines
replace the current AWS contents:
XCOPY JOB 23 54 R
■ To copy lines 100 through 500 from the library member TEST1 in the other
split screen after the last line of the AWS in this screen:
XCOPY TEST1 1 5 B
■ To copy the Library Selection List from the other split screen after the line
at which the pointer is currently positioned in this screen and to exclude
the Selection List header lines:
XCOPY LIB NOHDR

1.195 XCOPY
1.196 XCOPYS
Copies one or more lines containing a specific string from the designated data
in the other split screen into the active AWS of the screen containing the
command.
1.196.1 Syntax
XCOPYS Command
──XCopyS──┬────────────────────┬──/string/──┬──────────┬──o────
├──┬─────┬──┬───┬─ e─┤ └─p─┬───┬──┘
│ └─Dsn─┘ └─s─┘ │ └─q─┘
├─Job────────────────┤
└─Lib────────────────┘
──┬────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬──┬─────────┬──┬───────┬─────────
└─Nv─┘ └─LITeral─┘ └─Mix─┘ └─context─┘ ├─NOHDR─┤
└─FULL──┘
Operand Description
this screen.
Note: If neither DSN, JOB, LIB or a library member is specified,
screen are to be copied into the active AWS of this screen.

1.196 XCOPYS

v A line number.
Nv Number of times (v) the specified lines are duplicated. Default is
N1.
interpretation.
| context operand.
following:
as WOR.)
IMB.)

1.196 XCOPYS
1.196.2 Notes
■ XCOPYS can be abbreviated as XCS.
original location).
AWS Line Numbers:

■ When the copied lines are placed between existing lines or before the first
line in the active AWS, the associated line numbers are incremented by 1.
When the copied lines are placed at the end of the active AWS, the current
increment is used.
AWS Overflow:

JCL.

1.196 XCOPYS

system programmer.
■ When copying from a Selection List, the AWS contains:
specified, and


XCOPYS WIDGET), the appropriate lines from the designated member are
copied into the active AWS. The member need not be attached.
■ When LIB is specified with the command (for example, XCOPYS LIB), all
or part of the library member or Selection List attached in the other screen
is copied into the active AWS of the screen containing the command.


THE or X'E3C8C5'

1.196 XCOPYS

X'string'
characters.

strings that:
period, or comma).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.

1.196 XCOPYS


DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT
XCOPY, XCOPYX I, IB, IM (MASK), TE
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE
1.196.4.1 Examples
■ To copy every line of the job output file attached in the other screen that
contains the string PRINT-FILE in columns 20 through 50 to, or
immediately after, line 1200 of the active AWS in this screen:
XCOPYS JOB 2 5 PRINT-FILE 12

1.196 XCOPYS
■ To copy every line containing the string WIDGET in lines 100 through 900
of the data set attached in the other screen into the active AWS of this
screen, replacing the AWS contents:
XCOPYS DSN WIDGET 1 9 R
■ To copy every line from the library member MEMBER1 attached in the
other screen that contains the string XYZ to the top of the AWS in this
screen, repeating those lines three times:
XCOPYS MEMBER1 XYZ T N3
■ To copy every line from the data set object attached in the other screen
that contains the hexadecimal string C1 to the top of the AWS in this
screen:
XCOPYS DSN X'C1' LITERAL T
■ To copy every line containing the string 12/12/88 from the Library
Selection List attached in the other screen to the line at which the pointer
is positioned in this screen and exclude the Selection List header lines:
XCOPYS LIB '12'12'88' NOHDR

1.197 XCOPYX
1.197 XCOPYX
Copies one or more lines not containing a specific string from the designated
data in the other split screen into the active AWS of the screen containing the
command.
1.197.1 Syntax
XCOPYX Command
──XCopyX──┬────────────────────┬──/string/──┬──────────┬──o────
├──┬─────┬──┬───┬─ e─┤ └─p─┬───┬──┘
│ └─Dsn─┘ └─s─┘ │ └─q─┘
├─Job────────────────┤
├─Lib────────────────┤
└─mem────────────────┘
──┬────┬──┬─────────┬──┬─────┬──┬─────────┬──┬───────┬─────────
└─Nv─┘ └─LITeral─┘ └─Mix─┘ └─context─┘ ├─NOHDR─┤
└─FULL──┘
Operand Description
this screen.
Note: If neither DSN, JOB, LIB or a library member is specified,
screen are to be copied into the active AWS of this screen.

1.197 XCOPYX

v A line number.
Nv Number of times (v) the specified lines are duplicated. Default is
N1.
interpretation.
| context operand.
following:
as WOR.)
IMB.)

1.197 XCOPYX
1.197.2 Notes
■ XCOPYX can be abbreviated as XCX.
original location).
AWS Line Numbers:

■ When copied lines are placed between existing lines or before the first line
in the active AWS, associated line numbers are incremented by 1. When
the copied lines are placed at the end of the active AWS, the current
increment is used.
AWS Overflow:

JCL.

1.197 XCOPYX

system programmer.
■ When copying from a Selection List, the AWS contains:
specified, and


XCOPYS WIDGET), the appropriate lines from the designated member are
copied into the active AWS. The member need not be attached.
■ When LIB is specified with the command (for example, XCOPYS LIB), all
or part of the library member or Selection List attached in the other screen
is copied into the active AWS of the screen containing the command.


THE or X'E3C8C5'

1.197 XCOPYX
X'string'
characters.

strings that:
period, or comma).
non-alphanumeric.
non-alphanumeric.

1.197 XCOPYX


DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

=n
COPY, COPYS, COPYX
INPUT
XCOPY, XCOPYS I, IB, IM (MASK), TE
MOVE M, MM, MB, MT
CHAIN N/A
COPY
FETCH
IMPORT
MERGE

1.197 XCOPYX
1.197.4.1 Examples
■ To copy every line not containing the string PRINT-FILE from the job
output file attached in the other screen to, or immediately after, line 1200
of the active AWS in this screen:
XCOPYX JOB PRINT-FILE 12
■ To copy every line not containing the string WIDGET in lines 100 through
900 of the data set attached in the other screen into the active AWS of this
screen, replacing the AWS contents:
XCOPYX DSN WIDGET 1 9 R
■ To copy every line not containing the string XYZ in columns 10 through 30
of the library member attached in the other screen to the top of the AWS
in this screen, repeating those lines three times:
XCOPYX LIB XYZ T N3
■ To copy every line from the data set object attached in the other screen
that does not contain the hexadecimal string C1 to the top of the AWS in
this screen:
XCOPYX DSN X'C1' LITERAL T
■ To copy every line not containing the string 12/12/88 from the Library
Selection List attached in the other screen to the line at which the pointer
is positioned in this screen and exclude the Selection List header lines:
XCOPYX LIB '12'12'88' NOHDR

1.198 XLATE
1.198 XLATE
,*3.Function
Replaces a character found within the contents of the active AWS with another
character.
1.198.1 Syntax
XLATE Command
──XLATE──┬──────────┬──/string1/string2/──┬──────────┬─────────
└──┬───┬─e─┘ └─p─┬───┬──┘
└─s─┘ └─q─┘
──┬─────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─LITeral─┘
Operand Description
s e Number of the starting and ending columns to be searched
for string1. If only one number is specified, it is assumed to
be the ending column. The ending column cannot exceed 255.
/string1/string2/ Delimited search and replacement characters. The number of
search characters must equal the number of replacement
characters. A maximum of 55 search and 55 replacement
characters may be specified.
p q Number of the first and last lines to be searched for string1.
If only one number is specified, only that line is searched.
LITeral Prevents the search character(s) from being interpreted (for
example, X'C1' is to be treated as a character; not as the
hexadecimal representation of the letter A). If omitted, each
character is subject to interpretation.
1.198.2 Notes
■ XLATE changes specific characters to other characters. To replace one
character string with another, use the EDIT command.


1.198 XLATE

equal to e.

replacement character(s) can be specified in either character format or its
hexadecimal representation. Thus, the character A can be specified as
either:
THE or X'E3C8C5'
X'string'
characters.

DSN N/A
JOB N/A
LIB N/A

FILL N/A
PREFIX
SUFFIX

1.198 XLATE

EDIT E, EE, EB, ET
X, XLB, XLT
SET EDITCHNG N/A
1.198.4.1 Examples
■ To replace every occurrence of the character A with the character B:

XLATE /A/B/
■ To change every occurrence of the character A to B and every occurrence
of the character X to Y in columns 12 through 40 of lines 100 through 500:
XLATE 12 4 /AX/BY/ 1 5

1.199 Xlate Line Commands

Replaces a character found within the contents of the active AWS with another
character.
1.199.1 Syntax
Xlate Line Commands
──┬─XL─┬───┬──┬───────────────────┬──┬────────────────────────
│ └─v─┘ └─/string1/string2/─┘ │
├─XLB─┬───────────────────┬────────┤
└─XLT─┬───────────────────┬────────┘
└─/string1/string2/─┘
Operand Description
XL Replace the appropriate character(s) on one line. To replace
the characters on multiple lines, specify:
v Number of lines on which character replacement is to
occur.
XLB Replace the appropriate character(s) on all lines from the line
containing the command through the last line of the active
AWS.
XLT Replace the appropriate character(s) on all lines from the first
line of the active AWS through the line containing the
command.
/string1/string2/ Delimited search and replacement characters. The number of
search characters must equal the number of replacement
characters. The combined length must not exceed the length
of a terminal line.
1.199.2 Notes
■ These commands change specific characters to other characters. To replace
one character string with another, use the edit line commands.

■ By default, the entire line is searched for the specified character(s). The
search can be limited to specific columns by using the SET BOUNDS
effect until changed by another SET BOUND command or BOUNDS line
command.


replacement character(s) can be specified in either character format or its
hexadecimal representation. Thus, the character A can be specified as
either:
A or X'C1'
X'string'
characters.

words THE, THERE, and BROTHER match the string /THE/).

FILL N/A
PREFIX
SUFFIX
EDIT E, EE, EB, ET
XLATE
SET EDITCHNG N/A

1.199.3.1 Examples
■ To replace every occurrence of the character / with the character - and to

replace every occurrence of the character X with a space:

> AWS(AAA.DATEFILE) SCRL FULL COLS 7 78
> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... =========================== T O P =============
XLB1 '/X'- ' OF WHEN PURCHASES DELIVERED
2 ORDER NO. DATE DELIVERED
21 A12984XXX 12/15/88
3 A23563XXX 1/22/89
4 A45887XXX 4/1/89

> AWS(AAA.DATEFILE) SCRL FULL COLS 7 78
> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
...... =========================== T O P =============
1 RECORD OF WHEN PURCHASES DELIVERED
2 ORDER NO. DATE DELIVERED
3 A12984 12-15-88
4 A23563 1-22-89

1.200 ZAP
1.200 ZAP
Permits superzap processing to be performed on an OS data set.
1.200.1 Syntax
ZAP Command
──ZAP──┬────┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─-B─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, reads subcommands from the active AWS. If an
error is detected, execution terminates.
-B Reads subcommands from the active AWS. If an error is detected,
execution continues; however, only those subcommands that are not
related to the error are executed.
1.200.2 Notes
Restrictions:
■ ZAP is a Monitor command. Site management has the option of restricting
use of this command and/or its subcommands.
ZAP Criteria:
■ To be processed, a data set must:
1. Reside on a 2314, 3330, 3340, 3350, 3375, 3380, or 3390 volume that is
online and available to Advantage CA-Roscoe.
2. Not have been written using the record overflow hardware feature.
3. Not be a VSAM data set. (It may be a VSAM data space.)
4. Not be under the exclusive control of another task in the system. If
exclusive control by ZAP is required, it must be neither under the
shared control of another task in the system nor allocated by data set
name in the Advantage CA-Roscoe JCL.

1.200 ZAP
Additional Criteria:
1. Only one volume of a multivolume data set can be processed at a time.
The space occupied by a data set on a single volume of several must be
processed as though it were a separate data set from the space occupied by
the same data set on any other volume. If a multivolume data set is
located using the system catalog, the first volume is processed.
2. A load module can be processed as such only if it contains ESD data. In
general, all load modules contain ESD data except those flagged 'not
editable' upon user request by the linkage-editor.
Resulting Output:
■ When execution terminates, the active AWS contains the processed
subcommands interspersed with output resulting from the processing of
those subcommands.
Execution Recommendation:
■ ZAP-B should be used instead of ZAP. If an error occurs and:
ZAP was entered Processing terminates. A message is written both
at the end of the active AWS and to the terminal.
(The message written to the active AWS follows
the subcommand that contained the error.)
ZAP-B was entered Processing continues. Subsequent subcommands
not related to the error are executed. (A message is
written to the active AWS and follows the
subcommand that contained the error. If multiple
errors are encountered, a message follows each
bypassed subcommand.)
Entering Subcommands and Their Operands:

■ ZAP subcommands may begin in or after the first position of a line and
may not extend beyond column 71. With the exception of SYSLIB, no
subcommand may be continued from one line to another.
■ Hexadecimal operands must consist of an even number of digits. A single
comma may follow an even number of digits, but no hexadecimal operand
may begin or end with a comma or contain two consecutive commas.
■ With the exception of strings enclosed in apostrophes, the subcommands
and their operands may be entered in either upper- or lowercase.
■ Comments may follow the last operand on any line, provided that they are
separated from the last operand on the line by at least one space, and that
the syntax of the subcommand coded on that line is such that there is no
confusion about whether the comment is a comment or an operand.

1.200 ZAP
ZAP Subcommand Categories:

■ While the descriptions of the ZAP subcommands are presented in
alphabetical order on the following pages, they can be divided into the
following three categories:
Data Set Processing Dump Facility Data Set Modification

And Definition
SYSLIB ABSDUMP BASE
DUMP CCHHR
RELDUMP IDRDATA
NAME
REP
SETSSI
TTR
VERIFY
1.200.3 ZAP (* Subcommand)

Annotates the subcommand stream.
1.200.3.1 Syntax
ZAP Command (* Subcommand)

────string───────────────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
string Text that is to accompany the subcommand stream.
1.200.3.2 Note
■ The * may appear anywhere among the other subcommands except

between lines of a continued SYSLIB subcommand.
1.200.4 ZAP (ABSDUMP Subcommand)

Requests the dumping of data by absolute record address.
1.200.4.1 Syntax

1.200 ZAP
ZAP Command (ABSDUMP Subcommand)

──ABSDUMP──┬───┬──┬─ALL──────────────────────────────────┬────
├─E─┤ ├─dsnmem───────────────────────────────┤
├─M─┤ ├─cchhr1 cchhr2────────────────────────┤
└─T─┘ ├─cchhr3 FROM offset1─┬─────────────┬──┤
│ └─ TO offset2─┘ │
└─cchhr3 TO offset2─┬───────────────┬──┘
└─ FROM offset1─┘
Operand Description
E Dumps data in hexadecimal notation and EBCDIC.
M Dumps data in hexadecimal notation with translation to assembler
mnemonics.
T Dumps data in hexadecimal notation and EBCDIC with translation
to assembler mnemonics.
Note: If neither E, M or T are specified, the data is dumped in
hexadecimal notation only.
ALL Dumps entire data set. If the data set is sequential, partitioned or
direct, dumping stops when the end of the used portion of the
space allocated to the data set is reached. If the end of the used
portion of the space cannot be identified, all space allocated to the
data set is dumped.
dsnmem Name of the partitioned data set member whose records are to be
dumped.
cchhr1
cchhr2 First (cchhr1) and last (cchhr2) absolute record addresses of a range
of records to be dumped. Each address may be a maximum of 10
hexadecimal digits in length; an even number of leading zeros may
be omitted.
There need not be a record at the address specified by cchhr1, or at
the address specified by cchhr2. If there are no records within the
specified range, no dump output is written.
To dump a single record, code cchhr2 equal to cchhr1.
cchhr2 must specify a record address that is at least as close to the
logical end of the data set as that specified by cchhr1; if the data set
occupies several extents on a volume, the address specified by
cchhr2 may be lower than that specified by cchhr1.
cchhr3 Absolute address of a record of which a specified portion is to be
dumped. The address may be a maximum of 10 hexadecimal digits
in length; an even number of leading zeros may be omitted.
offset1 Offset from the start of the specified record at which the dumping
is to begin. Specify as 2 or 4 hexadecimal digits.

1.200 ZAP
offset2 Offset from the start of the specified record at which dumping is to
terminate. Specify as 2 or 4 hexadecimal digits.
1.200.4.2 Note
■ If the record-number portion of an absolute record address is coded as

zero, a record number of one is substituted for all purposes except
transcription of the subcommand to the active AWS.
1.200.5 ZAP (BASE Subcommand)

Defines a displacement to be subtracted from the offset specified in each
subsequent VERIFY or REP subcommand that is related to the previous
NAME, CCHHR, or TTR subcommand.
1.200.5.1 Syntax
ZAP Command (BASE Subcommand)

──BASE──offset────────────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
offset 2, 4, or 6 hexadecimal digits that are to be subtracted from the
offset operand of each subsequent VERIFY or REP subcommand to
yield the true offset of the data to be verified or replaced.
1.200.5.2 Notes
The displacement corresponds to:

1. The first byte of the control section identified by the preceding NAME
subcommand, or
2. The first byte of the record identified by the preceding CCHHR or TTR
subcommand.
1.200.6 ZAP (CCHHR Subcommand)

Selects a record for processing by its absolute address.
1.200.6.1 Syntax
ZAP Command (CCHHR Subcommand)

──CCHHR─┬───┬───cchhr─────────────────────────────────────────
└─F─┘

1.200 ZAP
Operand Description
F If specified and there is no record at the designated address but
there is a record at an address closer to the logical end of the data
set, the first such record found is processed. If omitted and there is
no record at the designated address, an error message is written to
the active AWS.
cchhr Absolute record address of the record to be processed. Specify as 10
hexadecimal digits; an even number of leading zeros may be
omitted.
1.200.6.2 Note
■ If the record-number portion of the absolute record address is coded as

zero, a record number of one is substituted for all purposes except
transcription of the subcommand to the active AWS.
1.200.7 ZAP (DUMP Subcommand)

Requests dumping of a single or every control section of a load module.
1.200.7.1 Syntax
ZAP Command (DUMP Subcommand)

──DUMP──┬───┬──dsnmem──────────────────────────────────────────
├─E─┤
├─M─┤
└─T─┘
──┬─ALL─────────────────────────────────────────┬──────────────
└─┬─────────────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─csect─┬──────────────────────────────┬──┘
├─FROM offset1──┬────────────┬─┤
│ └─TO offset2─┘ │
└─TO offset2──┬──────────────┬─┘
└─FROM offset1─┘
Operand Description
mnemonics.
Note: If neither E, M, or T are specified, the data is dumped in
dsnmem Name of the load module to be dumped.
ALL Dumps all control sections within the load module.

1.200 ZAP
csect Name of the control section that is to be dumped.

offset1 Offset from the start of the specified control section at which
dumping is to begin. Specify as 2, 4, or 6 hexadecimal digits.
offset2 Offset from the start of the specified control section at which
dumping is to terminate. Specify as 2, 4, or 6 hexadecimal digits.
1.200.7.2 Note
■ If neither a control section name nor ALL is specified after the load
module name, the first control section of the load module is dumped ( the
control section that is normally loaded at the lowest-numbered storage
address).
1.200.8 ZAP (IDRDATA Subcommand)

Specifies IDR data.
1.200.8.1 Syntax
ZAP Command (IDRDATA Command)

──IDRDATA──string─────────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
string 1 to 8 characters of identifying text.
1.200.8.2 Notes
■ If more than eight characters are coded, only the first eight are used.
■ The text is placed in a superzap csect identification record entry to note the
fact that the control section and load module were updated.
The entry is made if any REP subcommands that follow a preceding
NAME subcommand are successfully processed, regardless of whether
IDRUPDT=ALWAYS or IDRUPDT=DEMAND was specified in the SYSLIB
subcommand.
■ The IDRDATA subcommand is ignored if either of the following
conditions are met:
1. The load module defined by the preceding NAME subcommand has
no available space in its superzap csect identification records, or
2. The IDRDATA subcommand is preceded by another IDRDATA
subcommand that follows the preceding NAME subcommand.

1.200 ZAP
1.200.9 ZAP (NAME Subcommand)

Identifies the control section of a load module to be processed by subsequent
BASE, VERIFY, REP, SETSSI, or IDRDATA subcommands.
1.200.9.1 Syntax
ZAP Command (NAME Subcommand)

──NAME──dsnmem──┬───────┬─────────────────────────────────────
└─csect─┘
Operand Description
dsnmem Name of the load module to be processed.
csect Name of the control section that is to be processed. If omitted, the
first control section of the load module is processed (the control
section that is normally loaded at the lowest-1 numbered storage
address).
1.200.9.2 Notes
■ If a load module has one or more aliases and is capable of being referred
to by more than one member name, the member name coded in the NAME
subcommand determines in which of the directory entries that point to the
load module, system status information is to be updated. The update
occurs either when requested by means of a SETSSI subcommand or
automatically after the replacement of load-module text if the SSI=FLAG
option of the SYSLIB subcommand is in effect.
1.200.10 ZAP (RELDUMP Subcommand)

Requests dumping of data by relative track and record address.
1.200.10.1 Syntax
ZAP Command (RELDUMP Subcommand)

──RELDUMP──┬───┬──┬─ALL───────────────────────────────┬───────
├─E─┤ ├─dsnmem────────────────────────────┤
├─M─┤ ├─ttr1 ttr2─────────────────────────┤
└─T─┘ ├─ttr3 FROM offset1──┬────────────┬─┤
│ └─TO offset2─┘ │
└─ttr3 TO offset2──┬──────────────┬─┘
└─FROM offset1─┘
Operand Description

1.200 ZAP

mnemonics.
Note: If neither E, M, or T are specified, the data is dumped in
ALL Dumps entire data set. If the data set is sequential, partitioned or
direct, dumping ends when the end of the used portion of the space
allocated to the data set is reached. If the end of the used portion of
the space cannot be identified, all space allocated to the data set is
dumped.
dsnmem Name of the partitioned data set member whose records are to be
dumped.
ttr1 ttr2 First (ttr1) and last (ttr2) relative track and addresses of a range of
records to be dumped. The addresses can be specified as 2, 4 or 6
hexadecimal digits.
There need not be a record at the address specified by ttr1, nor at
the address specified by ttr2. If, however, there are no records
within the specified range, no dump output is written.
To dump a single record, code ttr2 equal to ttr1.
ttr3 Relative track and record address of a record of which a specified
portion is to be dumped. Specify as 2, 4, or 6 hexadecimal digits.
begin. Specify as 2 or 4 hexadecimal digits.
terminate. Specify as 2 or 4 hexadecimal digits.
1.200.10.2 Note
■ If the record-number portion of a relative track and record address is

coded as zero, a record number of one is substituted for all purposes
except transcription of the subcommand to the active AWS.
1.200.11 ZAP (REP Subcommand)

Replaces data at a specified location within a previously selected control
section or record.

1.200 ZAP
1.200.11.1 Syntax
ZAP Command (REP Subcommand)

──REP──offset──string─────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
offset Displacement from the beginning of the control section or record of
the data to be replaced. Specify as 2, 4, or 6 hexadecimal digits.
string Data that is to be placed at the specified offset. The data must be
coded in hexadecimal notation. The number of bytes of data
replaced is the number of bytes represented by this operand.
1.200.11.2 Note
■ The control section must have been previously defined by a NAME

subcommand or the record by a CCHHR or TTR subcommand.
1.200.12 ZAP (SETSSI Subcommand)

Updates the SSI field in the directory entry for the previously specified load
module.
1.200.12.1 Syntax
ZAP Command (SETSSI Subcommand)

──CCHHR──string───────────────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
string System status information to be recorded in the directory entry,
specified as 8 hexadecimal digits.
1.200.12.2 Note
■ SETSSI replaces the system status information contained in the directory

entry for the member whose name was specified in the preceding NAME
subcommand.

1.200 ZAP
1.200.13 ZAP (SYSLIB Subcommand)

Defines the data set to be processed and selects processing options.
1.200.13.1 Syntax
ZAP Command (SYSLIB Subcommand)

──SYSLIB──DSNAME=dsn──┬─────────────────────────┬──────────────
└─VOLume=─┬──────┬─string─┘
└─SER=─┘
──┬────────────────┬──┬─────────────────┬───────────────────────
│ ┌─OLD─┐ │ │ ┌─FLAG──┐ │
└─DISP=─┴─SHR─┴──┘ └─SSI=─┴─LEAVE─┴──┘
──┬──────────────────────┬──┬──────────────────────┬────────────
│ ┌─ALWAYS─┐ │ │ ┌─NOGO───┐ │
└─IDRUPDT=─┴─DEMAND─┴──┘ └─IDRFULL=─┴─IGNORE─┴──┘
──┬────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─TRKSIZE─┐ │
└─BUFL=─┴─BLKSIZE─┴──┘
Operand Description
DSNAME= Name of the data set to be processed. The data set name
specified must not include a member name.
VOLUME= Serial number of the volume containing the data set to be
processed. This operand is required if the data set is not
cataloged or if a portion of a multivolume data set other than
that which resides on the first volume is to be processed.
DISP= Disposition of the data set if it is to be updated. Specify as
either:
OLD Exclusive control of the data set is requested. ZAP is
to terminate if it cannot get exclusive control
(default).
SHR Shared control of the data set is requested.
SSI= In the absence of a SETSSI subcommand, setting of the 'local
fix' flag in the system status information contained in the
directory entry. Specify as either:
FLAG Set 'local fix' flag (default).
LEAVE Do not alter system status information except as
specified in a SETSSI subcommand.
IDRUPDT= In the absence of an IDRDATA subcommand, recording of
historic information about the update in a superzap csect
identification record. Specify as either:

1.200 ZAP
ALWAYS Place an entry in one of the superzap csect

identification records (default).
DEMAND Place an entry in a superzap csect identification
record only if explicitly requested.
IDRFULL= Updating of a load module when all the superzap csect
identification records that it contains have already been filled
with data. Specify as either:
NOGO REP subcommands are to be rejected (default).
IGNORE REP subcommands are to be executed.
BUFL= Algorithm that is to be used for determining the size of the
data set input and output buffer. Specify as either:
TRKSIZE Allocate a buffer large enough to hold the largest
record that can fit on one track of the volume on
which the data set resides (default).
BUFL= BLKSIZE Allocate a buffer large enough to hold
the largest block of data that is expected to be
found in the data set (based on the data set
organization and block size).
1.200.13.2 Notes
■ One SYSLIB subcommand can be specified during a single execution of

ZAP. It must precede all other subcommands except for comments.
To continue a SYSLIB subcommand, end each line except the last with a
comma followed by spaces through column 72, and continue anywhere on
the next line.
DSNAME= Operand Considerations:
■ The data set name must be enclosed in apostrophes under any of the
following conditions:
1. It contains special characters other than periods and the left braces (<).
2. It contains more than eight consecutive alphanumeric characters.
3. It begins with a numeric character.
4. It contains a period followed by a period or by a numeric character.
■ If the data set name contains embedded apostrophes, each must be
represented by two consecutive apostrophes. If the data set name contains
lowercase characters, they are folded to uppercase if the name is not
enclosed in apostrophes.
■ If character string FORMAT4.DSCB is coded as the data set name (in either
uppercase or lowercase), and if this string is not enclosed in apostrophes,
and if a volume serial number is specified by means of the VOLUME
operand of SYSLIB, the volume table of contents of the specified volume is
processed.

1.200 ZAP
VOLUME= Operand Considerations:
If the volume serial number contains:

■ Special characters other than hyphens - it must be enclosed in apostrophes.
■ Embedded apostrophes - each embedded apostrophe must be represented
by two consecutive apostrophes.
■ Lowercase characters - they are folded to uppercase unless the volume
serial number is enclosed in apostrophes.
DISP= Operand Considerations:

■ DISP= has no effect if there are no REP or SETSSI subcommands to be
processed or if the SYSLIB data set is a volume table of contents. Nor does
DISP= have any effect if another task in the system has exclusive control of
the data set; the data set is unavailable.
SETSSI= Operand Considerations:

■ When SETSSI=FLAG is specified, the 'local fix' flag is set in the directory
entry for a load module only when all of the following conditions are met:
1. The load module is updated by means of a NAME subcommand and
one or more REP subcommands.
2. There is system status information in the directory entry for the load
module.
3. The system status information is not updated by means of a SETSSI
subcommand following the NAME subcommand.
IDRUPDT= Operand Considerations:

■ When IDRUPDT=ALWAYS is specified and there is no IDRDATA
subcommand, an entry is placed in one of the superzap csect identification
records of a load module, noting the fact that the load module was
updated, only if the following conditions are met:
1. The load module is updated by means of a NAME subcommand and
one or more REP subcommands.
2. The load module contains one or more superzap csect identification
records that have not already been completely filled with data.
IDRFULL= Operand Considerations:

■ IDRFULL=NOGO does not restrict the processing of any load module that
contains no superzap csect identification records. It does not prevent the
updating of system status information. It does, however, prevent the
replacement of text in a load module when all of the load module's
superzap csect identification records are full, even if no simultaneous
recording of IDR data is requested.

1.200 ZAP
■ If IDRFULL=IGNORE is specified and all of a load module's superzap

csect identification records are full, subsequent IDRDATA subcommands
are bypassed. (A message is written to the active AWS immediately
following each subcommand that it ignored and processing continues.)
1.200.14 ZAP (TTR Subcommand)

Selects a record for processing by its relative address.
ZAP Command (TTR Subcommand)

──TTR─┬───┬───ttr─────────────────────────────────────────────
└─F─┘
Operand Description
F If specified and there is no record at the designated address but
there is a record at an address closer to the logical end of the data
set, the first such record found is processed. If omitted and there is
no record at the designated address, an error message is written to
the active AWS.
ttr Relative track and record address of the record to be processed.
Specify as 2, 4, or 6 hexadecimal digits.
1.200.14.1 Note
■ If the record-number portion of the relative track and record address is

coded as zero, a record number of one is substituted for all purposes
except transcription of the subcommand to the active AWS.
1.200.15 ZAP (VERIFY Subcommand)

Requests confirmation of the presence of expected data at a specified location
within a previously selected control section or record.
1.200.15.1 Syntax
ZAP Command (VERIFY Subcommand)

──VERIFY──offset──string──────────────────────────────────────
Operand Description
offset Displacement from the beginning of the control section or record of
the data to be verified. Specify as 2, 4, or 6 hexadecimal digits.
string Expected value of the data to be verified, coded in hexadecimal
notation. The number of bytes of data verified is the number of
bytes represented by this operand.

1.200 ZAP
1.200.15.2 Note
■ The control section must have been previously defined by a NAME

subcommand or the record by a CCHHR or TTR subcommand.

Appendix A. Extended Monitor Command Syntax
All Monitor commands can be invoked by the RUN command. While RUN is
never required, it does allow the syntax of specific commands to be extended.
In most cases, this extension permits the Monitor command to receive input
from, or direct output to, an alternate location.
This Appendix presents the syntax of those Monitor commands that use the
extended facilities provided by the RUN command.
Appendix A. Extended Monitor Command Syntax A-1

A.1 AMS
A.1 AMS
AMS Command
──RUN AMS──┬─────────────┬────────────────────────────────────
└─-A─┬─────┬──┘
└─mem─┘
Operand Description
Unless changed by site management, with no operands, input to
IDCAMS is read from the terminal and output is written to the
terminal.
-A Causes input to be read from the AWS. Output is directed to the
terminal.
-A mem Causes input to be read from the designated library member.
Output is directed to the terminal.
A.1.1 Example
RUN AMS-A AMSINPUT
Causes the input to IDCAMS to be read from the library member named
AMSINPUT.
A-2 Command Reference Guide

A.2 COB
A.2 COB
COB Command
──RUN COB──┬────────┬──┬────┬──┬─────┬──┬──────────┬──────────
└─string─┘ └─-p─┘ └─mem─┘ └─p─┬───┬──┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
With no operands, assumes the program is in the active AWS and
checks it against the highest level of COBOL.
string Level of COBOL used when checking the source. (See the COB
command description for additional information.)
-p Division of the program to be checked. (See the COB command
description for additional information.)
mem Name of the library member containing the program to be checked.
p q Starting and ending line numbers of the program to be checked. If
only one number is specified, the program is checked from that line
number to the end.
A.2.1 Example
RUN COB 500 1200
Causes the contents of lines 500 through 1200 of the active AWS to be syntax
checked.

A.3 EXPORT
A.3 EXPORT
EXPORT Command
──RUN EXPort──┬─────────────┬─────────────────────────────────
├─-A─┬─────┬──┤
│ └─mem─┘ │
└─/string/────┘
Operand Description
With no operand, displays a prompt for operands.
-A Causes operands to be read from the active AWS.
-A mem Causes operands to be read from the designated library member.
string Operands of the command. The operands must be bound by
delimiters.

A.4 IMPORT
A.4 IMPORT
IMPORT Command
──RUN IMPort──┬─────────────┬─────────────────────────────────
├─-A─┬─────┬──┤
│ └─mem─┘ │
└─/string/────┘
Operand Description
With no operand, displays a prompt for operands.
-A Causes input to be read from the active AWS.
-A mem Causes input to be read from the designated library member.
string Operands of the command. The operands must be bound by
delimiters.
A.4.1 Example
IMPORT-A OPERAND
Causes the member named OPERAND to be read for command input.

A.5 JCK
A.5 JCK
JCK Command
┌─,─────────┐
┬─────────┬┴───────────────
──RUN JCK──┬───────────────────┬───
└─mem─┬──────────┬──┘ └─charstr─┘
└─p─┬───┬──┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, syntax checks the contents of the active AWS.
mem Name of the library member that contains the JCL to be checked.
p q Number of the first and last line within the library member that is
to be checked.
charstr One or more of the Unicenter CA-JCLCheck options.

A.6 LOOK
A.6 LOOK
LOOK Command
──RUN LOOk──┬────┬──┬───────────────────┬─────────────────────
└─-─┘ └─mem─┬──────────┬──┘
└─p─┬───┬──┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, displays a prompt for LOOK commands.
-* Causes the commands in the designated library member to be
executed. The member can be named before or with the command
containing -*.
mem Name of the library member containing the LOOK commands.
p q Starting and ending line number within the library member. If only
one number is specified, the member is read from that line to the
end.
A.6.1 Example
LOOK-* WIDGET 100 500
Causes lines 100 through 500 of the member named WIDGET to be read for
LOOK commands.

A.7 PLI
A.7 PLI
AMS Command
──RUN PLI──┬────────┬──┬───────────────────────────┬──────────
└─string─┘ └─-A─┬─────┬──┬──────────┬──┘
└─mem─┘ └─p─┬───┬──┘
└─q─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, assumes the PL/I program is in the active AWS
and checks it against the PL/I checkout and optimizing compiler
Version 1, Release 3.
string Level of PL/I to be checked. (See the PLI command description for
-A Causes the contents of the active AWS to be syntax checked.
-A mem Causes the contents of the named library member to be syntax
checked.
p q Starting and ending line numbers of the program to be checked. If
only one number is specified, the program is checked from that line
number to the end.

A.8 ZAP
A.8 ZAP
ZAP Command
──RUN ZAP──┬────┬──┬─────┬────────────────────────────────────
└─-B─┘ └─mem─┘
Operand Description
With no operand, reads subcommands from the active AWS. If an
error is detected, execution terminates.
-B Causes input to be read from the active AWS. If an error occurs,
execution continues; only those subcommands that are not related
to the error are processed.
mem Name of the library member containing subcommands to be used
as input.

A.8 ZAP

Index
+P Line Command 1-470

Special Characters < (Shift) Line Command 1-555—1-557
- (Minus Sign) << (Shift) Line Command 1-555—1-557
To Reexecute Last Executed <B (Shift) Line Command 1-555—1-557
Command/Program 1-6 <T (Shift) Line Command 1-555—1-557
-INC Statement Expansion =n
Enable/Disable 1-533, 1-534 Add, Replace, or Delete Data in AWS by Line
-P Line Command 1-470 Number 1-7
:C (To Copy Screen) > (Shift) Line Command 1-558, 1-559
Description 1-9 > Line Command 1-557
:E (To End Split Screen) >> (Shift) Line Command 1-558, 1-559
Description 1-9 >> Line Command 1-557
:L (To Lock Screen) >B (Shift) Line Command 1-557—1-559
Description 1-9 >T (Shift) Line Command 1-557—1-559
:P (To Print Screen)
Description 1-9
:S (To Split Screen) A
Description 1-9 ACCESS= (AllFusion CA-Panvalet)
:U (To Suspend ETSO) EXPORT 1-204
Description 1-9 IMPORT 1-252
:W (To Swap Split Screens) ACTIVE Subcommand of DISPLAY 1-153
Description 1-9 AJOB Command
( (Shift) Line Command 1-555—1-557 Description 1-11
(( (Shift) Line Command 1-555—1-557 Alias
(B (Shift) Line Command 1-556, 1-557 For Data Set 1-118
(T (Shift) Line Command 1-555—1-557 For PDS Member 1-119
) (Shift) Line Command 1-557—1-559 AllFusion CA-Panvalet
)) (Shift) Line Command 1-557—1-559 EXPORT Command
)B (Shift) Line Command 1-557—1-559 Syntax 1-204—1-208
)T (Shift) Line Command 1-557—1-559 IMPORT Member 1-251
* (Asterisk) ALLOCATE Command
Deferring Command Execution 1-4 Advantage CA-Roscoe-Managed Files 1-32
Representing Data Sets
Line at Which Pointer is Positioned 1-4 Description 1-15
Name of Last FETCHed, SAVEd, UPDATEd With ETSO 1-22
Member 1-4 Without ETSO 1-16
* Line Command 1-469—1-470 Allocating Files
+ (Plus Sign) Advantage CA-Roscoe-Managed Files 1-32
To Redisplay Executed Command/Program 1-2 Data Sets
Description 1-15
With ETSO 1-22
Index X-1
Allocating Files (continued) AWS (continued)
Data Sets (continued) Change Line Contents (continued)
Without ETSO 1-16 Edit String, Using Primary Command 1-171
ALTER Command Edit Trace 1-523, 1-524
Change Suffix Line 1-585
AWS Attributes 1-35, 1-36 Copy
Job Output Characteristics 1-35, 1-38 From Data Set, Job, or Member (Containing
Member Attribute(s) 1-35, 1-40 String) 1-97
Member Description 1-35, 1-40 From Data Set, Job, or Member (Not
Description 1-35 Containing String) 1-105
Alternate Print Screen 1-410 From Other Split Screen (All or Range) 1-630
AMS Command From Other Split Screen (Lines Containing
Extended Syntax A-2 String) 1-634—1-639
Syntax 1-42 From Other Split Screen (Lines Not Containing
Arithmetic symbols (syntax diagrams) xli String) 1-641—1-646
ATTACH Command Screen, Using :C Command 1-9
AWS 1-45 Within, Using Primary Command 1-89
Data Set Object 1-50 Creating 1-113
Description 1-44 Data Protection
Job Output 1-60 Establish 1-500
Library Member/List 1-64 Delete
Volume/VTOC Selection List 1-71 All lines 1-125
Attach Data Lines Containing String, Line
Job Output 1-60 Commands 1-131
With Data Set Facility Lines Containing String, Primary
Using ATTACH DSN 1-50 Command 1-135
Using ATTACH VOL 1-71 Lines Not Containing String, Line
With Library Facility Commands 1-131
Using ATTACH LIB 1-64 Lines Not Containing String, Primary
Attaching Data Command 1-139
AWS 1-45 Range of Lines, Line Commands 1-131
With Library Facility Range of Lines, Primary Command 1-125
Via Menu 1-305 Detaching 1-147
Without Pausing 1-495, 1-496 Discarding
AWS Explicit 1-150
=n Display Format, Set 1-508, 1-509, 1-510, 1-511,
Add, Replace, or Delete Data by Line 1-512
Number 1-7 Line Numbers
Add Lines Control Display of 1-508, 1-509, 1-510, 1-511,
Insert, Using Line Commands 1-285 1-512
Insert, Using Primary Command 1-282 Locate/Display Data
Via Power Typing, Using Primary All Occurrences, Line Command 1-267
Command 1-282 All Occurrences, Primary Command 1-260,
Alter Attributes 1-36 1-474—1-478
Attaching 1-45 First Occurrence, Line Command 1-229
Bring Member Into AWS 1-209 First Occurrence, Primary Command 1-221
Change Line Contents Last Occurrence, Line Commands 1-302
Edit Character, Using Line Last Occurrence, Primary Command 1-293
Commands 1-651—1-653 Next Occurrence, Line Commands 1-339
Edit Character, Using Primary Next Occurrence, Primary Command 1-330
Command 1-648—1-649 Non-Matching Occurrences, Line
Edit String, Using Line Commands 1-176 Command 1-190
X-2 Command Reference Guide

AWS (continued) CA-eMAIL+, Invoking Interface 1-319
Locate/Display Data (continued) CALL Command 1-79
Non-Matching Occurrences, Primary Cancel
Command 1-184 Application Under ETSO 1-81
Non-Modifiable 1-307 Print Request 1-416
Prior Occurrence, Line Commands 1-402 CANCEL Command (ETSO) 1-81
Prior Occurrence, Primary Command 1-393 Capitalize Text
Move Lines Within Initial Cap
Using Line Commands 1-327 Using Line Commands 1-612, 1-613
Using Primary Command 1-325 Using Primary Command 1-598, 1-599
Pointer Positioning To Uppercase
Set to First Line 1-617 Using Primary Command 1-622, 1-623
Set To First Line Containing String 1-217 Uppercase All
Specific Line 1-381 Using Line Commands 1-626, 1-627
Prefix Lines with String CATALOG Command 1-82
Primary Command 1-390 Catalog Data Sets
Print Contents of 1-405—1-415 Using CATALOG Command 1-82
Renaming 1-446 Catalog Selection List
Renumber Contents of 1-451 Attaching
With FETCH 1-209 Directly 1-50
Replace Contents Between Screens 1-645
With Unattached Library Member 1-209 Copy To AWS
Save Contents of 1-462, 1-464 See Copy Lines 1-97
Select for Display 1-479, 1-480, 1-481 CB Line Command 1-94
Shift Contents CC Line Command 1-94
Left, Using Primary Command 1-317 CCR Line Command 1-94
Right, Using Primary Command 1-458 CDSN command 1-84
Sort Contents Of 1-561, 1-562 CHAIN Command 1-85
Using ORDER Command 1-360 Change
Status Information 1-565, 1-566, 1-567, 1-568, Job Output Characteristics
1-569 Using STATUS JOB 1-571, 1-572
Submit Contents of 1-582—1-584 Character Set
AWS Attributes Language
.Display/Change 1-569 Defining 1-503
Display/Change 1-565 Display/Change, Using STATUS
AWS 1-565—1-569
Display/Change, Using STATUS
B SESSION 1-574—1-579
B- Line Command 1-471, 1-472 Translation Mode
Between Screens Display/Change, Using STATUS AWS 1-565
See Copy lines Display/Change, Using STATUS
BOTTOM Command 1-75 DISPLAY 1-570
BOUNDS Line Command 1-76 Character Translation
BREAK Command 1-78 When Entering/Editing Data
Bring Member Into AWS Defining 1-534
FETCH 1-209 Display/Change, Using STATUS AWS 1-565
Display/Change, Using STATUS
C CLASS
DISPLAY 1-570
C Line Command 1-94
Printing 1-414
Index X-3
COB Command CT Line Command 1-94
Extended Syntax A-3 Cursor Positioning
Column Boundaries Change 1-506, 1-507
Display/Change
Using STATUS AWS 1-565—1-569
Using STATUS DISPLAY 1-570 D
Comma D Line Command 1-131
repeat symbol, use in xliv Data Display Mode
Command Area Display/Change
Change Size of 1-504 With STATUS AWS 1-565—1-569
Command Character Set With STATUS DISPLAY 1-570, 1-571
Description xxxviii Setting 1-508—1-512
Command Delimiter Data Protection Attribute, AWS
Change Display/Change 1-565—1-569
For PF/PA Keys 1-538 Data Set Facility
For Primary Commands 1-493, 1-494 Attaching
Delimiter 1-493, 1-494 Menu 1-168
Command Execution Hierarchy Selection List (Via Menu) 1-168
Description xxxix Using ATTACH DSN 1-50
Command Types Using ATTACH VOL 1-71
Description xl Using SELECT 1-482, 1-483
COMPRESS Command 1-87 Locate/Display Data
Compressing Data Sets 1-87 All Occurrences 1-260
CONTROL= (AllFusion CA-Panvalet) First Occurrence 1-221
EXPORT 1-205 Last Occurrence 1-293
IMPORT 1-252 Next Occurrence 1-330
COPY Command 1-89 Prior Occurrence 1-393
Copy Line Commands 1-94 Printing 1-405—1-415
Copy lines 1-630 Data Sets
Copy Screen Allocating
Using :C Description 1-15
Description 1-9 With ETSO 1-22
Copying Data Without ETSO 1-16
Between Screens Attaching
All or Range 1-630 Menu 1-168
Lines Containing String 1-636, 1-637, 1-638, Using ATTACH DSN 1-50
1-639 Between Screens 1-645
Lines Not Containing String 1-641, 1-642, Cancel Edit
1-643, 1-644, 1-645, 1-646 Data Saved 1-473
From Data Set, Job, or Member No Data Saved 1-84
All or Range 1-89 Cataloging 1-82
Containing String 1-97 Compressing 1-87
Not Containing String 1-105 Copying
Within AWS From AWS 1-196
Using Line Commands 1-94 Define Alias
COPYS Command 1-97 Data Set 1-118
COPYX Command 1-105 PDS Member 1-119
CR Line Command 1-94 Define GDG 1-121
Create AWS 1-113 Deleting
CREATE Command 1-113 Syntax 1-127
Detaching 1-147

Data Sets (continued) Deleting (continued)
Display Edit Information 1-437 Data Set
Displaying All 1-127
Information About 1-271 Single Member/Module 1-127
Set Format 1-508—1-512 Library Member 1-130
Editing 1-179 Delimiters
Locate/Display Data syntax diagrams, use in xlii
All Occurrences 1-260 Destination Line Commands
First Occurrence 1-221 With Copy/Move 1-143
Last Occurrence 1-293 DETACH Command 1-147
Next Occurrence 1-330 DEVICES Subcommand of Display 1-155
Prior Occurrence 1-393 DISCARD Command 1-150
Name Lines Discarding AWS
Display 1-573, 1-574 Explicitly 1-150
Position Display DISPLAY Command
To Named Line 1-383 Description 1-151
To Specific Line 1-383 Subcommands
Printing 1-405—1-415 ACTIVE 1-153
Releasing AWS 1-154
Allocated Under ETSO 1-232 DEVICES 1-155
Uncataloging 1-621 END 1-156
Datadictionary, Invoking Interface 1-116 HELP 1-157
Date Format INIT 1-158
Changing 1-507 JOB 1-159
DB Line Command 1-131 MASK 1-160
DD Line Command 1-131 NAME 1-161
DDO Command 1-116 NOAWS 1-162
Default values (syntax diagrams) xlv QUEUE 1-163
Deferring Command Execution Display Margins
* (Asterisk Command) 1-4 Display/Change
DEFINE Command 1-117 Using STATUS AWS 1-565, 1-566, 1-567,
Create Data Set Alias 1-118 1-568, 1-569
Create GDG 1-121 Using STATUS DISPLAY 1-570, 1-571
Create Member Alias 1-119 Displaying
Defining Active Jobs 1-153
Paper Size 1-414 AWS
DELETE Command 1-124 Via STATUS AWS Display 1-565—1-569
AWS 1-125 Data Set Edit Information 1-437
Data Set, Member, Module 1-127 Display Subcommands 1-157
Library Member 1-130 Executed Commands
Delete Line Commands 1-131 List of 1-569
DELETES Command 1-135 Information About
DELETEX Command 1-139 AWS 1-565—1-569
Deleting Locate/Display Data 1-153
AWS Contents Name of
All Lines 1-125 Last Copied Data Set 1-565—1-569
Lines Containing String, Primary Last FETCHed, SAVEd, UPDATEd
Command 1-135 Member 1-565, 1-569
Lines Not Containing String, Primary DIVERT Command 1-164
Command 1-139 DROP Command 1-167
Range of Lines, Primary Command 1-125
Index X-5
DS Line Command 1-131 ETSO Commands (continued)
DSB Line Command 1-131 DIVERT 1-164
DSN Command 1-168 FREE 1-232
DST Line Command 1-131 RESUME 1-457
DT Line Command 1-131 SET ESCAPE 1-526, 1-527
DU Line Command 1-131 EXCL Command 1-184
DX Line Command 1-131 EXCL Line Command 1-190
DXB Line Command 1-131 EXEC Command 1-193
DXT Line Command 1-131 Executing
See Invoking 1-193
EXPAND= (AllFusion CA-Panvalet)
E IMPORT 1-252
E Line Command 1-176 EXPORT Command
EB Line Command 1-176 AllFusion CA-Librarian Master File
EDIT command 1-171 Syntax 1-200, 1-203
Edit Data Set 1-179 AllFusion CA-Panvalet File
Edit Line Commands 1-176 Syntax 1-204, 1-208
Edit String Description 1-195
Change Extended Syntax A-4
Using Line Commands 1-176 MVS Data Set
Trace Edit Change Syntax 1-196
Modifiable 1-523, 1-524
Using Primary Command 1-171
Editing Data F
Character FETCH Command 1-209
Using Line Commands 1-651, 1-652, 1-653 FILL Command 1-212
Using Primary Command 1-648—1-649 FIND Command
EDSN command 1-179 Display Member Information 1-216
EE Line Command 1-176 Position AWS Pointer 1-217
End Data Set Edit FIRST Command
Data Saved 1-473 To Locate/Display Data 1-221
No Data Saved 1-84 To Position Within Job 1-227
END Subcommand FIRST Line Command 1-229
DISPLAY Command 1-156 FORMAT= (AllFusion CA-Panvalet)
ERASE EOF Key EXPORT 1-205
Controlling Extent of Deletion FREE Command 1-232
Display/Change 1-565—1-569
Establish 1-525, 1-526
ET Line Command 1-176 G
ETC Command 1-183 Generation Data Group, Define 1-121
ETC, Invoking Interface 1-183
ETSO
Allocating
H
HELP Command 1-234
Data Sets 1-22
HEX
QUERY ALLOCATE 1-438
Hexadecimal Display
QUERY CALL 1-439
Setting 1-508—1-512
QUERY DIVERT 1-440
Holding
ETSO Commands
Print Request 1-422
:U (Suspend Execution) 1-9
CALL 1-79
CANCEL 1-81

I Job Output (continued)
Copy to AWS
I Line Command 1-285 All or Range 1-89
IB Line Command 1-285 Lines Containing String 1-97
IDCAMS Lines Not Containing String 1-105
Executing Interactively 1-42 Deleting
IM Line Command 1-285 Using STATUS JOB 1-571, 1-572
IMPORT Command Detaching 1-147
AllFusion CA-Librarian Master File Displaying
Syntax 1-244, 1-250 Active Job Information 1-153
AllFusion CA-Panvalet Member Job Status Information 1-151
Syntax 1-251 Using JOB Subcommand 1-159
Description 1-236 Locate/Display Data
Extended Syntax A-5 All Occurrences 1-260
MVS Data Set First Occurrence 1-221
Syntax 1-237—1-243 Last Occurrence 1-293
INCL Command Next Occurrence 1-330
Line Command 1-267 Prior Occurrence 1-393
Primary Command 1-260 Positioning Display
INFO Command By File, Page, Line (To First) 1-227
Data Set 1-271 By File, Page, Line (To Last) 1-300
Library Member 1-276 By File, Page, Line (To Next) 1-337
Volume 1-278 By File, Page, Line (To Previous) 1-400
Initiators To Named Line 1-385
Display 1-158 To Specific Line 1-385
INPUT Command 1-282 Printing Files
Input Line Commands 1-285 PRINT 1-405—1-415
Insert Data In AWS STATUS JOB Display 1-571, 1-572
Add Lines Purge Job 1-436
Using Automatic Cursor Positioning 1-498 Purging Files
Using Automatic Line Insertion 1-499, 1-500 STATUS JOB Display 1-571, 1-572
Using Line Commands 1-285 Status of
Using Primary Command 1-282 Job 1-571, 1-572
By Splitting Line Jobs
Using Line Command 1-613, 1-614, 1-615 Attaching
Using Primary Command 1-600—1-609 Using AJOB 1-11
Via Power Typing
Using Line Command 1-606, 1-609
K
J Keywords (syntax diagrams) xli
JCK Command
Extended Syntax A-6 L
Syntax 1-288 LANGUAGE= (AllFusion CA-Panvalet)
JCL Syntax Checker EXPORT 1-205
JCK Command IMPORT 1-253
Syntax 1-288 LAST Command
Job Output To Locate/Display Data 1-293
Attaching 1-60 To Position Within Job 1-300
Change Characteristics LAST Line Command 1-302
ALTER Command 1-38
Using STATUS JOB 1-571, 1-572
Index X-7
LC Line Command 1-315 Library Facility (continued)
LCB Line Command 1-315 Attaching (continued)
LCC Line Command 1-315 Selection List 1-64
LCT Line Command 1-315 Using SELECT 1-484
LIBRARIAN Master File Detaching 1-147
Attaching Locate Data
Directly 1-50 First Occurrence 1-221
Using SELECT 1-482, 1-483 Last Occurrence 1-293
Between Screens 1-645 Next Occurrence 1-330
Copy Prior Occurrence 1-393
From AWS 1-200, 1-203 Printing 1-405—1-415
Copy To AWS Library Member
See Copy Lines 1-244 Access Attribute
Data Set Facility 1-50 Change Default 1-543
Locate/Display Data Attaching
All Occurrences 1-260 Using ATTACH LIB 1-64
First Occurrence 1-221 Via Selection List 1-305
Last Occurrence 1-293 Change Directly
Next Occurrence 1-330 ALTER Command 1-40
Prior Occurrence 1-393 Concatenate into AWS 1-85
Print 1-405—1-415 Copy Into AWS
LIBRARIAN Module All or Range 1-89
Attaching Lines Containing String 1-97
Directly 1-50 Lines Not Containing String 1-105
Using SELECT 1-482, 1-483 Deleting 1-130
Copy Detaching 1-147
From AWS 1-200, 1-203 Displaying
Copy To AWS Information About, Using FIND 1-216
See Copy Lines 1-244 Information About, Using INFO 1-276
Locate/Display Data Non-Modifiable 1-307
All Occurrences 1-260 Enable Expansion
First Occurrence 1-221 -INC Statements 1-533, 1-534
Last Occurrence 1-293 Place in AWS
Next Occurrence 1-330 FETCH Command 1-209
Prior Occurrence 1-393 Position Display
Print 1-405—1-415 Within 1-388
Select Display 1-482, 1-483 Printing 1-405—1-415
LIBRARIAN Selection List Save AWS Contents as 1-462, 1-464
Attaching Select Display 1-484
Directly 1-50 Submit for Execution 1-582, 1-583, 1-584
Using SELECT 1-482, 1-483 Update Contents 1-624, 1-625
Data Set Facility 1-50 Library Member Attributes
Locate/Display Data Establish/Change Access Default 1-543
All Occurrences 1-260 Line Commands
Print 1-405—1-415 Enable Use of 1-508—1-512
Select Display 1-482, 1-483 LIST Command 1-307
Selection List 1-50 Locate/Display Data
LIBRARY Command 1-305 All Occurrences
Library Facility Line Command 1-267
Attaching Modifiable Primary Command 1-260
Member 1-64 Primary Command 1-474—1-478
Member, via Menu 1-305

Locate/Display Data (continued) MESSAGE Command 1-324
Control Positioning Messages
Display/Change, Using STATUS Controlling Display
AWS 1-565—1-569 Advantage CA-Roscoe Messages
Display/Change, Using STATUS (Informational) 1-537, 1-538
DISPLAY 1-570, 1-571 Monitor Messages (Informational) 1-536,
First Occurrence 1-537
Line Command 1-229 SEND Messages (Received) 1-546
Primary Command 1-221 Send
In Job Output To Operator 1-324
First File/Page/Line 1-227 To Other Users 1-485, 1-486
Last File/Page/Line 1-300 Monitor Commands
Next File/Page/Line 1-337 Controlling Messages
Previous File/Page/Line 1-400 Informational 1-536, 1-537
Last Occurrence Redisplay Executed 1-2
Line Commands 1-302 Reexecuting 1-6
Primary Command 1-293 MOVE Command 1-325
Next Occurrence Move Line Commands 1-327
Line Commands 1-339 Moving Lines Within AWS
Primary Command 1-330 Using Line Commands 1-327
Non-Matching Occurrences Using Primary Command 1-325
Non-Modifiable 1-352
Prior Occurrence
Line Commands 1-402 N
Primary Command 1-393 NA Line Command 1-345
Lock Terminal Screen NAME Subcommand
Using SET TLOCK 1-552, 1-553 Of DISPLAY 1-161
LOOK Command 1-311 NB Line Command 1-345
Extended Syntax A-7 NC Line Command 1-345
LOWCASE Command 1-313 NEXT Command
Lowercase Data To Locate/Display Data 1-330
All Characters To Position Within Job 1-337
Using Line Commands 1-315 NEXT Line Command 1-339
Using Primary Command 1-313 NF Line Command 1-345
LSHIFT Command 1-317 NJ Line Command 1-345
NM Line Command 1-345
NOAWS Subcommand
M DISPLAY Command 1-162
MAIL Command 1-319 NOSEQ Command 1-342
Manipulate All NOTE Command 1-343
Lowercase All NOTE Line Commands 1-345
Using Line Commands 1-315 NOTE Names
Using Primary Command 1-313 Assign 1-343
MASK Display 1-573, 1-574
Line Command 1-320 Notification Messages
Subcommand of DISPLAY 1-160 Establish 1-542
Mask, Use NOTRACE Command 1-348
Define 1-320 NP Line Command 1-345
MERGE Command 1-322 NR Line Command 1-345
Merge Members Into AWS 1-322
Index X-9
O PREV Command
To Locate/Display Data 1-393
OFF Command 1-349 To Position Within Job 1-400
OFFON Command 1-351 PREV Line Command 1-402
OM Line Command 1-357 PRINT CANCEL Command 1-416
OMB Line Command 1-357 PRINT Command 1-405—1-415
OMIT Command 1-352 Operands 1-410
OMT Line Command 1-357 PRINT DEVICE Command 1-418—1-421
ORDER Command PRINT HOLD Command 1-422
Reorder Library Selection List 1-371 PRINT LOCATION Command 1-424—1-427
Reorder Records In AWS 1-360 PRINT RELEASE Command 1-428
ORDER DSN Command PRINT ROUTE Command 1-430
Reorder Library Selection List 1-363 PRINT STATUS Command 1-432—1-435
ORDER Line Command 1-376 Printing (At 328x/System Printer)
Overlay Line Commands Changing Printing (At 328x/System Printer)
With Mask 1-357 Location 1-414
Controlling
P Cancel Requests 1-416
Page/Request Separators
Panvalet Member
(INSEP/NOSEP) 1-412
Copy
Sequence Numbers (NUM/NONUM) 1-412
From AWS 1-204, 1-208
Top and Bottom Margins (TM/BM) 1-413
Parentheses
Controls
syntax diagrams, use in xlii
Hold Requests 1-422
Password
Release Requests 1-428
Changing User 1-379
Reroute Requests 1-430
PASSWORD Command 1-379
Current Screen (:P) 1-410
PDS Member
Data
Print 1-405, 1-415
Identify, Using :P 1-410
PDS Selection List
Identify, Using PRINT 1-405—1-415
Print 1-405, 1-415
Qualify 1-405—1-415
pg-start.(B (Shift) Line Command 1-555
Defining Paper Size 1-414
PGMR= (AllFusion CA-Panvalet)
Designating Site-Defined Class 1-414
IMPORT 1-253
Display Information About
PLI Command
Printers 1-418—1-421
Extended Syntax A-8
Printing Locations 1-424—1-427
POINT Command 1-380
Request Status 1-432—1-435
With AWS 1-381
Forcing Page Alignment (FPA) 1-413
With Data Set 1-383
Formatting Data (FORMAT) 1-412
With Job Output 1-385
Formatting Output (TYPE) 1-412
With Library Member 1-388
Identifying Data To Be Printed
Pointer Positioning
(AWS/DSN/JOB/LIB/SCREEN) 1-410
AWS
Receive Notification Messages 1-405—1-415
First Line 1-617
Scheduling a Print Request 1-409
Specific Line 1-381
Screen 1-9
In Job Output 1-385
Selecting Specific Line/Column Ranges
With Data Set 1-383
(p/q/COLS) 1-411
With Library Member 1-388
Specify
PREFIX Command 1-390
Class 1-409
Prefix Line in AWS 1-390
Destination 1-409

Printing Location Renaming (continued)
Changing Data Set 1-447
For Request 1-405—1-415 LIBRARIAN Module 1-447
For Session 1-541 Library Member 1-448
Printing Separator Pages PDS Member 1-447
Change Renumber AWS Contents 1-451
For Session 1-539 RENUMBER Command 1-451
Printing Sequence Numbers REPEAT Line Commands 1-454
Change RESET Line Command 1-456
For Session 1-539—1-541 Resetting Invalid/Pending Line Commands 1-456
Programs RESUME Command 1-457
comma RPF Programs
repeat symbol, use in xliv Defer Execution of 1-4
parentheses Explicit Invocation 1-193
syntax diagrams, use in xlii Redisplay Name of Last Executed 1-2
punctuation Reexecuting 1-6
syntax diagrams, use in xli RSHIFT Command 1-458
Punctuation marks (syntax diagrams) xli RUN Command 1-460
PURGE Command 1-436
Purge Files
Using STATUS JOB 1-571, 1-572 S
Purge Job 1-436 SAVE Command 1-462, 1-464
Save Data Set Edit 1-473
Saving AWS Contents 1-462, 1-464
Q SCALE Command 1-465
QDSN command 1-437 Scheduling a Print Request 1-409
QUERY Command Screen
Display Allocated ETSO Files 1-438 Copy
Display Diverted ETSO Input/Output 1-440 Into AWS (Data) 1-89
Display Executing ETSO Applications 1-439 Into AWS (String) 1-97
QUEUE Subcommand of DISPLAY 1-163 Escape (:) Commands 1-9
Queues, Display 1-163 Position with Search
Display/Change, Using STATUS AWS 1-565
Display/Change, Using STATUS DISPL
R AY 1-571
R Line Command 1-454 Set 1-545, 1-546
Redisplay Last Command/RPF Executed Print
+ (Plus Command) 1-2 Using :P 1-9
Reexecuting Last Command/RPF 1-6 Using PRINT 1-405—1-415
REFRESH Command 1-442 Split
Refreshing Selection List 1-442 End 1-9
Release Full 1-9
Unused DASD Space 1-444 Swap 1-9
RELEASE Command SCREEN Command 1-466, 1-467, 1-468
Data Set 1-444 Scroll Line Commands
RENAME Command By Absolute Line 1-469, 1-470
AWS 1-446 By Page 1-470
Data Set/Member/Module 1-447 By Relative Line 1-469, 1-470
Library Member 1-448 To Bottom of AWS 1-472
Renaming To Top of AWS 1-472
AWS To Top/Bottom 1-471
Using Command 1-446
Index X-11
SDSN command 1-473 Session Attributes (continued)
SEARCH Command 1-474—1-478 Advantage CA-Roscoe
Search for String Command Message Control,
See Locate/Display Data 1-474—1-478 Display/Change 1-574—1-579
SELECT Command (Advantage CA-Roscoe) Command Message Control,
With AWS MSGLEVEL 1-537, 1-538
Display/Change Defined Form 1-565 ID Display 1-551
Position Display 1-479, 1-480, 1-481 Automatic
With Data Set Facility 1-482, 1-483 Line Insertion After I or IB, Establish 1-499,
With Library Facility 1-484 1-500
Selection Lists Line Insertion, Display/Change 1-574—1-579
Between Screens 1-645 Sign-off Facility,
Copy To AWS Display/Change 1-574—1-579
See Copy Lines 1-97 Sign-off Facility, Establish 1-496, 1-497
Data Set Facility Terminal Lock Facility,
Attach, Using ATTACH DSN 1-50 Display/Change 1-574—1-579
Attach, Using ATTACH VOLUME 1-71 Terminal Lock Facility, Establish 1-552, 1-553
Attach, using Menu 1-168 AWS
Attach, Using SELECT 1-482, 1-483 Data Protection 1-565—1-569
Select Display 1-482, 1-483 Discard Setting 1-565—1-569
Library Facility Highlighting 1-565—1-569
Attach, Using ATTACH LIB 1-64 Recovery Setting 1-565, 1-569
Attach, Using SELECT 1-484 Selection Setting 1-565—1-569
Select Display 1-484 AWS Data Protection
Print 1-405—1-415 Establish 1-500
SEND Command 1-485, 1-486 AWS Highlighting
Send Messages Establish 1-500
To Other Users 1-485—1-486 Character Set
Separator Pages Display/Change, Using STATUS
Using RPSDEF Command 1-539—1-541 AWS 1-565—1-569
SEQ Command 1-488, 1-489 Display/Change, Using STATUS
Sequence Attribute SESSION 1-574—1-579
See Library Member Establish 1-503
Attributes/Description 1-488, 1-489 Character Translation
Sequence Numbers Display/Change, Using STATUS AWS 1-565
Control Display of Display/Change, Using STATUS
Establish 1-508—1-512 DISPLAY 1-570, 1-571
Using STATUS AWS 1-565 Establish 1-534
Using STATUS DISPLAY 1-570, 1-571 Column Boundaries
Enable in Output 1-488, 1-489 Establish, Using Primary Command 1-501,
Increment 1-502
Display/Change 1-565—1-569 Using STATUS AWS 1-565
Printing 1-539 Using STATUS DISPLAY 1-570, 1-571
Session Attributes Command Area
-INC Statement Expansion Establish 1-504
Display/Change 1-574—1-579 Command Delimiter (Advantage CA-Roscoe)
Establish 1-533, 1-534 Display/Change 1-574—1-579
:C (COPY) Destination Using 1-493, 1-494
Display/Change 1-574—1-579 Command Delimiter (PF/PA Key)
Establish 1-505 Display/Change 1-570, 1-571
+INC Statement Expansion Using 1-538
Display/Change 1-574—1-579

Session Attributes (continued) Session Attributes (continued)
Cursor Positioning Lines to be Searched
After Command Executed 1-506 In Data Set Object 1-520, 1-521
When Inserting Lines 1-498, 1-574—1-579 In Data Set Object,
Data Display Mode Display/Change 1-574—1-579
Display/Change, Using STATUS In Job Output 1-530, 1-531
AWS 1-565—1-569 In Job Output, Display /Change 1-574
Display/Change, Using STATUS In Job Output, Display/Change 1-579
DISPLAY 1-570, 1-571 Monitor Command Message
Establish 1-508—1-512 Establish 1-536, 1-537
Data Set Compression Message Monitor Command Message
Display/Change 1-574—1-579 Control 1-574—1-579
Establish 1-519 Pausing Command Execution
Data Set Migration Recall Display/Change 1-574—1-579
Display/Change 1-574—1-579 Printing
Establish 1-522, 1-523 Separator Pages 1-539, 1-540, 1-541
Date Display Format Sequence Numbers 1-539, 1-540, 1-541
Display/Change 1-574—1-579 Printing Destination
Establish 1-507 Display/Change 1-574—1-579
Display Format Printing Location
Display/Change, Using STATUS Establish 1-541
AWS 1-565—1-569 Printing Notification
Display/Change, Using STATUS Display/Change 1-574—1-579
DISPLAY 1-570, 1-571 Establish 1-542
Display Format/Margins Screen Split, Establish 1-547
Display/Change, Using STATUS SCRL Field Value 1-544
AWS 1-565—1-568 SEND Message Display
Establish 1-508—1-512 Display/Change 1-574—1-579
Edit Indicator Establish 1-546
Display/Change 1-574—1-579 Sequence Number Display
Establish 1-523, 1-524 Display/Change, Using STATUS
Enable Line Commands AWS 1-565—1-569
Display/Change, Using STATUS Display/Change, Using STATUS
DISPLAY 1-570, 1-571 DISPLAY 1-570, 1-571
Establish 1-508—1-512 Establish 1-508—1-512
Entering Data SPF Directory Information
Automatic Cursor Positioning 1-498 Establish 1-548
Automatic Line Insertion 1-499, 1-500 Inclusion, Display/Change 1-574—1-579
ERASE EOF Key Control Trace Edit Display (Modifiable),
Display/Change 1-565—1-569 Display/Change 1-574—1-579
Establish 1-525, 1-526 Trace Edit Display, Modifiable
ETSO Escape Sequence Establish 1-523, 1-524
Display/Change 1-574—1-579 User Id Display 1-553
Establish 1-526, 1-527 SET (&) Command 1-493, 1-494
Fill Character (Trailing Blanks) SET ALLRECALL command 1-494
Display/Change 1-565, 1-569 SET ATTACH Command 1-495, 1-496
Establish 1-527 SET AUTOFF Command 1-496, 1-497
Help Search Library 1-528 SET AUTOINDENT Command 1-498
Job Submission Characteristics SET AUTOINSERT Command 1-499, 1-500
Display/Change 1-574, 1-579 SET AWSDSPLY Command 1-500
Library Selection List Display
Establish Order 1-531
Index X-13
SET BOUNDS Command 1-501, 1-502 Sign Off (continued)
SET CHARSET Command 1-503 Terminate Session with Sign-on 1-351
SET CMDLINES Command 1-504 Sign-on Program
SET COPYDEST Command 1-505 Change 1-560
SET CURSOR Command 1-506 SIGNON Command 1-560
SET DATEFORM Command 1-507 SLEVEL= (AllFusion CA-Panvalet)
SET DISPLAY Command 1-508, 1-509, 1-510, 1-511, EXPORT 1-205
1-512 Sort AWS Contents 1-561, 1-562
SET DSN ORDER Command 1-512 SORT Command 1-561, 1-562
SET DSNCMLST Command 1-519 SPACE Command 1-563
SET DSNCNT Command 1-520, 1-521 Space Requirements
SET DSNEMPTY Command 1-521 User Libraries 1-563
SET DSNRECALL Command 1-522, 1-523 STATUS AWS Command 1-565—1-569
SET EDITCHNG Command 1-523, 1-524 STATUS COMMAND Command 1-569
SET EOF Command 1-525, 1-526 STATUS DISPLAY Command 1-570, 1-571
SET ESCAPE Command 1-526, 1-527 STATUS JOB Command 1-571, 1-572
SET FILL Command 1-527 STATUS NOTES Command 1-573, 1-574
SET HELPPFX Command 1-528 Status of
SET INFRECALL command 1-529 AWS 1-565—1-569
SET JOBCNT Command 1-530, 1-531 Column Boundaries 1-570, 1-571
SET LIB ORDER Command 1-531 Command Default/Maximum Values 1-580,
SET MASTER Command 1-533, 1-534 1-581
SET MODE Command 1-534 Display Format/Margins 1-570, 1-571
SET MONLEVEL Command 1-536, 1-537 Executed Commands 1-569
SET MSGLEVEL Command 1-537, 1-538 Job Output 1-571, 1-572
SET PFKDELIM Command 1-538 NOTE Names 1-573, 1-574
SET RPSDEF Command 1-539—1-541 STATUS SESSION Command 1-574, 1-579
SET RPSDEST command 1-414, 1-541 STATUS SYSTEM Command 1-580, 1-581
SET RPSNOTIFY Command 1-542 STATUS= (AllFusion CA-Panvalet)
SET SAVEATTR Command 1-543 IMPORT 1-253
SET SCROLL Command 1-544 String Handling
SET SEARCH Command 1-545, 1-546 Change, Trace
SET SEND Command 1-546 Modifiable 1-523, 1-524
SET SPLIT Command 1-547 Locate All Occurrences
SET STATS Command 1-548 Using Primary Command 1-474, 1-475, 1-476,
SET SUBMIT Command 1-549, 1-550 1-477
SET SYSID Command 1-551 SUBMIT Command 1-582, 1-583, 1-584
SET TLOCK Command 1-552, 1-553 Submitting Job(s)
SET USERID Command 1-553 Define Characteristics of 1-549, 1-550
Shift Line Commands From AWS 1-582—1-584
To Left 1-555, 1-556, 1-557 From Library 1-582—1-584
To Right 1-557, 1-558, 1-559 Receiving Completion Notification 1-583
Shifting Data SUBSET= (AllFusion CA-Panvalet)
Left IMPORT 1-253
Using Line Commands 1-555, 1-556, 1-557 SUFFIX Command 1-585, 1-586
Using Primary Command 1-317 Suffix Line in AWS 1-585, 1-586
Right Swap
Using Line Commands 1-557, 1-558, 1-559 :W Command 1-9
Using Primary Command 1-458 Syntax diagrams
Sign Off reading (how to) xli—xlvi
Terminate Session 1-349

T Trace Fill Operations 1-618
TS Line Command 1-613, 1-614, 1-615
T+ Line Command 1-471, 1-472 TSO Command 1-619
Tab Character TTY Command 1-620
Change 1-587, 1-588 TXTCENT Command 1-589, 1-590, 1-591
Display/Change Current 1-565—1-569 TXTFLOW Command 1-591—1-594
TAB Command 1-587, 1-588 TXTJOIN Command 1-594—1-597
TC Line Command 1-605 TXTLCASE Command 1-598, 1-599
TCB Line Command 1-605 TXTSPLIT Command 1-600—1-602
TCC Line Command 1-605
TCT Line Command 1-605
TE Line Command 1-606, 1-609 U
Terminal Lock Facility UC Line Command 1-626, 1-627
Invoking UCB Line Command 1-626, 1-627
Using :L Command 1-9 UCC Line Command 1-626, 1-627
Terminals UCT Line Command 1-626, 1-627
Lock Facility Uncataloging Data Set 1-621
Invoking, Using :L Command 1-9 UNCATLG Command 1-621
Invoking, Using Primary Command 1-552, UPCASE Command 1-622, 1-623
1-553 UPDATE Command 1-624, 1-625
Text-Related Functions Update Library Member Contents 1-624, 1-625
Center Lines Uppercase Data
Using Line Commands 1-605 Using Line Commands 1-626, 1-627
Using Primary Commands 1-589, 1-590, 1-591 Using Primary Command 1-622, 1-623
Format Data USER= (AllFusion CA-Panvalet)
Using Line Command 1-608 EXPORT 1-205
Using Primary Command 1-591 IMPORT 1-253
Insert Data
Using Line Command 1-606, 1-609
Join Lines V
Using Line Command 1-610, 1-611, 1-612 Variables (syntax diagrams) xli
Using Primary Command 1-594, 1-595, 1-596, Volume Information
1-597 Attaching
Lowercase Characters Using ATTACH VOL 1-71
Using Line Command 1-612, 1-613 Display 1-278
Using Primary Command 1-598 Print 1-405—1-415
Split Lines Volume Selection List
Using Line Command 1-613, 1-614, 1-615 Attaching
Uppercase Characters Using ATTACH VOL 1-71
Using Primary Command 1-622, 1-623 Data Sets 1-71
TF Line Command 1-608 Print 1-405—1-415
TIME Command 1-616 Selection Lists 1-71
Time, Display 1-616 VTOC Selection List
TJ Line Command 1-610, 1-611, 1-612 Attaching
TLC Line Command 1-612, 1-613 Using ATTACH VOL 1-71
TOP Command 1-617 Data Sets 1-71
TRACE Command 1-618 Print 1-405—1-415
Trace Edit Operations Selection Lists 1-71
Modifiable 1-523, 1-524
Non-Modifiable 1-618
Index X-15
W
WAIT Command 1-628
Width
Typewriter Device 1-629
WIDTH Command 1-629
X
XCOPY Command 1-630—1-633
XCOPYS Command 1-634, 1-635, 1-636, 1-637,
1-638, 1-639
XCOPYX Command 1-641—1-646
XL Line Command 1-651—1-653
XLATE Command 1-648—1-649
XLB Line Command 1-651, 1-652, 1-653
XLT Line Command 1-651—1-653
Z
ZAP Command
Description of 1-654—1-656
Extended Syntax A-9
Subcommands
* 1-656
ABSDUMP 1-656, 1-657
BASE 1-658
CCHHR 1-658
DUMP 1-659
IDRDATA 1-660
NAME 1-661
RELDUMP 1-661, 1-662
REP 1-662
SETSSI 1-663
SYSLIB 1-664—1-666
TTR 1-667
VERIFY 1-667

ROSCOE - B001613e - Command Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ROSCOE - B001613e - Command Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Advantage CA-Roscoe

Command Reference Guide

The manufacturer of this Documentation is CA.

Copyright  2005 CA. All rights reserved.

About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix

Chapter 1. Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

iv Command Reference Guide

vi Command Reference Guide

viii Command Reference Guide

x Command Reference Guide

xii Command Reference Guide

xiv Command Reference Guide

xvi Command Reference Guide

xviii Command Reference Guide

xx Command Reference Guide

xxii Command Reference Guide

xxiv Command Reference Guide

xxvi Command Reference Guide

Appendix A. Extended Monitor Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

The Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Command Reference Guide

Organization: Primary command descriptions are arranged alphabetically.

Line command descriptions are arranged alphabetically by the function they

Each command description includes:

The Appendix to this manual contains:

About This Guide xxix

|Summary of Revisions for Service Pack 7

Summary of Revisions for Service Pack 6

Summary of Revisions for Service Pack 5

Summary of Revisions in this Edition

See 1.178.6, “STATUS SESSION” on page 1-574.

xxx Command Reference Guide

About This Guide xxxi

xxxii Command Reference Guide

About This Guide xxxiii

User Series Contents

xxxiv Command Reference Guide

About This Guide xxxv

The following manuals relate to Advantage CA-Roscoe and are on

xxxvi Command Reference Guide

Licensing Management Program (LMP)

Advantage CA-Roscoe now interfaces with CAIRIM services to determine

About This Guide xxxvii

Command Character Set

xxxviii Command Reference Guide

To bypass this hierarchy, you can use the primary commands:

About This Guide xxxix

xl Command Reference Guide

The following terminology, symbols, and concepts are used in syntax

Keywords: Appear in uppercase letters, for example, COMMAND or PARM.

Variables: Appear in italicized lowercase letters, for example, variable.

Required Keywords and Variables: Appear on a main line.

Optional Keywords and Variables: Appear below a main line.

Default Keywords and Variables: Appear above a main line.

Double Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: Indicate the beginning of a

Double Arrowheads Pointing to Each Other: Indicate the end of a

Single Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: Indicate a portion of a statement,

Punctuation Marks or Arithmetic Symbols: If punctuation marks or

, comma > greater than symbol

About This Guide xli

Statement Without Parameters

You must write:

Statement with Required Parameters

You must write: